Taycan 21 Taycan

WKD Y1A 00 21 Good to know – Owner’s Manual

WKD Y1A 00 21 21

WKD Y1A 00 21 21 09/2020 or the potential for damage to your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in serious mechanical failure, seri- Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG is the owner of numerous ous personal injury or death. trademarks, both registered and unregistered, in- Different types of warnings and symbols are used in cluding, without limitation, the Porsche Crest®, Por- this Owner's Manual. ® ® ® ® ® sche , Boxster , Carrera , Cayenne , Cayman , Serious injury or death Macan®, Panamera®, Taycan®, PCM™, PDK®, 911®, DANGER 718®, 4S®, RS® and the model numbers and the dis- tinctive shapes of the Porsche automobiles, such as Failure to observe warnings in the "Danger" category the federally registered 911 and Boxster automo- will result in serious injury or death. biles in the US. The third party trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective owners. Possible serious injury or WARNING All text, images, and other content in this publication death are protected by copyright. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means Failure to observe warnings in the "Warning" cate- without prior written permission of Porsche Cars gory can result in serious injury or death. North America, Inc. Possible moderate or Porsche Cars North America, Inc. and its affiliates CAUTION believe the specifications to be correct at the time of minor injury printing. However, specifications, standard equip- Failure to observe warnings in the "Caution" cate- ment, and options are subject to change without gory can result in moderate or minor injuries. notice. Some options may be unavailable when any particular car is built. Some vehicles may be shown with equipment that is not available in the US or NOTICE Canada. Please ask your authorized Porsche dealer for advice concerning the current availability of op- Failure to observe warnings in the "Notice" category tions and verify that your vehicle includes the op- can result in damage to the vehicle. tional equipment you ordered. Porsche recommends seat belt usage and observ- Information ance of traffic laws at all times. © 2020 Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG Additional information is indicated using the word "Information".

Safety instructions, warnings and symbols in bb Prerequisites that must be met in order to use a the Owner’s Manual function. For your own protection and longer service life of e Instructions that must be followed. your vehicle, please heed all operating instructions and special warnings. These special warnings con- e Instructions that must be followed on the touch tain important messages regarding your safety and/ display.

1 1. Instructions are numbered in cases where a sequence of steps must be followed. > Indicates where you can find more information on a topic.

2 Structure of the Manual

Owner’s Manual – Digital Table of Contents Safety and Driving Pleasure Overviews

The Owner's Manual is available in Obtain an overview and find the Learn how you can contribute to safe Get to know the various components digital form on-board in the vehicle topics you are looking for. driving pleasure. and controls. and as an app. > From page 6 > From page 23 > Page 4

Your first trip Topics from A - Z Technical Data Index

Get to know your vehicle and the Learn how components and controls Look up specific values. Go directly to the information you are most important functions for your function and how to operate them. > From page 274 looking for. first trip. > From page 28

3 Owner’s Manual - Digital Further information about your vehicle is available (depending on country) in the on-board Owner's Manual in your vehicle and in the Porsche "Good to know" app: Functions in detail, video instructions, interactive graphics and keyword search function (index search).

On-board App

You can find the Owner's Manual in the Porsche You can download the Owner's Manual from the Communication Management (PCM) under: relevant app store by searching for Gut zu wis- sen, Good to know or 车主指南:

e e Instructions

Apple Disclaimer Apple®, the Apple logo, CarPlay®, iPod®, Siri®, iPhone® and other designations of Apple are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. IOS® is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Technology, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by Apple. Goo- gle Play® and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC.

4 Contents Cruise Control (CC) ...... 101 Navigation ...... digital1 Drive mode ...... 105 Notifications ...... digital1 Safety and Driving Pleasure ...... 6 Emergency Stop Function ...... 111 Online software update ...... digital1 Overviews Exit Warning ...... 113 Phone ...... digital1 Sensors and cameras ...... 23 HOLD Function ...... 123 Porsche Connect ...... digital1 Driver's Cockpit ...... 24 Intersection Assist ...... 139 Smart Service ...... digital1 Filler openings ...... 27 Lane Change Assist (LCA) ...... 142 Sport Chrono Stopwatch ...... 214 Overhead console ...... 26 Lane Keep Assist ...... 147 Vehicle settings ...... 234 Sensors and cameras ...... 23 Lights ...... 150 Warning and information messages ...... 244 Night View Assist ...... 162 Your first trip ...... 28 ParkAssist ...... 164 Luggage and Transport Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) Cup Holders ...... 103 Opening and Locking Electrical Socket ...... 107 Alarm System ...... 65 ...... 170 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) ...... 181 Luggage Compartment ...... 154 Central Locking ...... 79 Roof Transport System ...... 194 Garage door opener (HomeLink®) ...... 120 Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ...... 189 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS) ...... 191 Smoker's Package ...... 209 Hood ...... 124 Storage ...... 222 Trunk lid ...... 229 Rear Cross Traffic Alert ...... 193 Vehicle Key ...... 232 Speed Limiter (LIM) ...... 210 Mobility and Minor Repairs Windows ...... 263 Spoilers ...... 213 12-volt battery ...... 268 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle ...... 216 Brake Fluid ...... 66 Air Conditioning and Ergonomics Traffic sign recognition ...... 227 Car Care ...... 69 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 Warn and Brake Assist ...... 241 Charging ...... 86 zone automatic air conditioning) ...... 53 Windshield wipers ...... 265 Coolant ...... 100 Airbag Systems ...... 48 Emergency Call Systems ...... 108 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats) ...... 96 Display and input Center console control panel ...... 76 Flat Tire ...... 114 Interior lighting ...... 137 Fuses ...... 116 Mirrors ...... 158 Head-up display ...... 122 Instrument cluster ...... 127 Jack and Lifting Platform ...... 141 Personal settings ...... 168 Towing ...... 224 Seat Belts ...... 200 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) ...173 Voice control ...... digital1 Washer Fluid ...... 251 Seats ...... 203 Wheels and Tires ...... 252 Steering wheel ...... 221 Operation and use Sun visors ...... 223 Apple CarPlay ...... digital1 Technical data 1 1 Software Licenses ...... digital Driving and Driver Assistance Systems Device Manager ...... digital 1 Technical Data ...... 274 Active Lane Keeping ...... 34 Function on Demand (FoD) ...... digital 1 Active Parking Support ...... 38 Home screen and MyScreen ...... digital Index ...... 290 1 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...... 42 Media ...... digital 1 Brakes ...... 67 Messages ...... digital

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 5 Safety and Driving Pleasure

Safety and Driving Pleasure For U.S. only: For Canada only Dear owner, thank you for choosing a Porsche Sports If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which If you live in Canada and you believe that your ve- car. No other car embodies such a unique blend of could cause a crash, injury or death, you should im- hicle has a defect that could cause a crash, injury or legendary heritage, cutting edge innovation, high mediately inform the National Highway Traffic death, you should notify Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd. performance and great sportiness. Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- immediately and may also inform Transport Canada, As your safety and driving experience is our goal, we fying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. (Porsche Defect Investigations and Recalls. encourage you to read the Owner's Manual and take Cars N.A.). Canadian customers who wish to report a safety- time to familiarize yourself with the operation of your If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investi- Porsche vehicle before you drive it. investigation, and if it finds that a safety problem gations and Recalls, may either call Transport Cana- To prevent or minimize injury, always use your seat exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and da toll-free at: belts and always lawfully operate your Porsche remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become Tel: 1-800-333-0510 or vehicle. involved in individual problems between you and Tel: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa region and from Always keep your Owner's Manual in the car. If you your authorized Porsche dealer, or Porsche Cars N.A.. other countries) sell your Porsche vehicle, pass the Owner's Manual To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety TTY for hearing impaired: and other operation manuals on to the new owner. Hotline toll-free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1-888-675-6863 Should you have any questions regarding the opera- 1–800–424–9153); go to or contact Transport Canada by mail at: tion or maintenance of your vehicle, please call 1- http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga- 800-PORSCHE or contact your authorized Porsche NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, SE, Washington, DC tions Laboratory dealership. 20590. 80 Noel Street Gatineau, A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how you You can also obtain other information about motor QC J8Z 0A1 can keep your Porsche in top driving condition by vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. For additional road safety information, please visit having it serviced regularly. Your car has thousands of parts and components the Road Safety website at: A separate Warranty and Customer Information that have been designed and manufactured in ac- English: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesaf- Booklet contains detailed information about the cordance with Porsche high standards of engineer- ety/menu.htm warranties covering your Porsche. ing quality and safety. French: http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomo- Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the bile/menu.htm Misuse of your Porsche WARNING driver's side of the vehicle, and right as the passenger's side of the vehicle. Note to owners Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe manner Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual In Canada, this manual is also available in French. To obeying the local traffic laws and in the light of driv- are based on the information available at the time of obtain a copy, contact your authorized Porsche ing conditions faced by you, and in accordance with printing. dealer or write to: the instructions provided in this Owner’s Manual. It has always been Porsche policy to continuously Note aux proprietaires e Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those improve its products. Porsche, therefore, reserves the right to make changes in design and specifica- Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de ce laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the tion, and to make additions or improvements in its Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire ou du: instructions in this manual. products without incurring any obligation to install Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd. them on products previously manufactured. Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable 165 Yorkland Boulevard driving in your Porsche. Unit 150 6 Safety and Driving Pleasure

Toronto, ON running water for at least 15 minutes and immediately Canada, M2J 4R2 consult a doctor. Telephone number for customer assistance: 3 The high-voltage battery can burn. The high-voltage 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3 battery must never be exposed to fire, sparks and open flames. Always handle the high-voltage battery with care to prevent damage and fluid leakage. Excellent technology: A prerequi- 4 Always keep children away from the high-voltage battery. site for your driving pleasure 5 Further information is available in the operating in- The high-quality materials and excellent processing structions and in the workshop literature. help to ensure a long vehicle service life. In order for 6 Improper handling of the high-voltage battery can result your Porsche to achieve its full driving potential, the in serious injury or death. Never remove the cover of the vehicle requires your attention and care. Then you high-voltage battery or remove the high-voltage battery. can count on your Porsche, even in critical situations. 7 Improper handling of the high-voltage battery can result in serious injury or death. Only have maintenance work Special features of the electric vehicle on the high-voltage battery carried out by appropriately qualified and trained specialist personnel. Never make modifications to the high-voltage battery. The opened high-voltage battery must not come into contact with water or other liquids. Liquids can cause short circuits, electric shocks and burns.

e Do not perform any work on the high-voltage vehicle electrical system, the orange high-voltage cables, the on-board charger, the high-voltage heater, the high-voltage battery, the power electronics, the A/C compressor or other electri- The voltage in the high-voltage vehicle electrical cal system components. system and high-voltage battery is extremely dan- e Never damage, remove or disconnect the orange gerous. Touching damaged electrical system com- high-voltage cables from the high-voltage ve- ponents such as the high-voltage cables, the on- hicle electrical system. board charger, the high-voltage heater, the high- e Do not touch parts of the electrical system that voltage battery, the power electronics or the A/C have been damaged following an accident, for compressor can result in a fatal electric shock. 1 High voltage can result in serious injury or death. Never example. The high-voltage cables are orange. All components touch the battery terminals with your fingers, tools, e Never remove the high-voltage battery. jewelry or other metal objects. of the electrical system are marked with warning e Never remove, deface or render warning stickers stickers. 2 The high-voltage battery contains dangerous liquid and solid substances. In the event of outgassing, severe and warning signs illegible. burns and blindness may result. Always wear suitable e Never remove covers of high-voltage system eye protection and protective clothing when working on components that are labeled with warning the high-voltage battery in order to avoid skin and eye stickers. contact with battery fluid. After skin and eye contact with battery fluid, wash the affected areas with clean 7 Safety and Driving Pleasure

Drive power organizations, such as the World Health Organization – Sensors and cameras are intact without any Generally, the available drive power in battery-pow- of the United Nations (WHO) and is independent of flaws or damage ered electric vehicles depends on various factors any industry. According to the standards mentioned – Cooling air ducts, sensors and cameras are such as the duration of the power requirement, bat- above, the functions of neighboring devices and im- not obstructed (e.g. with film, stone guards tery voltage and temperature. The specified power is plants are not affected by our products. However, or license plate holders) available for at least 10 seconds, the specified over- due to the large number of different implants on the e Only operate the in-vehicle telephone or radio boost power is available for at least 2.5 seconds market, it is not possible to make a specific state- equipment with installed radio antenna using the when using the standard Launch Control. Particu- ment for each individual case. For further medical connected external aerial so that the threshold larly sporty driving or charging at a fast-charging questions, we recommend that you consult a doctor. values for electromagnetic radiation in the ve- pedestal can lead to an increase in battery temper- hicle are not exceeded. ature and thus to temporarily reduced drive power. Checking the vehicle for damage and correct Due to the physical conditions, the maximum power functioning Checking tires for damage required to achieve the specified acceleration values can be called up several times, but not arbitrarily in succession.

Limited awareness The vehicle produces much less driving and running noise than a vehicle with a combustion engine. In certain situations, such as in zones with traffic calming or when reversing or maneuvering, other road users may not hear your vehicle or only hear it faintly. A vehicle with technical issues may be the cause of Damaged tires may burst while driving. You may lose e Drive with extreme care and attention. accidents due to faulty operating behavior, for control of the vehicle. example. e Inspect the tires as often as required depending Electromagnetic compatibility e Check your vehicle regularly (at least once a on use, but at least once a month, for any foreign The laws of physics stipulate that electromagnetic month and prior to long trips) to ensure it is free objects that may have entered, pricks, cuts, tears fields are generated around all electrical devices. of technical issues. Pay particular attention to or dents. Check the tire sidewalls in the process. This also applies to the electronics in the vehicle. the following: e If in doubt, have the tire and the entire wheel Even in the early development phase of its products, – Undamaged tires, correct tire pressure and checked by an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche attaches great importance to ensuring that sufficient tread e Do not continue driving with damaged tires. they do not pose a health risk to vehicle occupants – Operation of headlights, brake lights and turn Have damaged tires replaced immediately: Visit or passers-by. Porsche strictly observes and follows signals an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have the guidelines for limiting exposure to time-varying – Undamaged aerodynamic components trained technicians and the necessary parts and electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields of – Intact windshield wipers tools. the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radi- – Windshield and window glass is clear and ation Protection (ICNIRP). The ICNIRP is a non-prof- free of cracks or other damage it-making scientific organization that works closely – Door and interior mirrors are intact and cor- together with national and international health rectly adjusted

8 Safety and Driving Pleasure

Setting the right tire pressure Checking the lights Keeping the windshield, windows and windshield wipers clean and functional

Tire pressure that is too low or too high destroys the If the lights are not working, your vehicle will be dif- tire and wheel, extends the braking distance, and ficult to see when visibility is poor. Other road users Dirty windshields and windows as well as defective significantly increases the risk of an accident. If the may notice you too late, increasing the risk of an windshield wipers reduce visibility and significantly tire pressure is too low, there may also be a notice- accident. increase the risk of an accident. able increase in energy consumption and a decrease e Check that all lights function correctly and have e Keep the vehicle and windshield/windows clean. in range. defective lights repaired immediately. Compo- e Thaw frozen windshield wipers and free them e Adjust tire pressure in accordance with the tires nents of the lighting system are the following: from the windshield. fitted and the load. – Side, low beam, driving, high beam lights e Replace windshield wipers regularly, or at the > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on – Turn signal, brake and reversing lights latest when they leave streaks on the windshield. page 274. – Fog lights > Please see chapter "Windshield wipers" on > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 265. page 252. Checking aerodynamic components e Ensure that the settings in the Tire Pressure Service and modifications to the vehicle must menu in the multifunction display correspond to be performed by an authorized Porsche dealer the tires fitted on the vehicle and the current load of the vehicle. e If a red tire pressure warning appears on the multifunction display: Stop immediately in a suitable place and check the tires for damage. Do not continue driving with damaged tires. If necessary, repair damage using tire sealing compound. > Please see chapter "Flat Tire" on page 114. Damaged or missing aerodynamic components (such as spoilers or underbody paneling) impair vehicle handling. Any modification to the vehicle may impair or elimi- e Check your vehicle regularly for damage. nate its safety functions. Unauthorized work per- e Damaged or missing components must be re- formed during the warranty period may result in placed immediately. claims being invalidated. 9 Safety and Driving Pleasure

e Have all service work and modifications to the Spare parts for your Porsche Load, safety systems, children in vehicle performed exclusively by an authorized the vehicle: Knowledge for Por- Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. This ensures sche drivers that your vehicle remains reliable and safe to With your Porsche, you can accelerate to above 60 drive, and that no consequential damage occurs mph (100 km/h) within a few seconds. This being to your vehicle. said, you should do everything necessary to ensure e Do not modify your Porsche. Any modifications safety before driving. could create dangerous conditions or impair safety engineering features built into your car. Correct use of seat belts

Diagnostic socket e Only use genuine Porsche spare parts for your vehicle or spare parts of a similar quality, which have been manufactured according to the specifications and production requirements of Por- sche. This helps to ensure that your vehicle remains reliable and safe to drive, and that no consequential damage occurs to your vehicle. These parts are available from authorized Por- sche dealers. e Only use accessories that originate from the The seat belts can only protect you from injuries if Porsche Tequipment range or that have been they are functional and are used correctly. The diagnostic socket is used to connect diagnostic tested and approved by Porsche. For information devices in authorized Porsche dealers. on Porsche Tequipment: Contact an authorized Information External equipment (e.g. navigation units, head-up Porsche dealer. Severe injuries can occur at speeds as low as 20 displays) connected to the diagnostic socket can mph (30 km/h). Safety systems only protect when impair operation of the vehicle systems and run Information used in combination. For example, the airbags can down or damage the battery (exhaustive discharge) protect you properly only if the seat belts are worn when the ignition is switched off. The external If other spare parts or accessories are used, Porsche correctly. equipment and cables can obstruct clearance does not accept any liability for damages caused by around the pedals or become caught between the these parts. pedals when braking or changing direction. Even if a supplier has obtained a General Operating e Do not connect any equipment to the diagnostic License for spare parts or accessories, the safety of socket. the vehicle may still be affected. The use of spare parts or accessories not approved e Do not place any equipment or cables in the by Porsche may also void your vehicle warranty. driver’s footwell.

10 Safety and Driving Pleasure e Always fasten seat belts tightly, even on short Airbag systems that have been tampered with offer Information drives. no protection. They may either not trigger or be e Use one seat belt to secure one occupant only. triggered in an uncontrolled manner. Uncontrolled Unsecured objects can, for example, be thrown for- e Remove any loose articles of clothing, e.g. winter triggering can cause serious injuries. ward at up to 50 times their weight in the event of a coats. e Do not use protective seat covers. rear-end collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). For exam- e Do not place the seat belts across hard or fragile e Do not attach any additional trims or stickers to ple, a 1.5 liter (0.4 gal) bottle of water has a force of objects (e.g. glasses or ball-point pens). the steering wheel or in the vicinity of the pas- 165 lbs. (75 kg) as it flies through the interior. e Do not twist the seat belts. senger airbag, side airbags or head airbag. e As a rule, transport only secured objects in the e e Do not route any cables of additional electrical Always fully roll up unused seat belts. vehicle. e Pregnant drivers or passengers should position equipment in the vicinity of the airbag wiring harnesses. e When possible, place all objects in closable stor- the lap belt under the belly and shoulder belt taut age compartments. over the chest. e Do not remove airbag components (e.g. steering e Always stow items safely, e.g. in the trunk. e If worn or damaged, have the belt, belt buckle or wheel, front seats, roof trims). e Place small objects in the storage compartments attachment points replaced. e Do not modify the wiring or components of the and close all closable storage compartments. > Please see chapter "Seat Belts" on page 200. airbag system. > Please see chapter "Airbag Systems" on Objects must not protrude out of the storage Airbag system page 48. compartments. e Never place objects on top of the dashboard. Securing all objects in the passenger e Secure loads with tie-down belts (tear strength compartment at least 1540 lbs.). e Do not transport heavy objects in open storage compartments. e Also provide your passengers with all information regarding safety measures. How to load your Porsche correctly and how to stow loads: > Please see chapter "Storage" on page 222. Airbag systems can only perform their protective > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on function if all occupants have their seat belts fas- page 154. tened and maintain the correct seating position. Objects and luggage must be stowed safely. An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load in the e Make sure that there are no persons, animals or passenger compartment can slide around as a result objects between the occupants and the area into of braking, acceleration, changes of direction or ac- which the airbag deploys. cident. Occupants may be endangered or injured. e Maintain a distance from the airbags, e.g. do not lean against the inside of the doors. Always keep your feet in the footwell while driving. Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat cushion.

11 Safety and Driving Pleasure

Preventing crushing hazards may not be able to exit the vehicle in emergency Drive safely situations, e.g. overheated passenger compartment. This is dangerous to life, especially for young children. e Keep children away from electric components or hot parts. e Keep toxic materials such as tire sealing compound and engine oil out of the reach of children. e Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.

Safe use of child restraint systems If persons or animals are within the range of move- e Never drive after you have consumed alcohol or ment of certain vehicle components, there is a risk of drugs. body parts being trapped or crushed. These compo- e Always drive defensively. nents include: e Expect the unexpected. – Adjustable front seats e Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes. – Doors e Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving – Windows conditions warrant it. – Flaps and lids e Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in – Storage compartment lids front of you, depending on traffic, road and weather conditions. e Make sure that no persons or animals are within Child restraint systems only function when installed e Reduce speed at night and during inclement the range of movement when moving these ve- correctly. hicle components. weather. e Only use child restraint systems approved for e Driving in wet weather requires caution and re- your Porsche. Take account of children's behavior duced speeds, particularly on roads with stand- e Before using a child restraint system: Read and ing water, as the handling characteristics of the follow the instructions from the child restraint vehicle may be impaired due to hydroplaning of system manufacturer as well as this Owner's the tires. Manual. e Always observe speed limits and obey road signs > Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems and traffic laws. (Child Seats)" on page 96. e When tired, get well off the road, stop and take a rest. Turn the vehicle off. Safe, competent driving: Making e On hills also turn the front wheels toward the the right decisions curb. You are ultimately responsible for keeping your The safe driver: Children often cannot judge dangers correctly and powerful vehicle under control. – knows her/his car and all controls, may behave inappropriately in dangerous situations. – maintains the vehicle properly, Children can accidentally trigger automatic settings (e.g. seat adjustment) and suffer injury. Children 12 Safety and Driving Pleasure

– uses driving skills wisely and always drives within situation allows you to do so safely. In case of Suitable tires and appropriate driving style her/his own capabilities and the level of famili- doubt, stop the vehicle. arity with the vehicle. e Do not use a phone or other mobile devices while You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to driving. perform most of the checks and actions listed on the e Only make or receive calls using hands-free following pages. If in doubt, have these checks per- equipment. formed by your authorized Porsche dealer. e Do not reach between the steering-wheel spokes while driving. Otherwise, you may not be able to Avoid distractions react in time to dangerous situations in time.

Be aware of braking behavior in rain or snow > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 252. Reacting correctly to uneven running and vibration Damage to tires or the vehicle can cause uneven running or vibration while driving. You may lose control of the vehicle. e Reduce speed immediately, but without braking sharply. If you operate the displays or other vehicle compo- e Stop the vehicle and inspect the tires. If a cause nents while driving, you will be distracted by the cannot be established for the fault, drive on traffic situation and may not be able to respond to In heavy rain, while driving through water or after carefully and have the fault corrected. Visit an dangerous situations in time. For your safety, some leaving a car wash, the brake disks are coated with a authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained functions are only available when the vehicle is water film, the braking action may be delayed and technicians and the necessary parts and tools. stationary. increased pressure may be required. e Never adjust the mirrors, seat or steering wheel Following a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a Keeping tires in a safe condition while driving. The seat or steering wheel may coating may form on the brake disks and pads that Damaged tires can burst, especially at high speeds. move further than desired. You may lose control significantly reduces friction and therefore also the Prevent damage to the tires by driving carefully. of the vehicle. Adjust the mirrors, seat and braking action. e Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if steering wheel position as required before your e Dry the brakes by frequent braking, particularly possible. journey. before you park the vehicle. This will prevent e Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs. e Only use the multifunction steering wheel, radio, corrosion. Running in new tires navigation system, etc. while driving if the traffic e Corroded brakes tend to "judder". If braking New tires have not yet achieved their maximum grip comfort is noticeably impaired, have the brake and tend to slip. system checked. e Run in new tires at a moderate speed for the first 125 miles (200 km).

13 Safety and Driving Pleasure

Driving with snow tires assistance systems cannot reduce the risk of Porsche Active Suspension Man- > p. 170 Maximum speed values apply for snow tires. If you accidents due to an inappropriate driving style. agement (PASM) > p. 170 exceed the maximum permitted speed, the tires may e The driver assistance systems cannot replace burst. your attention. Drive with care so you can re- Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 181 e Always observe the maximum permitted speed spond appropriately to the traffic situation. for the respective tire. e Familiarize yourself with the driver assistance Porsche Stability Management > p. 189 e Affix the sticker with the maximum permitted systems before using them. (PSM) speed in the driver’s field of vision. Observe An overview of the driver assistance systems is country-specific regulations. provided below: Porsche Vehicle Tracking System > p. 191 e Set the maximum permitted speed as the speed (PVTS) limit using the instrument cluster. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 42 > Please see chapter "Instrument cluster" on Tire Pressure Monitoring System > p. 253 page 127. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) > p. 189 (TPMS) Driving with summer tires Active Lane Keeping > p. 34 Lane Keep Assist > p. 147 Parking, maneuvering or accelerating in curves at outside temperatures below 60 °F (15 °C) may re- Speed limiter > p. 210 Lane Change Assist > p. 142 sult in noises. e Change to snow tires when outside temperatures HOLD function > p. 123 Cruise control > p. 101 fall below 45 °F (7 °C). Intersection Assist > p. 139 Traffic sign recognition > p. 227 Assistance systems and their limits Automatic headlights, PDLS Plus, > p. 150 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 241 dynamic high beam

Night View Assist > p. 162 Emergency braking function

Emergency stop function > p. 111

ParkAssist, rear view camera, > p. 164 Surround View

Your Porsche is equipped with driver assistance Active Parking Support, Maneu- > p. 38 systems for driving comfort. vering Assist None of these systems can overcome the limits set by the laws of driving physics. Rear Cross Traffic Alert > p. 193 e These systems should not induce you to take You can carry out full braking using the electric > greater risks with your safety. The driver Exit Warning p. 113 parking brake, for example if the conventional footbrake is defective.

14 Safety and Driving Pleasure

This emergency braking function works with very Driving off increased risk of accidents, injuries and damages on high braking power. As a result, the traffic behind the vehicle. may be endangered. e Familiarize yourself with the meaning of warning e Only use the emergency braking function in an lights and messages and pay attention to the in- emergency situation and not during normal structions regarding warning and information driving. messages before starting to drive so that you e For emergency braking, push and hold . Re- can respond correctly to the warnings. Stop lease the switch to stop braking. driving if necessary. > Please see chapter "Brakes" on page 67. > Please see chapter "Warning and information messages" on page 244. Driving with a loaded vehicle > Please see chapter "Instrument cluster" on The vehicle accelerates very rapidly when driving off, page 127. especially when Launch Control is activated. In some situations (poor road conditions, driver inattention, Hazardous fluids etc.) control over the vehicle may be lost or other road users may be endangered as a result. e Adapt driving off and driving according to road and traffic conditions. e Only use Launch Control on public roads if the road and traffic conditions permit. e Do not endanger other road users when driving The handling of your Porsche changes depending on off with Launch Control. the load condition. Use of a roof transport system creates greater wind resistance. Responding correctly to warning signals Transmission oil, electrolyte, coolant, refrigerant and e Adapt your driving style to the altered vehicle brake fluid are hazardous to health and may be fatal handling. if swallowed. e Do not drive at a speed of more than 80 mph e Only work on the vehicle outdoors or in well (130 km/h) when the roof transport system is ventilated spaces. fitted. e Fluid containers must be labeled appropriately e Before fitting a roof transport system or driving and must be kept out of reach for children. with a roof transport system, read the following e Dispose of residues in an environmentally section in this Owner’s Manual: friendly manner and according to regulations. e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight or axle e Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly load. with soap and water. If the systems detect malfunctions or defective parts, the vehicle warns you with lights or messages California Proposition 65 in the instrument cluster or central display. Disre- Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and cer- garding vehicle warning signals may result in an tain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals

15 Safety and Driving Pleasure

known to the State of California to cause cancer and Do not use voice control in case of an the inspection interval has elapsed, functionality birth issues or other reproductive harm. emergency is no longer guaranteed. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and e Observe the operating instructions on the fire certain products of component wear contain or emit extinguisher. chemicals known to the State of California to cause e Observe the safety instructions on the leaflet cancer and birth issues or other reproductive harm. supplied by the fire extinguisher manufacturer on the extinguisher handle. Parking the vehicle safely e Have the fire extinguisher checked by an authorized Porsche dealer every one or two years. e Have the fire extinguisher refilled after use.

Hot vehicle parts In an emergency, your voice can change so much due to stress that voice control does not recognize it. e Do not use voice control in an emergency.

Removing the fire extinguisher An improperly parked vehicle can roll away in an uncontrolled manner, endangering persons or causing vehicle damage. Before leaving the vehicle: e Activate the parking lock of the drive and electric Vehicle parts in the chassis area and adjacent com- parking brake using the P button on the selector ponents get very hot while driving. lever. When the drive position P flashes on the Fans can come on automatically at any time. instrument cluster, the parking lock is no longer e Park the vehicle and let it cool down if possible. engaged. Press the P button on the selector lever e Keep body parts, clothes, long hair and jewelry again. away from all moving parts, such as fans. If available in the relevant vehicle, the fire extin- e Take care when working near hot vehicle parts. guisher is located under the passenger seat. Just in case: Safety in the event of e Wear protective gloves that protect against hot e Hold the extinguisher with one hand and press parts. a breakdown or emergency the PRESS button on the fire extinguisher holder Protective equipment must be worn to perform cer- For your own safety, follow the instructions on the with the other hand. tain types of work on the vehicle, e.g. gloves to pre- following pages in the event of a breakdown. For correct and safe handling of the fire extinguisher, vent cuts. refer to the following points: e Always have work performed on the vehicle by an e Observe the inspection intervals for the fire ex- authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends tinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used after an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 16 Safety and Driving Pleasure

If the high-voltage battery or the air-conditioning Flat tires Carry Emergency equipment system is actively preconditioned, steam may form in the right front wheel housing in a wet environment (e.g. after driving in the rain or after washing the vehicle). e The vehicle can continue to be used without restriction.

Towing

Depending on the driving speed, the vehicle can no It is good practice to carry emergency equipment in longer be steered safely when the tires are damaged. your vehicle. e Never continue to drive with a flat tire. e Stop the vehicle safely in line with the traffic Before driving: Important infor- conditions and repair the damage. > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on mation regarding your Porsche page 252. Feel comfortable in the driver’s seat Towing poses an increased risk of accidents. After a collision e Exercise extreme care when towing if the engine has stopped or if power assistance or the brake booster has failed. e Vehicles with defective brakes must not be towed. > Please see chapter "Towing" on page 224.

e Check operation of the horn. e The safety systems may not be operational (e.g. Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and seat-belt pretensioners and airbags) after a collision. controls. To reduce the possibility of injury from The safety systems can then no longer protect you. the air bag deployment, you should always sit back as far from the steering wheel as is e Have the safety systems checked even if they were not triggered. e Have triggered safety systems replaced. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools.

17 Safety and Driving Pleasure

practical, while still maintaining full vehicle Bedding in new brake pads – Lifting platforms control. e If the vehicle hits an obstacle, park the vehicle e Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors. safely and contact an authorized Porsche dealer. e Check operation of the foot and electric parking Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche brake. dealer, as they have trained technicians and the e Never leave an idling car unattended. necessary parts and tools. e Lock doors from inside, especially with children in the car to prevent inadvertent opening of Driving on race circuits doors from inside or outside. e Drive with doors locked.

Breaking in the vehicle New brake pads and brake disks have to be "bedded in" and therefore only attain optimal friction when the vehicle has covered several hundred miles. The somewhat reduced braking effect requires more effort when pressing the brake pedal. This is also the case after the brake pads or brake disks have been replaced. Compared to normal road use, when driving on cir- Observing the ground clearance cuits the vehicle is subjected to disproportionately higher loads. In pure racing vehicles these loads are taken account of by regular maintenance and com- The moving parts of a new vehicle must be run in. ponent reconditioning intervals. These cover checks The parts require the first 2,000 miles (3,000 km) and the replacement of individual components where necessary after each use on the circuit, as for this purpose. The energy consumption may be somewhat higher than normal during this period. well as the reconditioning of entire assemblies after certain periods of use. During the breaking-in period, drive as follows: e Always make inquiries about the current stipula- e Preferably take long trips. tions before driving on race tracks: Contact an e Do not participate in motorsport events, sports authorized Porsche dealer. driving training or similar events. The vehicle may touch the ground as a result of the Following race circuit sessions, "cooling laps" must low ground clearance. be performed to control the temperature reduction e Avoid steep ramps. of chassis components which are subjected to par- e Drive carefully on the following: ticularly strong thermal load. Instantaneous stopping – Steep slopes (e.g. parking garages) of the vehicle would result in a further rise in com- – Curbs and speed bumps, such as at charging ponent temperature due to stationary heat build-up. stations This can irreparably damage individual components. – Uneven road surfaces

18 Safety and Driving Pleasure

Brake system – Service may be inadequate due to lack of proper Storing technical data in the vehicle Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over time. service facilities, tools or diagnostic equipment, Electronic control units have data memories that can This absorption of water lowers the boiling point and – Replacement parts may not be available or very temporarily or permanently store technical informa- can severely impair braking efficiency at high difficult to get. tion about vehicle status, component stress, servic- temperatures. – The authorized Porsche dealer may not be able to ing requirements, events or faults. Generally Driving on racetracks puts high pressure on brake carry out all repair work. speaking, this technical information documents the pads and brake disks. – Technical adjustments need to be made to the status of a component, module, system or environ- e If the brake fluid is more than 12 months old: vehicle, ment such as: Replace brake fluid before driving on a track. – Some countries require additional tools and spe- – Operating states of system components (e.g. fill e Have the brake pads and brake disks checked for cial spare parts to be carried in your vehicle, levels) wear before and after driving on tracks. make inquiries before driving abroad. – Status messages about the vehicle and its individual components Tires Porsche cannot be responsible for the mechanical – Malfunctions and faults in important system The tires are also subject to high stress when the damage that could result because of inadequate components (e.g. lights, brakes) vehicle is driven around a track. service or parts availability. – Information about events that can damage the e Have the tires checked for wear before and after If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to vehicle driving on tracks. bring it back home, be sure to find out about ship- – The vehicle response in special driving situations e Do not fit racing tires. Racing tires are not ap- ping and forwarding requirements, as well as current (e.g. triggering an airbag, activation of the proved by Porsche. import and customs regulations. stability control system) Before driving abroad Data processing in the vehicle – Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature) In addition to providing the actual control unit function, this data is used to detect and correct faults and enables the manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions. Most of this data is volatile and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small part of the data is stored in event or fault memories. More- over, your vehicle offers comfort and entertainment functions which are also made possible through electronic control units.

Government regulations in the United States and Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. Read-out of technical data Canada require that automobiles meet specific Some of these are required for the operational safety When having your vehicle serviced, service network emission regulations and safety standards. There- of your vehicle, while others provide assistance while employees (e.g. workshops, roadside assistance, fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from driving (driver assistance systems). Moreover, your manufacturers) can read out the technical informa- vehicles sold in other countries. vehicle offers comfort and entertainment functions tion from the vehicle. Services include repair serv- If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti- which are also made possible through electronic ices, service processes, warranty claims and quality nental limits of the United States or Canada, there is control units. assurance measures for example. The data is read the possibility that: out using a legally required connection for OBD

19 Safety and Driving Pleasure

("On-board diagnosis") in the vehicle. The data is Use of online services Event Data Recorder (EDR) collected, processed and used by the relevant serv- If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder ice network personnel and may be sent to Porsche in this can be used to exchange data between your (EDR). The main purpose of the EDR is to record, in order to comply with product monitoring obligations vehicle, the surrounding area and other systems. You certain crash or near-crash situations, such as airbag or to improve quality for example. Fault and event can connect to the wireless network via the send deployment or the hitting of a road obstacle, data memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service and receive unit in the vehicle or via your connected that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s center during repairs or servicing. mobile devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions system performed. The EDR is designed to record can be used via this wireless network connection. data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems Using functions in the vehicle These include online services and applications/apps for a short pe-riod of time, typically 30 seconds or Within the scope of the selected equipment options, that are available to you through Porsche or other less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record you can enter information such as multimedia and providers. such data as: address book data or navigation destinations and For Porsche online services, the various functions – How various systems in your vehicle were other settings in the vehicle comfort and infotain- are described at a suitable place (e.g. the Porsche operating ment functions. This data may be stored locally in Connect website) and the related data protection – Whether or not the driver and passenger safety the vehicle or it may be contained on a device which legislation information is provided. Personal data can belts were buckled/fastened you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, be used for the provision of online services. The re- – How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the USB stick or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the quired data exchange takes place via a protected accelerator and/or brake pedal vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data is connection, e.g. with the Porsche IT systems set up – How fast the vehicle was traveling only sent to third parties at your request and partic- for this purpose. Collection, processing and use of ularly while using online services, only in accordance personal data beyond that required for the provision These data can help provide a better understanding with the settings you have selected. of services takes place exclusively on the basis of of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries If your vehicle has the required equipment, you can legal authorization or consent. occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle control your connected smartphone or another mo- Usually, you can activate or deactivate the (often only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data bile device using the controls integrated in the ve- fee-based) services and functions and in some are recorded by the EDR under normal driving con- hicle. Images and sound from your smartphone can cases, even the entire data connection in the vehicle. ditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age, be output via the multimedia system. Certain infor- This does not apply to functions and services re- and crash location) are recorded. However, other mation can also be transferred to your smartphone. quired by law, in particular. parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the

This includes general vehicle information or position If there is a possibility of using online services from EDR data with the type of personally identifying data

data, for example, depending on the type of integra- other providers, these are the responsibility of and routinely acquired during a crash investigation. tion. This allows optimal use of selected apps on the subject to the data protection policy and terms of To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment smartphone, e.g. for using a navigation system or usage of the relevant provider. Porsche has no influ- is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is music playback. The smartphone cannot be used to ence on the data exchanged in these cases. Given needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, actively access vehicle data. The type of subsequent this, please request information from the relevant other parties, such as law enforcement, that have data processing is determined by the provider of the service provider on the type, scope and purpose of the special equipment, can read the information if relevant app being used. Whether and which set- such data collection and the use of personal data in they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Porsche tings you can configure for this depends on the app the context of third-party services. will not access EDR data or share it with others ex- and the operating system on your smartphone. cept: (a) with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; (b) in response to an official request by police or

20 Safety and Driving Pleasure similar government office; (c) as part of Porsche’s defense of litigation; or (d) as required by law.

Assistance System Monitor (ASM) Your vehicle is fitted with an Assistance System Monitor (ASM) (availability dependent on country and equipment). The unit is a functional extension of the Event Data Recorder (EDR). Following a critical event, such as an accident, the circumstances of the event and the behavior of the assistance systems can be understood using the ASM with the aid of a data memory. The data recorded by the ASM depends on the equipment in the vehicle and may include the following information: status information about the assistance systems (e.g. assistance system switched on/off, system events), control interventions (e.g. by the PSM), assistance system settings (e.g. speed settings). Data is recorded continually in a ring memory, which is overwritten repeatedly at ten-second intervals. Status data is only overwritten when a new value has been determined. If indicators of a critical event are registered, the current memory state of the ASM is stored in a log file. A critical event such as the activity of the airbags or automatically initiated target braking triggers the permanent storage of data. After permanently storing data, the ASM returns to ring storage mode until another triggering event initiates further permanent storage of data. A device for communicating with the diagnostic in- terface in the vehicle is required for reading out the log files that are stored permanently in the ASM.

21 Overview Illustrations On the following pages you will find overviews of all areas of the vehicle, with a brief explanation. Further information can be found on the specified pages.

22 Sensors and cameras Sensors and cameras A Surround View > p. 164 B Active Lane Keeping > p. 34 Lane Keep Assist > p. 147 Intersection Assist > p. 139 Dynamic high beam > p. 150 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 181 Traffic sign recognition > p. 227 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 241 C Active Lane Keeping > p. 34 Intersection Assist > p. 139 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 241 D ParkAssist > p. 164 E Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 42 Active Lane Keeping > p. 34 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 181 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 241 F Night View Assist > p. 162 G ParkAssist > p. 164 H Active Lane Keeping > p. 34 Lane Change Assist > p. 142 Intersection Assist > p. 139 I Open trunk lid using foot gesture > p. 229

23 Driver's Cockpit Driver's Cockpit A Door opener > p. 79 B Memory buttons > p. 168 Personal settings C Central locking buttons > p. 79 D Power windows > p. 263 E Light buttons > p. 150 F Overhead console > p. 26 G Door mirror adjustment > p. 158 H Power button > p. 216 I Steering wheel adjustment > p. 221 J Seat adjustment > p. 203

24 Cockpit Cockpit Cockpit A Turn signal and high beam > p. 150 B Voice control, infotainment, recuperation > p. 127 level controls C Instrument cluster > p. 127 D Phone, infotainment, instrument cluster > p. 127 controls E Windshield wipers > p. 265 F Selector lever > p. 216 G Chassis and assistance settings H Sport Chrono stopwatch > p. 214 I Porsche Communication Management > p. 173 (PCM) J Automatic air vents > p. 53 K Glove compartment lock > p. 222 L Front passenger display > p. 179 M Cruise control > p. 101 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 42 N Mode switch > p. 105 O Electric parking brake and parking lock > p. 216 P Center console operating panel > p. 76 Q Emergency flasher > p. 150 R Ashtray, cup holders > p. 209 S Cup holders > p. 103 T Armrest, storage compartment > p. 222

25 Overhead console Overhead console Overhead console A Reading lights > p. 137 B Button for interior/reading light > p. 137 C Interior light (illumination on the control > p. 137 panel) D SOS button > p. 108 E PASS AIR BAG OFF/ON warning light > p. 50 F Button for the interior light > p. 137

26 Filler openings Filler openings A Brake fluid > p. 66 B Washer fluid > p. 251

27 Your first trip Your first trip Incorrect handling of the DANGER Driving an electric vehicle With Comfort Access, the vehicle opens as soon as high-voltage system the vehicle key is near the vehicle (depending on the Risks for people and WARNING country and equipment). The voltage in the high-voltage vehicle electrical objects system and high-voltage battery is extremely dan- An improperly parked vehicle can roll away in an un- gerous. Touching damaged high-voltage cables, the controlled manner, endangering people and objects. on-board charger, the high-voltage heater, the high- voltage battery, the power electronics or the A/C e Before leaving the vehicle, activate the electric compressor can cause a fatal electric shock. parking brake (P) and engage drive position P. All components of the electrical system are marked Driving an electric vehicle is like driving a vehicle with warning stickers. The high-voltage cables are with a combustion engine. orange. The main differences between the two drive types e Do not perform any work on the high-voltage are as follows: vehicle electrical system, orange high-voltage – The electric vehicle is powered by electric cables, on-board charger, high-voltage heater, motors. high-voltage battery, power electronics or A/C – Regenerative braking is designed for energy re- compressor. covery (recuperation) and increases the range of e Never damage, remove or disconnect the orange the vehicle. high-voltage cables from the high-voltage ve- – The high-voltage battery must be charged using hicle electrical system. a suitable charger. e Do not touch parts of the electrical system that > Please see chapter "Charging" on page 86. Fig. 1: Unlocking doors with Comfort Access have been damaged, such as following an For further information: accident. Opening the vehicle > Please see chapter "Central Locking" on page 79. e Never remove the high-voltage battery. Depending on the equipment, the vehicle can be For more safety-relevant issues relating to electric unlocked either with the vehicle key or without a key Drive positions vehicles: by means of Comfort Access. The brake pedal must be pressed while engaging the > Please see chapter "Safety and Driving Pleasure" Once you open the vehicle, the vehicle is ready to drive position. on page 6. drive. When the electric vehicle is ready to drive, the drive positions and the engaged gear are displayed. Information > Please see chapter "Drive positions" on page 216. e Only use the vehicle key when the vehicle is in The following drive positions can be selected: your sight.

The doors of the vehicle can be unlocked using the vehicle key by pressing the button.

28 Your first trip

calming, while maneuvering or parking. charging before disconnecting the vehicle e Be particularly alert while driving! charging cable from the electrical socket. e Observe the safety notes in the instructions for Electric vehicles are fitted with an E-Sound system. the Porsche charging equipment. The synthesized E-Sound is a legal requirement and e Do not work in or on the vehicle during the is designed as an audible sound to warn pedestrians charging process. about the vehicle. The E-Sound system cannot be e Never charge the vehicle at both charge ports at switched off because it is legally required. the same time.

Drive-away performance of the electric Unsuitable or damaged DANGER vehicle electrical sockets and The creep function allows the vehicle to drive away vehicle charging cables automatically from a standstill when the brake pedal is released if drive position D or R is selected. The use of unsuitable or damaged electrical sockets and vehicle charging cables and improper handling Information of the high-voltage battery can cause electric shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire or burns. Fig. 2: Engaging the parking lock The vehicle moves (creeps) when the drive position e Only use vehicle charging cables that have been – To drive forward, select drive position D. is engaged. To prevent unintentional creeping, only tested and approved by the manufacturer for release the brake when you want to drive away. – To interrupt the supply of energy to the vehicle's charging the high-voltage battery in an electric drivetrain, select drive position N. – To reverse, select drive position R. Charging the high-voltage battery – After you have parked the vehicle, select drive Incorrect charging position P. DANGER

E-Sound in the electric vehicle An incorrect charging process, non-observance of bb The vehicle is moving at a speed of less than the generally applicable safety precautions and im- 12 mph (20 km/h). proper handling of the high-voltage battery can Reduced driving noise cause electric shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire WARNING with electric vehicles or burns. e Before starting the vehicle, remove the vehicle Even when E-Sound is switched on in accordance charging cable, close the cover and charge port with legal requirements, an electric vehicle produces door and store the vehicle charging cable in a very little driving noise, which means that other road safe place. users might not even hear it. There is therefore a risk e Always observe the specified sequence when of accidents, particularly in areas with traffic charging the high-voltage battery. Do not unplug the vehicle charging cable from the electrical socket during the charging process. Finish

29 Your first trip

vehicle. NOTICE Range and charging schedule e Always take along the charging equipment required for the country you are driving in. Risk of damage to the charging equipment and ve- e Only connect vehicle charging cables to electri- hicle from overvoltages in the power supply. cal sockets that were installed professionally. e Do not charge the high-voltage battery via the e Do not connect vehicle charging cables to dam- vehicle charge port during a thunderstorm. aged or dirty electrical sockets. e If possible, disconnect the charging equipment e Do not use a damaged vehicle charging cable. from the power grid during a thunderstorm. e Do not use extension cables, cable reels, multiple sockets or travel adapters. Porsche recommends that you use charging equip- e Do not modify or repair any of the electrical ment supplied and approved by Porsche for charg- components. ing. The high-voltage battery can be charged using e Protect electrical sockets and plug connections the charging dock or the basic wall mount. from water, moisture and other fluids and liquids. The high-voltage battery can be charged using ei- e Do not use sharp-edged or pointed objects to ther alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC). remove dirt, ice and snow from the charging – The high-voltage battery can be charged using socket. alternating current (AC) at domestic and indus- e If the charging socket is dirty, contact an au- trial electrical outlets or at public E-charging thorized Porsche dealer. stations. Fig. 3: Range display e Never insert objects into the charge port on the – Rapid charging of the battery is possible at pub- vehicle. lic E-charging stations with direct current (DC). The range of the electric vehicle is shown in the fol- This shortens the charging time significantly. lowing displays: Unsecured vehicle – The instrument cluster. WARNING The vehicle has either a manual or electric charge charging cable port door, depending on the equipment. – The central display. An unsecured, incorrectly secured or incorrectly > Please see chapter "Charging" on page 86. positioned vehicle charging cable can slip out of The Porsche Charging Service can be used via the Information Porsche Connect app in some countries. place and endanger the vehicle occupants during When route guidance is active, the navigation sys- > braking, direction changes or in the event of an Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" of the on- tem can show information about the route in the accident. board Owner's Manual. route monitor (e.g. traffic jam or charging stations). e Never transport the vehicle charging cable in the passenger compartment (e.g. on or in front of the The following factors can affect the range of the seats) or unsecured. electric vehicle: e Always store the vehicle charging cable in the – The current charge state of the high-voltage charge bag in the luggage compartment or in the battery. storage compartment provided for transporting – The current driving style. it in the luggage compartment. – The current temperature of the high-voltage battery; for example, the range may be reduced at lower temperatures. 30 Your first trip

– The properties of the route, including hills and driver assistance system and cannot take over any – The amount of recuperated energy increases to a speed limits. driver assistance system tasks. maximum when the brake pedal is pressed. A – The energy consumption of vehicle functions e Do not use the deceleration effect of recupera- higher braking request is achieved using the ve- that are currently switched on. tion as a distance control system. hicle's wheel brakes. > Please see chapter "Air conditioning Advanced e Always be ready to brake and stay a safe dis- – The maximum amount of regenerated energy Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air condi- tance away from the vehicle in front. can be temporarily reduced in certain situations. tioning)" on page 53. e For greater braking power or for braking the ve- For example, when the high-voltage battery is hicle to a standstill, press the brake pedal as fully charged or when the vehicle is driven in very high or low ambient temperatures. Increasing the range potential of the electric required. vehicle – If the regenerative braking ability is reduced, a message to this effect will appear in the central Note the following points for improving the range: Automatic overrun recu- WARNING display. – Anticipatory driving and recuperative braking can peration limited or not increase energy recovery. available The standard regenerative braking level, which occurs when the accelerator pedal is released, can be – Do not carry unnecessary objects in the vehicle. The maximum overrun recuperation is limited. Too much weight in the vehicle reduces energy configured between a low and high setting. The detection capability of the sensors can be im- savings. > Please see chapter "Energy recovery (recupera- paired by being dirty, bad weather conditions (rain, tion)" on page 217. – Driving with the windows closed reduces the snow, ice, fog, spray) and unfavorable road condi- vehicle's drag. In tube 2 on the instrument cluster, the Power meter tions (loose gravel reflective objects). Vehicles up shows the current regenerated amount of energy. – Check that the tire pressure is correct. The right ahead may not be adequately detected or may not > Please see chapter "Instrument cluster" on tire pressure reduces the vehicle's rolling be detected at all. page 127. resistance. The total amount of regenerated energy for the cur- – Limited use of vehicle functions increases energy If automatic overrun recuperation (Auto setting) is rent trip and the regenerated energy for previous savings. not available, such as if sensors are dirty, a message to this effect will appear in the instrument cluster. journeys or trips can be displayed in the central > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on display. e Do not use automatic overrun recuperation in page 252. > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication conditions of poor visibility and bad road > Please see chapter "Air conditioning Advanced Management (PCM)" on page 173. Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air condi- conditions. tioning)" on page 53. The recuperation mode can be set using the instrument cluster in the vehicle. Recuperation with the electric vehicle > Please see chapter "Instrument cluster" on Unsuitable use of page 127. WARNING recuperation – Recuperation occurs when the accelerator pedal is released while driving. Recuperation is a system that is used only for energy – Depending on the recuperation mode, the elec- recovery. When simultaneously using a recuperation tric motor brakes the vehicle when the accelera- stage with a driver assistance system, the control tor pedal is released. Feeding energy back behavior of the driver assistance system is always (recuperation) into the high-voltage battery in- prioritized (independently of the display). It is not a creases the range of the vehicle. 31 Your first trip

Setting the Advanced Climate Control air- Leaving and locking the vehicle conditioning system (2-/4-Zone Automatic Depending on the equipment, the vehicle can be Air Conditioning) unlocked either with the vehicle key or without a key Risk of damage to air by means of Comfort Access. NOTICE vents For more information: > Please see chapter "Central Locking" on page 79. e Do not insert objects (e.g. cellphone cradle, air freshener) into the air vents. e Only adjust the electric air vents via the touch displays. e Do not impede the electrical adjustment of the air vents (e.g. by blocking the vanes).

The front air vents in the dashboard are adjusted via the central display. The rear air vents in the center console are adjusted via the touch display in the rear.

Fig. 4: Air-conditioning control panels > Please see chapter "Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)" on page 53.

32 Topics On the following pages, the content is arranged in topics in alphabetical order.

33 Active Lane Keeping

A Active Lane Keeping1 e Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all passive at any time. times order to always be ready to steer. B e Drive with extreme care. General safety instructions e Always be ready to take over driving tasks e Always hold the steering wheel with both hands. C (steering, accelerating or braking) yourself. If a Lack of attention WARNING warning appears on the instrument cluster, take System fault with a D WARNING over control of the vehicle immediately. warning message E Active Lane Keeping is designed for use on highways e Drive with extreme care. e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and If a system fault occurs, Active Lane Keeping may F and well-surfaced country roads only. The increased comfort offered by Active Lane Keeping should not the vehicle surroundings. switch off automatically. The status display goes G induce you to risk your safety. Responsibility for e Adapt your driving speed to road and weather out, and a warning message appears on the instrument cluster. H staying in the lane and correctly assessing the traffic conditions. situation always lies with the driver. The following e Drive with extreme care. Restricted perception of I driving situations may arise: WARNING e Always hold the steering wheel with both hands. the environment e J – In the event of heavy braking, corrective steering Always be ready to take over driving tasks (steering, accelerating or braking) yourself. intervention might not take place. Detection of the area around the vehicle by the sen- K e If a warning appears on the instrument cluster, – During active steering by the driver, corrective sors (e.g. camera, radar) may be restricted by differ- take over control of the vehicle immediately. L steering intervention might be reduced or not ent influencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy take place. M water spray, oncoming headlights, dirt or damage). – The system cannot fully detect the environment. This can result in failure to make steering interven- N Steering interventions might not take place. tions or in unexpected steering interventions. System limitations – The system cannot correctly interpret the envi- Driving situations with O e Drive with extreme care. WARNING ronment. This could result in inadvertent steer- e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and risk of accidents P ing interventions. the vehicle surroundings. – Corrective steering intervention alone may not There are some driving situations in which the sys- Q e Clean the front camera lens and front radar reg- be sufficient to keep the vehicle in the driving tem cannot guarantee active lane guidance. There is ularly and keep them free of snow and ice. therefore a risk of accidents when using the system! R lane if there are ruts, winding roads, inclined road e Do not cover the sensors. surfaces or a crosswind. The driver must actively These include the following driving situations: e Check the windshield for damage in the area of S steer in such situations. the camera lens at regular intervals. – when increased attention is required on the part T – The system may not work as expected in unclear of the driver traffic situations, such as turn-off lanes, exits, Unexpected system – during sporty driving U WARNING building sites or city traffic. Steering intervention behavior – in adverse weather conditions (e.g. fog, snow or V might not take place or be feasible. heavy rain) – It may be the case that the system will remain In some situations, corrective steering intervention W – in unfavorable road conditions (including poor active in unwanted or unexpected situations or is not enough to keep the vehicle in the lane. Fur- surfaces or unclear lane markings) X will unexpectedly go into passive mode. thermore, the function can change from active to – in areas with roadworks Y Z 1. Availability depending on country 34 Active Lane Keeping

– when approaching humps and dips Operating principle > Please see chapter "Lane Change Assist (LCA)" A – in urban traffic on page 142. Active Lane Keeping uses the front camera as well as B – on winding and narrow country roads front and rear radar to continuously scan the area – in unclear traffic situations such as intersections around the vehicle and helps the driver to keep the Behavior if there is no steering activity C The driver's steering behavior is monitored when or tollbooths vehicle in the selected lane. D – off-road or on unpaved or slippery roads – When the system is active, the driver can set a Active Lane Keeping is switched on and active. If there is no steering activity (e.g. hands not on the The system does not always keep the vehicle in the preferred position within the lane. When the E driver keeps the vehicle at the desired position steering wheel or only resting lightly), a warning ap- center of the lane or in a central position behind the F for several seconds, the system ends lane center pears on the instrument cluster. The system last vehicle in the line. guidance and starts driving at the selected offset prompts the driver to actively take over the steering. G Active Lane Keeping does not react to people and position. The shift in position is reset again when If the driver does not react to the takeover prompt, animals or vehicles crossing lanes or oncoming ve- the system becomes passive or is switched off the system switches to a passive state. For vehicles H hicles in the same lane. These are not detected as (e.g. by activating the turn signal changing lanes with activated emergency stop function:1 The ve- I obstructions by the sensors. or braking). hicle can be slowed to a standstill. e Never use Active Lane Keeping in the specified – The system always prioritizes the lane markings J situations. over other objects (e.g. vehicles). In some cases, K e Do not use Active Lane Keeping to steer the ve- this can mean that the driver has to position the hicle around obstructions lying on the road. vehicle in the center of the lane in order to acti- L vate the system. Activation of the system out- M side the center of the lane is prevented so that Information the driver does not feel a strong movement on N If there is a fault in the system or if Active Line the steering wheel immediately after the system O Keeping does not function as described in this sec- is activated. tion, do not use the assistance function. Visit an au- – The driver is responsible for moving to the side of P thorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an the road to create a lane for emergency vehicles. Q authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained In such situations, the driver can switch off the technicians and the necessary parts and tools. system or override the system using the steering R wheel. S Responding to warning symbols Behavior when the turn signal is activated T Always heed any warning and information messages Activating the turn signal alerts the system to the U displayed in the vehicle. driver's intention to change lanes. Active Lane > Please see chapter "Warning and information Keeping therefore does not intervene in steering in V messages" on page 244. this case. W Lane Change Assist, on the other hand, assists the driver when changing lanes by also activating the X turn signal. Y Z 1. Available in some countries. 35 Active Lane Keeping

A Display elements Symbol Meaning B Active Lane Keeping and Lane Keep C Assist are switched on and both are D passive.

E Active Lane Keeping and Lane Keep F Assist are switched on and both are active. G Active Lane Keeping is active and H Lane Keep Assist is passive. I J Active Lane Keeping is passive and Lane Keep Assist is active, e.g. when K ACC status is "Ready". L Fig. 6: Control lever for driver assistance systems M Switching Active Lane Keeping on Selecting and deselecting Active Lane Keeping Fig. 5: Active Lane Keeping display 1. Press button S on the control lever. N and off A Display of lane markings The options menu for the driver assistance sys- Active Lane Keeping is only available when Adaptive O B Active Lane Keeping status display tems appears on the instrument cluster. Cruise Control (ACC) or Porsche InnoDrive (PID) is 2. Select Active Lane Keeping and press to P activated. Active Lane Keeping can be switched on confirm. Symbols and off if ACC or PID are activated. Selection or de- Q selection is possible with the control lever using the – or – Symbol Meaning instrument cluster and using the central display. R e e Assist e Active Lane Keeping S No Active Lane Keeping is switched off. T display Information

U Active Lane Keeping is switched on Active Lane Keeping can be deactivated at any time by pressing the brake or by oversteering. V and passive. W Active Lane Keeping is switched on X and active. Y Z

36 Active Lane Keeping

Additional information A Comparison of Lane Keep Assist and Active B Lane Keeping C D Function Lane Keep Assist Active Lane Keeping Lane Keep Assist + Active Lane Keeping E F Status icon G Lane center guidance No Yes Yes H I Lane departure warning Yes No Yes J Steering intervention to prevent lane Yes No No K departure (lane edge guidance) L Speed range approx. 40-156 mph (65-250 km/h) approx. 0-165 mph (0-210 km/h) See the individual function M ACC dependence No Only in conjunction with active ACC See the individual function N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

37 Active Parking Support

A Active Parking Support a risk of injuries and damage. – Objects above the detection area (e.g. bumpers on parked vehicles, half-open garage doors and B e Only use the system in suitable environmental General safety instructions conditions. other objects that are not touching the ground). C e Adapt your driving style to the visibility, weather, – Objects with sound-absorbing or sound-reflect- Lack of attention WARNING road and traffic conditions. ing surfaces and structures (e.g. fabrics, also D pillars and columns in a parking garage in unfav- E The system must not induce you to take risks with orable conditions). NOTICE – Objects that move quickly into the detection area F your safety. The driver is always responsible for taking due care. The system is no substitute for the (e.g. other road users). The system can guide the vehicle over curbs. The G driver's attentiveness. – Raised parking lot restrictions, e.g. parking stops, tires and rims of the vehicle may be damaged. may be detected as obstacles. H e Always check the traffic situation and the area e If necessary, take control of the vehicle or cancel – Precipices and embankments. around the vehicle. I the parking procedure. e If necessary, take over control of the vehicle. J e Observe the safety instructions and system lim- Functions its of the supporting systems, sensors and Information The system can provide assistance when searching K for a suitable parking space. The system can assume cameras. Observe any country-specific laws relating to the control of the steering movements, acceleration and L use of parking assistance systems. Information on supporting assistance systems: braking required to park and pull out. The system M > Please see chapter "ParkAssist" on page 164. monitors the vehicle surroundings using sensors. If a N Restricted detection road user crossing the driving path or an obstacle is WARNING System limitations detected, the system performs a braking ranges of sensors O The system is not available: intervention. P Sensors do not cover all parts of the surrounding – If a bicycle rack is mounted on the rear. Parking space search area. Persons, animals and obstacles may not be – In the "Lift" chassis setting. Parking space search works: Q detected in this area or may only be detected to a – On uphill gradients above 10 %. – When driving forward. R limited extent. There is a risk of injury and damage. – On tight bends. – If the distance to parked vehicles is a maximum of approx. 5.0 ft (1.5 m). S e Always check the traffic situation and the area The system is available to a limited extent: around the vehicle. – In poor weather conditions (rain, snow or ice). – For parking spaces parallel to the road up to a speed of 25 mph (40 km/h). T – When there are unusual road surfaces, such as Adverse environmental – For parking spaces perpendicular to the road up U CAUTION off-road, unpaved roads, loose substrate, in- conditions clined road surfaces or wheel ruts. to a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). V – For parking spaces between two parked vehicles. In the event of adverse environmental conditions, The system cannot detect: W the system will be restricted or not available: There is – Low, narrow or protruding objects (e.g. trailer Parking Parking is active under the following conditions: X hitches, drawbars of parked trailers, chain barriers, poles or fences). – Parking backward into parking spaces parallel to Y the road. Z – Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to the road, between two parked vehicles. 38 Active Parking Support

– Driving forward into parking spaces perpendicu- 2. Drive past the parked vehicles at low speed. bb Parking space selected on the central display. A lar to the road, between two parked vehicles. A 3. Observe the information on the central display. 1. Take your hands off the steering wheel and keep B parking procedure can also be started here if the 4. Parking space search is first active on the pas- the brake pedal pressed. front of the vehicle is already positioned in the senger side. C parking space. 2. Tap on the center console operating panel. In order to change the parking side, activate the D Pulling out corresponding turn signal (left/right). The color of the symbol changes to blue. – or – Pulling out works if the vehicle is moved forward out 3. Release the brake pedal. E Tap the corresponding icon A on the central of a parking space parallel to the road and the park- The parking procedure starts. F display. ing space is approx. 3 ft. (1 m) longer than your 4. Observe the information on the central display. 5. On finding a suitable parking space, stop the G vehicle. To cancel the parking procedure: vehicle. > Please see chapter "Aborting the parking H When a parking space is found, it will appear as a Parking space search procedure" on page 40. blue space on the central display. If several I A message appears when the vehicle reaches the parking directions are possible, they will be Starting a parking space search target position. J displayed. Transmission range P is selected and the parking 6. If in the display an arrow appears in front of the K brake is applied. vehicle, drive the vehicle further forward. 5. Take control of the vehicle. L A parking procedure can only be started if a blue vehicle is displayed in the desired parking space. If the vehicle is not taken over, a message ap- M pears and operational readiness will then be 7. To select the parking space, tap the parking switched off. N space symbol B with the desired parking direction on the central display. O Fig. 7: Active Parking Support Starting the pulling-out procedure on the center console operating panel pulsates A Select the parking or pulling-out side bb Operational readiness established. P blue. B Select the parking direction. bb Vehicle has not been moved yet. Q bb Brake pedal pressed. The parking space search starts in the background Canceling parking space search bb R as soon as the prerequisites are met. The parking Transmission range D selected. space can be selected even if the display does not e Tap on the central display. 1. Take your hands off the steering wheel and keep S the brake pedal pressed. switch on until after you have driven past the park- The search is aborted automatically: T ing space. – If the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h). 2. Tap on the center console operating panel. U – When transmission range R is selected. – or – 1. Tap on the center console operating panel. V – or – On the central display e Assist e ParkAssist On the central display e Assist e ParkAssist Parking procedure e W e Starting the parking procedure 3. In order to change the pulling-out direction, ac- X The parking space search is displayed. bb Vehicle is stationary. tivate the corresponding turn signal (left/right). Y bb – or – Brake pedal pressed. Z

39 Active Parking Support

A Tap the corresponding icon on the central The following actions end the parking procedure: System limitations display. e Intervening in the steering. B – The system is not available if a bicycle rack is on the center console operating panel pul- – or – mounted on the rear. C sates blue. e Changing transmission range. – In order for the system to detect obstacles in the D – or – driving path, they must be higher than approx. 4. Tap on the center console operating panel. e Applying the parking brake. 4 in. (10 cm) and be stationary. E 5. Release the brake pedal. – or – – The system is not available while active parking F The pulling-out procedure starts. e Opening a door. support is in use. – or – 6. Observe the information on the central display. G To cancel the parking procedure: e Press the accelerator. Scope of functions The parking procedure must be restarted. To do this, H > Please see chapter "Aborting the parking Maneuvering Assist uses sensors to monitor the area switch operational readiness off and back on again procedure" on page 40. behind and to the sides of the vehicle. If static ob- I when pulling out. stacles are detected, the system will brake the ve- A message appears when the vehicle reaches the hicle to a standstill. J target position. The system is available subject to the following The vehicle drives out of the parking space until a Maneuvering Assist K prerequisites: collision-free exit is possible. General safety instructions – Transmission range R is selected. L 7. Assume control of the vehicle. Lack of attention – The symbol on the screen is active. M WARNING Aborting the parking procedure – The vehicle speed is max. 5 mph (10 km/h). N To interrupt parking briefly: The system must not induce you to take risks with Following braking by Maneuvering Assist: O your safety. The driver is always responsible for tak- e e Take control of the vehicle by pressing the brake Tap on the center console operating panel. ing due care. The system is no substitute for the P or accelerator pedal. – or – driver's attentiveness. Maneuvering Assist is temporarily deactivated, Q e Bring the vehicle to a stop by pressing the brake e Always check the traffic situation and the area but remains switched on. R pedal. around the vehicle. The parking procedure can then be continued: e If necessary, assume control and brake the ve- S Switching Maneuvering Assist on and off hicle yourself. bb Brake pedal released. T e Observe the safety instructions and system lim- e e Assist e 1. Press the brake pedal again and hold. its of the supporting systems, sensors and U Maneuvering Assist is switched on or off. 2. Tap on the center console operating panel. cameras. V 3. Release the brake pedal. Switching Maneuvering Assist off temporarily The parking procedure is continued. Information on further assistance systems: W > Please see chapter "Active Parking Support" on e Tap the button in the rear view camera's X page 38. touch display. > Please see chapter "ParkAssist" on page 164. Y The button in the rear view camera's touch display lights up blue. Maneuvering Assist is switched Z off for the current maneuvering situation. 40 Active Parking Support

If the driving speed of 5 mph (10 km/h) is exceeded, A Maneuvering Assist is switches on again automatically. B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

41 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Covered radar sensor A Adaptive Cruise Control WARNING between the radiator and your body. B (ACC)1 e This transmitter must not be co-located or op- Covering the radar sensor can impair the function of erating in conjunction with any other antenna or C General Safety Instructions the system or prevent it from working. transmitter. D e Always keep the radar sensor free of dirt, ice and Lack of attention Damage to the radar WARNING snow. WARNING E sensor

F The increased comfort offered by the system should Shocks or damage to the bumper, wheel housings or G not induce you to risk your safety. Even when the underbody, such as through parking collisions, can system is activated, the driver remains responsible displace the sensors. This may impair the perform- H when driving, such as by keeping a safe distance or ance of the Adaptive Cruise Control. I driving at an appropriate speed. The system cannot e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche replace the driver's attentiveness. recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as J e Drive with extreme care. they have trained technicians and the necessary K e If the system deceleration is insufficient, slow parts and tools. the vehicle down immediately using the foot- L brake. Make sure that you can take control of the Driving on turn-off lanes, WARNING M vehicle at any time. highway exits or in areas with road construction N Unsafe traffic situation WARNING In such situations, the vehicle can accelerate to the O and unfavorable road conditions set speed. P e Switch off the system temporarily when driving If the prevailing situation does not allow you to drive Q Fig. 8: Radar sensor position on turn-off lanes, highway exits or in areas with safely at a sufficient distance and constant speed, road construction. Radiofrequency Radia- R using ACC can cause accidents. WARNING e Do not use the system in heavy traffic, where tion Exposure Foot on the accelerator S WARNING there is road construction, in built-up areas, on This equipment complies with the specified FCC ra- T private lanes or field tracks or in play streets. diation exposure limits for an uncontrolled environ- The system does not brake automatically when your U ment. This equipment should be installed and foot is on the accelerator. This leads to the risk of a V operated with minimum distance of 8 in. (20 cm) rear-end collision. e Take your foot off the accelerator when the sys- W tem is activated. X Y Z 1. Availability dependent on country 42 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Inadequate braking WARNING – Vehicles entering and exiting curves Vehicles entering and exiting bends and sta- A power during automatic – Stationary vehicles tionary vehicles B braking by the system – Vehicles with large projecting loads C If the system has detected that braking assistance is – Pedestrians, cyclists and animals required on the part of the driver, a warning signal – Objects on the road D – Oncoming vehicles and cross-traffic sounds and a warning message appears on the in- E strument cluster. In this case, the system braking e Intervene and brake yourself if necessary. power is insufficient to prevent a collision. e Drive with extreme care and always pay attention F to the traffic conditions and vehicle e Brake immediately in this case. G surroundings. H System limitations Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and I Unfavorable road condi- out and narrow vehicles WARNING J tions and poor weather conditions K

Radar sensor vision can be impaired by rain, snow, L ice, fog, loose gravel or spray. Vehicles up ahead may M not be adequately detected, or may not be detected at all. Fig. 10: Vehicles entering and exiting bends (C) and sta- N tionary vehicles (D) Reflective objects such as ice, heavy rain, crash bar- O riers or tunnel entrances may impair the functional- Vehicles entering and exiting bends may not be de- P ity of the radar sensor. A message indicating that the tected or may not be detected in time or the radar system is not available appears on the instrument sensor may react to vehicles in adjacent lanes. Q cluster. A stationary vehicle or obstacle that suddenly ap- R e Do not use the system under such conditions. pears in the radar sensor's range, such as after a vehicle ahead changes lanes or at the end of a traffic S Undetected vehicles or jam, may only be detected to a limited extent by WARNING T objects adaptive cruise control. U The radar sensor detects a narrow, cone-shaped area in front of your vehicle. As a result, vehicles or Fig. 9: Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out (A) V objects may not be detected in time or cannot be and narrow vehicles (B) W detected in the following situations: A vehicle that is driving erratically or weaving in and X – Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out out will only be detected if it is completely in the – Vehicles with a small cross-section or narrow same lane. Y vehicles A narrow vehicle may not be detected in time, if at all. Z 43 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

A Vehicles with large projecting loads The speed of the vehicle can be increased at any Display elements time by pressing the accelerator pedal. The stored B desired speed and distance settings are retained and C are set again after the accelerator pedal is released. The speed of the vehicle can be decreased at any D time by braking. This switches the system to passive E mode. F Controls G H Fig. 11: Vehicles with large projecting loads I In the case of vehicles ahead with long projecting loads (e.g. a lumber truck), the end of the vehicle J may not be detected or may not be detected cor- K rectly by the radar sensor. L Responding to warning symbols M Always observe any warning and information messages displayed in the vehicle. Fig. 13: Adaptive cruise control N > Please see chapter "Warning and information A Own speed messages" on page 244. O B Set desired speed C Speed of the vehicle ahead P Operating principle D Vehicle detected ahead E Desired distance from the vehicle ahead Q Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) automatically main- F Status display and desired speed tains a set speed and a set distance at a speed of R approx. 19 mph - 130 mph (30 km/h - 210 km/h) Fig. 12: Control lever for driver assistance systems Status display symbols S without having to use the accelerator pedal. If another vehicle that is traveling slower than the R Switch systems on/off and open options menu T selected speed is detected ahead in the same lane, S Open options menu (when system is switched on) Symbol Meaning ACC automatically maintains a set distance. Adap- 1 Set/increase the desired speed U 2 Reduce the desired speed tive Cruise Control will cause the vehicle to brake if ACC is passive. V 3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed the distance from the vehicle in front becomes too 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control W short and accelerate if the distance increases. If the vehicle in front stops, ACC brakes the vehicle X to a stop and then accelerates again automatically if ACC is passive at the set desired Y the vehicle in front starts driving again within 15 speed. seconds. Otherwise, automatic speed and distance Z control can be resumed.

44 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Symbol Meaning – The set desired speed and the set desired dis- The set desired speed is deleted. A tance are retained. The desired distance is stored. B ACC is active at the set desired – Control is active again after releasing the accel- speed. erator pedal. Activating ACC C bb ACC switched on. D Switching ACC on and off 1. Accelerate to the desired speed using the accel- A vehicle was detected ahead while The system that was selected last is always erator pedal. E the desired speed was set. A vehicle switched on. The system is initially in passive mode 2. Briefly press the control lever forward (position F symbol is displayed instead of the when switched on. It must first be activated before 1) and release the accelerator pedal. G cruise control symbol. the control function starts working. ACC is active. Switching on ACC The current driving speed is set as the desired H speed. bb A driver assistance system is not yet switched I Operating modes on. The current desired speed is green in the status dis- 1. Press button R on the control lever. play and is automatically maintained unless a slower J Passive vehicle is detected ahead. The options menu for the driver assistance sys- This mode is set after switching on and when ACC is K tems appears on the instrument cluster. active after pressing the brake pedal and after 2. If ACC is not already selected, select ACC using Changing the desired speed L pressing down the control lever (CANCEL). the rotary push button on the steering wheel and The set desired speed can be changed by pressing – The status display F is gray. M press to confirm. the control lever. – There is no control. ACC is switched on and passive. bb ACC is active. N – The set desired speed and the set desired dis- O tance are retained. Switching from an already activated driver assis- Increasing the speed tance system to ACC e Press the control lever forward (position 1): P Active 1. Press button S on the control lever. – Brief press = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments Q This mode is set after setting the speed, after re- The options menu for the driver assistance sys- – Press and hold = 6 mph (10 km/h) suming control (RESUME) and after temporarily tems appears on the instrument cluster. increments R overriding control by pressing the accelerator pedal. 2. Select ACC using the rotary push button on the Reducing the speed S – The status display F is green. steering wheel and press to confirm. e Pull the control lever (position 2): – Speed and distance to the vehicle ahead are ACC is switched on and passive. – Brief pull = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments T controlled. – Pull and hold = 6 mph (10 km/h) increments U Information The set desired speed is indicated by the outer line Temporarily passive at the edge of the speedometer and appears blue in V An activated driver assistance system will be acti- This mode is set while the accelerator pedal is the status display F. The display turns green as soon W pressed when ACC is active. vated again even after switching off and restoring as the set desired speed is reached. operational readiness. – A message indicating that ACC is passive ap- X pears in the instrument cluster. Changing the desired distance Y – The status display F is gray. Switching off ACC The desired distance from the vehicle ahead can be Z – There is no control. e Press button R on the control lever. set in 5 stages. Stage 3 is recommended. The 45 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

A distance depends on the driving speed. It reduces as Displaying the distance from the vehicle in 1. Press the accelerator. the vehicle slows down and increases as it speeds front The system is passive, while the accelerator is B up. pressed. C Symbol Suitable for Distance at 2. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 75 mph (120 D The system is active. km/h) E Traveling at approx. Interrupting and resuming speed F speed in lines of 108 ft. (33 m) and distance control G traffic (≙ 1 sec.) If the system is interrupted, it switches to passive standby mode and must be reactivated manually. H Driving in lines of approx. Interrupting control I traffic 154 ft. (47 m) e Press the brake pedal. ≙ J ( ap- – or – prox. 1.4 sec.) e Press the control lever down (CANCEL). K The system is passive. The desired speed and approx. L Corresponds to distance settings remain stored. 197 ft. (60 m) "half speedome- The status display changes from green to gray. M ter distance" (≙ approx. 1.8 sec.) N Information Fig. 14: Setting the desired distance O Driving on coun- approx. When the vehicle is stationary, the speed and dis- Increasing the desired distance try roads 239 ft. (73 m) tance control can only be canceled using the control P ≙ e Briefly press rocker switch Z upward. ( ap- lever. Q Another segment is shown in the desired dis- prox. 2.2 sec.) tance display E. R Driving in sparse approx. Resuming control e Briefly press the control lever upward (RESUME). S Reducing the desired distance traffic 285 ft. (87 m) (≙ ap- The system is active. The desired speed and e Briefly press rocker switch Z downward. T prox. 2.6 sec.) distance settings are applied again. A segment disappears in the desired distance The status display changes from gray to green. U display E. V Overriding speed and distance Information W Information control temporarily ACC can be activated even while the vehicle is sta- X When the system display is not active, pressing Speed and distance control can be overridden tem- tionary by briefly pressing the control lever upward. switch Z for the first time displays the main menu for porarily by pressing the accelerator pedal. This is Y the driver assistance system without changing the useful when passing, for example. Z desired distance. bb ACC is active.

46 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Braking to a standstill and driving A off again B If the vehicle in front stops, your vehicle will brake to a standstill within the system limits if distance con- C trol is active. D E Information F When distance control is active or while the vehicle is held, the brake pedal may feel different and you G may hear hydraulic noises. This behavior is typical of H the system. There is no fault. I Moving off again automatically J Driving off when there is K WARNING an obstacle L The vehicle may move off again in stop-and-go M traffic, even if there is an obstacle between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. This can result in a N collision. O e Brake immediately in this case. P After your vehicle is automatically braked to a Q standstill, the system assists the driver in driving off again automatically within 15 seconds. R A message on the instrument cluster informs the S driver that the vehicle is ready to drive off. T Moving off manually U bb No obstructions detected in front. e Press the control lever up (RESUME). V – or – W If after the vehicle is automatically braked to a standstill, the message indicating readiness to drive X off disappears, the vehicle can then be driven off Y again using the accelerator. e Press the accelerator briefly. Z 47 Airbag Systems

Seat Belts and A Airbag Systems DANGER occupant sensing. Positioning e Do not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat B The vehicle is equipped with airbags and lap/ shoulder belts at both front seating positions. The airbags hangers) over the backrest. Airbags are most effective when occupants wear C are a supplemental restraint at those seating e Objects must not protrude out of the door stor- seat belts and maintain a proper seating position. age compartment. D positions. The airbags in combination with the seat belts make To provide optimal occupant protection, airbags e Do not add any additional coverings or stickers to E up a safety system which offers the driver and the must inflate at very high speed. If you are not wear- the steering wheel or in the area of the passenger ing your seat belt or are too close to the airbag when airbag, side airbags, knee airbags, and head air- F passenger the greatest protection from injuries in case of an accident. it is deployed, inflating airbags can result in serious bags. Doing so may adversely affect the func- G Even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, personal injury or death. tioning of the airbag system or cause harm to the e Always fasten seat belts. H the seat belts must be worn at all times, because occupants if the airbag system should deploy. the front or side airbags deploy depending on the e Make sure there are no persons, animals or ob- e No objects should be placed over or near the I force and angle of impact. jects between the driver or passenger and the airbag on the instrument panel, because any area into which the airbags inflate. J Below the deployment threshold of the airbag sys- such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in tem, and during types of collisions which do not e Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering a crash severe enough to cause the airbag to K cause airbag deployment, the seat belts provide the wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full inflate. primary protection to the occupants when correctly e L vehicle control. Give your passenger all of the information in this worn. Therefore, all persons within the vehicle must e Always hold the steering wheel by the outer rim. chapter. M wear seat belts at all times to minimize the risk of Never rest your hands on the center of the severe injury or death in the event of a crash. steering wheel where the airbag module is Modification to Airbag N DANGER In many states, state law requires the use of seat located. System O belts. e Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. Do > Please see chapter "Seat Belts" on page 200. A modified airbag system cannot offer protection. P not put feet on the dashboard or the seat area. The front airbags are located under the steering e Do not lean against the inside of the door or They may not trigger or could trigger in an uncon- Q wheel center pad on the driver’s side and in the outside the window while the vehicle is moving. trolled way. An uncontrolled triggering of the airbag dashboard on the passenger's side. system can result in serious personal injury or death. R The side airbags on the front seats are installed in Safe Storage of Objects e Do not modify the seat coverings, since such DANGER S the side of the seat backrests. The side airbags of changes can block the seat-mounted side airbag. the rear seats are located in the side bolster. Do not attach additional cushions, protective T Objects and load have to be stored securely to keep The head curtain airbags are installed above the coverings, or pillows to the passenger's seat. Do from causing injury. U doors in the side roof rail. In case of a car rollover not affix things to the passenger's seat or cover it they help to inhibit an unintended passenger's ejec- e Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of V with other materials. Do not cover the back of tion from the vehicle. the passenger seat. These could impair the the backrest. Do not make changes to the pas- W The knee airbags for the driver and front passenger function of the airbags, the seat belts, and senger's seat, the cushion or foam or to the seat are located in the knee area on the driver and the X passenger side. Y Z

48 Airbag Systems

base frame. In the event of a side impact of corresponding force, time of a collision, including whether the airbag and A e Do not modify any wiring or components of the the side and curtain airbag on the impact side is seatbelt pretensioners deployed and whether the B airbag system. triggered. seat belt was in use. e Do not install any wiring for electrical accessory The inflation process generates the amount of gas To retrieve this information, special equipment is C equipment in the vicinity of the airbag wiring required to fill the airbags at the necessary pressure needed and access to the vehicle or feature that D harnesses. Doing so may disable the airbag sys- in fractions of a second. stores that data is required. Some states only allow tem or cause inadvertent inflation. Airbags help to protect the head and body, while si- access to such information under restricted circum- E e If the airbag warning light on the tachometer il- multaneously damping the motion of the driver and stances, including: F luminates, the airbag system should be repaired passenger in the impact direction in the event of a – In response to a request of police or other gov- immediately by your authorized Porsche dealer. frontal impact or side impact. ernment office; or G e In order to help provide protection in severe colli- – with the consent of the registered owner, or if Using accessories not approved by Porsche can H cause the capacitance occupant sensing system sions which can cause death and serious injury, air- the vehicle is leased, with the lessee, or to be impaired. bags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such high speed – through a discovery process in litigation; or as I e Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire extin- inflation has a negative but unavoidable side effect, otherwise permitted or required by law. which is that it can and does cause injuries, including J guisher, or first aid kit under the seat. Your rights with respect to the information dis- facial and arm abrasions, bruising and broken bones. e Only have seats removed and installed by an au- cussed above may vary from state to state. Check K You can help minimize such injuries by always thorized Porsche dealer so that capacitance oc- your state law for further information. L cupant sensing components will not be wearing your seat belts. damaged. There are many types of accidents in which airbags M are not expected to deploy. These include accidents Advanced Airbag where the airbags would provide little or no benefit, Your vehicle is equipped with capacitance occupant N Information such as a rear impact, or certain diagonal impacts sensing for the front passenger seat in accordance O against your vehicle. Other accidents where the air- with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, seats) may bag system is designed not to deploy are those 208. P be disassembled only by an authorized Porsche where the risk of injury from the airbag deployment The components of the advanced passenger airbag dealer. Q could exceed any protective benefits, such as in low system include a capacitance occupant sensing When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety in- speed accidents or higher speed accidents where system for the front passenger seat and a PASSEN- R structions must be followed. These instructions can the vehicle decelerates slowly over a longer time. GER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator light. The system be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer. S Since airbag deployment does not occur in all acci- measures the electrical capacitance acting on the dents, this further emphasizes the need for you and seat to determine whether the front passenger air- T your passengers to always wear seat belts. bag should be switched on or off. U Function of the Airbag System Your Porsche vehicle is equipped with electronically Depending on the angle and force of impact, only a Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your pri- controlled systems that help to ensure your vehicle passenger airbag that is switched-on by the capaci- V mary protection comes from your seat belts. The operates properly. These systems monitor the oper- tance system will be triggered during a collision. You front airbags and head curtain airbags are triggered ation of various systems and electronically store in- can determine the on/off status of the passenger W during a frontal collision of sufficient force and formation that is useful to service technicians when airbag system from the indicator lamp on the over- X direction. they need to diagnose and repair these systems. head console. Your vehicle is equipped with crash-sensing diag- > Please see chapter "Automatic deactivation of Y nostic devices that may record information at the the passenger airbag" on page 50. Z

49 Airbag Systems

A If the front passenger airbag is turned on, the PAS- DANGER passenger's airbag may be switched off. SENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light will go out and e Select an upright seat position, and do not sup- B the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator light is con- Risk of serious personal injury or death due to the port weight on the armrests or center console, or tinuously illuminated when the vehicle is switched C passenger airbag triggering unintentionally. lean out of the window while driving. on. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light e Always keep feet positioned on the floor in the D stays illuminated, the passenger airbag will not e If the front passenger seat gets wet, dry it footwell while driving. Do not put feet on the E deploy. immediately. e If liquid soaks into the front passenger seat, this dashboard or the seat area. Improper Use of Front F DANGER can keep the airbag system from working prop- Passenger Seat G erly and may, for instance, deactivate or activate Adjusting the passenger seat Improper use of the front passenger seat can unin- the passenger frontal airbag. If this happens, the H PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator light Reclining Passenger tentionally impair operation of capacitance occupant WARNING I sensing for the passenger’s airbag. and the airbag warning light on the instrument Seatback cluster may come on. If the electrical capacitance of an adult on the pas- Seat belts only offer protection when the backrest is J e If liquid is pooled on the front passenger seat, but senger's seat is not properly maintained, the pas- positioned at an upright seating angle and the belts has not soaked in, this may also keep the ca- K senger's airbag may be switched off. are properly positioned on the body. pacitance occupant sensing for the front pas- L e Always make sure that there is nothing on the senger seat from working properly and cause the e Do not operate the vehicle with the driver or front passenger seat that could cause the ca- passenger backrests excessively reclined. M passenger frontal airbag to be enabled (turned pacitance occupant sensing system to judge that on), even though there is a properly installed N the seat is occupied by a person when it is not. child restraint system on the seat. Wet towels or e Never use cushions, pillows, blankets or similar Modify vehicle to accomodate O other wet things on the seat cushion can have items on the front passenger seat. The additional the same effect. persons with disabilities layers prevent the capacitance occupant sensing P Because modifications to your vehicle could com- for the front passenger seat from accurately Improper Front Passen- Q WARNING promise your advanced airbag system, please call measuring the capacitance of the child restraint ger Seating 1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your vehicle R system and/or the person on the seat and thus modified. keep the advanced airbag system from working Improper use of the front passenger seat can unin- S properly. tentionally impair operation of capacitance occupant T e Never place or use any electrical device (such as sensing for the passenger’s airbag. Automatic deactivation of the a cell phone, tablet, laptop, CD player, electronic passenger airbag U If the electrical capacitance of an adult on the front games device or power inverter) on the front passenger seat is not properly maintained, the Child Restraint in Front DANGER V passenger seat if the device is connected to the Seat cigarette lighter socket. Such device can influ- W ence the capacitance registered by the capaci- The use of a child restraint system in the front pas- X tance occupant sensing for the front passenger senger’s seat can result in serious personal injury or seat, so that incorrect information is provided to Y the airbag control unit. Z

50 Airbag Systems death to the child from an airbag deployment Information inflating airbag. A To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an In this case: Depending on the weight, body positioning and B accident, Porsche strongly recommends: e Child restraint systems facing forwards: Install shape acting on the passenger's seat, it can occur in e C Under all normal circumstances, the child seat the case of heavier children that the passenger air- on the rear seats. e must be placed in the rear. Do not use a child bag is active or, in the case of very light adults or Child restraint systems facing rearwards: Do not D restraint system on the front passenger seat. young persons, that the passenger airbag is drive with a rearward facing child restraint system. E Before transporting a child on the passenger seat: deactivated. The condition of the passenger airbag system is e Have the fault remedied at your nearest author- F > Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems ized Porsche dealer. (Child Seats)" on page 96. shown by the indicator light in the overhead operat- G ing console. If in doubt: – When an up to one-year old child is seated in the e H child restraint system on the front seat, the pas- Fasten the forward facing child restraint system Detecting faults senger airbag will be automatically deactivated. on the rear seat or transport the passenger on I the rear seat. Faults are indicated by the red airbag warning light – When an adult is seated in the front passenger on the tachometer. J seat the front airbag is automatically activated. PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light lights up The airbag warning light illuminates when the elec- K The passenger airbag is switched off. tronic monitoring of the airbag system detects a PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light does not light up malfunction of the sensors, seat belt system, occu- L The passenger airbag is active and ready for pant detection system, PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator M operation. light, related wiring, airbag modules and control units. N Information e In the following cases you should immediately O consult an authorized Porsche dealer in order to After switching on the vehicle, the PASS AIR BAG assure the airbag system is functioning P OFF indicator light lights up for a few seconds as a properly: Fig. 15: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator Q check. – The warning light does not come on when the vehicle is switched on. R Child Seat Detection DANGER – or – S Fault – If the warning light does not go out once the ve- T When the vehicle is on and the up to one-year old hicle is on. child is seated in the child restraint system on the – or – U passenger seat the indicator light – If the warning light appears while driving. V PASS AIR BAG OFF must be on. W If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light does not light up, it could indicate a fault in the system, and X the airbag could inflate in a collision, placing the Y child at risk of death or severe injury from the Z

51 Airbag Systems

A Information B Further information on the airbag system can be C found on stickers attached to the sun visors, as well as on all airbag components. D For special recommendations on the use of child E restraints: F > Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems G (Child Seats)" on page 96. H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

52 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

Air conditioning Advanced A Climate Control (2/4 zone B automatic air conditioning) C Brief Overview – Air Conditioning D E Central display F The air conditioning system can be operated using G the central display, the center console control panel and the rear display, depending on equipment. H The preconfigured automatic modes Diffused and I Focused provide fully automatic climate control. J This brief overview does not replace the compre- hensive descriptions. In particular, safety messages K and warnings are not replaced by this brief overview. L > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication M Management (PCM)" on page 173. N Fig. 16: Brief overview of the central display O What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? P Q Call up Air conditioning menu in the central display – Central display: Tap e A/C . – – or – R – Center console operating panel: Tap the S Climate softkey. T Switch Air conditioning menu Use menu area A. – U

Select preconfigured automatic modes Select automatic mode (see B). > p. 57 V – Diffused W – Focused X > p. 57 Set Individual automatic mode bb C is selected. Y – Tap Adjust air distribution (see D). Z

53 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?

B – Tap the required type of climate control (adjust C strength of the air flow, see E). – Tap Adjust footwell temperature (see F). D E Switch air conditioning on and off in the entire Tap G. > p. 57 vehicle F > G Switch Eco mode on and off Tap H. p. 60 H Switch cooling function on and off Tap I. > p. 59 I Switch upper ventilation panel on and off bb C is selected. > p. 58 J Tap J. K Change air flow direction bb C is selected. > p. 57 L Tap K and move the selected air vent. M N Center console operating panel

O > Please see chapter "Center console control pan- P el" on page 76. Q R S T U V

W Fig. 17: Brief overview of the center console operating panel X Y Z

54 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A B Defrost windshield Tap the A softkey. > p. 62 C Switch on heated rear window/door mirror heating Tap the B softkey. > p. 62 D Show/hide Air conditioning menu in the central Tap the C softkey. – E display F Switch air-recirculation mode on and off manually Tap the D softkey. > p. 61 G

Switch maximum cooling output on and off - A/C Tap the E softkey. > p. 59 H MAX mode I

Switch on automatic mode Tap the F softkey in the middle. > p. 57 J K > p. 59 Set temperature Tap or swipe the G softkey up (warmer) or down L (colder). M > p. 59 Set air flow manually Tap or swipe the F softkey up (more) or down N (less). O

Use air conditioning settings for the entire vehicle Tap the H softkey. > p. 61 P – SYNC mode Q R S T U V W X Y Z

55 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

A Rear passenger touch screen (depending on equipment) B C D E F G H I J

K Fig. 18: Brief overview of rear passenger touch screen L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? M Set temperature > p. 59 N Tap A up (warmer) or down (colder). O > p. 59 Set air flow manually Tap B up (more) or down (less). P Switch rear air conditioning system on and Tap C. – Q off R Adjust the air distribution Tap D. > p. 60 S T Call up settings Tap E. – U Air conditioning Advanced distribution and air flow fully automatically in auto- The air conditioning system can be operated via the V Climate Control (2/4-zone automatic mode. central display, the Center Console control unit and W Automatic mode for a particular function is deacti- the rear display (depending on the equipment). matic air conditioning) vated as soon as the settings for this function are The air-conditioning system operates most effec- X Depending on various factors like the vehicle interior adjusted manually. In such cases, automatic air con- tively with the windows closed. Y temperature, sunlight or air quality, the air condi- ditioning will continue to regulate functions that If heat builds up in the vehicle interior: tioning system will adjust the temperature, air have not been changed manually. e Briefly air the interior by opening the windows. Z

56 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

Depending on the outside temperature and humid- Switching air conditioning on and Central display A ity, condensation may drip from under the vehicle. off This is quite normal and is not a defect. 1. e A/C e Ventilation e Individual B If the charge in the high-voltage battery is below Switching air conditioning on and off in the 2. Select the desired settings. C 10%, air conditioning functions will first be re- entire vehicle stricted then switched off. The front and rear climate zones can be switched to D The cooling feature switches off automatically at Central display automatic mode independently of each another. E temperatures below approx. 36 °F (2 °C) and cannot e e A/C e Ventilation e OFF Center console operating panel be switched on, even manually. F The OFF display appears on the center console Temporarily setting the temperature to a lower or e Tap the softkey for the required climate G operating unit and the touch display in the rear, higher value does not cool or heat the vehicle interior zone on the center console control panel or on the fresh air supply is interrupted and air con- to the desired temperature more quickly. the rear passenger touch screen. H ditioning is switched off. When automatic mode is active, the soft- I Enabling fresh-air intake Reducing the air flow to the rear air-conditioned key lights up blue. Air flow and distribution are J e Keep the fresh-air intake between the wind- areas or switching the rear air conditioning system automatically controlled. shield and the hood free from snow, ice and off does not improve passenger comfort in the front If necessary, the automatic system can be controlled K leaves. air-conditioned areas. manually. The manual setting is retained until you L 2-zone air conditioning Switching on automatic mode tap the relevant softkey again or the softkey. M The temperature, air flow, air distribution and type of N air conditioning can be set individually for the left Selecting preconfigured automatic modes Adjusting front air vents and right air-conditioned areas. The air outlets in the There are two preconfigured automatic modes. There are air vents on the dashboard and in the front O rear can be manually opened and closed. The direc- and rear center console. In the preconfigured auto- – Diffused: Draught-free setting with low air flow. P tion of the air flow can also be adjusted. – Focused: Stronger ventilation in the passenger matic modes Diffused and Focused, the opening of compartment. The air flow is clearly noticeable. the air vents and the air flow direction are controlled Q 4-zone air conditioning automatically. In the automatic mode Individual, au- The temperature, air flow, air distribution and type of Central display tomatic control for each climate zone can be regu- R air conditioning control can be set individually for lated manually in the central display as required. S 1. e A/C e Ventilation the front left, front right, rear left and rear right air- Risk of damage to air NOTICE T conditioned areas. In addition, the temperature can 2. Select the desired automatic mode for the rel- vents be customized individually in the front footwells as evant climate zone. U well. e Do not insert objects (e.g. cellphone cradle, air V Configuring automatic mode Individual freshener) into the air vents. e Only adjust the electric air vents via the touch – Individual: Temperature, air quantity and air dis- W displays. tribution can be adjusted individually. e Do not impede the electrical adjustment of the X air vents (e.g. by blocking the vanes). Y Z

57 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

A Opening and closing front air vents The selected air vent is now blue. Switching the upper ventilation panel on and off B 3. Adjust the air vent in the desired direction. C The air vents are automatically adjusted to the selected position by tapping anywhere in the vehicle D interior display. E F Adjusting air distribution Fig. 19: Opening and closing front air vents G Adjusting front air distribution Central display H Central display 1. e A/C e Ventilation e Individual I The adjustable air vents are shown by a white 1. e A/C e Ventilation e Individual e J circle in the central display. 2. Select the air distribution for the relevant air- K 2. Select the desired air vent. conditioned area: The slider (slide control) for adjusting the air L The air flows toward the windshield and vent is displayed. the side windows. M The selected air vent is now blue. The air flows from the center air vent N 3. Adjust the opening on the air vent using the and the side vent. Fig. 21: Upper ventilation panel slider (slide control). The air flows to the footwell. O The ventilation panel on top of the dashboard provides additional ventilation for the vehicle interior. P Changing front air flow direction The ventilation panel can be activated or deactivated Q separately in automatic mode Individual. The air- conditioning system regulates the air flow R automatically. S Central display T e e A/C e Ventilation e Individual e U The icon is blue when the function is switched on. V Fig. 20: Changing front air flow direction Central display In pre-configured automatic modes Diffused and W Focused, the ventilation panel above the dashboard X 1. e A/C e Ventilation e Individual is switched on automatically. The adjustable air vents are shown by a white Y circle in the central display. Z 2. Select the desired air vent. 58 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

Setting the climate style in the Switching maximum cooling out- Increasing and reducing the temperature A front put on/off - A/C MAX mode Center console control panel or touch display in the B The strength of the air flow can be individually ad- In A/C MAX mode, the vehicle interior is cooled at rear justed relative to the overall interior temperature for maximum power. C e Press or swipe the softkey for the relevant air- the front air-conditioned areas. D Center console control panel conditioning zone up (warmer) or down Central display e Touch the A/C MAX softkey. (colder). E 1. e A/C e Ventilation e Individual e When A/C MAX mode is active, the soft- The selected temperature is indicated on the F key lights up blue. The air conditioning system display for the relevant air-conditioned area. 2. Select the climate style for the desired air- works at maximum cooling output. G conditioning area. If LO or HI appears on the display, the system is operating at maximum cooling (LO) or heating (HI) H Setting the temperature power. Automatic mode is switched off. I Setting footwell temperature (de- The temperature can be adjusted between J pending on equipment) 60 °F (16 °C) and 85 °F (29.5 °C). Recommendation: Setting the air flow The footwell temperature can be individually ad- 72 °F (22 °C). K justed relative to the overall interior temperature for Temporarily setting the temperature to a lower or L the front air-conditioned areas. higher value does not cool or heat the vehicle interior M Central display to the desired temperature more quickly. N 1. e A/C e Ventilation e Individual e O 2. Select the desired footwell temperature for the relevant air-conditioned area. P Fig. 24: Setting the air flow in front Q Switching the cooling function on R and off S The cooling function cools and dries the air. Fig. 22: Setting the temperature in front T In automatic mode, the cooling function is activated by default. The cooling output is automatically U controlled. V Central display W e e A/C e Ventilation e A/C Fig. 25: Setting the air flow in the rear X The icon is blue when the function is switched on. Y

Fig. 23: Setting temperature in the rear Z 59 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

A Increasing and reducing the air flow Adjusting rear air vents (depend- Setting up air distribution in the B Center console control panel or touch display in the ing on the equipment) rear (depending on the rear Risk of damage to air equipment) C NOTICE e Press or swipe the softkey for the relevant air- vents Tap display in the rear D conditioning zone up (more) or down e Do not insert objects (e.g. cellphone cradle, air 1. A/C e E (less). freshener) into the air vents. 2. Select the air distribution for the relevant air- F The selected air flow is shown on the display as e Only adjust the electric air vents via the touch conditioned area: a white arc. The longer the arc, the more air is displays. The air flows from the central vents. G flowing into the vehicle interior. e Do not impede the electrical adjustment of the air vents (e.g. by blocking the vanes). The air flows to the footwell. H Pressing the softkey switches back to automatic I mode. If the air flow in all air-conditioned areas has been Opening and closing rear air vents Adjusting the climate style in the J reduced so much that OFF appears on the air con- Touch display in the rear rear (depending on the K ditioning displays, the outside-air supply is interrup- equipment) ted and the air conditioning switched off. 1. A/C L The strength of the air flow can be individually ad- Deactivating OFF mode in the rear from the front The adjustable air vents are represented by a justed relative to the overall interior temperature for M With 4-zone air conditioning, OFF mode can be de- white cross on the touch display in the rear. the rear air-conditioned areas. activated using the central display in the dashboard. 2. Select the desired air vent. N > Please see chapter "Set climate zones in the rear Touch display in the rear O from the front" on page 61. The slider (slide control) for adjusting the air vent is displayed. 1. A/C e The SYNC function does not deactivate OFF mode in P the rear. The selected air vent is now blue. 2. Select the climate style for the desired air- Q Impaired vision with air 3. Adjust the opening on the air vent using the conditioning area. WARNING flow OFF slider (slide control). R S The windows can mist up if the air flow setting is Switching Eco mode on and off OFF. Changing the air flow direction in the rear When Eco mode is switched on, the air conditioning T e To increase the air flow again, press the Touch display in the rear system operates particularly energy efficiently. U softkey up or switch on automatic mode again. When the rear seat is unoccupied, the air condition- 1. A/C ing in the rear is switched off. The level of comfort in V The adjustable air vents are represented by a the vehicle may be reduced in order to improve the white cross on the touch display in the rear. W range (e.g. the passenger compartment may take 2. Select the desired air vent. longer to heat up or cool down). X The selected air vent is now blue. If the RANGE driving program was selected, ECO PLUS mode can be switched on. Passenger com- Y 3. Adjust the air vent in the desired direction. partment ventilation is active to a limited extent in Z ECO PLUS mode. All other air conditioning functions

60 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning) are significantly reduced or switched off and cannot The icon is blue when the function is switched Using air-conditioning settings for A be selected in order to optimize energy consump- on. entire vehicle – SYNC mode tion. Selecting another function ends ECO PLUS B mode and switches to ECO mode. The configured Switching air-recirculation mode Turning the SYNC operation on and off on the C settings are retained. This does not affect the center console section RANGE driving program. on and off manually D > Please see chapter "Drive mode" on page 105. e Touch the SYNC softkey. Impaired vision in man- E WARNING When the SYNC operation is turned on, the ual recirculation mode SYNC softkey lights up blue. Only the driver's F display stays on. The other climate zones are Central display In prolonged manual air-recirculation mode, the G windows may mist up. As no fresh air is supplied, the set using the driver values. H e e A/C e Ventilation e ECO driver can get tired and become less attentive. To shut off the SYNC operation, press the e Do not switch on manual air-recirculation mode SYNC softkey again. I for an extended period. J Switching the ionizer on and off Recommended air-conditioning settings for bb Vehicles with an ionizer. lone drivers K In regions with poor air quality – such as in large Switching on air-recirculation mode manually e For optimum interior comfort, switch on SYNC L cities – the ionizer can help provide better air quality Center console control panel operation on the center console section. in the vehicle interior. SYNC lights up blue. M Ionization itself does not produce any odor. e Touch the softkey. N Central display When the function is switched on, the softkey lights up blue. Storing A/C settings O The selected climate setting can be actively stored e e e e A/C Air quality on the vehicle key. P The icon is blue when the function is switched Switching off air-recirculation mode manually > Please see chapter "Personal settings" on on. Q Center console control panel page 168. R Switching automatic air-recircu- e Touch the softkey. Set climate zones in the rear from S – or – lation mode on and off Touch the softkey. the front T In automatic air-recirculation mode, the outside air With the four-zone climate control system, the cli- supply is regulated depending on the air quality. At When the function is switched off, the mate zones in the rear can be set using the central U outside temperatures below approx. 41 °F (5 °C), softkey lights up white. display. V air-recirculation mode is automatically deactivated to prevent the windows from misting. 1. e A/C e REAR W Central display 2. Change to the desired setting. X Y e e A/C e Air quality e Z

61 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

A Defrosting windshield Switching the heated rear screen heating intelligently according to the outside tem- and door mirror heating on and off peratures. This is independent of whether precool/ B heat was activated via a Timer, the vehicle key, the C Porsche Connect App or by selecting the Precool/h. function on the central display. Precool/heat works D for a maximum of 60 minutes. When activated by a E timer, precool/heat starts 50 minutes before the desired departure time, at the earliest, and ends 10 F minutes after departure, at the latest. G The precool/heat function enables climate control (depending on equipment) for: H – the passenger compartment, I Fig. 26: Defrosting windshield – the door mirrors, Fig. 27: Softkey rear window / exterior mirror heating – the rear window, J Switching defroster mode on – the seats, K e Tap the softkey . Switching on heated rear screen and door – the steering wheel. mirror heating L The softkey lights up orange. This is the case regardless of whether or not the ve- The air flows toward the windshield and the front e Press the softkey . hicle plug is connected. M side windows. The softkey lights up orange. The available range is reduced when precooling/ N The windshield is demisted/defrosted as quickly Depending on the outside temperature, the heated heating is switched on. as possible. rear screen/door mirror heating switches off auto- > Please see chapter "Charging" on page 86. O In order to achieve maximum the defrosting effect, matically after approx. 5 to 20 minutes. the air is channeled exclusively to the windshield. P Information 4-zone automatic air conditioning: The control pan- Switching off heated rear screen and door Q el for the air conditioning system in the rear is mirror heating If precool/heat was switched on using a timer, the disabled. door mirrors and rear window are automatically R e Press the softkey . heated at low temperatures to de-ice the windows The softkey lights up white. S Switching defroster mode off and mirror glass. T e Tap the softkey . – or – Using precool/heat timer and Precooling/heating can also be programmed and U switched on using the Porsche Connect App. Tap the softkey . precooling/heating > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" of the on- V When the function is switched off, the softkey bb High-voltage battery is sufficiently charged (at least 25%). board Owner's Manual. W lights up white. bb Vehicle turned off. X The precool/heat function controls the air flow and Y air distribution automatically. The temperature can be adjusted individually. To provide the greatest Z possible comfort, the vehicle regulates precooling/

62 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

Switching on precooling/heating Switching off precooling/heating > Please see chapter "Air conditioning Advanced A Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air condi- Central display Central display tioning)" on page 53. B 1. e A/C e Precool/h. 1. e A/C e Precool/h. C Deactivating the precool/heat timer 2. Tap Precool/heat. 2. Tap Precool/heat. D Central display Precooling/heating switches off automatically after This also stops precooling/heating initiated by a E precool/heat timer. e e 60 minutes at the latest when the vehicle is ready to 1. A/C Precool/h. F drive or when the vehicle is stationary. Programming and activating precooling/ 2. Tap Manage timer. G Center console control panel heating via a precool/heat timer 3. Deactivate the desired timer. H The interior temperature can be precooled/heated – or – by precool/heat right up to the departure time using Tap and deactivate the Precool/heat option. I the precool/heat timer. This does not stop precooling/heating that has al- J Each precool/heat timer can be set to start once ready started. (single timer) or at regular intervals (recurring timer). K Central display Setting precooling/heating individually L Setting air conditioning zones on the central display 1. e A/C e Precool/h. M 2. Set the air conditioning zones, temperature and 1. e A/C e Precool/h. N seat activation individually. 2. Climate zones O Fig. 28: Activating preconditioning The configured settings are adopted for all timers. 3. Activate the desired air conditioning settings. P 1. Touch the softkey. 3. Tap Manage timer. The vehicle seats are heated or ventilated (depend- Q 2. Touch the A softkey. ing on equipment). The vehicle automatically regu- R For preconditioning, the most recent precool/heat 4. Tap and activate Precool/heat in Timer lates the settings for the vehicle seats, depending on settings are used. Settings. the outside temperature. If driver seat heating is ac- S tive, the steering wheel will also be heated (depend- 5. Tap Date and departure time and set the days T ing on equipment). Information or date and time of the desired departure time. Setting the target temperature on the central U 6. Tap Date and departure time then Timer If precool/heat is switched on or preconditioning is display V started during charging, full precool/heat power is Settings to close. available irrespective of the charging power. 7. Activate the desired timer entry in Timer. 1. e A/C e Precool/h. W During active charging with a very low charging X power, precool/heat can cause the high-voltage The selected Precool/heat function is maintained for 2. Tap Temperature. battery to discharge. up to 10 minutes after the set air conditioning peri- 3. Set the temperature you want using the slider. Y od. Automatic mode can be adapted after operational readiness has been established. Z 63 Air conditioning Advanced Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air conditioning)

A During precooling/heating, the vehicle regulates the interior temperature to the set target B temperature. C Setting Precool/heat with remote unlocking on the D central display E 1. e A/C e Precool/h. F 2. Activate Precool/heat at remote door release. G When you unlock the vehicle, 5-minute pre- H cooling/heating starts. I This function can be activated twice per stationary phase when unlocking the vehicle to prevent inad- J vertent activation. K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

64 Alarm System

Alarm System Switching off the alarm system Preventing theft A when the alarm has been Before leaving the vehicle, always: B Operating principle triggered e Close all windows. This will also prevent a false The alarm system monitors the following alarm alarm by the passenger compartment monitoring C contacts: e Press the button on the vehicle key. system. D – Alarm contacts in the doors, hood, and trunk – or – e Press the P button to activate the parking lock of E – Passenger compartment monitoring system: e Press the power button and turn on the vehicle. the drive and parking brake. movement in the vehicle interior with the vehicle e Close the glove compartment. F locked, such as attempted theft with a window Deactivating interior monitoring e Close all storage compartments. G broken and inclination sensor e Remove valuables, car papers, phone and house – Tilt sensor: tilting of vehicle (e.g. during a tow- keys from the vehicle. If people or animals are remaining in the vehicle, the H away attempt) e Close the doors, hood and trunk lid. interior monitoring system and inclination sensor I – Diagnostic socket can be deactivated when locking the vehicle. e Lock the vehicle. > Please see chapter "Central Locking" on page 79. J Switching the alarm system on/ Immobilizer K off Alarm system function display Every vehicle key contains a transponder (electronic component) with a stored code. L e The alarm system is activated after approx. 30 The lock status is indicated by the light indicators in seconds when the vehicle is locked. the front doors flashing at different frequencies. An authorized vehicle key is required in order to de- M activate the immobilizer and make the vehicle ready e The alarm system is deactivated when the ve- N hicle is unlocked. Alarm system is activated for operation. The central display can also be used to set whether The light indicators flash rapidly when the vehicle is O interior monitoring and the tilt sensor functions are being locked, then flash in normal mode. P to remain shut off once the vehicle is locked. The alarm system is activated and the pas- Q e e Settings e Vehicle e Vehicle locking senger compartment monitoring system and R systems e Interior monitoring inclination sensor are deactivated The light indicators flash rapidly when the vehicle is S Information being locked, go out for 28 seconds and then flash in T normal mode. If the vehicle is unlocked using the emergency key in U the door lock, the power switch must be pressed Faults in the central locking system and alarm V within 15 seconds after the door is opened to pre- system vent the alarm system from being triggered. During locking of the vehicle, the light indicators W The time it takes to trigger the alarm system differs flash rapidly, light up continuously for 28 seconds from country to country. X and then flash in normal mode. Y Z

65 Brake Fluid

A Brake Fluid 1. Remove plastic cover in front luggage e Do not change the brake fluid yourself. compartment. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- B Responding to a warning message > Please see chapter "Installing and removing ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts C If the brake fluid level is too low, the warning light the plastic cover in the front luggage com- and tools. (USA: , Canada: ) appears in the instru- partment" on page 156. D > ment cluster and a warning message is displayed. If 2. Read off the brake fluid level on the brake fluid Please see chapter "Safety and Driving Pleasure" E the warning light comes on and more force must be reservoir. The fluid level must always be between on page 6. the MIN and MAX markings. F applied to the pedal, this may indicate a fault in the brake system. Have the brake fluid topped up if the brake fluid Service status G e Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and do not level is below the MIN marking: Visit an author- For further information on the service status (avail- continue driving. ized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an ability dependent on country): H authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- > Please see chapter "Smart Service" of the on- technicians and the necessary parts and tools. I ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they board Owner's Manual. 3. Install plastic cover in front luggage J have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. compartment. K > Please see chapter "Warning lights and light in- > Please see chapter "Installing and removing dicators" on page 128. the plastic cover in the front luggage com- L partment" on page 156. M Checking brake fluid level N Changing the brake fluid Swallowing Brake Fluid O DANGER P Brake fluid is hazardous to your health and may be Q fatal if swallowed. R e Keep brake fluid out of children's reach. e Keep brake fluid away from pets. They can be S attracted to it should there be a spill, or to used T brake fluid left in an open container. e If brake fluid gets on your skin or into your eye, U immediately rinse the affected party of your V body with clean water for a few minutes. Then see a doctor immediately. W e Note all the information on the refill container of X the brake fluid. Y The brake fluid is regularly checked and changed as Z Fig. 29: Brake fluid reservoir part of servicing.

66 Brakes

Brakes significantly reduces friction and therefore also travel when you apply the brakes. Failure of one A braking effect. brake circuit will cause the stopping distance to B General Safety Instructions The brake discs will unavoidably start to corrode if increase. your vehicle is parked for an extended period. The C Blocked pedals brakes will tend to “judder” as a result. Brake pads and brake disks WARNING D e If braking comfort is noticeably impaired, it is The wear on the brake pads and brake disks largely Unsuitable or improperly secured floor mats can re- recommend that you have the brake system depends on the driving style and the conditions of E use and cannot therefore be expressed in terms of strict pedal travel or interfere with pedal operation. checked by experts. F The accelerator can be inadvertently actuated or the Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche mileage covered. brake pedal blocked. This can result in an unex- recommends an authorized Porsche dealer as The high performance brake system is designed to G ensure the best possible braking effect at all speeds pected increase in speed or make braking more they have trained workshop personnel and the H difficult. necessary parts and tools. and temperatures. Braking noise may occur, depending on the speed, I e Only use floor mats that are suitable for the For information on brake fluid and checking the braking force and ambient conditions (e.g, temper- vehicle. brake fluid level: ature, humidity). J e Secure floor mats properly and do not place them > Please see chapter "Brake Fluid" on page 66. e Have the brake system inspected at the intervals K loosely on the floor. With correctly adjusted brakes and a correctly recommended in your Maintenance Booklet. e Do not lay several floor mats on top of each L working brake system, the pedal travel to the point other. of brake application (start of brake pressure build- Bedding in and cleaning the brakes M e Ensure that the floor mats are securely fitted up) should not be longer than 10 mm. The vehicle has a braking recuperation system that again after they have been removed, e.g. for N e Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this feeds most of the braking energy back into the high- cleaning. value, have the brake system checked. Visit an voltage battery. In order to bed in the wheel brake, O authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends the recuperation system is deactivated briefly on Water film on brake P WARNING an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have new vehicles or after changing the brake pads and discs trained technicians and the necessary parts and this reduces the range. To assist in cleaning the Q In case of heavy rain, water crossing or after a car tools. brakes, the recuperation system is deactivated for a R wash, the braking action may be delayed and in- short time after standstill times of more than 6 creased foot pressure may be required. Operating principle hours. The recuperation system is activated again S automatically afterwards. e Check the brakes after washing the vehicle. T Brake system function e For this reason, keep further back from the ve- Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic Composite Porsche sports cars are equipped with a power as- U hicle in front and “dry” the brakes by applying Brake (PCCB) them at intervals. Make sure that the traffic be- sisted hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disk Even though the brake disks consist of alloyed gray V hind you is not affected. brakes at the front and rear. Both circuits function independently. One brake cir- cast iron, they will unavoidably start to corrode if the W car is parked for an extended period. The brakes will Reduced braking action cuit operates the front left and rear right wheel and X WARNING the other operates the front right and rear left wheel. tend to rub as a result. The nature, extent and effects of corrosion depend on the amount of time the If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still op- Y vehicle was parked, whether road salt or grit was After a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a erate. However, you will notice an increased pedal coating may form on the brake discs and pads that Z 67 Brakes

A spread and whether grease-dissolving agents were Activating the emergency braking Brake system warning light used in car washes. B function The functionality of the brake system warning light If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, it is Severe deceleration can be checked by switching the vehicle on with the C recommended having the brake system checked by WARNING help of the Power button and verifying that the experts at an authorized Porsche dealer. D warning light comes on. Emergency braking results in a very high braking Brake warning light USA Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) E force. This can endanger any following traffic and Brake warning light Canada The values quoted by Porsche are based on normal F control over the vehicle may be lost. use in line with general traffic conditions. Wear in- e Only use the emergency braking function in an The warning light in the instrument panel lights up. A message will be displayed on the multi-function G creases significantly if the vehicle is used on race emergency. display of the instrument panel if the brake fluid level tracks or if a forceful driving style is adopted. e Do not use the emergency braking function when H e is too low, or (if the brake pedal travel has increased) Before driving your vehicle in this way (e.g. on driving normally. I race tracks), ask an authorized Porsche dealer one of the two brake circuits has failed. A greater about currently applicable guidelines. braking pressure will be required, stopping distances J In the event of failure of the conventional brakes, the vehicle can be decelerated significantly and brought will be longer and the braking behavior will change, K Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB) to a stop using the electric parking brake. particularly in curves. The brake disk friction surface of PSCB brakes has a L e Press and hold button P. specific look and cannot be compared with a stand- The brake warning light (USA: /Canada: M ard brake disk. When a vehicle is driven normally ) starts flashing. according to the prevailing traffic situation, a shiny N To deactivate the emergency braking function: chrome-like friction surface covered with fine cracks e Release button P. O appears. Wear, cracks and darkening of the shiny silver friction surface increase when the vehicle is P driven in this way. These visual changes have no Responding to warning symbols Q relevant effect on braking and often just disappear partially after driving several thousand kilometers. Brake wear warning light R Owing to the hard-coated brake disk, a longer bed- Brake wear warning light USA S ding-in period of the PSCB must be taken into account, during which a technically insignificant Brake wear warning light Canada T friction noise may occur. U e Before driving your vehicle in this way (e.g. on A warning message is displayed to indicate that the race tracks), ask an authorized Porsche dealer brake pads are reaching their wear limit. V about currently applicable guidelines. > Please see chapter "Warning and information W messages" on page 244. Service status e Have the brake pads replaced immediately. Visit X For further information on the service status (avail- an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recom- Y ability dependent on country): mends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they > Please see chapter "Smart Service" of the on- have trained technicians and the necessary parts Z board Owner's Manual. and tools. 68 Car Care

Car Care Regular and expert car care helps maintain the value cleaning the vehicle. A of your vehicle and can be a prerequisite for making e Follow the operating instructions provided by the B General care instructions claims under the vehicle warranty. equipment manufacturer. Porsche recommends car care products from Por- Water film on brake e Always observe a minimum distance of C WARNING sche Tequipment. disks 20 in. (50 cm) during cleaning. D e Please read the application instructions on the e Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of the After washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be packaging of the car care product. aforementioned components. E delayed and increased pressure may be required. e Store car care products out of the reach of e Never point the cleaning jet directly into open- F e Check the brakes after washing the vehicle. children. ings. Cover the openings before washing. e Allow a greater braking distance from the vehicle e Dispose of car care products in the correct e Do not use high-pressure cleaners or steam G in front and "dry" the brakes by applying them at manner. cleaners to clean decorative films. H intervals. Make sure that this does not affect the To ensure that the condition of the vehicle is e Never use high-pressure cleaning equipment or traffic behind you. checked professionally and the warranty is retained steam cleaners with round-jet nozzles. A high- I for the full period: Contact an authorized Porsche pressure cleaning device or steam cleaner fitted J Chemical cleaners dealer. The dealer will prepare a condition report and WARNING with a round-jet nozzle will damage your vehicle. will certify the level of care of the vehicle. Tires are particularly susceptible to damage. K Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your health. NOTICE L Most chemical cleaners are concentrates which re- High-voltage battery care M quire dilution. High concentrations might cause High-pressure cleaning equipment or steam N problems ranging from irritation to serious injury. cleaners may damage the following components: General charging and care instructions e Keep cleaning agents out of the reach of – Tires The high-voltage battery is subject to aging and O children. – Logos, emblems, decorative films wear and tear brought about by a physical and P e Observe all caution labels. – Painted surfaces chemical process. This reduces the high-voltage e Always read the directions on the container be- – Charge port battery’s capacity during its lifecycle, which, along Q fore using any product. These directions may – Electrical components (e.g. high-voltage battery) with usage and ambient conditions, diminishes the R contain information necessary to avoid personal and plug connections maximum range available and increases charging injury. – ParkAssist sensors times the older the battery gets. S e Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish – (Radar) sensors of the Adaptive Cruise Control Adhering to the following measures can reduce the T remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They (ACC) and other assistance systems aging and wear and tear of the high-voltage battery: e U may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other – Cameras When charging, make sure that the ambient temperature for the vehicle is between approx. ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well – Wiper blades V ventilated area. -4 °F (-20 °C) and +86 °F (+30 °C) where No vehicle is absolutely leak-proof. Water can e Do not clean the underside of the chassis, fend- possible. W sometimes leak into the vehicle interior when ers, wheel covers, etc. without protecting your e Whenever possible, do not expose the vehicle to X hands and arms as you may cut yourself on prolonged temperatures in excess of sharp-edged metal parts. Y Z

69 Car Care

A 86 °F (30 °C), such as by parking it in direct left standing. You can use the profile function in purpose to ensure that soot, grease, oil, and sunlight for long periods. such cases, for example. heavy metals do not harm the environment. B e At ambient temperatures above 86 °F (30 °C), e Make sure that the vehicle is not permanently e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or if C connect the vehicle to the power grid following exposed to direct sunlight. We recommend that the bodywork is hot. operation and charge the high-voltage battery you park the vehicle in a roofed garage. e D If washing by hand, use a car shampoo, plenty of with alternating current (AC) to a maximum If it is not possible to establish a permanent con- water and a soft sponge or washing brush. E charge state of 85%. Use the timer function. nection between the vehicle and power grid: e Start washing the vehicle by wetting the paint- e At ambient temperatures exceeding e Charge the high-voltage battery to 50% prior to work thoroughly and rinsing off any heavy dirt. F 95 °F (35 °C), avoid using the "Range" drive leaving it standing. e After washing the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with G mode immediately after charging with direct e Check the battery every three months and re- water, and rub with a chamois leather. When current (DC) over 150 kW in order to maximize H charge if necessary to ensure that it never falls wiping with the chamois leather, do not use the cooling of the high-voltage battery. below 20%. same leather as you do for cleaning the windows. I e Preconditioning of the high-voltage battery e Make sure that the ambient temperature for the shortens the charging time. Particularly during Cleaning in the car wash J vehicle is between approx. 32 °F (0 °C) and 68 °F long-distance driving, initiate the charging proc- (20 °C). K ess for the high-voltage battery using the e Avoid using the Porsche Connect smartphone NOTICE Charging Planner and use the timer or profile L app. Establishing a connection between the app function to charge with alternating current (AC) and the vehicle activates the high-voltage sys- Optional add-on parts or parts that project beyond M if possible. tem, thereby discharging the high-voltage and the contours of the vehicle may be damaged in car e Use the timer or profile function to set the high- 12-volt battery. washes. N voltage battery to charge to a maximum 80% for e Before using an automatic car wash, consult the the vehicle’s daily use, excluding long-distance O car wash operator. trips. Washing your vehicle P e When the charge state is below 5%, connect the The best way to protect your vehicle against dam- vehicle to the power grid following operation and aging environmental effects is regular washing and Q Hazard What should be charge the high-voltage battery. preservation. The longer grit, road and industrial dust, insect residue, bird excrement, tree secretion observed? R e If required, a battery charge of 100% can be (e.g. resin, pollen), etc. remain on the vehicle, the programmed before starting long journeys. e S more harmful their effect. No vehicle is absolutely Windshield wipers can Switch windshield airtight. Water can sometimes leak into the vehicle start to move and be- wipers off. T Instructions if leaving the vehicle parked for interior when cleaning the vehicle. come damaged in the e Do not operate the extended periods U To ensure your car is cleaned thoroughly and the car wash. headlight cleaning For stationary periods of more than two weeks: system in car V paintwork washed gently, please observe the fol- e Do not leave the vehicle with a discharged high- lowing points: washes. W voltage battery; instead, leave it permanently e Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly at Unintended opening of e Lock vehicle connected to the power grid for trickle charging. the end of the gritting season at the latest. X e the tailgate Make sure that the high-voltage battery is be- e Only wash the vehicle in areas intended for this Y tween 20% and 50% charged while the vehicle is Z

70 Car Care

Hazard What should be NOTICE Caring for wiper blades A observed? NOTICE B The matt effect of components may be lost if not e Fold in door Damage to exterior cared for properly. C parts mirrors. The graphite coating on the wiper blades can be e Do not treat matt-effect bodywork sections with D e Retract extended damaged if they are not cleaned properly. preservatives or polishes. spoilers. e Ensure that the cleaning jet does not strike the E e Completely remove wiper blades. F roof transport Preserving paintwork e Do not clean wiper blades with a cloth or sponge. system. The paint surface will dull over time due to weath- e Clean wiper blades with clear water only. G e Close the tailgate. ering and should therefore be regularly protected H e Lock the vehicle. with a paint preservative after washing the vehicle. Windshield wiper blades in perfect condition are vi- This keeps the paint shiny and elastic, and prevents tal for ensuring a clear view. I e Check the dimen- Damage to wheels dirt from adhering to the paint surface and industrial e Clean the windshield regularly with a window sions of the car J dust from penetrating the paint. cleaner, particularly after going through a wash guide rail. carwash. K The wider the e If extremely dirty (e.g. due to insect residues), Polishing paintwork L wheel rim and the clean the windshield using a sponge or cloth. lower the tire Paint polish should only be used to clean the paintwork when the original shine can no longer be ob- The wiper blades should be replaced twice per year M height, the greater (before and after the cold season) or if wiper per- the risk of damage. tained using preservatives. N Headlights must not be polished. formance deteriorates or the wipers are damaged. O Scratches on wheels e Do not clean with with high-gloss or silk- the wheel-washing Removing marks Cleaning windows P gloss finish brushes in the car Remove tar spatters, traces of oil, insects, etc. as wash. soon as possible using an insect remover and wash Cleaning the windshield, side windows and Q rear window the area carefully afterwards as they discolor the R paint if left to work on it over time. e Clean all windows regularly, inside and out, using Paint care a window cleaning agent. S Repairing paint damage e Do not dry the windows with the same chamois NOTICE T Have minor paint damage (cracks, scratches or leather you use for the painted surfaces. Residue stone chips) repaired immediately, before corrosion from preservatives could impair visibility. U Dust particles on painted surfaces can damage the begins. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche e Remove insect residues with insect remover. V paintwork if not properly dealt with. recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they e Do not rub dust with a dry cloth. have trained technicians and the necessary parts W and tools. X If traces of corrosion have already formed, these must be thoroughly removed. An anti-corrosion pri- Y mer must then be applied to these spots, followed Z by top-coat paint. 71 Car Care

A Cleaning the panoramic sunroof Cleaning decorative films Wheel care e Regularly dry-dust the window from inside using Cleaning agent film on B WARNING a clean and soft towel. NOTICE the brake disks C e In case of stubborn dirt, clean the window with a Risk of damage through detachment of the decora- If cleaning agent (e.g. wheel cleaning agents) comes D window cleaner, rinse with clear water and then dry using a clean and soft towel. tive films during cleaning. into contact with the brake disks, the film that forms on the brake disks may impair braking performance. E e Do not use polish or hot wax. Coating on the front side windows e Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into F e Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment or The front side windows have a water-repellent (hy- steam cleaners. contact with the brake disks. G drophobic) coating, which reduces soiling of the e Use a soft sponge, pH-neutral soap and plenty of e If cleaning agents do come into contact with the H windows. This coating is subject to natural wear and water. brake disks, clean the brake disks thoroughly can be renewed. with a strong jet of water. I e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- e Paying attention to any traffic behind you, dry J ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they Cleaning headlights, lights, plastic the brake disks by applying the brake. have trained technicians and the necessary parts K and tools. components and surfaces, sen- Metal particles (e.g. brass or copper in brake dust) sors and cameras must not remain too long on alloy wheels. Contact L corrosion can cause pitting. Repairing the underbody NOTICE M Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or incorrect protection pH value, as are commonly used for other metals, as N The underside of your vehicle is permanently pro- Cleaning agents can get into the controls or well as mechanical equipment and products, will O tected against chemical and mechanical influences. switches, for example, and cause damage. Unsuit- damage the surface and are therefore unsuitable. Damage to this protective coating cannot be ex- able cleaning agents may damage plastic surfaces. e Only use acid-free cleaners for alloy wheels (pH P cluded in day-to-day driving. e Do not spray water and interior window cleaner value between 4 and 10). Products with the in- Q e Porsche recommends having the underside of directly onto the plastic components in the ve- correct pH value can destroy the surface of the the vehicle inspected at regular intervals by an hicle interior. wheels. R authorized Porsche dealer and the protective e Use only clean water and a little dishwashing e If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks S coating restored as necessary. Contact an au- liquid or interior window cleaner to clean head- with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels are thorized Porsche dealer. lights, lights, plastic components and surfaces, exposed to grit or industrial dust, weekly clean- T radar sensors for assistance systems and vehicle ing is necessary. U cameras. Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth for this purpose. Cleaning the door, hood, and win- V e Headlights must not be polished. dow seals and cover gaskets W e Only clean the center console with touch-sensi- tive buttons using a microfiber cloth. X NOTICE e Never use other chemical cleaning agents or Y solvents. The lubricant coating on the inner door seals may be Z damaged by unsuitable cleaning agents and care

72 Car Care products. Cleaning seats with seat ventilation braking difficult. A e Do not use chemical cleaning agents or solvents. Rain water or moisture can stain the perforated e Only use floor mats that are suitable for the B e Do not use care products. leather of the seats. vehicle. e Secure the floor mats properly and do not lay C To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please Removing water and moisture stains bb Seat heating and seat ventilation is switched off. them loosely. D observe the following: e Do not lay several floor mats on top of each bb There is no direct sunlight. e Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt and grit) other. E 1. Blot the entire seat and backrest surface using a from all seals regularly using warm soapy water. e Ensure that the floor mats are securely fitted clean, absorbent sponge and distilled water. F e If there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door again after they have been removed, e.g. for Make sure that perforated leather does not get seals and lid and flap seals from freezing using a cleaning. G suitable care product. wet on its reverse side. 2. Allow the seat covering to dry completely at To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please H Leather care room temperature out of direct sunlight. Do not observe the following: I switch on the seat heating and seat ventilation to e Clean using a vacuum cleaner or a brush that is NOTICE do this. not too soft. J 3. Once dry, wipe the seat covering with a dry, lint- e Remove heavy dirt and stains using a stain K The leather may become damaged by the use of free cloth. remover. unsuitable cleaning agents and care products, and Porsche recommends car care products from L by inappropriate treatment. Cleaning the floor carpet and floor Porsche Tequipment. M e Do not use aggressive cleaners or hard cleaning mats To protect the floor carpets, the Porsche accessory program offers floor mats in the correct size with the N objects. Obstructed pedals e Make sure that perforated leather does not get WARNING corresponding anchoring capability. O wet on its reverse side. P e Remove water drops from the leather Unsuitable floor mats or floor mats that are not Cleaning airbag covers properly secured can restrict the movement of the Q immediately. Improper cleaning pedals or interfere with actuation of the pedals. The DANGER To ensure proper cleaning and care of your vehicle, accelerator pedal can be depressed unintentionally R please observe the following: or the brake pedal blocked. This can result in an un- Unsuitable cleaning and care agents can penetrate S e Clean all types of leather regularly to remove fine expected increase in the driving speed or make into the airbag system. Risk of damage to the airbag T dust using a soft, white woolen cloth, or a com- system if incorrectly handled. In the event of an ac- mercially available microfiber cloth. cident, the airbag systems may not be triggered. U e Remove heavy soiling (not water or moisture e Do not make any modifications whatsoever to stains) with a leather cleaning agent. Follow the V individual components, such as the covers of the application instructions on the containers. W Porsche recommends car care products from steering wheel, dashboard, front seats and door Porsche Tequipment. and roof frame panels. X e Do not use cleaning agents or other liquids in the e Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care Y product. area of the airbags. Z

73 Car Care

A Cleaning fabric linings e Use mild detergent for soiled seatbelts. the necessary measures, e.g. corrosion prevention, e When drying, avoid direct sunlight. care, maintenance and storage. B Fabric linings on pillars, roofliner, and sun blinds, etc. must only be cleaned using suitable cleaning agents, e Only use suitable cleaning agents. C suitable dry foam and a soft brush. e Do not tint or bleach seatbelts. The belt fabric Refrigerant D could be weakened and could therefore impair Depending on the market, the air-conditioning sys- Race-Tex care safety. tem uses refrigerant named R1234yf or R134a. If E Do not use leather care products to clean microfiber refrigerant R1234yf is used, there´s a label located F covers made of Race-Tex. For regular care, it is suf- Cleaning screens and touch on the inside of the luggage compartment lid. ficient to clean the cover with a soft brush. Strong displays Pressurised refrigerant G abrasion or rubbing when cleaning will create a last- WARNING H ing change to the surface. NOTICE e When lightly soiled, wet a soft cloth with water The air conditioning system contains pressurised I refrigerant R1234yf or R134a. or a pH neutral soap solution and wipe off the Unsuitable cleaning and care agents and incorrect J dirt. treatment can damage screens and touch displays. e The refrigerant system should only be serviced e When heavily soiled, wet a soft cloth with luke- by trained and certified technicians to insure e Do not use solvents such as mineral spirits, thin- K warm water or thinned white spirit and dab the proper and safe operation (According to SAE ners, gas or acetone; alcohol (ethanol, methanol dirt from the outside in. J2845 Technician Training for Safe Service and L or isopropyl alcohol) or abrasive agents for Steering wheels with a microfiber cover made of Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C M cleaning. Race-Tex can become more heavily soiled as a result System). e Do not spray cleaning agents or other liquids di- of permanent contact with the skin. e Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche N rectly onto screens or touch displays. The elec- e When lightly soiled, wet a soft cloth with a pH dealer, as they have trained technicians and the O tronics can be damaged irreparably if liquids leak neutral soap solution and wipe the outer rim of necessary parts and tools. in. Instead, moisten a cloth and carefully wipe the P the steering wheel with this. screen. e When heavily soiled, the outer rim of the steering Q Label for R1234yf wheel can be cleaned by rubbing/dabbing it To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please R lightly with a soft cloth and a commercially observe the following: available upholstery foam cleaner in accordance S e Screens and touch displays are susceptible to with the instructions provided by the foam scratching. From time to time, clean the screens T manufacturer. and touch displays carefully with a dry, clean and U soft cloth (microfiber cloth). Do not exert too Cleaning the seat belts much pressure on the surface when cleaning. V To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please e Remove finger prints with a slightly damp cloth W observe the following: or a mild cleaning agent. Fig. 30: Label for R1234yf X Storing the vehicle Y If you intend to store your vehicle for a prolonged period: Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. They Z will be glad to give you information and advice about 74 Car Care

Observe the safety symbols on the Label for A R1234yf B Caution C

Lubricant type D E Mobile air conditioning system (MAC) F G An authorised service technician is required in order to service the mobile air H conditioning system (MAC) I Flammable refrigerants J K Evaporator L The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall M never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. New replacement N MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842 HFO-1234yf and O R744 Design Criteria and Certification for OEM Mo- P bile Air Conditioning Evaporator and Service Replacements. Q R S T U V W X Y Z

75 Center console control panel

A Center console control panel B Brief overview of the center con- C sole control panel D This brief overview does not replace the compre- E hensive descriptions. In particular, safety messages F and warnings are not replaced by this brief overview. G H I J K L Fig. 31: Upper section of center console control panel Fig. 32: Lower section of center console control panel M What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?

N Show/hide the quick entry bar e To show or hide the quick entry bar (see A), – O simply swipe from top to bottom on the center console control panel. P – or – Q Tap (see C).

R Show quick filters (e.g. Navigation, Media, Phone, bb The quick entry bar is displayed. – S Settings, Apple CarPlay) on the central display 1. Select a desired quick filter (e.g. Phone ) by T tapping. The selected quick filter is displayed on the central U display. V Operate the air-conditioning system e Use the controls on the center console control > p. 53 W panel (see B). X Navigate back e Tap the handwriting panel (see D) to navi- – Y gate back in the central display. Z

76 Center console control panel

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A B Use remote operation e Operate the handwriting panel (see E) with > p. 78 gestures to navigate in the central display. C

Enter text or characters bb The keyboard or input field is shown on the > p. 78 D central display. E e Enter the desired text or characters in the handwriting panel (see E). F G Display the folding view e Use F. > p. 124 > p. 229 H I Display the charging view e Use G. > p. 86 J Adjust the volume e Tap / in the quick access bar or swipe – K vertically using two fingers in the handwriting L panel. M Muting: Hold down . N Call up ParkAssist > p. 164 e In the quick access bar (see H), tap . O ParkAssist is shown on the central display. P Switch off displays or shut down the PCM e In the quick access bar (see H), tap . – Q The following options are available on the central R display: – Turn off central display S – Shut down PCM T

Adjust center console control panel On the central display: – U e Tap e Setting e Center console control V panel. W X Y Z

77 Center console control panel

A Operating the center console con- C Horizontal swipe direction right to left: note the writing direction). trol panel Swipe over the handwriting panel horizon- B – To delete text or characters, swipe your fin- The central display can be operated via the center tally with one finger. Example: Scroll hori- ger from right to left (for menu languages C console control panel. The center console control zontally in the lists on the central display. with a right-to-left writing direction right to panel provides tangible feedback during controlling. D left: according to the writing direction). D Vertical swipe (scrolling and switching) E NOTICE Swipe over the handwriting panel vertically 2. on the center console control panel con- F with one finger. Example: Scroll vertically in firms the input and transfers it to the results Placing objects on the center console control panel lists on the central display. list. G can damage it. 3. The cursor can now be moved freely in the H – Do not place objects on top of the center console E Zoom central display via remote operation on the control panel. I Move two fingers farther apart on the center console control panel. – Only use the storage options described in these handwriting panel to zoom in on a section Other functions or a result can be selected. J instructions. within the map view on the central display. K Please see chapter "Storage" on page 222. L Entering characters M N O P Q R Fig. 33: Operating the center console control panel S T A Tap (select) Briefly touch the center console control U panel or handwriting panel with one finger. Fig. 34: Freehand writing Example: Tap on a function or activate/de- V bb activate a checkbox. The keyboard or input field is shown on the cen- W tral display. X B Long press 1. Write the desired text or characters with your Hold a finger down on the center console finger (character recognition). Y control panel or handwriting panel. – To enter a space, swipe your finger from left Z to right (menu languages with writing

78 Central Locking

Central Locking A B Brief overview of opening and locking doors from outside C D This brief overview does not replace the compre- E hensive descriptions provided in the "Central Lock- ing" section. Safety messages and warnings, in F particular, are not replaced by this brief overview. G H I J K Fig. 35: Vehicle key Fig. 36: Comfort Access L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens? Where? M

> N Unlock (with the vehicle key) e Press button on the vehicle key The emergency flasher emits one p. 81 once. flash. O – or – The door handle extends. The driver's P Press button on the vehicle key door and trunk lid can be opened. twice (within approx. 2 seconds). or Q The door handles extend. The doors R and trunk lid can be opened. S Unlock (with Comfort Access) e Reach into the handle recess of The emergency flasher emits one > p. 81 T the door handle. Do not touch flash. U proximity sensor A on the door The door handle extends. handle when doing so. The relevant door can be opened. The V As you approach the vehicle: trunk lid is also unlocked together W e Move towards the vehicle. with the driver's door. X Y Z

79 Central Locking

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens? Where? B Lock With the vehicle key: The emergency flasher flashes twice > p. 82 C e Press the button on the vehicle and an acoustic signal sounds twice. D key. The door handles retract. E With Comfort Access: The doors and trunk lid are locked and e Touch proximity sensor A at the can be opened from inside by pulling F door handle. the door opener. G Lock when persons/animals are re- With the vehicle key: The emergency flasher emits 2 short > p. 82 H maining in the vehicle e Press button on the vehicle key flashes and then 1 long flash. An I e Switch off the alarm system's twice (within approx. 2 seconds). acoustic signal sounds twice. passenger compartment monitor- With Comfort Access: The door handles retract. J ing system. e Touch proximity sensor A on the The doors and trunk lid are locked and K door handle twice (within approx. can be opened from inside by pulling L 2 seconds). the door opener. > M Switch off the alarm system’s alarm e Press the button on the vehicle The alarm sound is switched off. p. 65 sound N key. – or – O Press the power button and P switch on the vehicle. Q Using the central locking > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on Comfort Access R page 234. Vehicles with Comfort Access can be unlocked and S Information All doors can be unlocked irrespective of the se- locked without using the vehicle key. For this pur- lected setting: pose, the vehicle key must always be carried, e.g. in T e Only use the vehicle key when the vehicle is in e Press button on the vehicle key twice within 5 your trouser pocket. U your sight. seconds. If the door handles are extremely dirty, the Comfort Access function may be restricted. Depending on equipment, the vehicle can be un- V > Please see chapter "Car Care" on page 69. locked and locked either with the vehicle key or Information W without a key by means of Comfort Access. This section describes the vehicle's factory settings. Deactivating Comfort Access using the ve- X You can set whether only the driver's door or the hicle key entire vehicle is to be unlocked when unlocking the To ensure that the vehicle cannot be unlocked and Y vehicle. started by unauthorized third parties, the Comfort Z

80 Central Locking

Access functions can be temporarily deactivated Unlocking doors with the vehicle key Unlocking doors with the proximity sensor in A using the vehicle key. the door handle B e Press the button and the button simultaneously until the light indicator on the vehicle key C lights up continuously. D Deactivation is confirmed when the light indicator on the vehicle key lights up continuously. E The Comfort Access functions are activated auto- F matically when pressing the buttons on the vehicle key. G e Do not expose the vehicle key to a high level of H electromagnetic radiation. This can adversely affect Porsche Comfort Access. I J Unlocking the doors K

Information L M – The door handles retract 45 seconds after the Fig. 37: Unlocking doors with the vehicle key doors, hood and hatchback are locked. The ve- Fig. 38: Unlocking doors with Comfort Access N hicle remains unlocked. 1. Press the button. bb Vehicles with Comfort Access. – If the vehicle is unlocked and if a door, the hood The emergency flasher emits one flash. O bb Function activated. or hatchback is not opened within 45 seconds, The vehicle is unlocked, depending on the set- P the vehicle is locked again automatically. ting, and the door handle extends. e e e e Settings Vehicle Vehicle closing Q 2. Pull the door handle. systems e Door unlocking R Information bb The driver must be carrying the vehicle key, e.g. in trouser pocket. S In the event of an accident in which the airbag is The doors can be unlocked on the side of the vehicle triggered, the entire vehicle is unlocked automati- T where the vehicle key is located. cally to facilitate fast access for helpers. The emer- 1. Grasp into the handle recess of the door handle. U gency flasher is also activated automatically. Do not touch the proximity sensor on the front of V the door handle when doing so. The emergency flasher emits one flash. W The vehicle is unlocked, depending on the set- X ting, and the door handle extends. 2. Pull the door handle. Y Z

81 Central Locking

A Information Unlocking doors from inside Unlocking with battery disconnected B An originally unlocked door can only be opened from In order to prevent the battery from discharging, the outside with the emergency key after the 12- C unused comfort functions are progressively turned volt lithium battery has been disconnected. off. The vehicle can then be unlocked using the ve- D e Open the window before disconnecting the 12- hicle key. volt lithium battery. E The door can be opened from inside and outside F Unlocking doors as you approach the vehicle by pulling the inside door handle twice. Pull the inside door handle from the rest position to the G The central locking system can be set so that the end stop for this purpose. doors will unlock automatically as you approach the H vehicle (distance of approx. 6.5 ft. (2 m)). Locking the doors I The prerequisite for this is that the vehicle key was at least approx. 19.5 ft. (6 m) away from the vehicle NOTICE J since the last time you locked it. When parking the K vehicle and then locking it, keep the key a sufficient distance away. Otherwise, it may be unlocked unin- Extended door handles can be damaged in car L tentionally within 45 seconds. washes. bb e M Vehicles with Comfort Access. Lock the vehicle before starting the car wash. bb Function activated. Fig. 39: Pressing the central locking button in the door panel N e e Settings e Vehicle e Vehicle closing e Press button in the door panel. Locking the doors with the vehicle key O systems e Automatic unlocking when – or – bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. P approaching Pull door opener. bb All doors closed. In this case, all doors and the trunk lid are un- Q bb The driver must be carrying the vehicle key, e.g. e Press the button once. in trouser pocket. locked. The door handles extend. The emergency flasher flashes twice and an R 1. Move towards the vehicle. The light indicator on the button goes out. acoustic signal sounds twice. S The emergency flasher emits one flash. The door handles retract. The vehicle is unlocked, depending on the set- Information If persons or animals remain in the vehicle: T ting, and the door handle extends. The doors cannot be opened from inside if the ve- e Press the button twice within 2 seconds. U 2. Grasp into the handle recess of the door handle. hicle was locked using the emergency key. The emergency flasher emits 2 short flashes and Do not touch the proximity sensor on the front of then 1 long flash. An acoustic signal sounds V the door handle when doing so. twice. W 3. Pull the door handle. Automatic unlocking The door handles retract. X The vehicle is unlocked automatically when you press the P button. Y Z

82 Central Locking

The doors are locked but can be opened from the bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. Locking the doors from inside A inside by pulling the door opener. bb The driver must be carrying the vehicle key, e.g. B e Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that in trouser pocket. the alarm system will be triggered if the door is bb All doors closed. C opened. e Touch proximity sensor A at the door handle. D The emergency flasher flashes twice and an Information acoustic signal sounds twice. E The door handles retract. If the doors, hood or trunk lid are not fully closed, the F vehicle cannot be fully locked. The emergency If persons or animals remain in the vehicle: G flasher does not flash. e Touch proximity sensor A at the door handle twice within 2 seconds. H The emergency flasher emits 2 short flashes and I Information then 1 long flash. An acoustic signal sounds If the key is inside the vehicle when you lock it, the twice. J vehicle will be unlocked again. Two warning signals The doors are locked but can be opened from the K sound and the emergency flasher flashes four times. inside by pulling the door opener. Only if a door, the hood or trunk lid is not opened e Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that L within approx. 45 seconds is the vehicle locked, after the alarm system will be triggered if the door is M which it can only be unlocked using a second key. opened. Fig. 41: Pressing the central locking button in the door panel N e Make sure that the vehicle key is not left inside bb Doors closed. the vehicle when locking it. Information e Press button in the door panel. O – If the doors, hood or trunk lid are not fully closed, In this case, all doors and the trunk lid are locked. P Locking doors with the proximity sensor in The door handles retract. the vehicle cannot be fully locked. The emer- Q the door handle gency flasher does not flash. The light indicator on the button lights up. – The vehicle key must be outside the vehicle The doors can only be opened from inside by R pulling the door opener. when locking, otherwise the vehicle cannot be S locked. Automatic locking T bb Function activated. U The vehicle is locked automatically when a speed of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. V > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on W page 234. X Fig. 40: Locking doors with Comfort Access Y bb Vehicles with Comfort Access. Z

83 Central Locking

A Activating and deactivating the e e Settings e Vehicle e Vehicle locking Emergency unlocking of the doors systems e Fold side mirrors when locking B child lock e Hold the vehicle key at the top right of the rear The rear doors can be secured against being opened window in direction of travel and press the C from the inside. The child lock is activated in con- Successful locking is confirmed by the alarm button. D junction with child protection. horn (availability depends on the country) If the vehicle still cannot be unlocked: > Please see chapter "Disabling controls in the rear 1. Remove the emergency key from the vehicle key. E e e Settings e Vehicle e Vehicle locking – child protection" on page 264. > Please see chapter "Using the emergency systems e Confirm vehicle lock with horn F A warning message appears on the instrument clus- key" on page 232. ter in the event of a child lock fault. G 2. Pull and hold the door handle. Emergency unlocking and emer- 3. Insert the emergency key into the door lock with H Setting up central locking gency locking of doors the round edge facing upward (right-hand drive: I Settings for central locking system behavior can be with the round edge facing downward). configured via the central display. 4. Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to J the first point of noticeable resistance and then K Door unlocking (driver's door only, by side, all turn it further to the stop using a certain amount doors) of force. L 5. Turn the emergency key back to its initial posi- e e e e M Settings Vehicle Vehicle locking tion and remove it. systems e Door unlocking 6. Pull the door handle from the closed position N past the noticeable resistance. O Unlocking doors as you approach the vehicle The door can be opened. bb Vehicles with Comfort Access. 7. To prevent the alarm system from triggering: P press the power button and switch on the vehicle Q e e Settings e Vehicle e Vehicle locking within 15 seconds. systems e Automatic unlocking when R approaching Information S The time it takes to trigger the alarm system differs Automatic locking of the doors as of a speed T from country to country. of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) U Fig. 42: Emergency unlocking/emergency locking e e e e Settings Vehicle Vehicle locking If the vehicle key remote control does not work, the Emergency locking of the doors V e systems Lock doors when driving doors can also be unlocked and locked without the W remote control. Information X Folding side mirrors in and out automatically when locking and unlocking Only emergency lock the doors when the vehicle is Y bb Vehicles with electrically folding side mirrors. parked. e Z Unlock the doors before starting to drive.

84 Central Locking

1. Remove the emergency key from the vehicle key. A > Please see chapter "Using the emergency B key" on page 232. 2. Pull and hold the door handle. C 3. Insert the emergency key into the door lock with D the round edge facing upward (right-hand drive: with the round edge facing downward). E 4. With the driver's door open, turn the emergency F key clockwise to the first point of noticeable resistance and then forcefully turn it further to the G stop. H 5. Turn the emergency key back to its initial position and remove it. I 6. Close the driver's door. J 7. Check that the vehicle is locked. K

Information Fig. 43: Performing emergency locking of the passenger's L door In the event of a central locking fault, all functional M locks in the central locking system can be locked via 1. Open the door. the lock in the driver's door. 2. Remove the emergency key from the vehicle key. N e Have faults in the central locking system 3. Unclip and remove cover. O repaired. 4. Turn the lock outward using the emergency key. P e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- 5. Refit the cover. ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they 6. Pull and hold the door handle. Q have trained technicians and the necessary parts 7. With the door open, turn the emergency key R and tools. clockwise to the first point of noticeable resistance and then turn it further to the stop using a S Performing emergency locking of the doors if certain amount of force. T the central locking system has failed 8. Turn the emergency key back to its initial posi- Perform the procedure for the passenger door and tion and remove it. U the rear doors. 9. Close the door. V 10.Check that all doors are locked. W X Y Z

85 Charging

A Charging shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire or burns. accident. B e Only use vehicle charging cables that have been e Never transport the vehicle charging cable in the Charging high-voltage battery tested and approved by the manufacturer for passenger compartment (e.g. on or in front of the C charging the high-voltage battery in an electric Incorrect charging seats) or unsecured. DANGER vehicle. D e Always store the vehicle charging cable in a e Always have the charging equipment required for charge bag in the luggage compartment or in the E An incorrect charging process, non-observance of the country you are driving in with you. storage compartment provided for transporting the generally applicable safety precautions and im- e Only connect vehicle charging cables to electri- F it in the luggage compartment. proper handling of the high-voltage battery can cal sockets that were installed professionally. G cause electric shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire e Do not connect vehicle charging cables to dam- NOTICE H or burns. aged or dirty electrical sockets. e Before starting the vehicle, remove the vehicle e Do not use a damaged vehicle charging cable. I Risk of damage to the charging equipment and ve- charging cable, close the cover and charge port e Do not use extension cables, cable reels, multiple hicle from overvoltages in the power supply. J door and store the vehicle charging cable in a sockets or travel adapters. safe place. e Do not modify or repair any of the electrical e Do not charge the high-voltage battery via the K e Always observe the specified sequence when components. vehicle charge port during a thunderstorm. L charging the high-voltage battery. Do not unplug e Protect electrical sockets and plug connections e If possible, disconnect the charging equipment from water, moisture and other fluids and liquids. from the power grid during a thunderstorm. M the vehicle charging cable from the electrical socket during the charging process. Finish e Do not use sharp-edged or pointed objects to remove dirt, ice and snow from the charging N charging before disconnecting the vehicle General charging and care instructions charging cable from the electrical socket. socket. O The high-voltage battery is subject to aging and e Observe the safety notes in the instructions for e If the charging socket is dirty, contact an au- wear and tear brought about by a physical and P the Porsche charging equipment. thorized Porsche dealer. chemical process. This reduces the high-voltage e Do not work in or on the vehicle during the e Never insert objects into the charge port on the Q vehicle. battery’s capacity during its lifecycle, which, along charging process. with usage and ambient conditions, diminishes the R e Never charge the vehicle at both charge ports at Unsecured vehicle maximum range available and increases charging the same time. WARNING S charging cable times the older the battery gets. Adhering to the following measures can reduce the T Unsuitable or damaged DANGER An unsecured, incorrectly secured or incorrectly aging and wear and tear of the high-voltage battery: electrical sockets and U positioned vehicle charging cable can slip out of e When charging, make sure that the ambient vehicle charging cables temperature for the vehicle is between approx. V place and endanger the vehicle occupants during The use of unsuitable or damaged electrical sockets braking, direction changes or in the event of an -4 °F (-20 °C) and +86 °F (+30 °C) where possible. W and vehicle charging cables and improper handling e of the high-voltage battery can cause electric Whenever possible, do not expose the vehicle to X prolonged temperatures in excess of Y Z

86 Charging

86 °F (30 °C), such as by parking it in direct the following web address: https://www.por- (3). Both charge ports have the same charging A sunlight for long periods. sche.com. power. When you are using one charge port, the B e At ambient temperatures above 86 °F (30 °C), e Only use vehicle charging cables that have been other charge port is disabled. connect the vehicle to the power grid following tested and approved for charging the high-volt- To reduce the charging time, Porsche recommends C operation and charge the high-voltage battery age battery in an electric vehicle (charging plug charging at electrical outlets or wall boxes supplied with alternating current (AC) to a maximum standardized in accordance with IEC 62196-2, by 208-240V (1 and 2). Only charge the high-volt- D charge state of 85 %. Use the timer function. SAE J1772 or GB/T 20234-2 and charging age battery at 110V domestic electrical outlets if no E e At ambient temperatures exceeding process in accordance with IEC 61851-1, other charging option is available. 95 °F (35 °C), avoid using the "Range" drive SAE J1772 or GB/T 18487 ), and comply with F mode immediately after charging with direct national standards and legislation. Rapid charging with direct current (DC) at G current (DC) over 150 kW in order to maximize Vehicle charging cables without protection public E-charging stations cooling of the high-voltage battery. (standardized in accordance with IEC 61851-1, The high-voltage battery in the vehicle can be H e Preconditioning of the high-voltage battery SAE J1772 or GB/T 18487 ) are not supported. charged with direct current (DC) 5 at a charging I shortens the charging time. Particularly during e Only use charging cables with a maximum length station via the charge port on the passenger's side. long-distance driving, initiate charging of the of 98 ft. (30 m). This shortens the charging time significantly. J high-voltage battery using the Charging Planner e Porsche recommends that you use charging Porsche recommends charging with direct current K and use the timer or profile function to charge equipment supplied and approved by Porsche (DC) if you want to charge the high-voltage battery the battery with alternating current (AC) if together with the charging dock or the basic wall in the shortest possible time. The shortest charging L possible. mount. Refer to the separate instructions for the times are achieved using the Charging Planner. M e Use the timer function to program a high-voltage Porsche charging equipment and instructions for Aging and wear to the high-voltage battery can be battery charge state of approx. 80 % for daily use the vehicle charging cable used. reduced using the Battery-friendly quick charging N of the vehicle without any long-distance driving. function. The quick charging process may take O e When the charge state is below 5 %, connect the longer. vehicle to the power grid following operation and P Central display charge the high-voltage battery. Q e If required, a battery charge of 100% can be 1. e Charging e Overview e programmed before starting long journeys. R 2. Activate Battery-friendly quick charging . e Note the special features of the local charging S infrastructure. Charging may only begin later. Press the start button on the E-charging station. T For further information on care of the high-voltage Fig. 44: Charging the high-voltage battery U battery: > Please see chapter "Car Care" on page 69. V Charging with alternating current (AC) at do- W Instructions for the charging equipment mestic and industrial electrical outlets or at public E-charging stations e Further information on the charger and the web X application is available under "E-Performance" at The high-voltage battery in the vehicle can be charged with alternating current (AC) via the charge Y port on the driver's side (4) or the passenger's side Z

87 Charging

A Opening and closing the charge Opening and closing the electric charge port door on the outside of the vehicle B port door

C NOTICE D Risk of damage to the charge port door from foreign E objects and ice. F e Check the charge port door for possible foreign G objects and ice before opening and closing it. e If the charge port door is damaged, consult an H authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends I an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and J tools.

K > Please see chapter "Car Care" on page 69. L The vehicle has either a manual or electric charge Fig. 45: Opening and closing the manual charge port door on port door, depending on the equipment. the outside of the vehicle M Opening and closing the manual charge port 1. Press on the rear part of the charge port door to N open it. Fig. 46: Opening the charge port door door Charge port door opens. e Move your hand along the underside of the fin to O bb Vehicle with a manual charge port door. 2. Press on the rear part of the charge port door open it. bb Vehicle unlocked or vehicle key near the charge P until it engages securely to close it. Charge port door opens. port door (depending on the equipment). Q e Move your hand along the underside of the fin to bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. Opening and closing the electric charge port close it. R door Charge port door closes. S bb Vehicle with an electric charge port door. The electric charge port door closes automatically bb Vehicle unlocked or vehicle key near the charge after 120 seconds, 10 seconds after removing the T port door (depending on the equipment). vehicle plug or immediately after locking the vehicle. U bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. Opening and closing the electric charge port door V using the center console control panel

W 1. Tap . X 2. Select the desired charge port door. Y Charge port door opens or closes. Z

88 Charging

Inserting the vehicle plug into the out up to a charge state of 100 %. The light on C Meaning A vehicle charge port and starting the release button C shows the locking status of the vehicle plug and the charge level of the high- B the charging process off Vehicle plug not inserted or no con- voltage battery. nection to the power grid C bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. > Please see chapter "Charge level and locking established. bb Vehicle unlocked. status display on the vehicle charge port" on D or bb Vehicle charging cable connected to the power page 89. E grid. Vehicle plug inserted: Vehicle in idle state. To detect the current con- F 1. Refer to the separate instructions for the Por- Information sche charging equipment and instructions for nection status and battery charge, G the vehicle charging cable used. – If the vehicle plug is inserted when you lock the press the or button on the ve- vehicle, the vehicle plug will remain locked. hicle key. H – If you try to move the selector lever to position D I during the charging process, the charging proc- lights Vehicle plug inserted and locked. ess will be interrupted. If the vehicle plug is not J up removed, charging will resume after approx. K 20 seconds. Vehicle plug inserted and locked. – If the charging timer function is activated when L Establishing and stopping charging with alternating current (A/C), the pulsates communication. M charging timer controls when the charging proc- N ess starts, and the charging process may not Vehicle plug inserted and locked. start immediately after you insert and lock the The high-voltage battery is being O vehicle plug. pulsates charged. P Vehicle plug inserted and locked. Q Charge level and locking status lights up Charging process complete and target battery charge reached. R Fig. 47: Inserted charging plug display on the vehicle charge port The light on the release button shows the locking S 2. Press the release button (B) and insert the ve- status of the vehicle plug and the charge level of the Vehicle plug inserted and locked. hicle plug A completely into the charge port. If T high-voltage battery. flashes Charging process paused due to the the vehicle plug is heavy, lift the plug in the programmed timer and profile U charge port slightly so that it will lock into settings. position. V After letting go of the release button (B), the ve- lights An error occurred while charging the W hicle plug is locked and the charging process is up high-voltage battery. started automatically in accordance with the X timer and profile function and the local charging Y infrastructure. If the timer or profile functions are If the charging process was not started: not activated, charging is automatically carried Z 89 Charging

A e Check that the vehicle plug is inserted correctly. Information Using the charging functions in e Refer to the separate instructions for the Por- B the central display sche charging equipment, instructions for the – Observe the specified sequence for charging the The Timer and Profile charging functions can be vehicle charging cable used and instructions on high-voltage battery. C used to program different parameters for the charg- the charging station. – End the charging process before disconnecting ing processes on the central display. Both functions D e the vehicle charging cable from the electrical Remove and insert the vehicle plug again. are only available in conjunction with alternating socket. E – or – current (AC) charging. – An ongoing charging process can be ended at 1. Switch off and leave the vehicle. Suitable charging equipment is required to make full F any time by releasing the vehicle plug. 2. Remove the vehicle plug from the vehicle charge use of all charging functions. Further information on – Observe the safety instructions for charging the G port. the charger and the web application is available high-voltage battery. H 3. Close doors, windows and charging ports, lock under "E-Performance" at the following web ad- the vehicle and vacate the reaction area of the dress: https://www.porsche.com. I keyless Comfort Access system. J 4. Wait approx. 5 minutes. Do not use the app to Using the direct charging function Using the charge level display access the vehicle during this time. When the timer or profile function is activated, the K 5. Insert the vehicle plug into the vehicle charge direct charging function can be activated via the L port and start the charging process again. central display and the center console operating panel. The high-voltage battery charges regardless M Ending the charging process and of the timer or profile function, up to a maximum N charge state of 100 %. If the timer or profile function removing the vehicle plug from is not activated, it is not necessary to activate the O the vehicle charge port direct charging function. The charging process P 1. Unlock the vehicle. starts automatically when the vehicle plug is 2. Press the release button on the vehicle charge inserted.. Q port. bb Vehicle plug inserted. bb R The vehicle plug is unlocked. If a charging proc- Timer or profile function activated. Fig. 48: Charge level display ess has been started, it will be stopped. S Central display The battery charge condition displays in the central 3. Press the release button (B) on the vehicle plug display and center console operating panel show T and pull the vehicle plug out of the vehicle 1. e Charging e Overview different information about the charge state of the charge port within approx. 20 seconds. high-voltage battery, including the current charge 2. Activate Direct charging. U 4. Disconnect the vehicle charging cable from the state, the current charging power and the settings of The high-voltage battery is charged. V power supply and store it in a safe place. the timer and profile function. 5. Close the charge port door. Center console control panel W Programming and activating the timer X 1. Tap the softkey. bb Departure time in the future. When the timer function is active, the high-voltage Y 2. Tap the Direct charging softkey. battery is charged to a specified target charge state Z The high-voltage battery is charged. at a programmed departure time. If the charge state

90 Charging is less than 25 %, the high-voltage battery is auto- Deactivating timer to the functions Set preferred charging time and A matically charged up to a charge state of 25 % as Optimized charging. With the function Set preferred Central display soon as the vehicle is connected to the power grid. If charging times, the high-voltage battery can be B the timer function is not active, the high-voltage 1. e Charging e Timer charged at specified times, for example to make use C battery is charged to at least the minimum charge of "time of use" energy costs. In conjunction with state programmed in the profile function. 2. Deactivate Timer. suitable charging equipment, the Optimized charg- D If several timers are active, the charge state of the ing function enables the networking of the vehicle E earlier timer is always targeted. Starting charging with the timer with the local charging infrastructure, e.g. the automatic use of individual charging tariffs or charging F It is recommended to insert the charging plug into bb Timer programmed and activated. with solar power. the charge port after programming the charging bb Vehicle plug inserted. G timer. If the timer function is active at the same time, the The timer function defines and automatically starts high-voltage battery is charged to the target charge H The passenger compartment can also be precooled/ the charging process. Depending on the pro- heated by the departure time by selecting the Pre- state programmed in the timer function after the I grammed timer, the charging process may start at a minimum charge state programmed in the profile cool/heat option. later time. > Please see chapter "Air conditioning Advanced function has been reached. J Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air condi- Ending charging with the timer K tioning)" on page 53. Programming and activating the general bb Vehicle plug inserted. charging profile L Central display bb The timer function is activated. Central display M 1. Press the release button. 1. e Charging e Timer High-voltage battery charging is stopped. 1. e Charging e Profiles N 2. Select Add new timer. 2. If charging is still ongoing, wait until the outer O – or – light on the release button goes out. 2. Edit the General charging profile . P Edit the Timer . If the vehicle plug remains inserted for more than 30 3. Program Minimum charge. minutes after the timer has expired, the high-voltage 3. Program the date and departure time. If the Q battery is charged up to a maximum charge state of 4. Activate Optimized charging selected timer is used regularly, activate Repeat 100 %. – or – and select Weekdays. R Activate Set preferred charging times and pro- S 4. Program Charge setpoint. Programming and activating the charging gram Preferred charging times. profile T 5. Activate Charge. 5. Activate General charging profile. If the profile function is active, the high-voltage U 6. Activate Pre-cool/heat if desired. battery will be charged as quickly as possible to a Programming and activating a location-de- 7. Activate Timer. programmed minimum charge state as soon as the V vehicle is connected to the power grid. When the pendent charging profile W At some public charging stations, the charging vehicle is delivered, the programmed minimum Central display process cannot be started if a departure timer has charge state is 25 %. X been programmed. After reaching the programmed minimum charge e e 1. Charging Profiles Y e Use the direct charging function. state, the high-voltage battery is charged beyond 2. Select Add new profile. the programmed minimum charge state according Z – or – 91 Charging

A Edit existing profile . Using intelligent charging Enabling intelligent charging functions on the 1 vehicle B 3. Program Name and select Location. functions In conjunction with a suitable charging infrastruc- Central display 4. Program Minimum charge. C ture, the Taycan enables the use of intelligent D 5. Activate Optimized charging. charging functions in private and public areas. These 1. e Charging e Overview e – or – include: 2. Activate Plug & Charge. E Activate Set preferred charging times and pro- – Plug & Charge F gram Preferred charging times. – Use of individual electricity tariffs, e.g. for cost- Due to different software versions of the charging optimized charging infrastructure, the intelligent charging functions may G 6. Activate Charging profile. not function or may only function to a limited extent – Self-consumption optimization, e.g. charging in individual cases. For example, the vehicle cannot H with solar power be authenticated or the charging process may be Deactivating a profile – Insight into individual charging statistics I interrupted. The vehicle can be charged despite Central display – Phase-synchronous and phase-individual over- limited intelligent charging functions. For this pur- J load protection pose, deactivate Plug & Charge. 1. e Charging e Profiles K In the private area, a charging infrastructure that Central display 2. Deactivate Profiles. enables the vehicle to be networked with the private L power grid is required for the intelligent charging 1. Follow the instructions of the local charging M Starting charging with a profile functions. For information, contact a qualified spe- infrastructure. cialist company, electricity provider or an authorized bb Profile programmed and activated. N Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends the use of the 2. e Charging e Overview bb Vehicle plug inserted. O Porsche Mobile Charger Plus or the Mobile Charger 3. Deactivate Plug & Charge. The profile function defines and automatically starts Connect in conjunction with the Home Energy P the charging process. Manager (HEM). 4. Start charging. Q Depending on the programmed minimum charge, In the public area, a contract with a charging serv- To make full use of the intelligent charging functions the high-voltage battery may not be fully charged. ice/mobility service provider, which enables the in- again at a later point in time, activate Plug & Charge. R telligent charging functions to be used, is required Ending charging with a profile S for the intelligent charging functions. For informa- Using Plug & Charge bb Vehicle plug inserted. tion, contact a qualified charging service/mobility With Plug & Charge, the vehicle can be charged us- T bb The profile function is activated. service provider or an authorized Porsche dealer. ing a suitable charging infrastructure in private and U 1. Press the release button. Porsche recommends the use of the Porsche public areas, without the need to manually initialize High-voltage battery charging is stopped. Charging Service. the charging process on the E-station or charger. V 2. If charging is still ongoing, wait until the outer The charging process is billed automatically on the W light on the release button goes out. basis of the contract with the charging provider. bb Intelligent charging functions on the vehicle X enabled. Y Z 1. Equipment availability and functionality in North America is under examination, and may be available for use only at a later time or in certain markets. 92 Charging bb Charging infrastructure suitable for Plug & – Customer-specific installation, e.g. electrical some energy is physically lost during the charging A Charge. socket used. process and because energy is also used to control B bb Contract with charging provider includes Plug & – Settings for the charging current limit on the the temperature of the high-voltage battery. Charge. electric vehicle supply equipment. For physical and chemical reasons, the charging C speed decreases when the charge level approaches 1. Open the charge port door. – Fluctuations in the power grid voltage. D 2. Insert vehicle plug into the charge port. – Ambient temperature for the vehicle and charg- 100 %. The vehicle plug is locked and the charging ing equipment. The excessive use of rapid charging stations (DC) E will increase charging times in the long term. process starts automatically. Depending on the – Temperature of the high-voltage battery and F charging infrastructure, the charging process control unit. e A maximum charging power of 50 kW is recom- may take a few seconds to start. – Charge level of the high-voltage battery. mended for regular charging with direct current G (DC). – Type and age of the high-voltage battery. H Renewing the charging contract certificate – Passenger compartment temperature precool- e Use of alternating current (AC) is recommended manually ing/heating. when charging the battery at home. Use an in- I dustrial electrical outlet (AC) instead of a do- Following conclusion of a charging contract that in- J cludes Plug & Charge in the public area, the appro- mestic electrical outlet to charge the battery priate charging contract certificate will be installed Charging type Charging time more quickly and efficiently. K in the vehicle on first registration at an E-station L suitable for Plug & Charge. The charging contract Alternating current (AC) approx. 8–9 h Emergency release of the charge certificate in the vehicle is automatically renewed as with 11 kW from 0 % up to port door M soon as the previous charging contract expires and 100 % the validity of the new charging contract begins. If the charging cradle is faulty, the charge port door N can be opened manually. If a new charging contract that includes Plug & Direct current (DC) with approx. 93 min. O e Charge is used before the previous charging contract 50 kW from 5 % up to 80 Do not perform an emergency release on the P loses its validity, the previous charging contract % charge port doors on both sides simultaneously certificate must be deleted manually. or if one charge port door has already opened Q correctly. The opposite charge port door will be e Reset the system to factory settings. Direct current (DC) with approx. 22.5 min. locked automatically. Important vehicle settings (e.g. configuration of maximum charging power R Porsche Connect Services) may be lost. from 5 % up to 80 % under Emergency release of the manual charge port S > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on optimum conditions (CCS door T page 234. fast-charging pedestal with >270 kW, >850 V, After performing an emergency release on the man- U Charging times battery temperature ual charge port door, the vehicle can be charged with 86 °F (30 °C) to alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC). V The charging power levels and charging times de- 95 °F (35 °C) and initial pend on various factors that may significantly in- W charge state of 5 %) crease the charging times compared to the specified X values: The amount of energy taken from the power grid is – Available power from the electrical Y greater than the amount of energy stored when infrastructure. charging the high-voltage battery. This is because Z 93 Charging

A they have trained technicians and the necessary Have the unlocking mechanism of the charge port parts and tools. door checked: B e Consult an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche C Emergency release of the electric charge port recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as door they have trained technicians and the necessary D After performing an emergency release, the vehicle parts and tools. E can only be charged with alternating current (AC). F Performing an emergency release G on the vehicle plug If the vehicle plug cannot be released (e.g. in the H event of a malfunction), an emergency release must be performed. I J Central display

K 1. e Charging e Overview e L Fig. 49: Emergency release of the manual charge port door 2. End the charging process and temporarily re- M bb Vehicle unlocked. lease the vehicle plug. 1. Remove the emergency release tool from the tool N kit. Performing emergency release manually O 2. Guide the metal hook on the emergency release If the emergency release of the vehicle plug via the tool under the rear section of the charge port P central display has no effect, a manual emergency door. release can be performed. Q 3. Place the emergency release tool in position and Fig. 50: Emergency release of the electric charge port door pull to open the door. R bb Vehicle unlocked. 4. Guide the metal hook on the emergency release S tool into the hole in the plunger until it engaged 1. Remove the emergency release tool from the tool audibly. Turn the emergency release tool through kit. T approx. 45 degrees in the direction of travel. 2. Guide the metal hook on the emergency release U 5. Remove the plunger. tool behind the cover on the charge port door. 6. Start the charging process. 3. Engage the emergency release tool and pull to V free the charge port door from its anchoring 7. After charging, close the charge port door. point and remove carefully. W Have the unlocking mechanism of the charge port 4. Start the charging process. door checked: X 5. To close the cover on the charge port door, press e Consult an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche it onto the anchoring point until it engages Y recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as securely. Z

94 Charging

A B C D E F G H I J K

Fig. 51: Performing an emergency release on the vehicle L plug M 1. Open the driver's or passenger's door. 2. Reach into the opening between the driver's or N passenger's door and fender. Pull the button to O the point of resistance. The vehicle plug is unlocked. If a charging proc- P ess has been started, it will be stopped. Q 3. Pull the vehicle plug from the vehicle charge port within approx. 20 seconds. R 4. Close the charge port door. S To test the release of the vehicle plug: T e Consult an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as U they have trained technicians and the necessary V parts and tools. W X Y Z

95 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

Improper use of child re- A Child Restraint Systems DANGER child restraints are not properly secured in the straint systems vehicle. B (Child Seats) e Do not affix objects to child restraint systems or Children could be endangered in a crash if their child C cover them with other materials. restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. General safety instructions e D For maximum safety and protection, install the Porsche recommends that all infants and children be e Make sure that all child restraints are properly child restraint system in the rear seat. E restrained in child restraint systems at all times secured. while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with e Follow all child restraint instructions and warn- F applicable laws. ings in this manual. Installing child restraint systems According to accident statistics, children are safer G When possible, use only child restraint systems recommended by Porsche. These systems have been e Always observe the separate operating instruc- when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- H tested and adjusted to the interior of your Porsche tions for the child restraint system provided by tions than in the front seating positions. the manufacturer of the child restraint for in- Under all normal circumstances a child restraint I and the appropriate child weight groups. Other systems have not been tested and could entail stallation, use and proper securing of the child. system must be placed in the rear. J an increased risk of injury. e Only use child restraint systems recommended e Do not use a child restraint system in the front for your Porsche. These systems have been passenger seat. K The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 US states and the Canadian provinces. The tested and adjusted to the interior of your Por- L child restraint system should be one that complies sche and the appropriate child weight groups. Children in group 0 and 0+: Other systems have not been tested and could Up to 29 lbs. (13 kg) M with U.S. Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be secured by a lap belt por- present an increased risk of injury. Children of this weight must be transported in a re- N tion of a lap-shoulder belt or for child seats equipped e Infants and small children should never be held straint system facing rearward. on the lap or share a seat belt with another oc- O with the L.A.T.C.H. system (Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children, also known as ISOFIX) to the L.A. cupant while the vehicle is in motion. Children in group I: P T.C.H. anchorages. e Children too big for a group II/III child restraint 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) system must use regular seat belts, even when Q A statement by the seat manufacturer of compliance Children in this group are carried in child restraint with U.S. Federal/Canadian standards can be found not placed in a child restraint system anymore. A systems facing forward. R on the instruction label on the restraint and in the child is too small for a seat belt if the shoulder instruction manual provided with the restraint. belt crosses the face or the neck of the child. Children in group II: S All child restraint systems are designed to be se- e Choose a child restraint system according to the 33 to 55 lbs. (15 to 25 kg) T cured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lapbelt por- height and weight of the child. Children in this group are carried in child restraint tion of a lap-shoulder belt. e Child restraint systems that are damaged or have U systems facing forward. You can obtain child seats that are L.A.T.C.H. com- been heavily stressed in an accident must be re- V patible at your authorized Porsche dealer. placed immediately. Children in group III: e e Children could be endangered in a crash if their 48 to 79 lbs.(22 to 36 kg) W Always observe the separate installation instructions for your child seat. Children in this group are carried in child restraint X systems facing forward. Y Z

96 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

Using child restraint systems in Child restraint system for up to one-year old Small adult passengers A children the front passanger seat Some smaller adults may not trigger the PASSEN- B If the child restraint system must be fastened to the GER AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be turned off. If Child Restraint in Front DANGER passenger’s seat in exceptional cases: the light is lit when an adult occupies the seat, they C Seat e When an up to one-year old child is seated in the should reposition their body properly, centered in the D The use of a child restraint system in the front pas- child restraint system, the front airbag is auto- seat with feet on the floor and not leaning on adja- senger seat can result in serious personal injury or matically deactivated on the passenger side. cent body parts. If the lamp still does not turn off, E the person should move to a rear seat for better death to the child from an airbag deployment. e Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF F indicator light lights up. protection, and the vehicle should be taken to an To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an e authorized Porsche dealer for evaluation. G accident, Porsche strongly recommends: Adjust the passenger’s seat as far away from the airbag and adjacent car body parts as possible. e Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF e Under all normal circumstances, the child seat indicator light does not light up. H must be placed in the rear. Child Seat Detection DANGER Adult Use of Front Seats I Do not use a child restraint system on the front Fault DANGER J passenger seat. When the ignition is on and the up to one-year old child is seated in the child restraint system on the When the ignition is on and the small adult passen- K > Please see chapter "Automatic locking retractor" ger is seated on the passenger seat, the indicator on page 97. passenger seat the indicator light PASSENGER AIR L BAG OFF must be on. light PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be off. However, there may be serious situations where it If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light M might be necessary to place a child in the front seat If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light does lights up, it could indicate a fault in the system. so that he/she can be kept under direct observation not light up, it could indicate a fault in the system, N and the airbag could inflate in a collision, placing the In this case: to prevent an immediate risk to the child (for exam- O ple, while driving to the doctor or hospital). child at risk of death or severe injury from the inflat- e Have the fault remedied at your nearest author- The following instructions are provided to you solely ing airbag. ized Porsche dealer. P for that purpose. In this case: Q e Seek appropriate advice from your authorized e Install child restraint system on the rear seats. Porsche dealer about the possible installation of e Have the fault remedied at your nearest author- Automatic locking retractor R a Porsche child restraint system. ized Porsche dealer immediatly. The seat belts for the front passenger and rear seats S e If a child restraint system must be fastened to are equipped with an automatic locking retractor for the front passenger seat, adjust the seat as far securing the child restraint system. T Occupant size sensing away from the airbag as possible and adjust the When activated, this retractor allows you to securely U passenger seat backrest angle to ensure firm Your vehicle is equipped with capacitance occupant fasten the child restraint system in place so that in- contact between the passenger seat and the sensing for the passenger's seat in accordance with advertent movements will not occur. V child restraint system. U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. Child Restraint in Front DANGER W e If emergency or other serious conditions require Depending on the electrical capacitance acting on Seat a child to be placed in the front seat, exercise the passenger's seat, the passenger's airbag will au- X extreme caution and defensive driving of your tomatically be switched on or off. The use of a child restraint system in the front pas- Y vehicle. e In case of doubt, fasten the child restraint sys- senger seat can result in serious personal injury or tem on a rear seat. Z

97 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

A death to the child from an airbag deployment. Activating the automatic locking retractor e Use only child restraint systems with the L.A.T.C. H. system (Lower Anchorage and Tether for B To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an 1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to accident, Porsche strongly recommends: the passenger seat, adjust the passenger seat as Children) recommended by Porsche. These systems have been tested and adjusted to C e Under all normal circumstances, the child seat far away from the airbag as possible. 2. Position child seat according to the child seat’s the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate D must be placed in the rear. child weight groups. Other systems have not Do not use a child restraint system on the front manufacturer instructions. E been tested and could entail an increased risk of passenger seat. 3. Pull the seat belt webbing completely out. At this point the locking mechanism is activated. injury. F e > Please see chapter "Automatic deactivation of 4. Insert the seat belt tongue into the buckle and You can obtain child seats that are L.A.T.C.H.- G the passenger airbag" on page 50. make certain that it is properly latched. Make no compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer. > Refer to the separate installation instructions for H If there are emergency reasons for transporting a more adjustments to the seat. child in the front passenger seat, use a child restraint 5. Allow the seat belt to retract until it is tight on your child restraint system. I seat and the automatic locking retractor function. the child restraint system. You may further J Follow the other safety instructions on the previous tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of it pages in this section. to retract. K Make sure that excessive seat belt forces do not L occur by moving the seat with the child seat installed. M Releasing the seat belt N 1. Unbuckle the seat belt latch. O 2. Then make certain that the belt has fully re- P tracted. At this point the automatic locking feature will be disengaged. Q Fig. 52: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator light e Seek appropriate advice from your authorized Adjusting Child Restraint Porsche dealer about the possible installation of R DANGER after Fastening a Porsche child restraint system. S T Moving the seat could misadjust the seat belt Using L.A.T.C.H. child restraint against the child restraint and cause the PASSEN- Fig. 53: L.A.T.C.H. child seat anchorage U system GER AIR BAG OFF indicator light to go off and acti- Markings on the right and left for the L.A.T.C.H. child vate the airbag system. L.A.T.C.H. child restraint systems are the best option V for mounting a child seat in your Porsche. Such L.A.T. seat anchorage can be found inside the funnels of e After fastening the child restraint system, do not the lower anchorages. W C.H. restraint systems can be installed only using the adjust the seat in any direction. L.A.T.C.H. system in the rear seats. The rear seats are The retaining anchor bars A for the L.A.T.C.H. child X e Check the condition of the passenger airbag equipped with the L.A.T.C.H. system (lower anchor- seat anchorage can be found in the seat section be- system shown by the indicator light in the over- low the back rests. Y age and anchor points for tether straps on the rear head console. parcel shelf). Z

98 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

Misuse of Child seat Re- WARNING 2. Secure the child restraint system to retaining A straint Anchorages anchor bars A as described in the instruction manual for the child restraint system. B Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- 3. Pull on the child restraint system to check that C stand only those loads imposed by correctly installed both anchorage points are properly engaged. child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to D 4. Guide L.A.T.C.H. top tether B through the be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. headrest. E e Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages or connector. Only attach one child seat tether an- F chor per anchorage. G e They are not designed to withstand loads imposed by adults. H I 1. Secure the child restraint system in retaining anchor bars A as described in the instruction J manual for the child restraint system. K 2. Pull the child restraint system to check that both anchorage points are properly engaged. Fig. 55: Open the L.A.T.C.H. top tether anchor point cover L 1. Open the L.A.T.C.H. top tether cover. M Upper anchorage points for child restraint systems with L.A.T.C.H. top tether N O P

Fig. 57: Installing child restraint system with L.A.T.C.H. top Q tether on the rear seats R 5. Fasten L.A.T.C.H. top tether B to the attachment point on the rear side of the backrest and tighten S the strap. T Fig. 54: Top tether anchor points U If your child restraint seat or seats require the use of V a tether strap, you will want to use the anchor points provided on the rear parcel shelf. W X

Fig. 56: Installing child restraint system with L.A.T.C.H. an- Y chorage on the rear seats Z

99 Coolant

A Coolant trained technicians and the necessary parts and Swallowing Engine tools. B DANGER Coolant C NOTICE Engine coolant is hazardous to your health and may D be fatal if swallowed. If the coolant level drops, this is an indication of a E e Keep engine coolant out of children's reach. fault on the vehicle, e.g. leaks in the cooling system. e Keep engine coolant away from pets. They can F e be attracted to it should there be a spill, or to Never add coolant yourself. e G used engine coolant left in an open container. Have the cause corrected immediately. Visit an e authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends H If engine coolant gets on your skin or into your eye, immediately rinse the affected party of your an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have I body with clean water for a few minutes. Then trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. J see a doctor immediately. e Note all the information on the refill container of The coolant provides year-round corrosion and K the engine coolant. freeze protection to –35 °F / –37 °C. The coolant L level is regularly checked as part of servicing. Coolant reservoir WARNING e Porsche recommends Glysantin® G40® (alterna- M tively freeze protection agents in accordance N The coolant reservoir is pressurized and contains hot with G12++/VW TL 774 G). e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- O coolant. Coolant can suddenly spray out when you open the coolant reservoir. ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts P e Never open the cap of the coolant reservoir. Visit and tools. Q an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they R have trained technicians and the necessary parts S and tools. e Take care when working near hot vehicle parts. T

U NOTICE V If you continue to drive the vehicle when a warning W light is on, you risk damaging the vehicle. X e Park the vehicle and leave it to cool down. Y e Have the fault corrected immediately. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends Z an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have

100 Cruise Control (CC)

Cruise Control (CC) Controls Display elements A B General safety instructions Status display symbols C Unsafe traffic situation WARNING Symbol Meaning and unfavorable road D conditions Cruise control is passive. E Using cruise control can lead to an accident if the F prevailing traffic situation does not allow you to drive at a sufficient distance to the car in front and at a G constant speed. Cruise control is passive. Control is H interrupted and the desired speed is e Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on still displayed. I windy stretches of road or in unfavorable road conditions (e.g. wintery conditions, wet roads, J Cruise control is active at the set de- varying road surfaces). sired speed. K L Responding to warning messages M Always heed any warning and information messages Fig. 58: Control lever for driver assistance systems displayed in the vehicle. Switching cruise control on and R Switch systems on/off and open options menu N > Please see chapter "Warning and information off S Open options menu (when system is switched on) O messages" on page 244. 1 Set/increase speed The system that was selected last is always 2 Reduce speed switched on. The system is initially in passive mode P 3 RESUME: Resume control when switched on. It must first be activated before Operating principle 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control Q Cruise control maintains the chosen speed in the the control function starts working. range between approx. 20 mph and 150 mph (30 Switching on cruise control R km/h and 240 km/h) without the driver having to bb A driver assistance system is not yet switched S press the accelerator pedal. on. 1. Press button R on the control lever. T The options menu for the driver assistance sys- U tems appears on the instrument cluster. V 2. If cruise control is not already selected, select Cruise control using the rotary push button on W the steering wheel and press to confirm. Cruise control is switched on and passive. X Y Z

101 Cruise Control (CC)

A Switching from an already activated driver assis- – Brief press = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments Resuming control tance system to cruise control – Press and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h) B e Press the control lever up (RESUME). 1. Press button S on the control lever. increments Cruise control accelerates or brakes the vehicle C The options menu for the driver assistance sys- Reducing the speed to the stored speed. D tems appears on the instrument cluster. e Pull the control lever (position 2): 2. Select Cruise control using the rotary push but- – Brief pull = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments E ton on the steering wheel and press to confirm. – Pull and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h) increments F Cruise control is switched on and passive. The operating status appears gray in the status dis- Information G play. There is no speed stored. H The speed can be increased using the accelerator Information pedal. This does not change the stored value. The I stored value is set again when you take your foot off The last selected driver assistance system is re- the accelerator pedal. J tained even after switching it off and restoration of K operational readiness is switched on. L Interrupting cruise control and re- Switching off cruise control suming control M e Press button R on the control lever. Following interruption, cruise control switches to N The memory is cleared and the readiness symbol standby mode and remains in standby until it is ac- disappears. O tivated manually again. P Activating cruise control Interrupting control bb Q Cruise control switched on. e Press the control lever down (CANCEL). bb Speed is higher than 20 mph (30 km/h). – or – R 1. Accelerate to the desired speed using the accel- e Press the brake pedal. S erator pedal. – or – 2. Briefly press the control lever forward (position e Move selector lever to position N. T 1). Cruise control is passive. The set value for the U Cruise control is active. desired speed remains stored. The status display The current driving speed appears green in the sta- changes from green to gray. V tus display and is maintained automatically. W Cruise control operation is interrupted auto- X Changing the desired speed matically in the following situations: bb Cruise control active. – The vehicle speed is above or below the set Y Increasing the speed speed for a certain time. Z e Press the control lever forward (position 1): – Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is in control mode. 102 Cup Holders

Cup Holders Using front cup holders A B Using cup holders C Spilling hot drinks CAUTION D

Hot drinks can cause scalding if spilled. E e Only use containers that fit and have a lid. F e Never put overfull containers in the drink holder. G e Do not use hot drinks. e Only use drinks holders for their intended pur- H pose of storing drinks. I

NOTICE J K Risk of damage from spilled beverages. Fig. 60: Cup holders in the rear armrest L e Only use containers that fit and have a lid. e Never put overfull containers in the drink holder. bb Vehicles with three seats in the rear. M Fig. 59: Front cup holders e Unlock and open the armrest. N There is one cup holder located in the center console and one in the front armrest. O

Using the cup holders in the rear P There are two additional cup holders in the rear Q armrest. R S T U V W X Y Fig. 61: Cup holder in the rear armrest Z

103 Cup Holders

A bb Vehicles with two seats in the rear. e Open the armrest. B C Stowing bottles D e Stow bottles in the storage compartments in the doors. E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

104 Drive mode

Drive mode Configuring INDIVIDUAL drive A The drive modes that are available in the vehicle are mode B designed to suit different demands and driving In INDIVIDUAL drive mode, the settings for chassis conditions. systems and electric sport sound can be combined C RANGE based on the existing drive modes. The stored com- D The control systems are designed for efficient and bination can be retrieved by turning the mode switch consumption-optimized driving. to INDIVIDUAL or by using the central display. E NORMAL F The control systems are designed for everyday driv- Fig. 62: Button for SPORT driving mode Selecting and storing settings under G ing with an emphasis on comfort. Switching on SPORT driving mode: INDIVIDUAL SPORT e Press the SPORT button. e e Drive e e Individual drive mode H Adjusts the control systems toward higher perform- SPORT driving mode is active. configuration ance and dynamics during everyday driving. I The corresponding switch lights up blue. SPORT PLUS J Maximum performance for racetrack-like operation. Switching off SPORT drive mode: Configuring RANGE drive mode e When in active SPORT driving mode, press the K INDIVIDUAL The following settings can be changed in RANGE SPORT button again. Drive mode adapted to individual driving style. drive mode: L SPORT driving mode is switched off, and NOR- M Selecting drive mode MAL driving mode is engaged. Air conditioning N Selecting drive mode using the mode switch Sets the air conditioning mode: ECO or ECO PLUS. > Please see chapter "Air conditioning Advanced Information O bb Vehicles with Sport Chrono package. Climate Control (2/4 zone automatic air condi- NORMAL driving mode is automatically active once tioning)" on page 53. P operational readiness has been established. Q Speed limitation The speed can be limited to between 56 mph – R Select the driving mode on the center console 87 mph (90 km/h – 140 km/h) and is displayed on S the instrument cluster. The speed limiter can be e e Drive e Drive mode temporarily deactivated by initiating a kickdown. The T display on the instrument cluster turns gray. The U Select SPORT driving mode on the center speed limitation is activated again as soon as the Fig. 63: Driving mode on the steering wheel console vehicle speed drops to below the set value. V bb Vehicles without the Sport Chrono package. e Turn the mode switch left or right to select the W desired driving mode. Route-based adaptation The selected driving mode is displayed on the When route guidance is active and the Porsche In- X instrument panel. telligent Range Manager (PIRM) is activated, the air Y conditioning and speed limit are adapted as required for the current route. The changes are only made for Z

105 Drive mode

A the current route. The previously selected settings Selecting and storing settings under RANGE Information remain saved for the RANGE drive mode. B If PIRM is active, the speed limitation is displayed on e e Drive e e Range drive mode When RANGE drive mode is active, the chassis can- C the instrument cluster with the message "Auto". configuration not be adjusted and the PSM SPORT and PSM OFF settings are not available. D For more information on PIRM: The selected settings are saved. > Please see chapter "Charging Planner E (available in some countries)" of the on-board Owner's Manual. F G Overview of vehicle setup in the H selected driving mode I The table below shows only some of the available driving settings for the relevant driving modes. J e Please see the relevant section for further infor- K mation on the individual vehicle functions. L Driving mode RANGE NORMAL SPORT SPORT PLUS

M Launch Control Cannot be activated Cannot be activated Can be activated Can be activated N Basic overrun boost recuperation setting Off Off On On O P Medium Medium Chassis height Low Dependent on the Dependent on the Low Q driving speed driving speed R Electric Sport Sound Normal Normal Normal Sport S T Air conditioning Eco or Eco Plus Normal Normal Normal U Additional information such as the selected drive mode. An attentive driving Responding to warning symbols V style and restrained use of energy-intensive loads Always observe any warning and information mes- W Range have a positive effect on the available range. sages displayed in the vehicle. Among other things, the range depends on the driv- > X Please see chapter "Warning and information ing style, the climatic conditions, the use of energy- messages" on page 244. Y intensive loads and the selected vehicle settings, Z

106 Electrical Socket

Electrical Socket A B Using 12-volt electrical socket Electrical accessories can be connected to the 12- C volt electrical socket. D The 12-volt electrical sockets are located in the storage compartment in the front armrest (USB type E C), between the rear seats (USB type C), and on the F right in the rear luggage compartment in direction of travel. G Devices can be charged and data transmitted to the H PCM using the 12-volt electrical sockets as soon as operational readiness has been established. I Devices can be charged at the 12-volt electrical J sockets in the rear and in the luggage compartment. K Connecting power adapter Fig. 64: Power adapter for 12 volt electrical socket L A Suitable power adapter M Information B Unsuitable power adapter N – The 12 V plug and the connected electrical ac- NOTICE cessories can function even when the vehicle is O shut off.To save the vehicle battery, the electric- Danger of damage to the electrical system. P ity supply is cut off after a maximum of 30 minutes. To turn an electrical accessory back on, e Only use suitable power adapters (A): Q the power switch must be pressed and the ve- Distance X between the earth connection and R hicle turned on. the upper edge of the power adapter must be – The maximum load capacity of a 12-volt socket less than approx. 0.63 in. (16 mm). S is 20 amperes when only one electrical load is in e Unsuitable power adapters (B) with a dis- T operation. Do not exceed 10 A per 12-volt elec- tance X greater than 0.63 in. (16 mm) between trical socket if several electrical loads are oper- the ground connection and the upper edge can U ating simultaneously. damage the 12-volt electrical sockets. V – Unshielded devices and equipment can cause interference to radio reception as well as vehicle W electronics. X Y Z

107 Emergency Call Systems

A Emergency Call Systems If the vehicle battery is disconnected or defective, an Information integral battery ensures that the emergency call B Different emergency call systems may be used depending on model, country and equipment. Help can system remains available for at least one hour for The emergency call cannot be triggered when the C be requested via the emergency call system in an queries from the emergency call center. vehicle is switched off. D emergency or in dangerous situations. Despite activated private mode, location information Information 1. Open the cover plate by pressing on it. E for the vehicle can be transmitted in the event of a 2. Press SOS button A for at least 1 second. If the breakdown or emergency call as well as theft. When the cover is open, the SOS button can be ac- SOS button is pressed again for at least 1 second F cidentally pressed and therefore trigger an uninten- within 6 seconds, the emergency call is canceled. G tional emergency call. Light indicator B flashes green while the call to Emergency call e Always keep the SOS button cover closed when the emergency call center is being established. bb Cellphone network available. H driving. 3. If conditions permit, wait in the vehicle until the bb Emergency call system ready for operation I e Only press the SOS button in an emergency. connection to the emergency call center is (about 20 seconds after vehicle is switched on). established. J Light indicator B flashes green when the emer- Triggering an emergency call via SOS button K Information gency call to the emergency call center has been established. The emergency call system does not require a cell- L If queries from the emergency call center remain phone registered in the vehicle as it has its own unanswered, rescue measures are initiated M cellphone module. automatically. N Under unfavorable conditions, an emergency call to O an emergency call center cannot be ensured (e.g. no Information cellphone network available). P If the light indicator flashes, but the emergency call Due to technical or organizational restrictions be- center cannot be heard via the loudspeaker, the Q yond the control of Porsche (e.g. vehicle is in a loca- loudspeaker may be defective, for example. How- tion where there is no emergency call system ever, the emergency call center may be able to hear R coverage), it may not always be possible to establish you. S an emergency call to the relevant emergency call center. If legally permitted, an emergency call can be T established to a public emergency call center in this Light indicator status display U case. A public emergency call center may not be able to process the data transmitted by the emergency V call system for determination of the necessary res- Light indicator Status cue measures (e.g. the current position of the vehicle W Fig. 65: SOS button and light indicator is not sent automatically). Off Emergency call system X A SOS button is off B Light indicator Y Z

108 Emergency Call Systems

Lights up green Emergency call system Data transmission > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" of the A on-board Owner's Manual. is ready for operation During an emergency call, data for determination of B the necessary rescue measures is transmitted to the Lights up or flashes Error – emergency call emergency call center, provided that this is available. Information C red not or only restrictedly This can include: The breakdown call system does not require a cell- D possible1 – Current vehicle position phone registered in the vehicle as it has its own E – Position data of the route immediately before the cellphone module. Flashes green Active emergency call emergency call is triggered F – emergency call is – Vehicle identification number Due to technical or organizational restrictions out- established and data – Severity of the accident side of Porsche control (e.g. no roaming or no active G transmission to emer- – Direction of the vehicle during the accident data connection), it may not be possible to establish H gency call center – Menu language in the vehicle a breakdown call to Porsche Assistance. I – Vehicle drive type Glows orange Active, automatically – Manually or automatically triggered emergency Data transmission J triggered emergency call During a breakdown call, data for determination of call – an emergency K – Time of the triggered emergency call the required measures can be transmitted to Por- call is established and – Number of persons in the vehicle sche Assistance, provided that this is available. This L data transferred to the can include: – Crash direction emergency call center – Current vehicle position M – Vehicle identification number N Breakdown call – Vehicle type Automatic emergency call Assistance can be requested via the breakdown call O – Fault codes and other data for finding the fault in the case of breakdowns or accidents (availability P Information depending on country and equipment). Triggering a breakdown call Q When the vehicle is switched off, no automatic Ensure that no external devices are connected to the emergency call can be made. Information diagnostic socket before making a breakdown call. R Further information about Porsche Connect (Help bb e Phone e Keypad is selected. S A connection to the emergency call center is estab- videos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and lished automatically immediately after triggering of Questions & Answers) can be found at www.por- 1. Press Breakd. Call button. T the airbags. The automatic emergency call cannot be sche.com/connect.. Select to end the test emergency call. prevented by pressing SOS button A. U If queries from the emergency call center remain bb Cellphone network available. 2. If circumstances allow, wait in the vehicle until V unanswered, rescue measures are initiated the connection to Porsche Assistance has been bb Breakdown call system is ready for operation W automatically. (approx. 20 seconds after switching on the established. vehicle). X bb Private mode is deactivated. Y Z 1. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 109 Emergency Call Systems

A The breakdown call can also be triggered using the Porsche (e.g. no Internet connection), it may not be Porsche Connect App (availability dependent on possible to start or end the online measure. B country). e If the vehicle is able to be driven: Adapt your C driving style to the situation. Accessing the vehicle e D If the vehicle cannot be driven: Call a roadside bb Vehicle parked safety. assistance service and have the vehicle towed. E bb Breakdown call triggered. e Have the error rectified at a qualified specialist repair shop. Porsche recommends an authorized F bb Vehicle data was transferred successfully to Porsche Assistance. Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians G bb Online measure available. and the necessary parts and tools. H If necessary, Porsche Assistance can access the vehicle. Changes to the software of individual control I units can be made in the vehicle. J Allowing access to the vehicle K 1. Follow the instructions in the central display L and allow access with Yes. M 2. Follow the instructions in the central display. Online measure is performed. N O NOTICE

P Usage restrictions during write access. Q Operational readiness can be limited while the online measure is carried out. Displays and vehicle func- R tions (e.g. comfort functions, driver assistance sys- S tems or emergency call functions) may not work T temporarily. e Park the vehicle safely. U e Follow the instructions in the central display. V e Do not use the vehicle during the online measure. W Interruption of the online measure X Under unfavorable conditions, performance of the Y online measure cannot be ensured. Due to technical Z or organizational restrictions outside the control of

110 Emergency Stop Function

Emergency Stop Function Responding to warning symbols function does not detect any steering, brake A pedal or accelerator pedal activity. Always observe any warning and information mes- B General Safety Instructions sages displayed in the vehicle. In the speed range from 130 mph (210 km/h) to > Please see chapter "Warning and information C Lack of attention and approx. 156 mph (250 km/h): WARNING messages" on page 244. failure to detect objects – Lane Keep Assist is active and the driver does not D react to the takeover prompts from Lane Keep The system can only assist the driver within the Operating principle Assist. E limits of the system, but it cannot replace the driver. The system monitors the driver's steering, accelera- – Lane Keep Assist is switched off and the emer- F The assistance offered by the system should not in- tor pedal and brake pedal activity and provides as- gency stop function does not detect any steer- duce you to risk your safety. sistance in the speed range from 0 mph (0 km/h) to ing, brake pedal or accelerator pedal activity. G The system cannot prevent an accident under all approx. 130 mph (210 km/h) – The emergency stop function is not available if Ac- H 155 mph (250 km/h)1. circumstances. The driver is always responsible for tive Lane Keeping is switched off in the speed range I responding in an appropriate manner. When the emergency stop function is activated, it below 40 mph (65 km/h). initiates visual, acoustic or tactile warnings in stages The system cannot detect the following situations: These warnings prompt the driver to take over con- J and brakes the vehicle to a standstill. trol of the vehicle: – Persons, cyclists and animals K The following conditions must be met so that the – Driver instructions in instrument cluster – Objects on the road switched-on emergency stop function can be – Warning signals L – Oncoming vehicles and cross traffic activated: – PCM muting e Drive with extreme care. In the speed range from 0 mph (0 km/h) to M – Jerking belt e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and 40 mph (65 km/h): N – Warning jerk and slight braking the vehicle surroundings. – Active Lane Keeping is active and the driver does not react to the takeover prompts from Active If the driver still fails to act, the emergency stop O Lane Keeping. function performs an emergency stop: P System limitations – The emergency flasher is activated. In the speed range from 40 mph (65 km/h) to Q In the following situation, this function can be 130 mph (210 km/h): – The seat belt is pretensioned. limited, may not react or automatically deactivate: – Active Lane Keeping is active and the driver does – The windows are closed. R – The driver actuates the accelerator pedal, the not react to the takeover prompts from Active – The seat bolsters are inflated (depending on S brake or the steering wheel. Lane Keeping. equipment). – The driving system such as Lane Keep Assist, – Active Lane Keeping is switched off, Lane Keep – The vehicle is braked to a standstill in its own T Active Lane Keeping, Adaptive Cruise Control Assist is active and the driver does not react to lane. Warning jerks can also be felt. U (ACC) or Porsche InnoDrive (PID) are accessible the takeover prompts from Lane Keep Assist. After the vehicle has come to a standstill, the park- on a limited basis. – Active Lane Keeping is switched off, Lane Keep ing lock and parking brake are activated, the doors V – In case of damage or soiling of the radar sensors Assist is switched off and the emergency stop are unlocked, the interior lighting is activated and an W or the front windshield in the area of the camera. emergency call2 country and equipment. X Y 1. The specified speed range depends upon various factors (e.g. drive power, tire type, loading, road surface, uphill and downhill gradients, etc.) Z 2. is triggered depending on 111 Emergency Stop Function

A e To drive off again, select transmission range D or R. B C Overriding the emergency stop D function E The emergency stop function can be overridden while driving. This temporarily deactivates the sys- F tem. This also happens when the driver does this without being aware of it. Override the emergency G stop function by: H e Moving the steering wheel – or – I e Pressing the brake pedal J – or – K e Forcefully pressing the accelerator pedal. L Activating and deactivating the M emergency stop function N e e Assist e Basic Assist e Emergency Stop O Function P Q Information R The function is activated automatically once opera- S tional readiness is established. T U V W X Y Z

112 Exit Warning

Exit Warning Display elements After the vehicle is switched off, the status of the A system is stored in the selected account and paired General safety instructions with the vehicle key used. B > Exiting the vehicle with- Please see chapter "Personal settings" on C WARNING page 168. out due care and D attention The system shuts down approx. 3 minutes after the vehicle is switched off. The indicators B in the door E The system must not induce you to take risks with panels light up briefly. No other warnings are issued. your safety. The vehicle occupants are still respon- F sible for taking due care when exiting the vehicle and G when assessing obstacles. The system is no substitute for the attentiveness of the vehicle occupants. H e Observe the relevant area around the vehicle I closely at all times. J e Before exiting, make sure that no road users are approaching from behind. K

Information on further assistance systems: L > Please see chapter "ParkAssist" on page 164. M > Please see chapter "Active Parking Support" on Fig. 66: Exit Warning indicator elements N page 38. A Indicator on the door mirror B Indicator in the door panel. O System limitations Road users cannot or may not be detected in time in When the door is opened or if the door is already P the following situations: open, the indicators in the door mirror on the relevant side of the vehicle and in the door panel on the Q – Road users are approaching extremely slowly or relevant door light up to indicate that road users are extremely quickly. R approaching. – The range of the sensors is restricted by vehicles If a vehicle occupant attempts to open a door while S parked nearby. an approaching road user is detected as a hazard, the – The range of the sensors is restricted by dirt on T door will be momentarily prevented from opening. the rear bumper. Indicators A in the door mirror and B in the door U panel will flash briefly. Scope of functions V If an approaching road user is detected as a hazard The Exit Warning (EW) alerts the occupants in the when the door is already open, indicators A and B will W stationary vehicle to road users (e.g. passenger ve- light up until the danger has passed. hicles, motorcycles, bicycles) approaching from X behind. Activating and deactivating the Exit Warning Y Z e e Assist e Exit Warning 113 Flat Tire

Risk of accident due to A Flat Tire WARNING > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on sealed tires page 154. B Depending on model and equipment, the vehicle may be equipped with a tire sealant set (Tire Mobi- Damaged tires that are sealed with tire sealant can Service status C lity System –TMS) or a spare wheel. lose pressure or burst in the event of inappropriate For further information on the service status (avail- D speed or continuous loading. ability dependent on country): Responding to Tire Pressure Mon- e Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an E > Please see chapter "Smart Service" of the on- emergency solution enabling you to drive to the itoring System warning messages board Owner's Manual. F If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System has detected nearest authorized Porsche dealer. e G a severe pressure loss, a message appears on the Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or Filling tire sealant (Tire Mobility System – instrument cluster. This loss of pressure could indi- punctures no larger than 0.16 in. (4 mm). TMS) H cate tire damage. e Never use tire sealant if the rim is damaged or if Flammable and harmful e Stop in a suitable place and check the indicated you have driven with low tire pressure or deflated WARNING I sealant tire for damage. tires. J > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on e Do not use tire sealant at outside temperatures The sealant is highly flammable and harmful to K page 252. below -4 °F (-20 °C). health. Prolonged or repeated exposure can cause e Avoid rapid acceleration and high cornering irritation, allergic reaction or organ damage. L speeds. Parking the vehicle safely e Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited e Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). M 1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving lane when handling tire sealant. e Check the tire pressure after driving for around as possible. The vehicle must be parked on a firm e Keep tire sealant away from children. N 10 minutes. If the tire pressure is less than and flat surface that is skid-proof. e Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. 22 psi (1.5 bar), do not continue driving. O 2. Switch on the emergency flasher. e If tire sealant gets on your skin or into your eyes, e Have sealed tires replaced by an authorized Por- 3. Activating the parking brake thoroughly rinse the affected part of your body P sche dealer as soon as possible. Inform the au- 4. Straighten the front wheels. immediately with plenty of water. thorized Porsche dealer that the tire contains tire Q e If you feel unwell or have an allergic reaction, 5. Get all passengers to leave the vehicle. Pay at- sealant. tention to the traffic as they do so. consult a doctor immediately. R e Tire repairs are not permissible. Replace dam- e Change soiled clothing immediately. 6. Set up the warning triangle at a suitable aged tires. S distance. e Do not inhale vapors. e Observe the safety information and instructions e If tire sealant is swallowed, thoroughly rinse out T 7. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling for use in the separate operating instructions for your mouth immediately and drink plenty of away, e.g. by means of wedges under the wheels the tire sealant and compressor. U on the diagonally opposite side. water. Do not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor V > Please see chapter "Jack and Lifting Platform" on In case of a flat tire, tire defects or tire damage can immediately. page 141. be sealed temporarily using the tire sealant provided W in the vehicle. X Sealing defective tires The tire sealant set (Tire Mobility System – TMS) and the associated compressor are located in the Y bb Vehicles with tire sealant (Tire Mobility System –TMS). front luggage compartment. Z

114 Flat Tire

Failure to detect pres- WARNING > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" Checking the pressure A sure loss in the tire on page 154. e Check the tire pressure after driving for B A tire pressure sensor that is soiled with tire sealant 3. Affix the sticker in the driver's field of vision. around 10 minutes. If the tire pressure is less cannot determine the tire pressure correctly. Filling tire sealant (Tire Mobility System –TMS) than 22 psi (1.5 bar), do not continue driving. C > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on e When the defective tire is changed, have the tire > Refer to the separate operating instructions for D page 274. the tire sealant (Tire Mobility System – TMS). pressure sensor replaced as well. E 1. Shake the filler bottle A. Changing tires F 2. Screw the filler hose B onto the filler bottle. > Please see chapter "Replacing tires and wheels" The filler bottle is now open. on page 259. G 3. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve F. H 4. Remove the valve insert E from the tire valve us- Updating the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- ing the valve turner D. tem tire settings after changing a wheel I If a replacement valve insert is not available, > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on J keep the valve insert in a clean, dry place. page 252. 5. Remove the plug C from the filler hose B. K 6. Push filler hose onto the tire valve. L 7. Hold the filler bottle higher than the level of the tire valve and squeeze it forcefully until the con- M tents of the bottle are completely emptied into N the tire. 8. Detach the filler hose from the tire valve. O 9. If available, screw the replacement valve insert or P alternatively valve insert E firmly into the tire Fig. 67: Filling tire sealant (Tire Mobility System – TMS) valve using valve turner D. Q A Filler bottle Inflating the tire R B Filler hose > Comply with the operating instructions on the C Filler hose plug S D Valve turner compressor. E Valve insert 1. Remove the compressor from the right-hand box T F Tire valve in the front luggage compartment. U > Preparing to fill Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on page 154. V 1. Leave the object that caused the puncture in the tire. 2. Connect the compressor to a socket in the ve- W hicle and inflate the tire to at least 2. Remove the tire sealant (Tire Mobility System – 37 psi (2.5 bar). If this tire pressure cannot be X TMS) and the enclosed sticker from the left- reached, the tire is too severely damaged. Do not hand box in the front luggage compartment. Y continue driving with that tire. 3. Screw valve cap onto the tire valve F. Z 115 Fuses

A Fuses Checking and changing fuses Unassigned fuse slots are not listed in the following Electrical shock To prevent short-circuits and overloading of the overviews. B DANGER electrical system, the individual circuits are pro- 1. If possible, switch off the load with the defective C tected by fuses. fuse. Replacing fuses or relays with the engine running or D The fuse boxes are found in the footwell area and on 2. Open the relevant fuse box cover. the ignition on could cause electrical shock. the outside of the dashboard on the driver and pas- 3. If necessary, carefully remove the purple plastic E e Always switch off the engine and the ignition senger sides. strip over the fuses. when working on the electrical system. F Depending on equipment, further fuse boxes are lo- 4. Remove the fuse from its slot using the plastic cated at various locations in the vehicle, which are gripper B in order to check it. A blown fuse can Short circuit G WARNING only accessible to an authorized Porsche dealer. be identified by the melted metal strip. H 5. Insert a new fuse. The replacement fuse must Fuse ratings Working on the electrical system of the vehicle can have the same rated current as the one it is I replacing. result in a short circuit. The short circuit can cause a J fire. Color Amperage 6. Fit the purple plastic strip back into place. rating If the same fuse blows repeatedly, the cause of the e Always disconnect the negative terminal on the K fault must be corrected immediately. 12-volt lithium battery when working on the Light brown 5 A e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- L electrical system. ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they M > Please see chapter "12-volt battery" on Brown 7.5 A have trained technicians and the necessary parts N page 268. and tools. Red 10 A Improper intervention O WARNING and incorrect Blue 15 A P accessories

Q Improper intervention in the fuse box and the use of Yellow 20 A the incorrect accessories can result in damage and R White / clear 25 A malfunctions in electrical and electronic systems. S e Do not attempt to replace any electrical compo- Green 30 A T nents except the fuses listed here (e.g. relays). U e Go to a qualified specialized repair shop. Porsche Blue-green 35 A recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as V they have trained technicians and the necessary Orange 40 A W parts and tools. e Only use accessories that have been approved by X Porsche. For information on approved accesso- Checking and changing fuses Y ries: Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. The numbering for the fuse slots is printed on the fuse holder. Z

116 Fuses

Opening fuse box on the dash- No. Load Right fuse box A board on the left side B 8 Instrument cluster No. Load C 9 ETC toll system card reader (availability 1 Smartphone tray dependent on country) D 2 PCM E 10 Digital clock/stopwatch 3 Central display F 12 Heated steering wheel 4 Central display G H 5 Audio ports Opening fuse box on the dash- I board on the right side 6 Fresh-air blower J 7 PCM control unit K

8 Selector lever L M 12 Diagnostic socket Fig. 68: Left fuse box N A Fuses 1–12 (depending on equipment) O B Plastic gripper P Left fuse box Q e Carefully lever off the cover starting from the R underside and remove it. S No. Load T 2 Rear air conditioning, seat heating control U unit in the rear Fig. 69: Right fuse box V 3 Air-conditioning control unit A Fuses 1–12 (depending on equipment) W B Plastic gripper 5 Steering column electronics control unit X e Carefully lever off the cover starting from the Y 6 Control unit for steering column underside and remove it. adjustment Z

117 Fuses

A Opening fuse box in left footwell No. Load Row C B 9 Overhead console No. Load C 10 BCM control unit (LHD vehicles) 1 Control unit for wireless data transmis- D sion (LHD vehicles) E 11 Control unit for wireless data transmission (LHD vehicles) 3 BCM control unit (LHD vehicles) F G 12 Communication box 4 Diagnostic socket (LHD vehicles) H Row B 6 Control unit for front left radar sensor I 7 Brake booster control unit (LHD vehicles) J No. Load 8 Interior mirror K 1 Control unit for driver assistance systems L 9 Communication box 2 Rear left door control unit M Fig. 70: Opening fuse box in left footwell 10 Power supply, right, term. 15 (RHD 3 Control unit for heating circuit (LHD ve- N vehicles) Row A hicles), charge ports (RHD vehicles) O 11 Power supply, rear, term. 15 (RHD 4 Windshield wipers (LHD vehicles) P No. Load vehicles) Q 1 Heating circuit coolant pump 5 PSM control unit R 7 Seat belt, front left 2 Heating circuit coolant pump S 8 BCM control unit (LHD vehicles) T 3 Cooling circuit relay 9 BCM control unit (LHD vehicles) U 5 BCM control unit (LHD vehicles) V 10 Left headlight electronics 6 BCM control unit (LHD vehicles) W 11 Front left door control unit 7 Light/rain sensor X 12 BCM control unit (LHD vehicles) Y 8 Control unit for radio-controlled parking (LHD vehicles), charge port sensor (RHD Z vehicles) 118 Fuses

Opening fuse box in right footwell No. Load Row C A B 10 Seat belt, front right No. Load C 11 1 Diagnostic socket (RHD vehicles) Charge port sensor (LHD vehicles), con- D trol unit for radio-controlled parking (RHD vehicles) 2 Gateway control unit E F 12 BCM control unit (RHD vehicles) 3 Brake booster control unit (RHD vehicles) G 4 BCM control unit (RHD vehicles) Row B H 5 Front pulse inverter I No. Load 6 Ionizer J 1 Gateway control unit K 7 Power supply, left, term. 15 (LHD 2 Control unit for wireless data transmis- vehicles) L sion (RHD vehicles) M Fig. 71: Opening fuse box in right footwell 8 Power supply, rear, term. 15 (LHD 3 Control unit for heating circuit (RHD ve- vehicles) N Row A hicles), charge ports (LHD vehicles) 9 DC/DC converter O No. Load 4 Right headlight electronics P 10 Control unit for electric power steering 1 BCM control unit (RHD vehicles) 5 BCM control unit (RHD vehicles) Q 12 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) R 3 BCM control unit (RHD vehicles) 6 BCM control unit (RHD vehicles) S 4 Windshield wipers (RHD vehicles) 7 Night View Assist control unit T

5 BCM control unit (RHD vehicles) 8 Front camera for driver assistance U systems V 6 Rear right door control unit 9 Front PDCC control unit W 7 Assistance systems control unit 10 Control unit for wireless data transmis- X 8 Front right door control unit sion (RHD vehicles) Y

9 Airbag control unit 11 Control unit for front right radar sensor Z 119 Garage door opener (HomeLink®)

A Garage door opener Information Information ® B (HomeLink ) e Before selling your vehicle, remember to delete If the signals cannot be stored despite having care- C the garage door opener signals. fully read this chapter and the operating instructions General Safety Instructions for the original remote control: D Pinching, crushing or e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. WARNING E impact through operated Teaching garage door opener e Make sure that there is a new battery in the ga- bb equipment Operational readiness established. rage door opener remote control. Insufficient F bb Vehicle is positioned to allow visual contact with battery power can cause malfunctions in signal G If persons or animals are in the movement area of remote-controlled equipment and is within the transmission. The system in the vehicle then the operated equipment, there is a risk of injury receiver range (signal is transmitted). learns an incorrect code, which cannot be reliably H while the garage door opener is being operated or recognized. I programmed. Systems with remote control e Check the compatibility of the vehicle's e HomeLink® system with the original remote J Make sure there are no persons, animals or ob- 1. e HomeLink® e Configure new profile jects in the movement area of the operated control. K equipment while the HomeLink® system is being 2. Follow the instructions on the screen. During operated or programmed. programming, aim the remote control at the L overhead console from the height of the center Systems without remote control (FixKit e Observe the safety instructions for the original receiver) M remote control. console. Systems without rolling code system: 1. e HomeLink® e Configure new profile e N The profile is taught. O Operating principle – or – The HomeLink® system can be used to operate up to Systems with rolling code system: 2. Select the desired option. P The profile is created. Manual synchronization eight radio-controlled devices (garage doors/prop- 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Q between the HomeLink® and vehicle is still re- erty gates, security systems, house lighting) from The profile is taught. the vehicle via profiles in the central display. quired to complete the teaching process: R > Read the instructions for the original remote 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. S control. > Read and follow the instructions for the Using the garage door opener T original remote control. Calling up configured HomeLink® profiles Information The profile is taught. U manually For information on the compatibility of your vehicle’s bb Operational readiness established. V HomeLink® system with the original remote control: bb Vehicle is positioned to allow visual contact with e W Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. remote-controlled equipment and is within the > Visit www.homelink.com or call the toll-free receiver range (signal is transmitted). X hotline on 1–800–355–3515. Y 1. e HomeLink® Z 2. Select the desired profile.

120 Garage door opener (HomeLink®)

If the existing HomeLink® profiles are assigned to > Please see chapter "Instrument cluster" on A GPS coordinates, the profiles are filtered based on page 127. the current vehicle position. B Managing configured profiles C Calling up taught HomeLink® profiles D automatically Deleting a configured profile Shortly before reaching HomeLink® systems with E assigned GPS coordinates, affected profiles will be 1. e HomeLink® displayed automatically. F 2. Swipe to remove the profile you want to delete GPS coordinates can be assigned during the teach- from the list of profiles. G ing process or afterward: > Please see chapter "Teaching garage door open- H er" on page 120. Deleting all configured profiles I > Please see chapter "Managing configured pro- ® files" on page 121. e e HomeLink e e Delete all Home- J Link® profiles bb GPS coordinates must be assigned to a K HomeLink® profile. bb Operational readiness established. Renaming a taught profile, adding or deleting L bb Vehicle is positioned to allow visual contact with GPS coordinates for a taught profile M remote-controlled equipment and is within the receiver range (signal is transmitted). 1. e HomeLink® N O e Select the desired profile. 2. Select the button for the relevant profile. 3. Select the desired option. P Information Q When parking assistance systems are activated, the R ® HomeLink display may be hidden by the ParkAssist S display. e Close the parking assistance system display if T necessary. U – or – e Assign the HomeLink® function to a quick access V button on the multifunction steering wheel and W then press the button if necessary. HomeLink® is displayed in the foreground. X

For information on the quick access button: Y Z

121 Head-up display

A Head-up display NOTICE B Risk of damage from scratches on the glass cover. C e Do not place any objects on the glass cover of D the head-up display. E Information F G The driver's view of the information in the head-up display may be impaired by the following factors: Fig. 72: Head-up display areas H – Sunglasses with certain polarizing filters. A Main display area – Wet roads. I B Status area C Temporary content – Unfavorable lighting conditions. J – Objects on the glass cover. K The head-up display (HUD) projects important e Check that the head-up display is fitted at the messages and selected information onto the wind- correct position and that the height is adjusted L shield, where the driver can see it. This allows drivers correctly. M to read the information (e.g. speed, transmission range and navigation) without taking their eyes off N the road. The information displayed can be assigned Adjusting head-up display individually. O The display position of the head-up display projec- The head-up display is divided into three areas: tion can be adapted to the driver's size and seating P – Main display area. The driver can choose be- position. This projection can be switched on and off Q tween three views: via the central display. – Navigation R – Power meter e e Settings e Displays e Head-Up – User-defined Display S – Status area, e.g. current speed and symbols of T the driver assistance systems. U – Area to display temporary content, e.g. calls/ voice control. V The head-up display supplements the instrument W cluster as a display instrument. X Y Z

122 HOLD Function

HOLD Function Operating principle Information A The HOLD function assists the driver when stopping B General Safety Instructions the vehicle and driving off on steep gradients. The When the HOLD function is active, the driver may vehicle is automatically secured against rolling back feel a difference in the brake pedal, and hydraulic C Loss of control over the WARNING opposite the desired direction of travel. noises may be heard. vehicle D When the HOLD function is active, the light indicator This behavior is typical of the system. There is no fault. Despite the HOLD function, responsibility for stop- on the instrument cluster comes on. E ping and starting on gradients lies with the driver. When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is operating F When stopping and starting on slippery surfaces (e. normally, the HOLD function actively holds the ve- g. icy or loose substrate) the HOLD function cannot hicle at a standstill following automatic braking. G be guaranteed to provide assistance. The vehicle can If the driver seat belt is unfastened and the driver H roll away. door is opened while the HOLD function is active, the parking lock and parking brake are activated I e Always adjust your driving style to the road sur- automatically. face and the vehicle load; use the footbrake if J necessary. If the vehicle is held on a steep gradient, you can drive off in the usual way. K If the HOLD function is not working, the driver cannot be assisted when driving off on gradients. L Activating the HOLD function e Hold the vehicle with the footbrake. M bb Drive position D or R selected. Slight rolling back on e Press the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to N WARNING a standstill. uphill slopes O The HOLD function is activated. The vehicle is held If the vehicle comes to a standstill on steep gra- stationary even without pressing the brake pedal. P dients without the driver applying the footbrake, the Q vehicle can roll back until the HOLD function stops it. Information In this situation it is possible to reduce the roll-back R by applying the footbrake. The HOLD function can also be activated, irrespec- S e Increase the braking force with the footbrake to tive of the gradient, by quickly flooring the pressed help to hold the vehicle. brake pedal while the vehicle is stationary. Changing T the drive position will not deactivate the HOLD function in this case. U Responding to warning symbols V Always observe any warning and information messages displayed in the vehicle. W > Please see chapter "Warning and information X messages" on page 244. Y Z

123 Hood

A Hood Unlocking hood with the vehicle key Unlocking hood with Comfort Access (without a key) B Unlocking and opening the hood C D NOTICE

E Risk of damage to the hood and windshield wipers. F e Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded forward when opening the hood. G e Always switch off the windshield wipers before H opening the hood (wiper lever in position 0). I J Unlocking hood using center console control panel or central display K The hood can be unlocked using the flap view on the L center console control panel or using the central display. M bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. Fig. 73: Opening hood with the vehicle key N Centre console control panel e Press the button. Fig. 74: Opening hood with Comfort Access O bb Vehicles with Comfort Access. e e The hood and the vehicle doors are unlocked. bb The vehicle key is at the front of the vehicle. P The hood is unlocked. e Move your hand between the Porsche crest and Q Central display license plate. Use either a back-and-forth movement or a swipe motion. R bb Ready for operation. The hood is unlocked. S e e Settings e Vehicle e Hood, trunk lid T and charging ports e Open hood Opening the hood The hood is unlocked. bb The hood is unlocked. U V W X Y Z

124 Hood

If the hood is not closed correctly, a warning 1. Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning A message appears on the instrument cluster while message lights up. B driving. 2. Check the luggage compartment. Unsecured Luggage 3. Close the lid. C DANGER Compartment Lid Unsecured luggage DANGER D compartment lid If the luggage compartment lid is not secured prop- E erly, it could fly up, blocking your vision and causing If the warning message lights up when the vehicle is F loss of control. moving, the lid may impact the front of the wind- e Should you notice at any time while driving that shield and can tear off. G the lid is not secured properly, stop immediately e Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning H in a suitable place and close it. message lights up. e Check the luggage compartment. I e Close the lid. J Trunk entrapment Empty Battery K Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk re- WARNING Fig. 75: Unlocking the hood lease mechanism. L A person trapped in the luggage compartment can 1. Lift the hood slightly and open the safety catch The internal trunk release mechanism will not work if release the lid from the inside using the unlocking M (arrow). the vehicle does not have battery power. button. N 2. Open the hood completely. The unlocking button is equipped with a light indi- O cator. The light indicator keeps flashing for 60 mi- Emergency unlatching of the hood Closing the hood nutes after locking the luggage compartment lid. If the 12 volt battery has no remaining charge, the P Heavy hood Unsecured luggage hood can only be unlatched with the help of an out- CAUTION WARNING Q side battery. > Please see chapter "12-volt battery" on R When closing the hood, its own weight can cause it When loading the luggage compartment, make sure page 268. to fall into the lock when it is open half way. that items of luggage or other objects cannot be- S e Ensure that no foreign objects or limbs are lo- come caught on the button. This could cause the T cated near the moving parts (hinges) or under luggage compartment to open unintentionally. U the hood. V 1. Lower the hood and allow it to fall into the lock. Function Press the hood closed with the flat of your hand If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked by using W the internal trunk release mechanism, the latch over the lock area. X 2. Check that the hood has engaged correctly in the striker pops into the catch-hook position and the lid lock. can be opened from the inside immediately. Y A warning message lights up when the unlocking Z button is operated. 125 Hood

A B C D E F G H I J K

L Fig. 76: Emergency unlatching of the hood – connecting the Fig. 77: Emergency unlatching of the hood – connecting the positive pole negative pole M 1. Unlock the vehicle at the door lock with the 5. Use the black jumper cable to connect the neg- N emergency key. Please see chapter "Emergency ative terminal of the external battery to the joint O unlocking and emergency locking of doors" on of door arrester B. page 84. 6. Press the button on the vehicle key for about P 2. Remove the plastic cover of the left-hand fuse 2 seconds. The hood will be unlatched and the Q box. alarm system deactivated. 3. Pull out the positive terminal A (red) in the fuse 7. First disconnect the negative cable, then the R box. positive cable. S 4. Use the red jumper cable to connect the positive 8. Insert positive terminal A in the fuse box and at- terminal of the external battery to the positive tach the plastic cover of the fuse box. T terminal A in the fuse box. U Information V If the vehicle was locked, the alarm system signal W will sound when the negative terminal is connected. X Y Z

126 Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster A B Instrument cluster overview C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R Fig. 78: Instrument cluster S

The fully digital instrument cluster is divided into 3 Using the tube menu Tube 1 – Speed & Assist display T tubes (C) and has capacitive touch buttons (A) on You can toggle between tubes and select menu op- Information about assistance systems as well as in- U the outer edges (light, vehicle settings and ◊ but- tions using the multifunction steering wheel. formation relating to the vehicle is displayed in the V ton). The temperature, time and date can be dis- > Please see chapter "Operating the instrument left tube 1. played between the outer tubes and the capacitive cluster" on page 132. W touch buttons (B). There are various warning lights Entries in lists are shown in different colors: Tube 2 – Power meter and light indicators (F) at the bottom edge of the X – White: List entry available Information about drive power, speed, battery instrument cluster. Additional warning lights and – Blue: List entry selected charge level and navigation is displayed in the center Y light indicators can be found in areas D (Assistance tube 2. The tube display can be changed and ex- – Gray: List entry not available Z & Systems) and E (Driving & Entertainment). panded to tubes 1 and 3 in some cases: 127 Instrument cluster

A – Power meter (can be customized and – Date driver will appear on the instrument cluster as well. configured) – Phone When certain events occur, messages that are of B – Night View Assist – Station/Track high priority or contain important information for the C – Map – Arrival driver will appear on the instrument cluster as well. > Please see chapter "Operating the instrument D – Extended map (Full HD map across all three – Driving time and distance tubes) cluster" on page 132. E – Reduced view Fuel Range > Please see chapter "Warning and information messages" on page 244. F The current electric drive power (from "12 o'clock" Display of the fuel range without active The following warning lights and light indicators are to "6 o'clock" position) and the current recuperation route guidance G available depending on the equipment: capacity (from "12 o'clock" to "9 o'clock " position H counter-clockwise) is shown in the Power meter. Warning light if there is no steering Display of the fuel range with active activity The display can be activated and deactivated. route guidance I > Please see chapter "Instrument cluster display ▶ Actively take over steering. J contents" on page 134. ▷ Please see chapter "Active Lane Keep- ing" on page 34. K Tube 3 – Car & Info display Warning lights and light ▷ Please see chapter "Lane Keep Assist" on page 147. L Information on navigation, driving program and me- indicators dia as well as notifications are shown in the right Coolant temperature warning light M tube 3. Incoming calls can also be displayed in this NOTICE The coolant temperature is too high. N tube. ▶ Do not continue driving; stop when it is Configuring the information area Faults are indicated by the warning light. The rele- safe to do so. O ▶ Turn off the vehicle and let it cool You can select four of the many items of vehicle in- vant warning light goes out only when the cause of down. P formation for display in tube 3. the fault has been corrected. ▶ Check radiators and air-flow routing in Q Central display Go to a qualified specialist repair shop in the follow- and on the vehicle for obstructions. ing cases: Check the coolant level. R e Touch e Settings e Displays e – The warning light comes on or flashes when the ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately by S Instrument cluster e Customized view. vehicle is running or while driving. a qualified specialist repair shop.1 – Current charge High-voltage e Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche ▷ Please see chapter "Coolant" on T page 100. – Battery temperature High-voltage dealer, as they have trained technicians and the U – System voltage 12-volt necessary parts and tools. V – GPS altitude When certain warning lights appear, an additional – Compass W acoustic signal sounds. – Lateral acceleration When certain events occur, messages that are of X – Longitudinal acceleration high priority or contain important information for the Y – Deceleration Z 1. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 128 Instrument cluster

Porsche Active Suspension Manage- brake system is faulty. The brake fluid Warning light for a critical fault in the A ment (PASM) warning light level may be too low. high-voltage battery The Porsche Active Suspension Man- The warning light flashes: The parking A critical fault was detected in the vehi- B agement (PASM) function may be faulty. cle's high-voltage battery. brake is faulty. C Restricted and adapted driving possible. ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately by ▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to ▶ Adapt your driving style to the a qualified specialist repair shop.1 do so. D situation. ▶ Do not continue driving; stop when it is ▷ Please see chapter "Brakes" on E ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately by page 67. safe to do so and turn off the vehicle. 1 a qualified specialist repair shop. ▷ Please see chapter "Brake Fluid" on ▶ Call a roadside assistance service and F ▷ Please see chapter "Porsche Active page 66. have the vehicle towed if necessary. Suspension Management (PASM)" on ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately by G Critical battery charge warning light 1 page 170. The high-voltage battery is almost com- a qualified specialist repair shop. H Airbag warning light Warning light for a fault in the high- pletely discharged. I The airbag system may be faulty. Continued driving possible with voltage battery ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately by adjustment. A fault was detected in the vehicle's J 1 a qualified specialist repair shop. ▶ Stop when it is safe to do so and turn high-voltage battery. K ▷ Please see chapter "Airbag Systems" off the vehicle. Restricted and adapted driving possible. on page 48. ▶ Charge the high-voltage battery im- ▶ Adapt your driving style to the L Seatbelt warning light mediately or call a roadside assistance situation. The seatbelt is incorrectly fastened or service and have the vehicle towed if ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a M 1 not fastened at all. necessary. qualified specialist repair shop. N ▶ Fasten the seatbelt correctly. ▷ Please see chapter "Charging" on High-voltage vehicle electrical system ▷ Please see chapter "Seat Belts" on page 86. warning light O page 200. Battery charge warning light The high-voltage vehicle electrical sys- P Brake system warning light (USA) The charge level of the high-voltage tem may be defective. battery is less than 15 %. ▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to Q do so. ▶ Monitor the range and plan for charg- R ing of the high-voltage battery. ▶ Do not continue driving; stop when it is Brake system warning light (Canada) ▷ Please see chapter "Charging" on safe to do so and switch off the vehicle. S The warning light lights up continuously: page 86. ▶ Call a roadside assistance service and T The parking brake is engaged or the have the vehicle towed if necessary. ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately by U 1 a qualified specialist repair shop. V W X Y Z 1. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 129 Instrument cluster

A Warning light for a critical fault in the Electric parking brake warning light Porsche Stability Management warning drive or charging system (USA) light B A critical fault was detected in the vehi- The warning light flashes: Porsche cle's drive or charging system. Stability Management (PSM) control Electric parking brake warning light C ▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to procedure. Please see chapter "Porsche (Canada) do so. Stability Management (PSM)" on D The warning light lights up continuously: ▶ Do not continue driving; stop when it is page 189. Parking brake is faulty. E safe to do so and switch off the vehicle. The warning light lights up continuously: The warning light flashes: There is a fault ▶ Call a roadside assistance service and Porsche Stability Management (PSM) F in the brake system. have the vehicle towed if necessary. has failed. ▶ If the fault occurs multiple times or G ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately by Restricted and adapted driving possible. consistently, have the fault rectified a qualified specialist repair shop.1 ▶ Avoid sharp acceleration and deceler- H promptly by a qualified specialist repair ation as well as high cornering speeds. Warning light for a fault in the drive or shop.1 I ▶ If the fault occurs multiple times or charging system ▷ Please see chapter "Porsche Stability consistently, have the fault rectified J A fault was detected in the vehicle's Management (PSM)" on page 189. promptly by a qualified specialist repair drive or charging system. ▷ Please see chapter "Brakes" on K shop.1 Restricted and adapted driving possible. page 67. ▶ Adapt your driving style to the ▷ Please see chapter "Porsche Stability L Anti-lock braking system warning light situation. Management (PSM)" on page 189. (USA) M ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a PSM OFF warning light (USA) 1 N qualified specialist repair shop. Central warning light Anti-lock braking system warning light PSM OFF warning light (Canada) O At least one warning message is dis- (Canada) Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is played or stored. The anti-lock braking system (ABS) or P deactivated. ▷ Please see chapter "Warning and in- Porsche Stability Management (PSM) Restricted and adapted driving possible. Q formation messages" on page 244. has failed. The brake booster may be ▶ Adapt your driving style to the faulty. Brake pad wear warning light (USA) situation. R Restricted and adapted driving possible. ▷ Please see chapter "Porsche Stability S ▶ Avoid abrupt braking where possible. Management (PSM)" on page 189. Allow a longer braking distance. T Brake pad wear warning light (Canada) ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a Steering system warning light U Brake pads are worn. qualified specialist repair shop.1 The function of the steering system may Restricted and adapted driving possible. ▷ Please see chapter "Porsche Stability be faulty. V ▶ Have brake pads replaced as soon as Management (PSM)" on page 189. Restricted and adapted driving possible. ▶ Adapt your driving style to the W possible by a qualified specialist repair shop.1 situation. X ▷ Please see chapter "Brakes" on ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a qualified specialist repair shop.1 Y page 67. Z 1. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 130 Instrument cluster

AWD system warning light E-Sound warning light Lights warning light A A fault was detected in the vehicle's E-Sound is deactivated. Vehicle lighting may be faulty. AWD system. ▶ Drive with extreme care, as other road Restricted and adapted driving possible. B Restricted and adapted driving possible. users may not hear the vehicle when it is ▶ Adapt your driving style to the ▶ Adapt your driving style to the driving in electric mode. situation. C situation. ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a D ▶ Have the fault corrected promptly by a specialist repair shop.1 qualified specialist repair shop.1 E qualified specialist repair shop.1 ▷ Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" Lane Change Assist light indicator Restricted drive performance warning on page 234. Lane Change Assist is switched on. F light Distance warning light ▷ Please see chapter "Lane Change As- Drive power is limited. The high-voltage Risk to safety as a result of tailgating. sist (LCA)" on page 142. G battery may not be sufficiently charged ▷ Please see chapter "Operating princi- Night View Assist light indicator H or may be at a borderline operating tem- ple" on page 241. Night View Assist is switched on. I perature due to very cold outside tem- Warn and Brake Assist warning light ▷ Please see chapter "Night View Assist" peratures, for example. The Warn and Brake Assist function is on page 162. J Tire pressure warning light restricted. Preconditioning light indicator K During the learning process for newly Restricted and adapted driving possible. Preconditioning is active. fitted wheels or tire pressure sensors, ▶ Adapt your driving style to the ▷ Please see chapter "Charging" on L the warning light may flash or light up in situation. page 86. M the event of pressure loss in one or more ▶ If the fault occurs multiple times or Electric charge port door light indicator tires, a fault or a temporary malfunction consistently, have the fault rectified faulty N of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System promptly by a qualified specialist repair Electric charge port door is faulty. 1 O (TPMS). shop. ▷ Please see chapter "Charging" on ▶ Reduce your speed and adapt your ▷ Please see chapter "Operating princi- page 86. P driving style to the situation. Avoid ple" on page 241. ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a forceful braking and steering maneuvers. Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus qualified specialist repair shop.1 Q ▶ Stop when it is safe to do so and turn (PDLS Plus) warning light Mechanical charge port door light indi- off the vehicle: Check the indicated tires R The Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus cator faulty for damage. Fill with sealant if necessary. S (PDLS Plus) function is impaired. Mechanical charge port door is faulty. Set the correct tire pressure at the next Restricted and adapted driving possible. ▷ Please see chapter "Charging" on T opportunity. ▶ Adapt your driving style to the page 86. ▶ If the fault occurs multiple times or situation. ▶ Have the fault rectified promptly by a U consistently, have the problem rectified ▶ If the fault occurs multiple times or qualified specialist repair shop.1 V immediately by a qualified specialist re- consistently, have the fault rectified pair shop.1 promptly by a qualified specialist repair W shop.1 X Y Z 1. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 131 Instrument cluster

A HOLD function light indicator Warning and information The HOLD function is activated. The ve- B hicle is independently held in a station- messages ary position. If certain events occur, messages that have high C ▷ Please see chapter "HOLD Function" on priority or contain important information for the D page 123. driver will appear in the instrument cluster. These messages must be acknowledged before the Tubes E Readiness to drive light indicator The vehicle is ready to drive. menu can be opened. F ▷ Please see chapter "Starting, driving > Please see chapter "Operating the instrument and stopping the vehicle" on page 216. cluster" on page 132. G Light indicator for parking light > Please see chapter "Warning and information H The parking lights (depending on the messages" on page 244. equipment, side marker lights, parking I lights, etc.) are switched on. Operating the instrument cluster J Low beam light indicator Configuring settings and Low beam is switched on. WARNING K operating while driving

L Configuring settings and operating the multifunction Fig. 79: Operating the instrument cluster with the multi- Dynamic High Beam light indicator function steering wheel M Dynamic High Beam is switched on. steering wheel, infotainment system, etc. while driving can distract you from the traffic. You may N The high beams are switched on and off A – Adjust the volume and mute the audio automatically depending on the traffic lose control of the vehicle. source O situation. e Only operate these components while driving if e To set the volume: Turn rotary knob A up or ▷ Please see chapter "Lights" on P the traffic situation allows. down. page 150. e If in doubt, stop in a safe place and only carry out e To mute: Press rotary knob A. Q High beam warning light extensive operations and settings while the ve- The high beams are switched on. hicle is at a standstill. B – Open a saved function R ▷ Please see chapter "Lights" on The instrument cluster is only operational when the S page 150. Assigning quick access buttons Rear fog light indicator light vehicle is switched on. For safety reasons, some T The button on the steering wheel and the instrument The rear fog light is switched on. functions are only available when the vehicle is cluster can be individually configured. U ▷ Please see chapter "Lights" on stationary. e Hold down the B button (◊ button) and select page 150. V the desired settings on the central display. Left turn signal > W Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 234. X C – Open voice control Y Right turn signal e Press button C. Z

132 Instrument cluster

> Please see chapter "Voice control" of the on- Selecting one of several options A board Owner's Manual. Option is selected. B D – Recuperation button Option is not selected. C e Hold down the D button to set up recuperation D mode step by step. Activating and deactivating function – or – The function is activated. E Hold down the D button to switch on automatic F recuperation. Function is deactivated. > Please see chapter "Energy recovery (recu- G peration)" on page 217. Adapting view in the instrument cluster H > Please see chapter "Energy recovery (recupera- The content that is displayed can be configured: tion)" on page 217. I e e e e Settings Display Instrument J E – Accept and end a call cluster e Press button E. To end, press and hold button E. K > Please see chapter "Phone" of the on-board L Owner's Manual. M F – Scroll and select menus and functions in the tubes N e To scroll: Turn the F rotary knob up or down to O scroll through the menu on the relevant tube. P e To select/enter: Press rotary knob F. Q G – Skip back one or more selection levels in the menu, confirm notifications R e Press the Back button G. S > Please see chapter "Notifications" of the on- T board Owner's Manual. U H – Switch between tubes V e Press button H. W Selection of options and activa- X tion of functions Y A preceding symbol indicates whether an option is Z selected or a function is activated. 133 Instrument cluster

A Instrument cluster display B contents C Certain displays are only available when the vehicle is stationary. D Not all functions are explained in detail in this Man- E ual. The examples will help you understand the F functions and clarify the menu structure. On the first level, the menu is called up by turning the rotary G knob up/down. On the second level, the rotary knob H must be pressed first before scrolling through the menu. Pressing the Back button exits the second I level and shows the display contents. Fig. 80: Instrument cluster display contents J Tube Display What can I do? / What is displayed? Where? K L 1 e Assistance systems Activate and display Lane Keep Assist - > p. 147 active lane guidance. > p. 34 M N Choose between and display Porsche > p. 181 InnoDrive, Adaptive Cruise Control > p. 42 O (ACC) and Speed Limiter (LIM). > p. 210 P 1 e Traffic signs Display up to 3 current traffic signs. > p. 227 Q R 1 e G-Force Display the current and maximum lon- – gitudinal and lateral acceleration forces S in the form of a circular diagram and T reset them.

U 1 e Drive distribution Display the current torque distribution – V between the front and rear axle in the form of bar charts. W 1 e Tire info Display the current tire pressure and > p. 252 X pressure deviation. Y 1 e PDCC Display the roll stabilization status. – Z

134 Instrument cluster

Tube Display What can I do? / What is displayed? Where? A B 1 e Mileage Display the odometer. – C e > 1 2 Range display Display the range. digital D The charge level of the high-voltage battery is also indicated by a symbol. E Meaning: F – White symbol: battery charge greater than 15 % G – Yellow symbol: battery charge less H than 15 % I – Red symbol: battery almost completely discharged J

2 e Speedometer Display the speedometer. – K L 2 e Power meter / Map display / Night The instrument cluster display view > p. 127 View Assist can be changed and expanded using M the tubes: N – Displaying the power meter (standard view) O – Display Night View Assist with P thermal image detection Q – Display and adjust the map display – Show and adapt the extended map R (full HD map) S – Display reduced view T e Navigation > digital1 3 Display and select navigation informa- U tion (turn-off messages, etc.). V e Trip – 3 Display and reset driving data (average W fuel consumption, range, driving time, etc.). X Y Z 1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 135 Instrument cluster

A Tube Display What can I do? / What is displayed? Where? B 3 e Media Display current media (e.g. radio). > digital1 C e > D 3 Information p. 214 E 3 e Sport Chrono Measure times with the stopwatch. > p. 214 F 3 e Driving mode Display the selected driving program. > p. 105 G 3 e Telephone For example, incoming calls will be > digital1 H shown if a phone is connected,. I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 136 Interior lighting

Interior lighting – Once operational readiness has been established A – After the vehicle is locked B Adjusting brightness The interior lighting is switched off again in the following situations, depending on the duration of the C Central display off delay: D – After all doors are closed e e Settings e Vehicle e Light and visibility e E – Automatically, approx. 10 minutes after the in- Interior lighting e Brightness Adjust the terior lighting is switched on F brightness of the interior vehicle lighting. Fig. 82: Operating reading lights Setting the off-delay time for vehicle interior G lighting Switching the front and rear interior lighting H Switching the interior lighting on on and off e e Settings e Vehicle e Light and visibility e and off e Press the C button. I Interior lighting e Set light delay time. J Switching reading lights on and off K Front reading lights Switching ambient lighting on and e Press the A or B button. off L M Rear reading lights Switching ambient lighting on and off e Press the D button over the respective door. N 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. Adjusting brightness O 2. Activate Turn on the lights. e Press and hold the button for the relevant light P for at least 1 second until the desired brightness is achieved. Setting ambient lighting color Q R Switching interior lighting on and off 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. automatically S 2. Select Color. T e e Settings e Vehicle e Light and visibility e 3. Set the desired light color. Interior lighting e Enable Interior lighting when Fig. 81: Operating the interior lighting U door opens or unlocks. A Button for front left reading light Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting V B Button for front right reading light When it is dark, the interior lighting is switched on in Setting the brightness for the entire vehicle interior C Button for front and rear interior lighting the following situations: W – When the vehicle is unlocked or a door is opened 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. X – After the vehicle is turned off 2. Touch Overall brightness. Y The interior lighting is dimmed again immediately and then switched off in the following situations: 3. Set the desired brightness value. Z 137 Interior lighting

A Setting the brightness in individual areas of the vehicle interior B C 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. D 2. Touch Cupholder, Doors, Center console or Footwell. E 3. Set the desired brightness value. F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

138 Intersection Assist

Intersection Assist include: exits. The areas are monitored by the camera and A radar sensors integrated in the vehicle. – Pedestrians or animals are not detected. B General Safety Instructions – Cyclists may not always be detected. In the event of a possible collision, the system warns the driver by means of visual and acoustic signals on C Restricted detection – Vehicles approaching very fast or very slowly WARNING the instrument cluster and central display and by around the vehicle may not always be detected in time. D – Highly reflective surroundings (e.g. steel bridges, initiating a brief warning jolt if necessary. Detection of the area around the vehicle by the sen- railings) can cause incorrect warnings or prevent E sors (e.g. camera, radar) may be restricted by differ- warnings from being issued. Display elements F ent influencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy – Crossing objects that accelerate or change driv- water spray, oncoming headlights, dirt or damage). ing behavior (e.g. sudden turn-offs) can cause G As a result, warnings might not be activated. incorrect warnings or prevent warnings from H e Drive with extreme care. being issued. I e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and – When turning off, if the vehicle is not facing in the vehicle surroundings. the direction of the driving lane (but is inclined J e Clean the front camera lens and front radars diagonally, at a right angle to it or sharply upward K regularly and keep them free of snow and ice. or downward), approaching vehicles may not be e Do not cover the sensors. detected or may not be detected in time. L e Check the windshield for damage in the area of – When your vehicle accelerates from a stillstand, M the camera lens at regular intervals. the system may not detect a turn-off or may only detect a turn-off after a delay under certain cir- N No warning jolt cumstances. The system may assume you are WARNING driving straight on and generate a false collision O warning. P When PSM is switched off, no warning jolt is trig- e Drive with extreme care. gered ahead of a possible collision. In this case, the e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and Q system only warns the driver by issuing a visual and the vehicle surroundings. R acoustic warning. Fig. 83: Intersection Assist display on the instrument cluster e Adapt your driving style and driving maneuvers If the system detects a possible collision, it warns S Responding to warning symbols to the current situation. the driver by issuing a warning tone and displaying a T Always observe any warning and information mes- collision warning. sages displayed in the vehicle. In another display, red arrows also indicate the di- U > Please see chapter "Warning and information System limitations rection from which the cross traffic is approaching. V messages" on page 244. The system is available – This is indicated in the central display only when WARNING W to a limited extent ParkAssist is activated. Operating principle – The display on the instrument cluster only ap- X The assistance provided by the system cannot be Intersection Assist monitors the areas around the pears when the ACC main menu is activated. guaranteed in certain situations. Such situations front and sides of the vehicle at intersections and Y Z

139 Intersection Assist

A Switching Intersection Assist on B and off Intersection Assist can be switched on and off in the C central display. D bb Transmission range D selected. bb E Speed not higher than approx. 20 mph (30 km/h). F bb Porsche Stability Management (PSM) switched G on. H e e Assist e Intersection Assist I Information J The function is activated automatically once opera- K tional readiness is established. L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

140 Jack and Lifting Platform

Jack and Lifting Platform equipment, e.g. a jack or lifting platform. This can A cause serious injuries and damage. B Raising the vehicle e Manually set medium height and switch off the height control system before lifting the vehicle. C D Lifting the vehicle WARNING E

If the PASM displays a warning message or the ve- F hicle is too hot, there is a risk of injuries and damage G from raising the vehicle. e Only raise the vehicle after it has cooled down. H e Do not perform any work on the chassis when- I ever the PASM displays a warning message ei- J ther. Visit an qualified specialist repair shop. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche K dealer, as they have trained technicians and the Fig. 85: Rear jacking point for the jack or lifting platform L necessary parts and tools. Inadequate securing of WARNING M vehicle e e Settings e Vehicle e Additional chas- N An unsecured or incorrectly secured vehicle can sis settings e Deactivate chassis adjustments Fig. 84: Front jacking point for the jack or lifting platform O move unintentionally or tip or fall off lifting equip- to use a jack ment such as a jack or lifting platform. This can P cause serious injury and damage. Q e Raise the vehicle using a jack on a solid and flat surface only. R e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking S points on the vehicle underbody. e Always place the vehicle on solid supports when T working under the vehicle. U e Engage the electric parking brake when working with the vehicle switched on. V W Control operation of the WARNING leveling system X Y A vehicle on which the leveling system is activated can move unexpectedly or tip or fall off lifting Z

141 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

A Lane Change Assist (LCA) may therefore occur that vehicles that are already moving or are driving off will not be de- B General Safety Instructions tected or will only be detected late. Vehicles C already located immediately next to your vehicle Lack of attention WARNING and therefore outside of the detection range of D the sensor may not be detected either. – The rear collision warning does not respond to E The Lane Change Assist and Rear Turn Assist are not cross traffic, vehicles with a small cross-section, a substitute for the driver's attentiveness. The driver F narrow vehicles and objects that are not identi- is still responsible for taking due care when changing fied as vehicles. G lanes. e Keep the direction of travel and the relevant area H e Keep the direction of travel and the relevant area around the vehicle in view at all times. I around the vehicle in view at all times. Undetected vehicles J WARNING K L Vehicles cannot or may not be detected by the system in time in the following situations: M – The range of the radar sensors may be reduced in N adverse weather conditions (rain, snow, ice, or heavy spray), in tight curves and when ap- O proaching hilltops. P – Lane Change Assist only alerts you to approaching vehicles or vehicles in the blind spot above a Q driving speed of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h). R – Vehicles that approach at high speed from behind or vehicles that are falling back. S – If the vehicle is not facing in the direction of the T driving lane when turning but is facing diagonally or at right angles to it, approaching vehicles can U no longer be detected by the radar sensors. V – In the case of Rear Turn Assist, it is possible that, owing to the small differences in speed between W your vehicle and moving or stationary objects, X fixed objects (e.g. a metal post) may also trigger a warning or that slow-moving vehicles will not Y be detected. Z – Rear Turn Assist is activated when driving off. It

142 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

System limitations Information Operating principle A – Only Rear Turn Assist is available at speeds be- Lane Change Assist (LCA) warns the driver about B low 9 mph (15 km/h). When driving off, the To ensure that Lane Change Assist operates vehicles that are approaching from the rear or are driver is therefore only supported by monitoring correctly: located in the blind spot. This applies both when C e Do not cover the radar sensors on the rear of the area behind the vehicle on the side of the overtaking other vehicles and when your vehicle is D vehicle on which the direction indicator was bumper (e.g. with stickers). Keep the area clean being overtaken. actuated. and free of snow and ice. Using the radar sensors integrated in the rear E – Lane Change Assist and Rear Turn Assist are not e Do not cover the warning indicator in the exterior bumper, Lane Change Assist measures the distance F available if the system detects that the radar mirror (e.g. with stickers). and speed difference of the detected vehicles in re- sensors are covered. e Subsequent painting of the bumper may lead to a lation to your vehicle. The radar sensors cover an G reduction in the sensor range owing to the area of up to 230 ft. (70 m) to the rear and the blind – The rear collision warning may be switched off if H there is a malfunction in the Lane Change Assist. thicker coating layer. The electrical properties spot area. – The radar sensors cover the adjacent lane to the may also differ from those of the approved As soon as the direction indicator is activated for a I paints. lane change regarded as critical, the warning indica- left and right. Other lanes are not covered by the J radar sensors. tor in the respective exterior mirror lights up brightly – The radar sensors can sometimes detect other and briefly several times. The system therefore pro- K vides assistance separately for both sides of the objects (e.g. high or raised crash barriers), not L only vehicles. vehicle. When slowly overtaking another vehicle (speed dif- M Information ference of less than approx. 9 mph (15 km/h)), the warning indicator lights up as soon as this vehicle is N If the position of the radar sensors was changed fol- in your blind spot area and is detected by Lane O lowing an accident, for example, this can impair the Change Assist. If the speed difference is greater, no function of Lane Change Assist. warning indicator will be activated on the door P e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- mirror. Q ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they The rear turn assist is always automatically activated have trained technicians and the necessary parts together with the Lane Change Assist. The driver is R and tools. supported by Rear Turn Assist until the Lane Change S Assist speed range is reached after driving off. When the turn signal is on, the Rear Turn Assist de- T tects objects located next to and behind your ve- U hicle, but only at the side on which the turn signal Fig. 86: Radar sensors in rear bumper has been activated. If a potential hazard is detected, V the respective warning indicator on the door mirror W Responding to warning symbols lights up. If your own calculated driving path crosses Always heed any warning and information messages that of a detected vehicle on the side of the vehicle X displayed in the vehicle. on which the turn signal has been activated, the re- Y > Please see chapter "Warning and information spective warning indicator on the door mirror will messages" on page 244. flash brightly and briefly several times. Z

143 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

A Rear collision warning Additional information B If the radar sensors in the rear of the vehicle detect vehicles traveling behind, the system calculates the Driving situations C probability of a rear-end collision. The following driving situations describe possible scenarios and the associated Lane Change Assist D If a collision risk is detected, the emergency flasher comes on to alert the driver in the vehicle traveling and rear turn assist warning indicators. E behind to the imminent danger situation. Vehicles approaching fast F In this case, the emergency flasher could flash faster than it normally would when switched on manually. G H Display elements Lane Change Assist provides information using two I indicator stages - an information stage and a warn- J ing stage - which are activated as appropriate, depending on whether or not the turn signal was set. K

L Information stage Fig. 87: Indicator on door mirror While the turn signal is not on, Lane Change Assist M provides information about detected vehicles that it Switching Lane Change Assist on N regards as critical in the event of a possible lane change. The indicator on the relevant mirror lights up and off O dimly. Lane Change Assist can be switched on and off on P the central display. Warning stage e e e Q If the turn signal is on and Lane Change Assist has Assist Lane Change Assist R detected a vehicle on this side that it regards as When Lane Change Assist is on, the symbol Fig. 88: Vehicle approaching at speed critical, the warning indicator on the door mirror on appears on the instrument cluster. S this side will flash brightly and briefly several times. A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light up T This is an indication for you to check the driving situation by looking in the door mirror and looking over Adjusting display brightness of The sensors have not detected a vehicle. There is no U your shoulder. Lane Change Assist indication on the door mirror. V The brightness of the display in the side view mirrors B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage is adapted automatically to the ambient brightness. A fast approaching vehicle – in the left lane in the W The basic brightness can also be set. example – is detected. This vehicle is already con- X sidered critical for changing lanes due to the signifi- e e Assist e e Assistance system cant speed difference, even though it is still a good Y settings e Lane Change Assist e LED distance away. The warning indicator on the door mirror lights up. Z brightness C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage 144 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B, C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage briefly several times. Lane Change Assist is inform- A the warning indicator on the door mirror flashes If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B, ing you that you may have overlooked a vehicle. B briefly several times. Lane Change Assist is inform- the warning indicator on the door mirror flashes ing you that you may have overlooked a vehicle. briefly several times. Lane Change Assist is inform- Vehicles falling back quickly C ing you that you may have overlooked a vehicle. Vehicles approaching slowly D Vehicles falling back slowly E F G H I J K L M N O Fig. 91: Vehicle falling back fast A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light P Fig. 89: Vehicle approaching slowly up Q A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light Fig. 90: Vehicle falling back slowly The vehicle you have overtaken is not yet detected. up A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light There is no indication on the door mirror. R A slowly approaching vehicle – in the left lane in the up B – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light S example – is detected. Due to the small speed dif- The vehicle you have overtaken is not yet detected. up T ference and the large distance, there is no indication There is no indication on the door mirror. The vehicle on the right that is falling back fast on the door mirror. B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage (speed difference of more than approx. U B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage 9 mph (15 km/h)) – in the right lane in the example The vehicle on the right that is falling back slowly V The distance from the slow approaching vehicle is (speed difference of less than approx. – is detected, but is not regarded as critical for now smaller. The warning indicator on the door mir- 9 mph (15 km/h)) – in the right lane in the example changing lanes because it is falling back fast. There W ror lights up. Only when Lane Change Assist regards – is detected. The warning indicator on the door is no indication on the door mirror. the speed difference and distance as critical for mirror lights up. C – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light X changing lanes will this be indicated on the door C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage up Y mirror. You are alerted to every vehicle detected by If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B, Z Lane Change Assist when they are in the blind spot. the warning indicator on the door mirror flashes 145 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

A If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B, results in their own calculated driving path crossing the warning indicator is still not activated on the that of a detected vehicle, the warning indicator on B door mirror. the door mirror flashes briefly several times and then C comes on. This warns you of a potential collision Starting to turn off with a vehicle that may have been overlooked. D E Cornering When driving around a bend, Lane Change Assist F may react to a vehicle driving in the next lane but G one and the warning indicator in the door mirror may light up. H Lane Change Assist cannot detect vehicles in tight I bends. e Be particularly careful when driving around J bends. K Lane width L Fig. 93: Lane width and detection area When driving on narrow lanes, the detection area M may cover even more lanes, particularly when driving at the edge of a lane. In such situations, vehicles N driving two lanes away may be detected and Lane O Change Assist may switch to the information or warning stage. P Fig. 92: Starting to turn off Likewise, when driving on very wide lanes, vehicles Q A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light in the adjacent lane may not be detected as they are up outside the detection area. R No turn signal has been actuated, therefore the rear S turn assist is not active after starting to turn off and the motorbike located in the blind spot is not de- T tected. A fast approaching vehicle may also not be U detected. There is no indication on the door mirror. B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage V If the relevant turn signal is switched on in driving W situation A, the warning indicator on the door mirror lights up. The Rear Turn Assist alerts you to the fact X that you may have overlooked a vehicle. Y C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage If, in driving situation B, the driver has initiated Z turning off by steering to the relevant side and this 146 Lane Keep Assist

Lane Keep Assist1 place at all. System limitations A e Drive especially carefully and keep your hands on Physical limits and sys- WARNING B General Safety Instructions the steering wheel at all times in order to always tem limits be ready to steer. C Lack of attention In some situations, the system may not detect the WARNING e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and D the vehicle surroundings. lane correctly, corrective steering intervention may The system has a limited ability to help the driver e If a warning appears on the instrument cluster, not be enough to keep the vehicle in the lane or the E keep the vehicle in its lane, but it does not drive it- take over control of the vehicle immediately. function may change suddenly from active to pas- F self. The driver remains responsible at all times when sive. There is a risk of accident! Such situations Insufficient corrective include: G driving, such as staying in the lane, even if the sys- WARNING tem is active. The system does not replace the driv- steering intervention – When increased attention is required on the part H er's attentiveness. of the driver Corrective steering intervention alone may not be I e Drive especially carefully and keep your hands on – During sporty driving sufficient to keep the vehicle in the driving lane in the steering wheel at all times in order to always – In adverse weather conditions (e.g. fog, snow or the case of track ruts, winding roads, inclined road J be ready to steer. heavy rain) surfaces or a crosswind. K e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and – In unfavorable road conditions (including bad e the vehicle surroundings. In such situations, assist by steering actively. roads, pot holes and dirty road surface) L e e If a warning appears on the instrument cluster, Drive with extreme care. – In areas with road construction e M take over control of the vehicle immediately. Always hold the steering wheel with both hands. – When approaching humps and dips e Adapt your driving speed to road and weather – In urban traffic N conditions. Information – On winding and narrow country roads O e Do not attach any objects to the steering wheel. e Do not use the system in these situations. e If there is a fault in the system or if Lane Keep P No or very little steering Assist does not function as described in this WARNING Obscured camera view Q intervention section, do not use Lane Keep Assist. Visit an WARNING authorized Porsche dealer. R In the event of heavy braking, corrective steering in- Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche The camera's view can be impaired by different intervention might not take place. Likewise, in the dealer, as they have trained technicians and the fluencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy water S necessary parts and tools. case of active steering by the driver, corrective spray, oncoming headlights or damage). Sometimes, T steering intervention may be reduced or not take the camera cannot detect the lane markings, or cannot detect them correctly. When this happens, U no steering intervention or an unexpected steering V intervention can occur. Steering intervention can only take place on the side where a lane marking has W been detected. Other road structures or objects may X be incorrectly identified as lane markings as well. Y Z 1. Available in some countries 147 Lane Keep Assist

A This can lead to unexpected or missing steering in- Operating principle overridden by the driver, an additional warning is terventions/acoustic warnings. provided via a warning tone (if active). B e Drive with extreme care. C e Keep the direction of travel and the lane lines in Behavior if there is no steering activity The driver's steering behavior is monitored when D view at all times. e Clean the camera lens regularly and keep it free Lane Keep Assist is switched on and active. If there E of snow and ice. is no steering activity (e.g. hands not on the steering wheel or only resting lightly), a warning appears in F e Do not cover the camera lens. e Check the windshield for damage in the area of the instrument cluster. The system prompts the G the camera lens at regular intervals. driver to actively take over the steering. If the driver does not react to the takeover prompt, the system Fig. 94: Windshield camera H switches to a passive state. I The system is available to a limited extent Lane Keep Assist helps the driver keep the vehicle in The system function may be passive in the following the lane. The system uses the front camera (A) to J Display elements situations: detect the course of the road ahead based on the lane markings and initiates corrective steering inter- K – The vehicle speed is below the activation speed vention when the vehicle approaches a detected lane of approx. 40 mph (65 km/h). L marking and is in danger of leaving the driving lane. – The lane markings of the lane currently driven in However, the driver can override this steering inter- M are not detected (e.g. due to snow, dirt, wet vention at any time. conditions, oncoming headlights or driving close N If the vehicle crosses a lane marking without acti- to the vehicle ahead). vating a turn signal, the system can alert the driver O – The quality of the lane markings is not suffi- acoustically. The acoustic warning must be switched ciently good for activation of Lane Keep Assist. P on in the central display for this to happen. If the – The radius of a bend is too small. vehicle crosses a lane marking after the driver has Q – The distance to the nearest lane marking is too activated a turn signal, the system does not issue a R great. warning or steer because the lane change is inter- – The lane markings are too close to the vehicle. preted as intentional in this case. S – Temporarily in conjunction with an extremely The system is designed for driving on highways and T dynamic driving style. well-surfaced country roads in a speed range of ap- – The turn signal is on. prox. 40 mph – 156 mph (65 km/h – 250 km/h). U – The system has detected that your hands are not on the steering wheel. Vehicles with Lane Change Assist V Fig. 95: Lane Keep Assist display If the vehicle is equipped with Lane Change Assist, W Responding to warning symbols the active system warns the driver through correc- A Display of driving lane borderlines (only in vehicles with automatic cruise control (ACC)) tive steering intervention when changing lanes in a X Always heed any warning and information messages B Status display displayed in the vehicle. potentially critical situation. Steering intervention Y > Please see chapter "Warning and information occurs even if the turn signal is activated for the di- Z messages" on page 244. rection in question. If the steering intervention is

148 Lane Keep Assist

System status symbols The driver assistance system selected is dis- A played on the instrument cluster. B Lane Status Meaning 3. Select Lane Keep Assist using the rotary knob on Keep display the steering wheel and press to confirm. C Assist D display Setting acoustic warning The acoustic warning can be switched on and off. E No No Lane Keep Assist is The warning tone volume can also be selected. F display display switched off. e e Assist e e Assistance system set- G Lane Keep Assist system tings e Lane departure warning H is engaged and passive. I J Lane Keep Assist is switched on and active K on both sides. L M The lane markings can be detected on one side. N O

Lane Keep Assist per- P forms a corrective steer- Q ing intervention (to the right, for example). R S When Active Lane Keeping is switched on at the same time, a combined display of both functions can T also be shown in place of the Lane Keep Assist U symbol. V Switching Lane Keep Assist on W and off X 1. Press the R button on the control lever. Driver assistance systems are switched on. Y 2. Press the S button on the control lever. Z

149 Lights

A Lights B Brief overview – Lights C D This brief overview does not replace the compre- hensive descriptions. Safety messages and warn- E ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief F overview. G H I J K L M N O Fig. 96: Light control panel P What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? Q Switch on automatic headlights > p. 151 R e Press the button. The button lights up green. The light indicator lights up. S Automatic headlights and Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus, depending on T equipment) are switched on.

U Switch on parking light e Press button . – V License plate light, instrument lighting, and parking light are switched on.

W Switch on low beam manually bb Ready for operation. – X e Press button . The button lights up green. The light indicator goes out. Y The low beam is switched on. Automatic headlights, daytime running lights and Porsche Z Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus, depending on equipment) are switched off.

150 Lights

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A B Switch on rear fog light e Press button . – C Switch exterior lights off completely e Press button for approx. 2 seconds. > p. 151 D The green light on the button goes out. The exterior lights remain completely switched off until a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) or a distance of 330 ft. (100 m) has been exceeded. E F General safety instructions – Where there are poorly lit road users, such as The button lights up green. The light indicator G cyclists. Driving without lights lights up. H WARNING – On narrow curves, steep crests or hollows. The low beams are switched on automatically in the – In poorly lit areas. following situations: I If you drive without lights, this may significantly re- – Where there are strong reflectors, such as road – Dusk J strict your visibility and also the ability of other road signs. – Darkness users to see your vehicle. – If the windshield is obscured by mist, dirt, ice or – Driving through tunnels K e stickers in the area of the camera. Carefully monitor the automatic headlights and – Rain L switch the low beams on manually if necessary. e Drive with extreme care. When low beams are automatically turned on, the e Observe country-specific laws for driving with e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and M button lights up green. The light indicator is lit low beams. the vehicle surroundings. N e If necessary, manually adjust the high beam ac- up. Lack of attention when O WARNING cording to the light, visibility and traffic driving with High Beam conditions. Information P Assist Fog is not automatically detected. Q Despite High Beam Assist, the responsibility for Responding to warning symbols e In the event of fog, switch on the low beams and driving remains with the driver, such as for manually Always observe any warning and information mes- rear fog light manually. R adjusting the high beam according to the light, visi- sages displayed. S bility and traffic conditions. The system is not a > Please see chapter "Warning and information Switch exterior lights off completely substitute for careful attention on the part of the T messages" on page 244. e Press the button for about 2 seconds. driver. Manual intervention may be required in the The green light on the button goes out. U following situations: Switching automatic headlights/ The automatic light is turned on once again in the – In unfavorable weather conditions, such as rain, V following circumstances1: fog, snow, ice or heavy spray. exterior lights on and off – as of a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) W – On streets where oncoming traffic is party hid- Switching on automatic headlights X den, such as on highways. e Press the button. Y Z 1. Country-dependent 151 Lights

A – after the exterior lighting has been shut off, once Dynamic cornering light Information a distance of more than 330 ft. (100 m) has B Above a speed of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h), the low been driven beam or high beam headlights are swiveled in the To avoid impairing the detection performance: C direction of the curve, depending on the speed of the e Do not cover the camera area on the interior Information mirror with objects (e.g. stickers). D vehicle and the steering wheel angle. e The camera must always be kept free of dirt, ice E The vehicle exterior lights can mist up due to tem- High beam assist and snow. perature and humidity. This misting will dry off after F a sufficient distance has been driven. G Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED matrix H Adjusting Automatic Coming headlights I Home lights bb Automatic headlights switched on. bb J Automatic headlights switched on. PDLS Plus with LED matrix headlights also includes The vehicle lights can be switched on when getting the functions of PDLS Plus with LED headlights, but K in and out of the vehicle. has a higher light output. L The following lights are switched on when the last Fig. 97: Windshield camera vehicle door is closed or after the vehicle has been Light sources of other road users and street lighting M unlocked: Operating turn signal and high can be detected by the camera (A) in the vicinity of beam lever N – Daytime running lights the interior mirror. – Courtesy low beam O When other road users are detected, a continuous – Front and rear position lights shift of the light/dark threshold of the driving light is P – License plate light performed in several phases between low beam and Q They are switched off again when operational read- high beam illumination. The level of light is chosen iness is switched on or the automatic headlights are so that the light/dark threshold of the driving lights R switched off. reaches to the nearest vehicle detected. S The light delay time can be set in the central display. High beam illumination is switched to low beam when the camera detects street lights. T e e Settings e Vehicle e Light and High beam is switched on as of 40 mph (60 km/h) Fig. 98: Actuate turn signals, high beam and flasher U visibility e Exterior lights e Light delay time and off below 25 mph (40 km/h). High beam assist can be activated or deactivated on 1 Left turn signal/parking light V the central display: 2 Right turn signal/parking light Porsche Dynamic Light System 3 High beam W 4 Flasher Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED e e Settings e Vehicle e Light and X visibility e Exterior lights e Dynamic high headlights beam Activating the turn signals Y bb Automatic headlights switched on. e Push the lever to the pressure point 1 or 2. The Z turn signal remains active until the lever is

152 Lights

returned to the home position either manually or High Beam Assist can only be deactivated when Switching the emergency flasher on and off A automatically when the steering wheel is turned. the light indicator lights up. e Press the switch on the center console. B Comfort turn signals If the prerequisites for the high beam assist have not All turn signal lights and the switch flash. C e Press lever once at pressure point 1 or 2. been met, high beam can be switched on and off Emergency stopping DANGER The turn signal lights flash three times. manually. D e In order to interrupt comfort turn signals, press Switching on manually Other vehicles could collide with your vehicle if you E the lever in the opposite direction. e Press the lever to position 3 twice. are parked in a dangerous position. In this case: F Switching high beam on and off The light indicator lights up. e Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency re- G bb Vehicles without Porsche Dynamic Light System Switching off manually pairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on Plus (PDLS Plus). e Pull the lever to position 4 once. the emergency flasher and mark the car with H road flares or other warning devices. – or – The light indicator goes out. I High Beam Assist is deactivated. e Do not remain in the car. Someone approaching from the rear may not realize your vehicle is J Switching on Activating the flasher stopped and cause a collision. e Press the lever to position 3 once. e Briefly pull the lever to position 4 once. K The light indicator lights up. The light indicator comes on briefly. L Changing bulbs Switching off Switching the parking light on and off M e Pull the lever to position 4 once. The vehicle lighting as well as the interior lights are bb Driving readiness switched off. equipped with long-life LEDs. The LEDs cannot be N The light indicator goes out. e Press the lever past pressure point 2 or 1 to changed individually. O switch on the right or left parking light Removing and installing lamps involves a great deal Switching High Beam Assist on and off respectively. of effort. P bb Vehicles with Porsche Dynamic Light System If the parking light is on, a message appears on e Always have faulty bulbs and lamps replaced or Q Plus (PDLS Plus). the instrument cluster after the door is opened. repaired by an authorized Porsche dealer. Por- bb Automatic headlights switched on. sche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, R bb High Beam Assist is activated. as they have trained technicians and the neces- Switching the emergency flasher S Switching on on and off sary parts and tools. e T Press the lever to position 3 once. NOTICE The light indicator comes on. Depending on U various positions such as the position of other The headlights can be damaged as a result of abra- V vehicles and the speed, the system switches sion and excessive temperatures. from low beam to high beam and back again. If W e Do not install any coverings (e. g. stone guards or high beam is activated, the light indicator films) in the headlight area. X lights up. Y Switching off Z e Pull the lever to position 4 once. Fig. 99: Switching the emergency flasher on and off 153 Luggage Compartment

A Luggage Compartment changes or in accidents. Securing loads with tie-down belts B e Never transport objects that are not secured e Do not use elastic belts or straps to tie down a Stowing loads (accidents, braking, corners). load. C e Always transport loads in the luggage compart- e Do not route belts and straps over sharp edges. Changed vehicle han- WARNING ment, never in the passenger compartment (e.g. e Cross the belts over the load. D dling when loaded on or in front of the seats). e Only tension belts by hand. Do not use additional E The handling changes depending on the load e Support the load against the seat backrests tensioning aids (e.g. ratchet). F condition. wherever possible. Always lock the backrests in- e Observe the operating instructions and informa- to place. e Adapt your driving style to the altered vehicle tion for the tie-down equipment. G e Only transport heavy objects with the rear seat handling. backrests upright and engaged. H e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight or axle Opening and locking the hood and e Place the load behind unoccupied seats when- load. I ever possible. trunk lid > Please see chapter "Hood" on page 124. J Unsecured, incorrectly e Stow heavy objects as far forward as possible on WARNING the floor, with lightweight objects behind them. > Please see chapter "Trunk lid" on page 229. K secured or incorrectly positioned loads e Do not transport objects on the parcel shelf. L e If the rear seats are not occupied, the backrests An unsecured, incorrectly secured or incorrectly can be additionally secured with the seat belts. M positioned load can slip out of place and endanger Simply cross the outer seat belts and insert each N the vehicle occupants during braking, direction into the opposite buckle. e Do not transport heavy objects in open storage O compartments. P e Always keep the covers of the lockable storage compartments closed while driving. Q Incorrect tire pressure R WARNING S An incorrect tire pressure can impair driving safety. T e Adapt the tire pressure to the load. U e After changing the tire pressure, you must also V update the setting for the Tire Pressure Moni- toring System. W The maximum permissible load on the cargo area X floor is 440 lbs (200 kg). The weight must be dis- Y tributed evenly over the entire cargo area. Z

154 Luggage Compartment

Removing and stowing tire seal- Removing tool box and tire filling compressor A ant (Tire Mobility System - TMS), e Remove cover on plastic box C and take out the B equipment you want. tool box and equipment for minor C repairs D E F G H I J K

Fig. 102: Plastic box for tool box and tire filling compressor L A Tool box M B Emergency release tool for charge port door C Open-end wrench N Fig. 101: Plastic box for tire sealant (Tire Mobility System - D Tire filling compressor TMS), towing hook and first aid kit (depending on country) E Screwdriver O F Socket for security wheel bolt Fig. 100: Plastic boxes in front luggage compartment A Tire sealant (Tire Mobility System - TMS) P B Towing hook A Warning triangle (depending on country) C First aid kit (depending on country) Q B Plastic box for tire sealant (Tire Mobility System - TMS), towing hook and first aid kit (depending on country) R C Plastic box for tool box and tire filling compressor S Removing warning triangle (depending on T country) U The warning triangle A is located at the rear of the luggage compartment. V W Removing tire sealant (Tire Mobility System - TMS), towing hook and first aid kit (depend- X ing on country) Y e Remove cover on plastic box B and take out the equipment you want. Z 155 Luggage Compartment

A Installing and removing the plastic Installing the plastic cover in the front lug- Opening and closing storage gage compartment B cover in the front luggage space floor compartment C Opening the cargo area floor D Removing the plastic cover in the front luggage compartment E F G H I J K L M

N Fig. 104: Closing the plastic cover O 1. Insert the plastic cover with the guides at the rear edge and position it on the holders. Lower Fig. 105: Opening trunk space floor P the cover at the front. e Pull on the strap to lift up the floor board in the Q Fig. 103: Releasing and lifting the plastic cover 2. Ensure that the centering pins on the underside trunk compartment. of the cover engage in the appropriate guides. R 1. Lift the plastic cover until the catches audibly Press the cover downward at the handle re- Closing the cargo area floor S disengage. cesses until the catch audibly engages. 2. Pull the plastic cover forward slightly and lift it at e Use the straps to lower the floor board in the T the front. trunk compartment. 3. Remove the plastic cover. U Using the ski bag V Skis or snowboards can be readily transported with- W out damaging the interior space. X Y Z

156 Luggage Compartment

NOTICE compression strap. The ski bindings must be A behind this strap. B Risk of damage to the ski bag from sharp edges on 4. Fold down the through-loading cover between the load (e.g. snowboard). the rear seats. C 5. Hook the snap hooks on the lashing straps into e Protect sharp edges on the load. D the lashing rings. 6. Pull the lashing straps tight. E Stowing the snowboard or skis in the ski bag F Using lashing rings G H I J K L M N O P Q

Fig. 106: Using the ski bag R The ski bag is stowed in the packing bag provided for Fig. 107: Using lashing rings S it in the trunk. In order to ensure that the payload in the trunk space T 1. Fit edge protectors to the snowboard or skis. does not slide around, strap belts can be connected 2. Place the snowboard or skis in the ski bag and to the rings. U close it. The skis must be placed into the ski bag e Pull on all rings evenly when tightening. V with the ends facing the front of the vehicle. The W zipper of the ski bag must be facing toward the Information rear of the vehicle. X 3. Strap the ski firmly in place using the The tie-down rings are not designed to restrain a heavy load in an accident. Y Z

157 Mirrors

A Mirrors NOTICE Adjusting door mirrors B Using door mirrors Risk of damage to the door mirrors when washing C Incorrect assessment of the vehicle in car washes. WARNING D traffic situation due to e Fold in door mirrors before using the car wash. E distorted representation of surroundings in door F mirrors

G Vehicles or objects appear smaller in convex mirrors H and further away than they are in reality. This may lead to incorrect assessment of the driving situation I and an accident. J e Take account of distortion when estimating the distance of vehicles behind you and when K parking. L e Use the interior mirror for judging distance as M well. Fig. 109: Adjusting door mirrors N Escaping electrolyte fluid CAUTION bb Operational readiness established. O – or – P Electrolyte fluid may escape from a broken mirror. Vehicle shut off, driver or passenger door not yet This fluid causes irritation to the skin and eyes. Fig. 108: Operation of door mirror opened (10 minutes maximum). Q e In the event of contact with the skin or eyes, A Selecting the door mirror on the left-hand side 1. Press button A to select the left door mirror or R immediately rinse off the electrolyte fluid using B Selecting the door mirror on the right-hand side button B to select the right door mirror. clean water. C Adjusting door mirrors As long as the symbol on the selected button D Folding door mirrors in and out (depending on S e Seek medical attention from a doctor if is lit up in red, the corresponding exterior mirror equipment) T necessary. can be adjusted. 2. Move the glass of the door mirrors to the correct U position by pressing the adjustment button C. NOTICE V If the electric function fails W Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic com- e Adjust the mirrors by pressing on the mirror ponents and clothing. surface. X Electrolyte fluid can only be removed while it is still Y wet. Z e Clean affected parts with water.

158 Mirrors

Folding door mirrors in and out Folding door mirrors in and out from outside Information A the vehicle B The door mirrors can be folded in when the vehicle is The door mirrors do not fold out automatically after locked. the vehicle has been switched on if they had previ- C ously been folded in manually using the D button. . e Press and hold the button on the vehicle key D for at least 1 second. On vehicles with Comfort Access: Touch the E Storing door mirror settings proximity sensor on the driver’s door handle for F at least 1 second. In vehicles with the memory package, individual The door mirrors fold in. settings for the door mirrors can be saved to the G memory buttons in the driver's door and on the ve- Folding door mirrors out automatically hicle key. H e Press the power button and switch on the > Please see chapter "Personal settings" on I vehicle. page 168. The door mirrors fold out automatically. J K Folding door mirrors in and out automatically Switching automatic dimming of (depending on equipment) door mirrors on and off L The automatic folding in and out function of the door The door mirrors are dimmed automatically, together M Fig. 110: Folding door mirrors in and out mirrors can be activated in the central display. with the interior mirror. > Please see chapter "Switching automatic dim- N Activating the function Folding in door mirrors manually ming of door mirrors on and off" on page 159. O e With your hand, swivel the mirror housing diag- e e e Vehicle settings e Vehicle locking onally upward as far as possible. P systems e Fold door mirrors when locking Swiveling mirror glass downward Q Folding out door mirror manually as a parking aid Folding door mirrors in automatically In vehicles with the memory package, the mirror e With your hand, swivel the mirror housing diag- R bb Function activated. glass on the passenger's side swivels slightly down- onally downward as far as possible. > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on ward when reverse gear is engaged, so that the area S page 234. around the curb comes into view. Folding door mirrors in and out electrically T e (depending on equipment) Lock the vehicle. The door mirrors fold in. U bb Maximum speed approx. 30 mph (50 km/h). V e Press the D button. Folding door mirrors out automatically Both door mirrors fold out/in. bb Function activated. W e Unlock the vehicle. If the electric folding function fails X The door mirrors fold out. e Fold mirrors in/out manually. Y Z

159 Mirrors

A The mirror glass on the passenger's side swivels Dimming interior mirror manually downward. B Making individual adjustments to the position of C the lowered mirror glass: D e Move the glass of the door mirror into the appropriate position by pressing the adjustment E button C. F In vehicles with the memory package, this setting is saved to the memory buttons in the driver's door or G on the vehicle key. H For information on storing and retrieving the vehicle settings: I > Please see chapter "Personal settings" on J page 168. K Moving mirror glass to the initial position L Fig. 111: Swiveling mirror glass downward as a parking aid The mirror glass swivels back into its initial position: – after a time delay when reverse gear is disen- M Swiveling mirror glass downward gaged, or Fig. 112: Dimming interior mirror manually N automatically – immediately when the vehicle has reached a When setting the mirror, the dimming lever A must Shifting the passenger side mirror glass downward speed of more than 9 mph (15 km/h). O point toward the vehicle interior. can also be activated in the central display. Manually moving the mirror glass on the passeng- P e Initial position – swivel lever in the direction of Activating the function er's side to the initial position: the vehicle interior. Q e Press button A for the door mirror on the driver's e Dimmed position – swivel lever toward the e e e Vehicle settings e Light and side. windshield. R visibility e Reverse gear driving options e Shift S mirror glass down when driving in reverse Use the automatic dimming fea- T bb Vehicle switched on. ture of the mirrors U bb Reverse gear engaged. When bright light shines on the surface of the inte- bb Function activated. rior mirror, the exterior and interior mirror are auto- V matically dimmed. W Swiveling mirror glass downward manually The mirrors do not dim if reverse gear has been se- 1. Engage reverse gear. lected or the interior lighting has been turned on. X Light indicator B on button A for adjusting the The light coming in on the interior mirror or through Y door mirror on the driver’s side lights up. the front windshield on the front light sensor may 2. Press button D for adjustment of the door mirror not be obstructed. Z on the passenger's side. 160 Mirrors e Do not put any stickers on the front windshield in A front of the interior mirror or on the rear windshield. B e Do not transport any luggage on the hat rack. C Escaping electrolyte fluid CAUTION D E Electrolyte fluid may escape from a broken mirror. F This fluid causes irritation to the skin and eyes. e In the event of contact with the skin or eyes, G immediately rinse off the electrolyte fluid using H clean water. e Seek medical attention from a doctor if I necessary. J K NOTICE L Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic com- M ponents and clothing. Electrolyte fluid can only be removed while it is still N wet. O e Clean affected parts with water. P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

161 Night View Assist

A Night View Assist – Adverse weather conditions, such as heavy rain, In vehicles with LED matrix headlights, the head- snowfall and ice formation, can impair operation lights flash at the endangered person in order to en- B General safety instructions of the camera as well as detection of collision hance detection. Even with this warning, the driver C hazards. may still have to swerve or brake sharply in order to Lack of attention and WARNING – In complex driving situations, the pedestrian and avoid a collision. The warning time varies according D failure to detect objects animal warning system can trigger unintentional to the traffic situation and the driver's behavior. E via Night View Assist warnings owing to internal limitations of the system. Animal warning F Night View Assist is a support system and cannot e If the system detects a potential collision with large alert the driver of a collision under all circumstances. Observe the direction of travel and the relevant G area around the vehicle closely at all times. wildlife outside urban areas, e.g. deer, it can warn the There is a risk of accident. driver with a warning tone and a display on the in- H Responsibility for braking in time and for appropriate strument cluster. At the same time, the camera im- I vehicle lighting always lies with the driver. Responding to warning symbols age appears with the animal marked in red. e Drive with extreme care. Always observe any warning and information mes- The animal warning is triggered if an animal is lo- J e Always check the traffic situation and the area sages displayed in the vehicle. cated in the driving lane or is in close proximity. K around the vehicle. > Please see chapter "Warning and information The animal warning is deactivated automatically in messages" on page 244. urban areas in order to prevent it from being trig- L Night View Assist un- gered by leashed dogs, for example. CAUTION M available or only available Operating principle to a limited extent N The thermal imaging camera in the front bumper Shocks or damage to the bumper, e.g. through provides a differential thermal image of the sur- O parking collisions, can displace the camera. This may rounding area that can be displayed on the instru- P impair the performance of the system. ment cluster. The system can detect persons and animals beyond the area illuminated by the head- e Q Visit an qualified specialist repair shop. Porsche lights and highlight them in the camera image. recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as Night View Assist detects persons and animals when R they have trained technicians and the necessary it is sufficiently dark and at an ambient temperature S parts and tools. below 82 °F (28 °C) in a vehicle speed range up to 156 mph (250 km/h). T The camera image deviates greatly from the image U System limitations perceived by the human eye. System is only available V WARNING to a limited extent Pedestrian warning W If the system detects a potential collision with a pe- The assistance provided by the system cannot be X destrian, it can warn the driver with a warning tone guaranteed in certain situations. Such situations and a display on the instrument cluster. The camera Y include: image is displayed with the person marked in red. – It will not always be possible to detect pedes- Z A pedestrian warning is emitted if a pedestrian is trians and animals. standing in or moving into the driving lane. 162 Night View Assist

Display elements Switching Night View Assist on A and off B e e Assist e Basic Assist e Night View Assist C D Information E Switching it off only deactivates the warning func- F tion and the marking of pedestrians and wild animals. It is still possible to display the image in the G instrument cluster. H I Setting warning time and image contrast J e e e e Assist Assistance system settings K e Night View Assist L M Fig. 113: Night View Assist Cleaning the Night View Assist N 1 Pedestrian and animal warning camera 2 Thermal image display bb Low beam or high beam activated. O Once operational readiness is established, the cam- P Symbols era is automatically cleaned at every first and tenth activation of the windshield washer system. Q > Please see chapter "Spraying and wiping" on Symbol Meaning page 266. R When the camera image is displayed, S Information it indicates that persons or animals T cannot be detected reliably owing to The system has an internal heating system that au- U the prevailing ambient conditions tomatically heats the camera to prevent or remove (outside temperature and bright- icing when below a certain temperature. V ness), and no warning function is available. The symbol is also dis- W played when the system is switched X off. Y Z

163 ParkAssist

A ParkAssist System limitations Distance measurement B The system cannot detect the following: General safety instructions – Sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. wintery condi- C tions, powder snow, clothing made from fabric, Lack of attention D WARNING hide or fur). – Sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfaces, E The system must not induce you to take risks with flat enameled surfaces). F your safety. The driver is always responsible for tak- – Very thin obstacles (e.g. thin posts). ing due care. The system is no substitute for the – External ultrasound waves (e.g. air brakes from G driver's attentiveness. other vehicles, road sweeping machines, pneu- H e Make sure that no persons, animals, or obstacles matic hammers) can interfere with obstacle are within maneuvering range of the vehicle. detection. I e When maneuvering, stop the vehicle if there are – Obstacles, if the sensors or cameras are very J persons or animals in the red area. dirty or covered, e.g. by dust, dirt, snow or ice.

K Restricted detection WARNING Functions L ranges of sensors ParkAssist visually and audibly indicates to the driver the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle M Sensors do not cover all parts of the surrounding during parking and maneuvering. Fig. 114: Ultrasound sensors for distance measurement area. Persons, animals and obstacles may not be N ParkAssist's visual parking assistance is displayed on detected in this area or may only be detected to a The ultrasound sensors A in the front and rear the central display. Obstacles located in front of and O limited extent. There is a risk of injury and damage. bumpers measure the distance to the nearest ob- behind the vehicle are indicated by means of differ- stacle. A detected obstacle is reported by an inter- e P Always check the traffic situation and the area ent colored fields on the display. These fields show mittent tone. The intervals shorten as the vehicle around the vehicle. the contour of the obstacles as well as their distance Q approaches the obstacle. When the distance is less from the vehicle. than approx. 12 in. (30 cm), a continuous tone Adverse environmental R CAUTION sounds. conditions S Obstacles above and below the sensors cannot be In the event of adverse environmental conditions, detected. T the system will be restricted or not available: There is You can adjust the volume of the warning tones in U a risk of injuries and damage. the central display. > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on e Only use the system in suitable environmental V page 234. conditions. W e Adapt your driving style to the visibility, weather, Activating ParkAssist X road and traffic conditions. Y Automatically bb Ignition switched on. Z

164 ParkAssist bb Vehicle speed is less than approx. Color Front Rear distance Setting ParkAssist A 10 mph (15 km/h). distance B bb Reverse gear engaged. e e Assist e e Assistance system settings – or – White Distance to obstacles that are e ParkAssist C bb Distance in front is less than approx. not in the path of the vehicle. D 32 in. (80 cm). Rear view camera – or – Orange < < E 47 in. (120 71 in. (180 bb Rolling backward is detected. General safety instructions F cm) cm) Risk of injury due to dis- Manually WARNING G Red < < torted display H e e Assistance e ParkAssist 16 in. (40 cm) 16 in. (40 cm) The objects shown by the camera appear distorted. I Red plus con- < < The image from the rear view camera does not show Central display tinuous tone 12 in. (30 cm) 12 in. (30 cm) the entire area behind the vehicle. J e Always pay attention to the entire vehicle K Symbol Meaning surroundings. e Make sure that no persons, animals, or obstacles L Deactivate ParkAssist for the current are within maneuvering range of the vehicle. M parking procedure. Deactivation is N canceled if a speed of System limitations 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded or if O transmission range R is selected The system cannot be used or can only be used to a limited extent if the camera is heavily soiled or cov- P again. ered by dust, dirt, snow or ice, for example. Q Switch off the acoustic warning. Functions R The rear view camera facilitates monitoring of the S area behind the vehicle during parking maneuvers. T For information on operating the central display: The picture from the rear view camera is displayed > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication on the central display. U Management (PCM)" on page 173. Activating the rear view camera V Fig. 115: ParkAssist display Deactivating ParkAssist Automatically W bb Operational readiness established and transmis- e In the central display, tap . sion range R engaged. X – or – – or – Y e Select transmission range P. bb Rolling backward is detected. Z

165 ParkAssist

A Manually Surround View B e In the central display: e Assistance e General safety instructions ParkAssist C Risk of injury due to dis- WARNING D torted display Information E The objects shown by the cameras appear distorted. Guide lines are superimposed on the rear camera F Many of the screen windows do not show the entire view. area around the vehicle. G These guide lines indicate the direction the vehicle e Always check the entire area around the vehicle. can follow with the steering wheel in the current e Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles H position. The guide lines change as the position of are within the maneuvering range of the vehicle. I the front wheels changes.

J System limitations Automatically deactivating rear view camera K The system cannot be used or can only be used to a bb Speed is higher than 9 mph (15 km/h). limited extent if the cameras are heavily soiled or L Fig. 116: Position of Surround View cameras Manually covered by dust, dirt, snow or ice, for example. M e Press button P. A Camera in the center of the front bumper Functions B Camera in both door mirrors N C Camera between the license plate lights in the tailgate. Cleaning the rear view camera Surround View provides a bird's eye view of the ve- O hicle and covers the area around the vehicle. Using e Briefly touch the button once on the rear of the cameras, obstacles or markings as well as the Activating Surround View P the vehicle in the camera display. exact position of the vehicle are detected. When Automatically Q Surround View is active, the courtesy lights are bb ParkAssist is active. Information switched on for better illumination. Manually R e If windshield is very dirty, repeat the cleaning 1. e Assistance e ParkAssist S process. T e Persistent dirt (e.g. insect remains) should be 2. Select the desired view. removed regularly. U The symbol for the active view is highlighted in blue. V W X Y Z

166 ParkAssist

Symbol Meaning Deactivating Surround View A e Deactivate ParkAssist. B Parking Switch view by touching the front or C rear camera symbol. D

Panorama E Switch view by touching the front or F rear camera symbol. G Side H Switch view by touching the front or I rear camera symbol. J 3D view K – Switch perspective by touching one of the side camera symbols. L – Select all-round view by touching M the camera symbol at the bottom of the screen and by turning the N perspective 360° by swiping the O camera image. P Clean the reversing camera. Q R S Information T Guide lines are superimposed on the front and rear U camera views. V These guide lines indicate the direction the vehicle can follow with the steering wheel in the current W position. The guide lines change as the position of X the front wheels changes. Y Z

167 Personal settings

Retrieving automatic A Personal settings CAUTION Managing accounts seat, door mirror, and B Ergonomic settings can be stored and retrieved Up to seven accounts can be registered and man- manually using the memory buttons in the driver's steering wheel settings aged on the central display. One guest account is C door. In addition, individual accounts that automati- available, which cannot be deleted. Parts of the body may be pinched or crushed if the cally store and retrieve ergonomic and comfort set- The driver's personal settings are stored in the D settings are activated in an uncontrolled manner. tings can be registered via the central display. Both account. E functions can be used independently of one another. e Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. When you start the car for the first time, the Set-up e Automatic retrieval of the ergonomic settings F wizard is displayed on the central display, which Storing and retrieving personal can be canceled if necessary by pressing a guides you through important configuration steps. G memory button, seat adjustment button or the We recommend that you run the Set-up wizard fully settings central display. to correctly create your first account. A Porsche ID H If the vehicle is switched off, the previously actuated (Porsche Connect user) is required to set up and use I settings are automatically stored in the selected ac- an account. count and paired with the vehicle key used. The set- Storing and loading comfort You can switch between the registered accounts at J tings are loaded automatically when the door is any time when the vehicle is turned on via the cen- unlocked, when the account paired with the vehicle settings K tral display. key is detected. If two or more people use the ve- Due to the different usage possibilities, the contents Driver detection occurs automatically via the vehicle L hicle, the use of one account and one vehicle key per described here are not available in all models, coun- key. A vehicle key is always automatically assigned person is recommended. The accounts can be tries and equipment configurations. to an active account. M changed manually if required. Storing comfort settings N Ergonomic settings affect: seat, door mirror and steering wheel settings. e When the vehicle is turned off and locked, the O Information In addition, up to three ergonomic settings can be settings previously made are automatically stored in the account. P manually stored and retrieved via the memory but- Further information about Porsche Connect (Help e The comfort settings are overwritten when tons in the driver's door. videos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and Q switching from one active account to another. Comfort settings (depending on the country) affect: Questions & Answers) can be found at www.por- The ergonomic settings are not overwritten. R ergonomic, air conditioning, light, vision, assistance sche.com/connect.. system, instrument cluster and infotainment S settings. Loading comfort settings T 1. Unlock the vehicle. Managing accounts The account settings are loaded. The accounts can be managed on the central U Information – or – display. V Some functions cannot be personalized (e.g. the bb The vehicle is stationary. If the activated personalization settings do not charge timer, time zones and parking pre- 1. Switching the account via the central display match the current driver, we recommend switching W climatization). 2. Wait until all settings have been applied. to another registered account. We recommend using X your own account. A new account can be registered and the vehicle settings adapted if necessary. This Y Z

168 Personal settings prevents the vehicle settings of the first account The settings will be automatically made A selected from being inadvertently changed. 2. Wait until all settings have been applied. B Canceling retrieval of the ergonomic settings C Storing and retrieving ergonomic e Press one of the memory buttons in the door. settings – or – D e Actuate one of the controls on the seat. E Storing ergonomic settings on the memory – or – buttons e Tap Cancel seat adjustment on the central dis- F play (not always available, depending on other G active functions such as rear view camera). H I J K L Fig. 117: Memory buttons, driver’s door M 1. Press the SET button. N The lettering on the button is illuminated. 2. Press the relevant memory button 1, 2 or 3 O within 10 seconds. P The settings are stored. Storage is acknowledged acoustically (driver’s door Q only), and the illumination of the SET button goes out. R S Retrieving ergonomic settings with memory buttons T 1. Press and hold the relevant memory button 1, 2 U or 3 until all settings are retrieved. – or – V bb Vehicle switched off. W bb Driver’s door open. X 1. Briefly press the relevant memory button 1, 2 or 3. Y Z

169 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)

A Porsche Active Suspension Lift Selecting chassis setup – Increases the ground clearance by approx. B Management (PASM) 0.8 in. (20 mm) compared to the “Medium“ Selecting chassis setup using buttons height. C General Safety Instructions D – Can be selected up to a speed of approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and is deselected automati- Responding to warning symbols E cally at higher speeds. Always observe any warning and information mes- – Used for driving over obstacles. F sages displayed in the vehicle. Lowered G > Please see chapter "Warning and information messages" on page 244. – Decreases the ground clearance by approx. H 0.4 in. (10 mm) compared to the “Medium“ level. – Can be selected manually. I Operating principle Fig. 118: PASM button PASM is a system that actively adjusts the chassis Low J bb Ready for operation. dynamics. Your vehicle may be fitted with one of the – Decreases the ground clearance by approx. e K following equipment configurations: 0.87 in. (22 mm) compared to the “Medium“ Press button (repeatedly). – PASM with steel suspension height. L Selecting chassis setup via the central display – PASM with switchable air suspension and a – Used for sporty driving. bb M height control system – Can be selected manually. Ready for operation. – Selected automatically when the “Sport Plus“ N The variable chassis system configures a damping e e Drive e Chassis force suitable for each individual wheel. chassis setting or RANGE driving mode is O activated. The last selected chassis setup is shown on the in- Three different chassis setups can be selected: strument cluster. It remains effective even when the P If RANGE driving mode is activated, a range-opti- – Normal: comfortable chassis setting vehicle is no longer ready for operation. – Sport: sporty setting mized chassis setting and low height are selected. Q The option of selecting the chassis setting is dis- – Sport Plus: distinctly sporty setting, such as for Display Chassis setup R use on racetracks. abled in RANGE driving mode. S None Normal PASM with switchable air suspension and a T height control system Sport U The height control system with air suspension automatically compensates for load changes and main- V tains a constant ride height. The following chassis Sport Plus W heights are available: Medium X – Standard level in the “Normal“ and “Sport“ chas- Y sis settings Selecting the chassis height – Can be selected manually with the “Sport Plus“ bb Porsche Active Suspension Management Z chassis setting (PASM) with air suspension and leveling system 170 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)

Control operation of the Selecting the chassis height via the central Display Chassis height WARNING A display leveling system B bb Operational readiness established. Lowered A vehicle on which the leveling system is activated C can move unexpectedly or tip or fall off lifting e e Drive e Chassis height equipment, e.g. a jack or lifting platform. This can D Low cause serious injuries and damage. Selecting the “Lift“ chassis height via the E e Manually set medium height and switch off the button height control system before lifting the vehicle. F The “Lift“ chassis height can be selected using the Information G button on the instrument cluster to quickly increase > Please see chapter "Jack and Lifting Platform" on the ground clearance. The vehicle is not lowered when the door is open. page 141. H The selected level is set after closing the door. e e Settings e Vehicle e Additional chas- I sis settings e Deactivate chassis adjustments J Information to use a jack K Frequent chassis height changes can cause the compressor to overheat. In this case, the compres- Information L sor must cool for several minutes before the leveling M system is fully functional again. The selected height The leveling system switches on automatically at is set automatically once the compressor has cooled speeds above approx. 4 mph (7 km/h). N Fig. 119: Lift button down. O bb Operational readiness established. e Press the button. Automatic lift function P Switching the height control system off With the automatic lift function, the vehicle "Lift" Q Display of the selected chassis height on the Lifting the vehicle level can be adjusted automatically based on the instrument cluster WARNING location. R The last selected chassis height is shown on the in- bb Vehicles with air suspension. If the PASM displays a warning message or the ve- S strument cluster. It continues to be displayed even hicle is too hot, there is a risk of injuries and damage NOTICE after the vehicle is switched off. T from raising the vehicle. U Display Chassis height e Only raise the vehicle after it has cooled down. The system must not induce you to take risks with e Do not perform any work on the chassis when- your safety. Responsibility when driving, such as V None Medium choosing an appropriate speed, remains with the ever the PASM displays a warning message ei- W ther. Visit an qualified specialist repair shop. driver. The automatic lift function is not a substitute Lift Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche for the driver's attentiveness. X dealer, as they have trained technicians and the Even at the vehicle "Lift" level, contact with an ob- Y necessary parts and tools. stacle cannot be prevented if the driving speed is Z

171 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)

A inappropriate. 1. Press the "Lift" button. bb Automatic lift function activated. Central display bb Location for automatic lift function taught. B Situations may arise in which a saved location is not recognized and the automatic lift function is not bb Speed within system limits. 2. Tap Save. C executed. e Press the button. A message confirming the saving process ap- D The automatic lift function cannot be executed in pears on the central display. The automatic lift function is canceled. the event of an air suspension system malfunction. E e Ensure that the vehicle "Lift" level is set when Information Information F approaching taught locations. A message appears for deleting the current location G e Drive over the obstacle at an appropriate speed. If there are several approach paths to an obstacle, appears on the central display. such as on the outward and return route, it is nec- H essary to approach the obstacle and save the loca- Activating the function and managing saved tion on both journeys. I locations Additional information The automatic lift function can be activated and de- J Lower ride height after leaving the vehicle activated on the central display. Saved locations can Executing the automatic lift function K stationary for long periods be renamed or deleted. Automatic adjustment of the vehicle "Lift" level L bb Operational readiness achieved. If vehicles are left stationary for several weeks, the When approaching a saved location, the vehicle ride height may be reduced. The vehicle automati- "Lift" level is adjusted automatically. A message ap- M e e Settings e Vehicle e Smart Lift cally re-adjusts to the correct ride height when op- pears on the central display. erational readiness is established. This can take N bb Operational readiness established. several minutes, depending on the operating state. O Teaching the automatic lift function bb Automatic lift function activated. Ground clearance is reduced during this time. When first approaching an obstacle, the vehicle bb Location for automatic lift function taught. bb Porsche Active Suspension Management P "Lift" level must be set manually and the location bb Speed within system limits. (PASM) with air suspension and leveling system Q saved. Canceling the automatic lift function Level control after parking the vehicle R The automatic lift function can be canceled via the When the vehicle is parked, the chassis height may S button on the instrument cluster. be adjusted automatically in order to balance the vehicle load. T bb Porsche Active Suspension Management U (PASM) with air suspension and leveling system V W Fig. 120: Lift button X bb Operational readiness achieved. Y bb Automatic lift function activated. bb Speed within system limits. Fig. 121: Lift button Z Instrument cluster bb Operational readiness established. 172 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

Porsche Communication A Management (PCM) B Brief Overview – PCM C D This brief overview does not replace the complete information provided in this section. E In particular, safety messages and warnings are not F replaced by this brief overview. G H I J K L Fig. 122: Areas of the display M What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? N Switch on PCM e Turn on the vehicle. – O

Shut down the PCM, switch the central display and e Tap in the center console control panel. – P front passenger display off and on Q Start the front passenger display from standby e Tap on the front passenger display. > p. 179 R mode S Adjust the volume e Turn volume control (rotary knob) on the multi- > p. 132 T function steering wheel. – or – U Tap / on the quick access bar. V – or – W Swipe vertically with two fingers in the handwriting panel. X Mute: Press the volume control (rotary knob) on the Y multifunction steering wheel briefly or press longer Z on . 173 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?

B Remote operation of central display e Operate the handwriting panel using gestures to > p. 76 C navigate in the central display.

D Use Global search e Enter search text in search area A or use voice – input. E F Display time, connection and status symbols, use e Use status area B. > p. 177 options G The relevant settings (e.g. Ionizer) can be called up directly by selecting the status symbols. H > digital1 I Adapt sorting of apps bb selected. e In status area B, tap e Customize App view. J > 1 K Open MyScreen e Swipe to the left in the Home screen . digital L MyScreen is displayed.

M > 1 Configure MyScreen bb MyScreen is displayed. digital N e In status area B, tap e Configure MyScreen . O e > P Call up and use content from main menu and Use main menu C and content and interaction p. 177 submenus area E. Q Open messages e Tap on a message in message area D. > digital1 R S Context-dependent display area e Use extended display area F. –

T Call up Set-up wizard When you start the PCM for the first time, the Set- – U up wizard is displayed and guides you through important steps for configuring the PCM. V Calling up Set-up wizard manually: W e e Settings e Set-up wizard X Y Z 1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 174 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A

> 1 B Activate/deactivate Private mode (available in e Tap e Settings e Porsche Connect digital some countries) Settings e Private mode. C D Display service interval e Tap e Service . – The display contains information about when E the next service is due. F > G Change system and vehicle settings e Tap e Settings e System/Vehicle. p. 234 H Display vehicle information – e Tap (see C) e Drive. I > 1 J Display notifications e Tap in the main menu C. digital K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 175 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

A Central display B C D E F G H I J K L M N Fig. 123: Control elements of the central display O P A – Home Screen & MyScreen C – Quick filter bar / global search (sub-op- F – Connection and status symbols > Please see chapter "Home screen and MyScreen" erating area) > Please see chapter "Device Manager" of the on- Q of the on-board Owner's Manual. Depending on the menu selection, a menu bar will board Owner's Manual. R appear with additional menu items in this area (quick B – Main menu (main operating area) filter bar). The global search is displayed here on the G – Content and interactive area S The main menu is divided into three areas: Home Screen. T – Home screen/ MyScreen H – Options and the most important settings, D – Time/temperature depending on the content and interactive area – Vehicle settings U > Please see chapter "Setting display of time or Context-specific settings for the respective display V – Notifications temperature" on page 177. can be configured for specific screens under > Options. W Please see chapter "Opening menus" on page 177. E – Filter bar X A filter bar appears, depending on the menu I – Detail area selection. The detail area displays additional information on the Y content area. Z

176 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

Important information for users A Tap (select) Opening menus A The Porsche Communication Management system Briefly touch the central display or front Opening the main menu B (PCM) is the central control unit. passenger display with one finger. Example: e For safety reasons, some functions are only available Tap on a function or activate/deactivate a Tap the menu in the main operating area (e.g. C when the vehicle is stationary. checkbox. ). D Configuring settings and WARNING Calling up a submenu E operating while driving B Long press Touch the central display or front passenger e Tap the menu item in the quick filter bar (e.g. F Configuring settings and operating the multifunction display with one finger for longer. Example: Contact). steering wheel, infotainment system, etc. while Confirm a destination on the map G driving can distract you from the traffic. You may (Navigation). Calling up settings for each menu item H lose control of the vehicle. bb The desired menu is selected. I e Only operate these components while driving if C Horizontal swipe e Tap Options . the traffic situation allows. Swipe horizontally across the central display J e If in doubt, stop in a safe place and only carry out or front passenger display using one finger. Settings and other functions of the respective K extensive operations and settings while the ve- Example: Scroll through lists horizontally. content or interactive area are displayed. hicle is at a standstill. L D Vertical swipe (scrolling and switching) Setting display of time or M Swipe vertically across the central display or temperature Operating the central display and front passenger display using one finger. N front passenger display Example: Scroll through content vertically. e Tap Time or Temperature in the status O area to adjust the display. Zoom P To adjust the central display or front passenger Q E Briefly tapping twice on the central display display: or front passenger display enlarges that R section. e e Settings e Display settings S F Briefly tapping on the central display or T front passenger display using two fingers Entering text and characters reduces the size of that section. As soon as you can enter text or characters, e.g. for U entering a navigation destination or search term, an V G Moving two fingers apart on the central input field appears. Touching a search result will Fig. 124: Operating the central display and front passenger display or front passenger display enlarges zoom in on the results list. W display that section. X Y Z

177 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

A Entry using the handwriting panel Operating the central display via B the handwriting panel Use the handwriting panel of the center console op- C erating panel to navigate in the central display via D gestures. For information on using the center console control E Fig. 125: Display keyboard panel: F A Back > Please see chapter "Center console control pan- B Current cursor position el" on page 76. G C Auto-correction and suggested results H D Search area (availability dependent on country) E Toggle between entry of letters/numbers and special Calling up Owner's Manual in the I characters Central display F Insert space bb Vehicle is stationary. J G Zoom in on results list Fig. 126: Freehand writing on the center console control H Delete entry panel K I Results list e e Owner's Manual L The handwriting panel in the center console control There are various options for entering text and panel has a handwriting recognition function and al- M characters: lows you to write text and characters directly with N your finger. Entry via the keyboard bb The keyboard or input field is shown on the cen- O 1. Tap the input field. tral display. P The display keyboard appears. e Write text and characters directly with your Q 2. Enter desired text or characters. finger (handwriting recognition). R 3. To enter accents, press the required letters for For information on handwriting entry: longer. Please see chapter "Center console control panel" on S A window appears showing the accents for page 76. T these letters. Entry via voice control U Text and numbers can also be entered using voice V control (e.g. for dialing a phone number or entering a navigation destination). W For information on using voice control: X > Please see chapter "Voice control" of the on- board Owner's Manual. Y Z

178 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

Front passenger display A

Current driving data can be shown on the front pas- B senger display. C Configuring settings that affect vehicle handling or system settings that do not affect the front passen- D ger display is not permitted. E On the front passenger display, content can be F viewed and selected independently of the central display. G H I

Fig. 127: Controls for the front passenger display J K A – Home screen & MyScreen F – Connection and status symbols H – Options and the most important settings, L > Please see chapter "Home screen and MyScreen" > Please see chapter "Device Manager" of the on- depending on the content and interactive area of the on-board Owner's Manual. board Owner's Manual. Context-specific settings for the respective display M can be configured for specific screens under B – Quick filter bar/global search (sub-oper- G – Switch front passenger display on and off Options. N ating area) Switching on front passenger display O Depending on the menu selection, a menu bar will e e Operating front passenger display P appear with additional menu items in this area (quick Tap in the center console operating panel Activate Passenger display in the central display. For information on operating the front passenger filter bar). The global search is displayed here on the display: Q Home screen. Switching off front passenger display > Please see chapter "Operating the central display R e Tap in the front passenger display e Activate and front passenger display" on page 177. C – Content and interactive area Passenger display in the front passenger display. S D – Detail area Switching on front passenger display standby Calling up menus in the front pas- T The detail area displays additional information on the mode senger display U content area. e Tap in the passenger display e Activate Pas- For information on calling up the menus: V senger display in standby mode in the front > Please see chapter "Opening menus" on E – Time/temperature passenger display. page 177. W > Please see chapter "Setting display of time or Switching off front passenger display standby X temperature" on page 177. mode e Tap on the front passenger display. Y Z

179 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

A Setting display of time or temper- right (menu languages with writing direction right to left: note the writing direction). B ature in the front passenger 4. To delete text or characters, swipe your finger C display For information on setting the time or temperature: from right to left (for menu languages with a right-to-left writing direction right to left: ac- D > Please see chapter "Setting display of time or cording to the writing direction). E temperature in the front passenger display" on page 180. F G Entering text and characters via H the front passenger display I Entry via the keyboard J For information on entering text and characters: > Please see chapter "Entry via the keyboard" on K page 178. L Entering via freehand writing (availability de- M pendent on country) N The freehand writing feature has handwriting recognition and enables you to write text and charac- O ters directly with your finger. P Q R S T U V Fig. 128: Freehand entry on front passenger display W 1. Select to open freehand entry. X 2. Write the desired characters with your finger. Y 3. To enter a space, swipe your finger from left to Z

180 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Porsche InnoDrive (PID)1 can therefore lead to undesired driving situations. A The vehicle can accelerate to the set speed when B General safety instructions driving in areas with road construction. C Lack of attention e Do not use the system in heavy traffic, where WARNING there is road construction and in built-up areas. D e When making turns and taking exits with the The system must not induce you to take risks with system activated, use the turn signal in a timely E your safety. The driver remains responsible when manner, be especially careful and take over con- F driving, such as by keeping a safe distance or driving trol of the vehicle if needed. at an appropriate speed, even when the system is G activated. The system is no substitute for the driv- Partially or completely WARNING H er's attentiveness. covered front camera or I e Drive with extreme care. radar sensor and poor e If the system-induced deceleration is insuffi- ambient conditions J cient, slow the vehicle down immediately using Radar sensor and camera vision can be impaired by K the footbrake. rain, snow, ice, fog, loose gravel and spray. Vehicles e Fig. 129: Radar sensor position L Make sure that you can take control of the ve- in front may not be adequately detected, or may not hicle at any time. be detected at all. M Unsafe traffic situation Reflective objects such as ice, heavy rain, crash bar- N WARNING and unfavorable road riers or tunnel entrances may impair the functional- O conditions ity of the radar sensor. A message indicating that the system is not available appears on the instrument P If the prevailing situation does not allow you to drive cluster. safely at a sufficient distance and constant speed, e Do not use the system under such conditions. Q using the system can cause accidents. e Always keep the radar sensor and camera area A R The system assists the driver when making turns on the rearview mirror free of dirt, ice and snow. Fig. 130: Windshield camera and taking exits. Especially unfavorable conditions S e Do not cover the camera area on the rearview Radiofrequency Radia- WARNING mirror A with objects (e.g. stickers). tion Exposure T U This equipment complies with the specified FCC radiation exposure limits for an uncontrolled environ- V ment. This equipment should be installed and W operated with minimum distance of 8 in. (20 cm) X Y Z 1. Available in some countries 181 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Foot on the accelerator A between the radiator and your body. WARNING power will be insufficient to prevent a collision. B e This transmitter must not be co-located or op- e Brake immediately in such cases. erating in conjunction with any other antenna or The system does not brake automatically when your e Make sure that you can take control of the ve- C transmitter. foot is on the accelerator pedal. Placing the foot on hicle at any time. D the accelerator pedal may override the cruise and Damage to the radar WARNING distance control. Information E sensor and camera e Take your foot off the accelerator pedal when the Porsche InnoDrive offers assisted driving. It is the F Shocks or damage to the bumper, wheel housings or system is activated. responsibility of the driver at all times to monitor the G underbody, such as through parking collisions, can Braking behavior at Stop system, assess the traffic situation and intervene if displace the sensors. Stone damage in the area of WARNING necessary. In some cases, the system automatically H and Yield signs the camera on the rearview mirror can impair the determines that driver intervention is necessary. In camera view. This can adversely affect the system. I The system assists the driver when approaching such cases, an appropriate message appears in the e Go to an qualified specialized repair shop. Por- instrument cluster. J Stop and Yield signs as long as these traffic signs are sche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, stored in the navigation data. The vehicle will only be K as they have trained technicians and the neces- slowed but not be braked to a standstill. sary parts and tools. L e When approaching a Stop sign and if required by System limitations Support on turn-offs and the traffic situation, brake the vehicle independ- The system is switched M WARNING WARNING highway exits ently to a standstill when approaching a Yield off. N sign. The system is switched off in the following The system assists the driver when making turns O Recognizing traffic lights situations: and taking exits. Particularly unfavorable conditions WARNING P can therefore lead to undesired driving situations. – PSM is deactivated. – The driver’s door is opened. Q e When making turns and taking exits with the The system does not recognize traffic lights. – The driver’s seat belt is open. system activated, be especially careful and take R e Take over control of the vehicle at traffic lights – Transmission range N or R is selected. over control of the vehicle if necessary. that require braking and stopping of the vehicle. S – The parking lock or parking brake is activated. – When driving on private lanes, field tracks or in Driving in areas with Inadequate braking T WARNING WARNING traffic-calmed streets (e.g. play streets). roadworks power during automatic – In a vehicle position that cannot be clearly rec- U braking The vehicle can accelerate to the set speed when ognized by the system. V driving in areas with roadworks. If the system detects that braking assistance is re- – In a country that is not enabled. e W Switch off the system temporarily when driving quired on the part of the driver, a warning tone – With a speed limit below 20 mph (30 km/h). in areas with roadworks. sounds and a warning message appears on the in- e Take over control of the vehicle if necessary. X strument cluster. In this case, the system braking Y Z

182 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Undetected vehicles or WARNING Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and Vehicles entering and exiting curves and sta- A objects out and narrow vehicles tionary vehicles B The radar sensor detects a narrow, cone-shaped C area in front of your vehicle. As a result, vehicles or objects may not be detected in time or cannot be D detected in the following situations: E – Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out – Vehicles with a small cross-section or narrow F vehicles G – Vehicles entering and exiting curves – Stationary vehicles H – Vehicles with large projecting loads I – Pedestrians, cyclists and animals J – Objects on the road – Oncoming vehicles and cross-traffic K e Intervene and brake yourself if necessary. L e Drive with extreme care and always pay attention to the traffic conditions and vehicle M surroundings. Fig. 131: Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out Fig. 132: Vehicles entering and exiting curves (C) and sta- N (A) and narrow vehicles (B) tionary vehicles (D) O Vehicles will only be detected if they are traveling Vehicles entering and exiting curves may not be de- entirely in the same lane and within the detection tected or may not be detected in time or the radar P range of the sensors. sensor may react to vehicles in adjacent lanes. Q A stationary vehicle or obstacle that suddenly appears in the radar sensor's range, e.g. after a vehicle R ahead changes lanes or at the end of a traffic jam, S may only be detected to a limited extent by adaptive cruise control. T U V W X Y Z

183 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

A Vehicles with large projecting loads braking until your vehicle is stationary and starts Speed limits detected in advance are displayed on driving again automatically as soon as the vehicle in the instrument cluster and the speed of the vehicle B front drives off again. A detected vehicle and the fact is reduced in good time. Otherwise, the speed is not C that the vehicle has started driving again will be in- reduced until the vehicle is driving past the detected dicated on the instrument cluster. traffic sign. D Consideration of speed limits is active automatically E In bends when PID is activated. Navigation data and vehicle information is used to F adapt the speed to the road ahead. At Stop and Yield signs G Tight bends detected in advance are displayed on When approaching Stop and Yield signs, a message Fig. 133: Vehicles with large projecting loads the instrument cluster and the speed of the vehicle appears on the instrument cluster and the speed is H is reduced in good time. The speed calculated for the reduced if the traffic signs are stored in the naviga- I In the case of vehicles ahead with long projecting bend is also indicated by the speed prediction sys- tion data. It is up to the driver, however, to brake the loads (e.g. towing vehicle), the radar sensor may not tem. If no bend ahead warning is displayed, the vehicle to a standstill. J detect the end of the vehicle or may detect the end speed will only be reduced slightly or will not be re- If the driver accidentally continues driving at a Stop K of the vehicle incorrectly. duced at all. Vehicle handling in bends is also influ- sign, PID switches to passive mode and can be acti- enced by the selected drive mode. vated again afterwards by the driver. L Responding to warning symbols If the driver continues driving at a Yield sign, PID re- M Always observe any warning and information mes- At rotary intersections, junctions and on up- mains active, passes the Yield sign at a reduced sages displayed in the vehicle. hill and downhill slopes speed and accelerates again to the previously set N > Please see chapter "Warning and information When navigation is active or when the driver indi- speed as soon as the traffic situation allows it. The O messages" on page 244. cates in good time, PID reduces the speed before the previously set speed can be resumed again immedi- vehicle starts to change direction. A corresponding ately by pressing RESUME. P Operating principle display appears on the instrument cluster. Q Porsche InnoDrive (PID) is a driver assistance system that assists the driver when driving on well- Information R surfaced country roads and highways. S Using navigation data as well as radar and camera When route guidance is active in the navigation data, PID detects both the area directly around the system, PID always orients itself according to the T vehicle and the route ahead, determines the best proposed route. If route guidance is not active, it adapts to the most plausible route. U possible driving strategy in advance and adapts the speed accordingly. V PID can assist the driver in the following situations: On roads with speed limits W Vehicle driving ahead PID uses navigation data and data from cameras X (traffic sign recognition) to automatically detect the If a vehicle was detected ahead, PID brakes if the speed limit within the system limits and changes the vehicle is driving slower than the set desired speed Y desired speed accordingly. and keeps the distance from the vehicle ahead con- Z stant in the preselected range. PID can continue 184 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Controls Display elements Symbol Meaning A B PID is active with the desired speed set. C D

PID is active. A speed limit was de- E tected ahead or the set desired speed F has not yet been reached. G A vehicle was detected ahead while H the desired speed was set. A vehicle I symbol is displayed instead of the speedometer symbol. J K Operating modes L M Fig. 134: Control lever for driver assistance systems Fig. 135: PID display Passive The system is passive after switching on and when N R Switch systems on/off and open options menu A Own speed PID is active after pressing the brake pedal and after S Open options menu (when system is switched on) B Event up ahead (display on the speedometer and via O 1 Set/increase the desired speed symbols) pressing down the control lever (CANCEL). 2 Reduce the desired speed C Set speed – The status display is gray. P 3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed/confirm speed D Status display – There is no control. limit Q 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control – The stored speed setting and the selected dis- Symbols tance are retained. R S Symbol Meaning Active This status is active after setting the desired speed, T PID is passive. after resuming control (RESUME) and after tempo- U rarily overriding control by pressing the accelerator. – The status display is green or blue. V – Speed and distance to the vehicle ahead are W PID is passive with the desired speed regulated in line with the detected speed limit (if X set. activated) and the road features. Y Z

185 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

A Temporarily passive Information Information B The system is temporarily passive when the accelerator is pressed while PID is active. An activated driver assistance system will be acti- – Speed limits are only considered when PID is C – A message indicating that PID is passive appears vated again even after switching off and restoring activated. operational readiness. – On roads with no speed limit, the set maximum D in the instrument cluster. – The status display is gray. speed is used. E – There is no control. Switching off PID – The driver assistance system can be switched using the S button even when the system is ac- – The stored target speed and the selected target e Press button R on the control lever. F tive. The newly selected system is in passive distance are retained. The set desired speed is deleted. mode after you switch systems. G – The system is active again after the accelerator The desired distance is stored. H pedal is released. I Activating PID Changing the desired speed Switching PID on and off bb PID switched on. The set desired speed or the recognized speed limit J The system that was selected last is always acti- Setting the current driving speed as the desired can be changed by pressing the control lever. K vated. The system is initially in passive mode when speed bb PID is active. switched on. It must first be activated before the 1. Accelerate to the desired speed using the accel- L control function will start working. Increasing the speed erator pedal. e Press the control lever forward (position 1). M Switching on PID 2. Briefly press the control lever forward (position – Brief press = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments N bb No other driver assistance system is activated. 1) and release the accelerator pedal. – Press and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h) 1. Press button R on the control lever. PID is active. The current driving speed is set as the increments O The options menu for the driver assistance sys- desired speed in the status display and is automati- Reducing the speed tems appears on the instrument cluster. cally maintained unless a slower vehicle is detected P e Pull the control lever (position 2). 2. Select PID using the rotary push button on the ahead. – Brief pull = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments Q steering wheel and press to confirm. Setting the detected speed limit as the desired – Pull and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h) increments R PID is switched on and passive. speed S Switching from an already activated driver assis- bb Consider speed limits activated. Resetting the changed desired speed to the tance system to PID e Press the control lever upward (RESUME) and detected speed limit T 1. Press button S on the control lever. release the accelerator pedal. e Briefly press the control lever up (RESUME). U The options menu for the driver assistance sys- PID is active. The currently detected speed limit The currently detected speed limit is confirmed. tems appears on the instrument cluster. is set as the desired speed in the status display V 2. Select PID using the rotary push button on the and is automatically maintained unless a slower Discarding an automatically accepted speed W steering wheel and press to confirm. vehicle is detected ahead. limit PID is switched on and passive. e X Long-press the control lever up for longer (RESUME). Y The set speed limit is discarded and the previ- Z ously set desired speed is retained.

186 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Changing the desired distance The set speed limit is displayed in blue in the Consider speed limits activated A status display. > Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control B (ACC)" on page 42. Setting the maximum speed C Overriding speed and distance On roads with no speed limit or if no speed limit has D control temporarily been detected, the maximum preset speed is used as the desired speed. If a speed limit is detected, the E > Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control following applies: (ACC)" on page 42. F – If the maximum speed is above the speed limit, the speed limit is adopted as the new desired G Interrupting and resuming speed speed. H and distance control – If the maximum speed is below the speed limit, I > Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control the maximum speed is adopted as the new de- (ACC)" on page 42. sired speed. J Setting the maximum speed K Braking to a standstill and driving e e Assist e e Assistance system settings L off again e Porsche InnoDrive e Maximum speed > Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control M Fig. 136: Example of driving with Consider speed limits (ACC)" on page 42. The set maximum speed remains active until it is reset, even with a change of driver or when the ve- activated N Activating and deactivating con- hicle is restarted. A The vehicle regulates the speed to the de- O tected speed limit of 60 mph (100 km/h). sideration of speed limits Additional information P The driver sets the desired speed Q e e Assist e e Assistance system settings B Example of how Porsche InnoDrive works 3 mph (5 km/h) higher based on the de- e Porsche InnoDrive e Consider speed limits R The example below compares two scenarios when tected speed limit. The vehicle regulates the driving into a city with a 30 mph (50 km/h) speed speed to 63 mph (105 km/h). S Manually considering a detected speed limit limit - one scenario with consideration of speed lim- T If consideration of speed limits is deactivated, PID its activated and the other with consideration of still displays detected events such as bends, inclines speed limits deactivated. U and vehicles driving ahead. A detected speed limit can be accepted manually by the driver. V bb Consider speed limits deactivated. W bb The speed limit is detected and appears gray in X the status display. e Press the control lever up (RESUME). Y Z

187 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

A C An imminent speed limit of A The vehicle regulates the speed to the de- B 30 mph (50 km/h) has been detected (e.g. sired speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) set by boundary to a built-up area). The vehicle the driver. C progressively reduces the speed until it rea- D ches the built-up area boundary. B The driver sets the speed 3 mph (5 km/h) The detected speed limit is displayed in higher. The vehicle regulates the speed to E blue. 63 mph (105 km/h). F D When the built-up area boundary is reached, C After driving past a 30 mph (50 km/h) G PID regulates the speed to the new speed speed limit sign, the vehicle regulates the H limit of 30 mph (50 km/h). speed to the desired speed of 63 mph (105 km/h) set by the driver. I As the vehicle approaches the new speed Consider speed limits deactivated J limit, the speed restriction of 30 mph (50 km/h) appears in gray on the K instrument cluster. L D The driver acknowledges the currently de- M tected speed limit of 30 mph (50 km/h) by N pressing up the control lever (RESUME). The vehicle regulates the speed to O 30 mph (50 km/h) and the set desired P speed appears green in the status display. If the speed is set again before reaching the Q traffic sign, the set desired speed will be R displayed in blue. S T U V Fig. 137: Example of driving with Consider speed limits deactivated W X Y Z

188 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)

Porsche Stability Manage- – Vehicle deceleration and a change in steering Activating PSM Sport A wheel forces through targeted brake intervention Restricted PSM support B ment (PSM) – Reduced drive power WARNING – A pulsing brake pedal and changes in brake pedal C General Safety Instructions In PSM SPORT mode, the support provided by PSM position when braking D Loss of control over the is restricted in critical driving situations outside the WARNING vehicle Automatic brake differential ABS control range. E If one wheel on a driven axle starts to spin, it is e Always leave PSM SPORT switched off during The PSM cannot reduce the risk of accidents due to F braked so that the other wheel on the same axle can "normal" driving operation. inappropriate speed. be driven. e Never activate PSM SPORT when driving with a G The increased safety that is provided should not in- spare wheel. H duce you to take greater risks with your safety. The Anti-slip regulation limits set by the laws of driving physics cannot be Anti-slip regulation prevents wheels from spinning I overridden by PSM. through targeted adjustment of drive power, thereby J e Despite PSM, drivers remain responsible for ensuring good lane-holding and stable handling. adapting their driving style and maneuvers to the K Drive drag torque control road and weather conditions, as well as the traf- L fic situation. In the event of excessive slip, drive drag torque control prevents all the driven wheels from locking up M during acceleration. This is also the case when Responding to warning symbols N downshifting on slippery road surfaces. Fig. 138: PSM OFF button Always observe any warning and information mes- O sages displayed in the vehicle. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) bb Vehicles with Sport Chrono package. In PSM SPORT mode, the system is switched to a P > Please see chapter "Warning and information ABS prevents the wheels from locking during full sporty mode. messages" on page 244. braking. Q > Please see chapter "ABS brake system (anti-lock e Press the PSM OFF button briefly. R Operating principle braking system)" on page 190. The button lights up yellow and a message appears on the instrument cluster. Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is a control S Steering torque pulse system for stabilizing the vehicle and is automati- T cally active when driving readiness is established. Steering torque pulse provides the driver with Switching off PSM U The major components of the PSM are the auto- steering assistance when braking on roads with No PSM support WARNING matic brake differential (ASR), anti-slip regulation, varying friction levels. Targeted impulses also assist V engine drag torque control and anti-lock braking the driver during counter steering. system (ABS). When PSM is switched off, the support provided by W PSM controls can be observed as follows: PSM is absent in critical driving situations outside X – The PSM warning light on the instrument cluster flashes Y – Hydraulic noises can be heard Z

189 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)

A the ABS control range. ABS brake system (anti-lock Multi-collision braking B e Always leave PSM switched on during "normal" braking system) During an accident, multi-collision braking can help driving operation. the driver reduce the risk of skidding and further Loss of control over the C e Never switch PSM off when driving with a spare WARNING collisions during the accident through automatically vehicle D wheel. initiated braking. The ABS cannot reduce the risk of accidents due to e E Press the PSM OFF button for at least two inappropriate speed. Prerequisites seconds. Multi-collision braking only happens: F The increased safety that is provided should not in- The button lights up yellow and a message ap- duce you to take greater risks with your safety. The – during front, side and rear-end collisions G pears on the instrument cluster. laws of physics for driving cannot be overridden even – when the airbag control unit detects an appro- H with ABS. priate activation threshold during an accident Information – during an accident at a driving speed above ap- e Despite ABS, drivers remain responsible for I prox. 5 mph (10 km/h) When braking in the ABS control range, the vehicle is adapting their driving style and maneuvers to the J stabilized even when PSM is switched off. One-sided road and weather conditions, as well as the traf- Information K spinning of the wheels is prevented even when PSM fic situation. is switched off. L The vehicle is decelerated automatically by the PSM system, provided the hydraulic brake system, PSM, In exceptional situations, it may be advantageous to Operating principle M and electrical system remain undamaged and op- temporarily switch off PSM: The anti-lock braking system (ABS) prevents the erational during the accident. N – on loose ground. wheels from locking during full braking. This ensures O – in deep snow that the vehicle has enhanced driving stability and – when "rocking the vehicle free". maneuverability in hazardous situations. Exceptions P ABS begins to take control as soon as one wheel The following activities prevent automatic braking in Q Information shows a tendency to lock. the event of an accident: The controlled braking process is comparable to ca- – The driver depresses the accelerator pedal a sig- R When PSM SPORT mode is active, it is only possible dence braking in very rapid succession. The driver is nificant amount. to switch to PSM OFF mode if PSM was activated warned to adapt the driving speed to the road con- S – The braking pressure exerted by the driver on the beforehand. ditions by a pulsing brake pedal and a "juddering brake pedal is stronger than the brake pressure T noise". applied by the system. U Switching on PSM Carrying out full braking with ABS V e Press the PSM OFF button. If full braking is necessary: W The button lights up white. e Fully depress the brake pedal during the entire The status display PSM SPORT appears PSM braking operation, despite the pulsing pedal. Do X OFF on the instrument cluster. not reduce the braking pressure. Y Z

190 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS)

Porsche Vehicle Tracking Detailed activation information is available at www. Information A porsche.com/connect or from an authorized Porsche System (PVTS) dealer. Note for Belgium / Luxembourg: B If the Driver Card remains in the shut-off vehicle for C General Safety Instructions Functions more than 30 minutes, it will become invalid. In order to reactivate the card, the disarming mode must D The vehicle will only be located in the event of theft. Responding to warning symbols be accessed via the app, customer portal, or Service In this event, a notification is sent to the cellphone E Always heed any warning and information messages Operating Center (SOC). number provided. For security reasons, the position displayed in the vehicle. F of the vehicle is not communicated in the > Please see chapter "Warning and information notification. G messages" on page 244. Information e Contact the Security Operating Center (SOC) if H your vehicle is stolen. In addition, report the theft – If the vehicle has been stolen, the Service Oper- Operating principle to the relevant police authority. ating Center (SOC) can block the engine from I PVTS is a GSM/GPS-based tracking system that al- being started. The following alarms can be set: J lows a Security Operating Center (SOC) to locate the – Unauthorized movement of vehicle: The vehicle – For vehicles with the smartphone app 1 vehicle if it is stolen. It can then be found by the is moved when operational readiness is shut off. Porsche Connect or Car Connect access to the K authorities. app or My Porsche the vehicle is blocked in case For vehicles with a Driver Card: The vehicle is L moved without the Driver Card being in it. of theft. Information – Sabotage: PVTS was used without authorization. M On vehicles with the Porsche Connect or – Break-in alarm: The alarm system has been trig- N 1 gered and is active for more than 15 seconds. Operating the PVTS without a Car Connect smartphone app, a few settings can be O implemented directly using the app. Driver Card Detailed information on installation, the functions Information When the PVTS is operated normally, no intervention P on the part of the driver is required. and management of the contract can be found at: Q www.porsche.com/connect. – There is no guarantee that a theft will be detected under all circumstances. R – The PVTS alarm can be triggered even if the ve- Transport hicle battery is flat. Transport mode must be activated when transport- S Scope of supply and initial ing the vehicle (e.g. on a ferry). T activation If the vehicle is not transported in transport mode, PVTS is tested by the authorized Porsche dealer and the system may trigger a false alarm, which is also U subject to charge (further information is available at activated together with the vehicle owner. V After activation, the vehicle owner will receive im- www.porsche.com/connect). portant documents, such as the phone number of W the local Security Operating Center (SOC) and your X service provider. Y Z 1. In some countries, 191 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS)

A Activating and deactivating transport mode B e Contact the Security Operating Center (SOC) before transporting the vehicle and when you C have finished transporting the vehicle. D – or – e Via the Porsche Connect smartphone app, E Car Connect1 or at www.porsche.com/connect, before transporting the vehicle and when you F have finished transporting the vehicle. G H Service PVTS Plus must be set to service mode in the fol- I lowing situations: J – During customer service (e.g. for regular servicing) K – When the vehicle battery is disconnected L If the vehicle is not serviced in service mode, the M system may trigger a false alarm that you will be billed for (for further information, please visit www. N porsche.com/connect). O Activating and deactivating service mode P e Contact the Security Operating Center (SOC) Q before and after having the vehicle serviced. e When your vehicle is being serviced, please in- R form the relevant employee at the authorized S Porsche dealer that your vehicle is equipped with PVTS. T U V W X Y Z 1. depending on country 192 Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Rear Cross Traffic Alert – If the rear bumper is dirty. After the vehicle is switched off, the status of the A system is stored in the selected account and paired B General safety instructions Scope of functions with the vehicle key used. > Please see chapter "Personal settings" on C Inattentive maneuvering Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) monitors the area WARNING page 168. or pulling out behind the vehicle and warns of any road users (e.g. D passenger vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, pedes- The system must not induce you to take risks with trians) crossing behind the vehicle when the driver is E your safety. The driver is still responsible for taking backing out. F due care when pulling out and when assessing ob- G stacles. The system is no substitute for the driver's attentiveness. H e Make sure that no persons, animals, obstacles or I vehicles are within maneuvering range of the vehicle. J e Observe the safety instructions and system lim- K its of the supporting systems, sensors and Fig. 139: Rear Cross Traffic Alert display cameras. The system is available subject to the following L prerequisites: Information on further assistance systems: M – Rear Cross Traffic Alert is switched on. > Please see chapter "ParkAssist" on page 164. – Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is N > Please see chapter "Active Parking Support" on switched on. O page 38. – Transmission range R is engaged. Unidentified situations P WARNING – The vehicle speed is less than approx. 10 mph (15 km/h). Q Functional restrictions in the system may result in When reverse gear is engaged, arrows appear on the R the system failing to respond or issuing a false alarm. central display to alert the driver to approaching S e Drive with extreme care. crossing road users. Visual and acoustic signals warn of the potential hazardous situation. If the driver e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and T does not respond to the warning, the system per- the vehicle surroundings. forms a brief warning jolt to alert the driver to the U impending collision hazard. V System limitations W Vehicles cannot or may not be detected in time in Switching Rear Cross Traffic Alert the following situations: on and off X – The vehicle is parked next to vehicles that pro- e e Assist e Rear Cross Traffic Alert Y trude out very far toward the rear. – Crossing road users approach extremely quickly. Z 193 Roof Transport System

Unsecured or incorrectly A Roof Transport System WARNING Information secured loads B e When you are not using the roof transport sys- Transporting objects on the roof An unsecured or incorrectly secured load can be- C tem, remove it completely from the vehicle in Unsecured or incorrectly come detached from the roof transport system while WARNING order to optimize energy consumption and re- D secured roof transport driving and cause serious accidents. duce noise. e E system or individual Secure the load so that it cannot move during the load-carrying devices journey. Various objects can be transported safely and se- F e Load the roof transport system so that the load curely using the roof transport system and additional An unsecured or incorrectly secured roof transport attachments, e.g. ski/snowboard rack, roof box or G does not protrude over the sides of the roof system can become detached from the vehicle while transport system. Never exceed the width of the bicycle rack. H driving and cause serious accidents. vehicle. e Only use roof transport systems that have been tested and approved by Porsche. It is not possi- I e Individual attachment modules such as ski/ e Do not use elastic tensioners. snowboard holders or roof boxes must be posi- e Position the center of gravity of the load as low ble to fit commercially available roof rack J tioned as centrally much as possible relative to as possible with respect to the roof transport systems. For more information on the roof transport system: K the leg supports. system and distribute the load evenly over the e Check the roof transport system and attachment load area. e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. L modules before every trip and at regular intervals M during longer trips to make sure that they are NOTICE Fitting the roof transport system fitted correctly and securely. bb Vehicles with a panoramic sunroof. N e Retighten all fastening screws. Washing the vehicle in a car wash or failure to ob- O serve the overall vehicle height or the maximum Changed vehicle WARNING permitted gross weight can damage the vehicle or P handling roof transport system. Q Vehicle handling changes when the roof transport e Remove the complete roof transport system be- R system is mounted and loaded. fore washing the vehicle in a car wash. e Check the overall vehicle height with the roof S e Adapt your driving style. e Do not drive at a speed of more than transport system fitted before driving into areas T 81 mph (130 km/h) when the roof transport with limited headroom (e.g. parking garages). e Do not exceed the maximum permitted roof load, U system is loaded. e Do not drive at a speed of more than gross weight or maximum axle loads. V 110 mph (180 km/h) when the roof transport W system is mounted but not loaded. X Y Z

194 Roof Transport System

2. Undo cover flap H with wrench E and open it A upward. B C D E F G H I J K

Fig. 140: Components of the roof transport system Fig. 141: Opening the flaps of the roof trim L A Front carrier (long) 1. Open the flaps J of the roof trim. M B Rear carrier (short) Fig. 143: Undoing the adjusting bolts C Cover trims N D Torque wrench 3. Initial installation: O E Key a. Place adapter G on torque wrench D. Undo F Mounting protection adjusting screws I on both upper sides of P G Adapter each carrier with torque wrench D. Q When fitting for the first time: e Adjust the front and rear carriers to fit the width R of the vehicle. S NOTICE T

Risk of damage to paint and/or glass through the U carrier foot. V e Attach the mounting protection on the carrier W foot when installing the carrier. X

Fig. 142: Unlocking and folding up the cover flaps Y Z

195 Roof Transport System

A c. Insert long carrier A in the front and short carrier B in the rear into vehicle receptacles K B in the openings in the roof trim while simul- C taneously adjusting them to the width of the vehicle using the adjustable carrier legs. D Ensure that the carriers are fitted in accord- E ance with the stickers on the underside of the F carriers. G H I J K

L Fig. 144: Put on the mounting protection. Fig. 147: Tightening the adjusting screws M b. Attach mounting protection F onto the carrier e. Tighten the adjustment screws on the upper foot on the opposite side. side of the carriers on both sides slightly but N do not tighten them all the way yet. Then O tighten the adjusting screws on the upper side to 6 ftlb (8 Nm) with torque wrench D. P To do this, turn torque wrench D until a Q "cracking noise" is heard. Continue with installation step 4 R Fig. 146: Tightening the anchoring bolts S d. Screw in all four anchoring screws for the carriers until flush using torque wrench D but T do not tighten them all the way yet. U V W X Y Z Fig. 145: Placing the carrier on the roof

196 Roof Transport System

A B C D E F G H I J K

Fig. 148: Attaching the mounting protection Fig. 149: Placing the carrier on the roof Fig. 150: Tightening the anchoring bolts L 3. Reinstallation: b. Insert long carrier A in the front and the short 4. Tighten all four anchoring bolts of the carriers M a. Attaching mouting protector F on the carrier carrier B in the rear into vehicle receptacles K until flush using torque wrench D. Then tighten leg on the opposite side. in the openings in the roof trim. all four anchoring screws at 8 Nm. To do this, N turn torque wrench D until the "cracking noise" is O heard.. e Check that the carriers are seated properly and P firmly in place. Q R S T U V W X Y Z

197 Roof Transport System

A Installing attachments B C D E F G H I J

K Fig. 152: Cutting the profile covering to size and at- L Fig. 151: Closing and securing the cover flaps taching it 5. Close cover flaps H on the carriers all the way 6. To protect against moisture and dirt and prevent M Fig. 153: Installing attachments and mount the desired attachment module (e.g. wind noises, cut profile covering C to size and N roof box, bicycle rack) onto the carrier. Finally, push it into the carriers from the side, or press it 1. Undo the cover flaps with the wrench and fold into the carriers from above. O secure the cover flaps with wrench E. them back. 2. Insert the attachments into the existingT groove. P Information 3. Close the cover flaps and secure them with the wrench. Q After driving 30 miles (50 km), retighten all screws on the carriers and load-carrying devices. 4. Follow the respective installation instructions R when mounting and anchoring the attachments S in place. T Closing the profile cover U To protect against moisture and dirt and avoid wind V noises, close the T groove on the profile cover when attachments are not in use. W X Y Z

198 Roof Transport System

A B C D E F G H I J K

Fig. 154: Cutting the profile cover to size and mounting it L 1. Cut the profile cover to the length of the base M carrier. N 2. Press the profile cover into the T groove. O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

199 Seat Belts

A Seat Belts serious personal injury in case of an accident. parts and tools. e The shoulder belt should always rest on your e The seatbelt pretensioner system can be trig- B Correct use of seat belts upper body. The shoulder belt should never be gered only once. Triggered belt tensioner sys- C Unfastened or incor- worn behind your back or under your arm. tems must be replaced. DANGER e For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt should e Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that D rectly used seatbelts be worn low across the hips. may prevent secure locking. E A seatbelt that is not fastened will not provide any e Pregnant women should position the seatbelt as e If the seatbelts show damage to webbing, bind- low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it is ings, buckles or retractors, they should be re- F protection in the event of an accident. A seatbelt that is not fastened correctly can increase the risk of not pressing against the abdomen. placed to ensure safe operation. G injury in the event of an accident. e Seatbelts must not rub against sharp objects or e Do not modify or disassemble the seatbelts in H e All occupants must always fasten their seatbelts damage may occur to the belt. your vehicle. e before the start of a journey. Never bleach or dye seatbelts. Using damaged e I e Never allow two people to use the same seatbelt DANGER Do not allow seatbelts to retract until they are seatbelts J at the same time. completely dry after cleaning or this may cause e Remove any loose articles of clothing (e.g. jack- damage to the belt. K Damaged or heavily worn seatbelts will not provide et), as they can interfere with the correct posi- adequate protection in the event of an accident. > Please see chapter "Cleaning the seat belts" on L tion of the seatbelt and restrict your freedom of The seatbelt pretensioner system may only be trig- page 74. movement. M gered once; it must then be replaced. e Do not position seatbelts across hard or fragile e Regularly check all seatbelts for fabric damage Seat-belt pretensioners N objects (e.g. glasses, ball-point pen, cellphone, and check that the belt buckle and attachment Triggering of the seatbelt pretensioners depends on etc.). O points are in good working order. the severity of the accident. Objects of this kind pose an additional risk of e The seatbelts must be kept clean or the retrac- The seat-belt pretensioners can be triggered during: P injury. tors may not work properly. – Front or rear collisions e Make sure that the seatbelts are not twisted or Q e Immediately replace any seatbelts that are dam- – Side impacts loose. aged or have been subjected to heavy strain – Vehicle rollover R e Also provide your passengers with all the infor- during an accident along with triggered seatbelt mation in this section. S pretensioner systems and force limiters. e Use appropriate child restraint systems for all Information e In addition, you should have the anchorage T children. points of the seatbelts checked. Smoke may be released when the seat-belt preten- e Seatbelts must be positioned on the body as to sioners are triggered. This does not necessarily mean U Go to a qualified specialized repair shop. Porsche restrain the upper body and lap from sliding for- that the vehicle is on fire. V ward. Improperly positioned seatbelts can cause recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary W X Y Z

200 Seat Belts

Observe the seat belt warning A warning message is also displayed in the instru- Adjusting seat belt A ment cluster. light and warning message B From a driving speed of approx. 15 mph (24 km/h), an acoustic warning sounds and the red warning C light D in the instrument cluster flashes if the D driver's seat belt or passenger's seat belt - if the passenger seat is occupied - is not fastened. E F Rear seats When operational readiness has been established, a G seat belt status display for the rear seats appears in H the instrument cluster. The seat belt status display disappears approx. 60 seconds after driving off. I The green symbol A + B indicates that the person J sitting on this seat has fastened their seat belt. K The red symbol C indicates that the person sitting on this seat has not fastened their seat belt, or no L one is sitting on this seat. If a seat belt on the rear M seats is opened while driving, an acoustic warning Fig. 156: Adjusting belt height sounds and the relevant symbol turns red and N Fig. 155: Seat belt status display in the instrument cluster The height of the belt outlets for the front seats can flashes for about 60 seconds . A Seat belt status display for left rear seat be adjusted. O B Seat belt status display for center rear seat (depending e Adjust the height of the belt outlet so that the P on equipment) belt runs across the middle of your shoulder, not C Seat belt status display for right rear seat against your neck. Q D Warning light: driver's seat belt or passenger's seat belt a. Upward – push belt outlet upward. not fastened b. Downward – press locking button A and push R belt outlet downward. S Front seats T When the vehicle is ready to drive, an acoustic warning sounds and the red warning light D in the U instrument cluster flashes for 6 seconds if the driv- V er's seat belt or passenger seat belt - if the passenger seat is occupied - was not fastened. The red W warning light on the instrument cluster stays on X after the 6 seconds until the driver's seat belt or passenger's seat belt - if the passenger seat is oc- Y cupied - has been fastened. Z

201 Seat Belts

A Fastening a seatbelt buckle on the inner side of the seat until it locks 1. Hold the belt latch. with an audible click. 2. Press the red button on the seat-belt buckle. B 5. Make sure that the seatbelt is not trapped or 3. Guide the belt latch up to approx. 2.75 in. (7 cm) C twisted and that it is not rubbing against sharp below the belt outlet. edges. D On the front seats and the middle rear seat (de- 6. Ensure that the lap belt fits tautly across the lap. pending on equipment), the belt latch is held at E After fastening the seatbelt, tension the lap belt its end position by a securing knob. by pulling the shoulder belt up. On the outer rear seats, the belt latch is held in an F For pregnant women: Position the lap belt so that easily accessible position by a plastic slider (see G it is as far down on the lap as possible and not illustration). pressing against the abdomen. 4. Push plastic slider under the belt latch (see H 7. During the journey, pull on the shoulder belt oc- illustration). I casionally to ensure that the lap belt remains under tension. J K Opening the belt buckle and re- L moving the seat belt M Fig. 157: Fastening a seatbelt N 1. Assume a comfortable seating position. O 2. Adjust the backrest so that the shoulder belt P passes over the center of your shoulder and is positioned on your upper body. Q 3. Grasp the seatbelt by the belt latch and pull it R slowly and evenly over your chest and hip. S Information T The seat belt can block in the following situations: U – Vehicle is at an angle. V – Seat belt is pulled out abruptly. – When accelerating or decelerating, when nego- W tiating bends or on inclines. X 4. Insert the belt latch into the relevant seatbelt Fig. 158: Unfastening the seat belt Y Z

202 Seats

Seat adjustment Seats The vehicle is equipped with a total of 4 head re- CAUTION A straints in the backrests of the the front and rear seats (2 seats in the rear). B Selecting the correct seat position If persons or animals are in the movement range of A correct sitting position is important to ensure safe The driver seat and the front passenger seat provide the seat during seat adjustment, there is a risk of C integrated head restraints in the backrests. The fore- and fatigue-free driving. To adjust the position of the parts of the body being pinched or crushed. D driver's seat, proceed as follows: and-aft position of the head restraints on the front seats can be adjusted (depending on type of seat). e Ensure that no one is put at risk when adjusting 1. Adjust the seat height to ensure that you have E The height position of the head restraints on the the seat. enough headroom and a good overview of the front seats are not adjustable. The height of the head e Do not activate the memory button if anything or F vehicle. restraints on the rear seats can be adjusted. anyone is in the way. G 2. Move the seat in the fore-and-aft direction so e Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any of that you can reach and press the pedals without the seat adjustment buttons. H stretching your legs out completely. Your foot Adjusting seat should cover the entire surface of the pedal. Adjusting the seat while I WARNING NOTICE 3. Grip the upper part of the steering wheel. Set the driving J backrest angle and the steering wheel position so that your arms are almost outstretched. Your The seat can move further than intended if adjusted Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor, wind de- K shoulders must still be touching the backrest. while driving. You may lose control of the vehicle. flector, etc. when the seat is adjusted or folded back L 4. Correct the fore-and-aft position of the seat if e Do not adjust the seat while driving. The back- or forward. M necessary. rest locks must be engaged at all times while the e Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not in vehicle is in motion. contact with any other object. N Head restraints The driver and front passenger seats provide inte- O Removal of or Failure to DANGER grated head restraints in the backrests. The head P Adjust Headrest restraints are not adjustable. The rear seats do not provide head restraints. Q Driving with removed headrests, improperly posi- Failure to adjust tioned headrests or improperly installed headrests WARNING R can cause serious personal injury or death in an backrests S accident. All occupants, including the driver, should not oper- T e Adjust the headrests so that the upper edge of ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the backr- the headrest is brought to eye level or higher. ests are placed in their proper positions so that the U e Do not drive the vehicle without the headrest in risk of neck injuries is minimized in the event of a V place and properly adjusted. crash. The vehicle is equipped with a total of 5 head re- e Adjust the backrest's inclination such that the W straints in the backrests of the the front and rear headrest is in an upright position. X seats (3 seats in the rear). e Driver and passengers should be seated upright and in the center of their seats. Y Z

203 Seats

A Adjusting seat electrically Using the Comfort access When entering the vehicle B function bb Function activated. The Comfort access function makes it easier for you bb The driver's seat and steering wheel are in their C to get in and out of the vehicle. Easy Entry positions. e Close the driver's door, press the Power button D Automatic adjustment of CAUTION and switch on the vehicle. the driver’s seat E The driver's seat and steering wheel move to the F If persons are behind the seat when the driver’s seat stored position. is automatically adjusted, they may become trapped. G e Switch off the Comfort access function if some- Information H body is sitting behind the driver’s seat. When the key is changed, the seat and steering I wheel move to the entry position stored on the ve- NOTICE hicle key. J K Risk of damage to the seat and rear seat if the rear Information L seat bench is folded forward when settings are activated. Altering the seat setting manually interrupts the M Easy Entry function. Fig. 159: Adjusting seat electrically e Switch off the Easy Entry function if the rear seat N is folded forward. e Set the seat position manually. 1 Adjust seat angle O 2 Adjust seat height 3 Adjust seat cushion Activating the function Switching seat heating/seat ven- P 4 Adjust seat cushion side bolsters (depending on equipment) The Comfort access function can be activated in the tilation on and off Q 5 Adjust seat backrest side bolsters (depending on central display. equipment) R 6 Adjust fore-and-aft position e e Comfort e Comfort access S 7 Adjust backrest angle 8 Adjust lumbar support > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on T page 234. e Press the respective control in the direction of U the arrow until the desired setting or final posi- When exiting the vehicle V tion is reached. bb Function activated. e Press the Power button, switch off the vehicle W Storing seat settings and open the driver's door. Fig. 160: Turn the seat heater / ventilation on and off X For information on storing and retrieving the seat The steering wheel moves upward. Y settings: The driver's seat moves backward. > Please see chapter "Personal settings" on Z page 168.

204 Seats

Adjust the front seat heater / seat ventilation The massage function switches off automatically A after 10 minutes. For the front seat heater and seat ventilation, the B balance between the seating area and the backrest can be adjusted on the center console. Setting the massage program on the central C display D 1. e Comfort e Driver seat/Passenger seat e bb Vehicle ready to operate. Seat heat. balance/Seat vent. balance E 1. e Comfort e Driver seat/Passenger seat e 2. Setting the balance. F Fig. 161: Switching rear seat heating on and off Massage program 2. Select the desired massage program. G Switching seat heating/seat ventilation on Set the rear seat heater For the rear seat heater, the balance between the H bb Vehicle ready to operate. seating area and the backrest can be adjusted on the Setting the massage strength on the central e Press the A (seat heater) or B (seat ventilation) I rear display. display softkey — repeatedly if necessary. bb Vehicle ready to operate. J The number of illuminated light indicators shows 1. e Seat heating balance left/Seat heating bb Massage program selected. K the selected heating or ventilation setting. balance right The seat heating warms the seat via heating wires in 1. e Comfort e Driver seat/Passenger seat e L the seat surface and backrest. 2. Setting the balance. Massage strength The seat ventilation cools the seat by directing cold M air through the seat surface and backrest into the 2. Select the desired massage strength. N vehicle interior. Using massage function on the front seats (depending on the O Adjusting passenger seat from the Switching seat heating/seat ventilation off equipment) P e Press the A (seat heater) or B (seat ventilation) driver’s cockpit softkey — repeatedly if necessary — until no Switching on the massage function Q 1. e Comfort e Adjust passenger seat light indicator remains lit up. bb Vehicle ready to operate. R e Press button 8 (Fig. 159) on the corresponding 2. Setting the passenger seat position using the S Information seat. controls on the driver’s seat. The massage function is switched on. T Heated seats are not available when the interior A menu in which you can select the massage To end the adjustment: temperature is high. U program is displayed briefly on the central Seat ventilation is not available when the interior e Select Finish seat adjustment. display. V temperature is below 60 °F (15 °C). If the battery voltage is too low, seat heating/seat e The massage strength can be selected by Adjusting headrests W ventilation is restricted initially and then turned off. touching the icon. X Adjusting headrests on front seats e The massage function can be switched on or off Y The headrests on the front seats can be adjusted by touching the icon. horizontally. Z

205 Seats

A e Always make sure that the headrest is engaged Adjusting headrests on rear seats Raising correctly. Headrest on occupied e Push headrest upward until the desired setting is B WARNING center rear seat in stor- reached. C age position Lowering D e Press button A and push the headrest downward Driving with headrests not adjusted correctly in- at the same time until the desired setting is E creases the risk of serious injury. reached. F e If the center rear seat is occupied, move the To improve your view to the rear, the headrest on the headrest out of its storage position and adjust it center rear seat can be moved to a storage position G to one of the higher detent positions. that is lower than the lowest usable position. H The height of the headrests on the rear seats can be I adjusted. Removing and installing headrests e J Adjust the height of the each headrest in such a on rear seats way that the upper corner of the headrest is at The headrests on the rear seats may have to be re- K eye level. If eye level cannot be reached, select moved in order to install a child restraint system the uppermost headrest position. L correctly. e Always make sure that the headrest is engaged > Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems M correctly. (Child Seats)" on page 96. N Fig. 162: Adjust the horizontal position of the head rests on Headrests on rear seats WARNING the front seats removed or not adjusted O Forward correctly P e Keep the A button depressed, while at the same time moving the headrest with both hands to the Driving with headrests removed or not adjusted Q front until the desired setting has been reached. correctly increases the risk of serious injury. e If the rear seats are occupied, install the relevant R Backward headrests. S e Keep the A button depressed, while at the same e Adjust the height of the each headrest such that time pushing the headrest with both hands to T the rear until the desired setting is reached. the upper edge of the headrest is at eye level or the headrest is in the uppermost position. U e Always make sure that the relevant headrest is V engaged correctly. W X

Y Fig. 163: Adjust the height of the headrests on the rear Z seats (example: three seats in the back)

206 Seats

will increase the risk of serious injury. Folding outer rear seat backrests forward A e Make sure that the headrests are not inter- B changed during re-installation. C Installing D 1. Fold the rear seat backrest roughly half-way forward. E 2. Insert headrest into the guides and push it down F until it locks with an audible click. 3. Press button A and push the headrest down fully. G It should no longer be possible to pull the head- H rest out of the backrest. 4. Adjust and engage the rear seat backrest. I J Folding down rear seat backrest K The rear seat backrests can be folded forward indi- Fig. 164: Removing and installing headrests on rear seats vidually to make the luggage compartment larger. L Removing M 1. Push headrest up as far as it will go. NOTICE Fig. 165: Folding outer rear seat backrests forward N 2. Fold the rear seat backrest roughly half-way 1. Push the headrests down. forward. Risk of damage from objects on the rear seats. > Please see chapter "Adjusting headrests" on O e Do not place objects on the seats when folding 3. Press the A and B buttons and at the sime time page 205. P push the headrest upward until the B button re- the backrests forward. 2. Press the release button A and fold the backrest mains locked in place. forward. Q 4. Remove the headrest and stow it safely in the Information R vehicle. 5. Adjust and engage the rear seat backrest if The backrests on the left and center rear seats are S necessary. connected. When you fold the left backrest forward, the center backrest will also fold over. T Interchanging headrests WARNING The backrest on the center rear seat can also be U folded forward separately (depending on V The individual headrests are designed specifically for equipment). use on the respective seats. If the headrests are not W fitted on the correct seats during re-installation, this X Y Z

207 Seats

A Folding center rear seat backrest forward e Fold up the backrest until it locks with an audible click. Make sure that the seat belts are not B trapped. C D E F G H I J K L M Fig. 166: Folding center rear seat backrest forward N bb Vehicles with 3 rear seats O e Actuate release handle A in direction of arrow P and fold the backrest forward. Q Returning rear seat backrests to upright position R Seat backrest not en- WARNING S gaged correctly T If the rear seat backrests are not engaged correctly, U they can fold forward unintentionally while driving. V If the red marking B is still visible, the seat backrest is not engaged correctly. W e Make sure that the red marking B is no longer X visible after the seat backrest has engaged. Y e Release the seat backrest again and engage it again if necessary. Z

208 Smoker's Package

Smoker's Package Opening and closing the ashtray A B Using the ashtray C Fire hazard due to flam- WARNING mable objects D

Paper in the ashtray can catch fire. E e Do not put any flammable objects into the F ashtray. G H Inserting the ashtray I J K L M Fig. 168: Opening and closing the ashtray N e Open and close the ashtray by lifting and closing the lid. O

Removing the ashtray P e Grasp the ashtray and pull it out. Q R S T Fig. 167: Inserting the ashtray U Depending on the equipment, an ashtray is available V in the drink holder in the center console. > Please see chapter "Cup Holders" on page 103. W e Insert the ashtray into the drink holder and push X it down to the stop. Y Z

209 Speed Limiter (LIM)

A Speed Limiter (LIM) e Do not use the adaptive speed limiter in the fol- Information lowing situations: B General Safety Instructions – poor weather conditions (e.g. snow or ice) When using navigation with active route guidance, C – unfavorable road conditions (including pot the adaptive speed limiter always adapts to the pro- Lack of attention posed route. If route guidance is not active, it adapts D WARNING holes, dirty road surfaces, ruts, unclear road markings, loose gravel) to the most plausible route. E The system must not induce you to take risks with – areas with high volumes of traffic F your safety. The driver remains responsible when – unsafe traffic situations (driving on highway driving, such as by keeping a safe distance or driving on and off-ramps, accelerating briefly) Controls G at an appropriate speed, even when the system is – a vehicle position that cannot be clearly de- H activated. The system is no substitute for the driv- tected by the system er's attentiveness. – covered or damaged traffic signs I e Drive with extreme care. – damaged or covered front camera lens J e If the system-induced deceleration is insuffi- – out-of-date navigation data K cient, slow the vehicle down immediately using the footbrake. L e Make sure that you can take control of the ve- Operating principle M hicle at any time. The speed limiter (LIM) helps you to stay below a certain speed you set yourself. N Responding to warning symbols O Adaptive speed limiter (depending on the Always observe any warning and information mes- country) sages displayed in the vehicle. P The adaptive speed limiter uses navigation and > Please see chapter "Warning and information camera data to automatically detect the speed limit Q messages" on page 244. within the system limits and changes the maximum R speed accordingly. Fig. 169: Control lever for driver assistance systems S System limitations Speed limits detected in advance are displayed on Restricted availability of the instrument cluster, and the speed of the vehicle R Switch systems on/off and open options menu T WARNING S Open options menu (when system is switched on) the system is reduced in good time. If a speed limit is not detected in advance, the speed is not reduced until the 1 Set/increase speed limit U 2 Reduce speed limit The assistance provided by the adaptive speed lim- vehicle is driving past the detected traffic sign. 3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed V iter cannot be guaranteed in certain situations. 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control W Possible consequences: X – The speed limit is not detected or adopted correctly. Y – The vehicle drives at the set maximum speed. Z – An information message is displayed on the instrument cluster. 210 Speed Limiter (LIM)

Display elements The options menu for the driver assistance sys- Activating the speed limiter A tems appears on the instrument cluster. Setting the current driving speed as the maximum Status display symbols B 2. If LIM is not already selected, select LIM using speed the rotary knob on the steering wheel and press e Briefly press the control lever forward (position C to confirm. Symbol Meaning 1). The speed limiter is switched on and passive. D The speed limiter is active. Speed limiter is passive. E Switching from an already activated driver assis- The current driving speed is set as the maximum tance system to the speed limiter speed and appears green in the status display. F 1. Press button S on the control lever. Setting the detected speed limit as the maximum G The options menu for the driver assistance sys- speed Speed limiter is passive with the set tems appears on the instrument cluster. H maximum speed. bb Adaptive speed limiter is activated 2. Use the rotary knob on the steering wheel to se- e Press the control lever up (RESUME). I lect LIM and press to confirm. The speed limiter is active. The speed limiter is switched on and passive. J Speed limiter is active with the set The detected speed limit is set as the maximum The operating status appears gray on the status K maximum speed. display. If the speed limiter is active, then the cur- speed and is displayed in the status display. rently detected speed limit is also displayed in gray. L Adjusting the maximum speed M Speed limiter is active and a speed Information The set maximum speed or the recognized speed limit has been detected ahead. As limit can be changed by pressing the control lever. N soon as the vehicle reaches the start An activated driver assistance system will be acti- bb Speed limiter active. vated again even after switching off and restoring O of the speed limit zone, the color of Increasing the speed the displayed speed changes from operational readiness. P e Press the control lever forward (position 1): blue to green. – Brief press = 1 mp (km/h) increments Q Deactivating the speed limiter – Press and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h) e Press button R on the control lever. increments R Activating and deactivating the The set maximum speed is deleted. S speed limiter Reduce speed e Pull the control lever (position 2): T The system that was selected last is always Information – Brief pull = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments switched on. The system is initially in passive mode – Pull and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h) increments U when switched on. It must first be activated before If the speed limiter is deactivated automatically due If the adaptive speed limiter is active, then the ±- V the control function will start working. to a system fault, it is only deactivated completely symbol appears alongside the maximum speed. when the accelerator pedal is released or when the W Activating the speed limiter system is switched off by pressing the R button. bb A driver assistance system is not yet switched X on. Y 1. Press button R on the control lever. Z

211 Speed Limiter (LIM)

A Interrupting and resuming speed Information Activating and deactivating the B limiting The speed limiter is interrupted if another driver as- adaptive speed limiter Due to the interruption, the system switches to C sistance system is selected. The last maximum e e Assistance e e Assistance system passive standby mode and remains in standby until speed entered remains in the system and is resumed D it is activated again manually. settings e Adaptive Speed Limiter e Consider when the speed limiter is reactivated. If the speed recognized speed limits E limiter is active, then the currently detected speed Interrupting control limit is used. The currently detected speed limit is set as the F e Press the control lever down (CANCEL). maximum speed. The speed limiter is passive. G The previously set maximum speed or the cur- Overriding the speed Setting the maximum speed H rently detected speed limit is displayed in gray. limiter temporarily On roads with no speed limit or if no speed limit has been detected, the maximum speed that is set is I The speed limitation can be temporarily overridden Resuming control used as the top speed. by initiating a kickdown. This can be useful when J bb The current driving speed is lower than the set passing, for example. Setting the maximum speed maximum speed. K bb Speed limiter active. e Press the control lever upward once (RESUME). e e e e L e Accelerator pedal pressed down fully. Assistance Assistance system The speed limiter is active. e e The system is temporarily passive. settings Adaptive Speed Limiter Maximum M – or – speed bb The current driving speed is higher than the set A warning signal sounds. N maximum speed. The speed limiter symbol with the set maximum The set maximum speed remains active until it is 1. Press the control lever upward once (RESUME). speed flashes on the instrument cluster. reset, even with a change of driver or when the ve- O hicle is restarted. 2. Take your foot off the accelerator or press the To resume control: P brake pedal to bring the speed of the vehicle to e Press the control lever up (RESUME). Q below the displayed maximum speed. If the current driving speed is above the set Using a personal speed limit – or – maximum speed, the vehicle is slowed down un- The personal speed limits function allows you to set R Press the control lever upward twice (RESUME). til the set maximum speed is reached again. your own speed limit. A warning message appears S The vehicle is then slowed down, until the set – or – and a warning signal sounds if the limit is exceeded. maximum speed or the currently detected speed e Take your foot off the accelerator or press the One way the function can be used is as a reminder of T limit is reached again. brake pedal to bring the speed of the vehicle to the maximum permitted speed for a particular type U The speed limiter is active. below the displayed maximum speed. of tire that was fitted. The speed limiter is active. The previously set V Setting and activating a personal speed limit maximum speed or the currently detected speed Two speed limits can be set, but only one can be W limit is resumed. activated at any one time.

X e e Assistance e e Assistance system Y settings e Personal speed limits Z

212 Spoilers

Spoilers Moving rear spoiler to cleaning A position B General Safety Instructions Retracting and extending CAUTION C Failure of the extendible the rear spoiler WARNING rear spoiler D When the rear spoiler is manually extended or re- E Driving stability is impaired at higher speeds by the tracted while the vehicle is stationary, body parts increased uplift on the rear axle. can become trapped between the moving spoiler F and stationary vehicle parts. e Adapt your driving style and speed to the altered G vehicle handling. e Make sure that no persons or animals are within e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche the range of movement of the rear spoiler. H dealer. I Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche The rear spoiler can be moved to a cleaning position dealer, as they have trained technicians and the manually using the central display. J necessary parts and tools. Moving rear spoiler to cleaning position K bb Operational readiness established. L NOTICE bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. M e e Settings e Vehicle e Manual cleaning Risk of damage to the rear spoiler. position spoiler N e Never pull or push the vehicle by the rear spoiler. O e Retract the rear spoiler before using an automatic car wash. P Q Responding to warning symbols R Always heed any warning and information messages displayed in the vehicle. S > Please see chapter "Warning and information T messages" on page 244. U Operating principle V The rear spoiler improves driving stability at high W speeds. The rear spoiler extends and retracts automatically depending on driving speed and the se- X lected drive mode. Y Z

213 Sport Chrono Stopwatch

A Sport Chrono Stopwatch Stopwatch on the dashboard B With the Sport Chrono stopwatch, times can be measured, evaluated and displayed on the instru- C ment cluster. D The following information can be recorded and evaluated: E – Lap number F – Completed lap distance – Lap time G – Optional: Various other data (such as vehicle po- H sition or speed) I During a recording the following can be displayed: – Number of the current lap J – Fastest lap time and the current lap time in color K comparison – How much of the lap has been completed in re- L lation to a reference lap Fig. 171: Stopwatch in the instrument cluster M – Color rating to indicate whether the current lap A Lap counter time is quicker than, slower than or identical to Fig. 170: Sport Chrono stopwatch B Circle diagram: how much of the lap has been com- N the current fastest lap or selected lap pleted compared to a reference lap. The total time is displayed in the stopwatch on the C Control commands O – Remaining recording time dashboard. D Current lap time P Up to 10 hours can be recorded and displayed. The analog pointer shows the seconds. The digital E Reference lap time display shows 1/100 seconds up to the first minute. F Intermediate time set Q Subsequently, the display is in second steps. Starting timing R Setting the time display and illumination of S the stopwatch on the dashboard e Sport Chrono e Start Recording of the data begins. If a reference lap T > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 234. has not been loaded, the first lap is used as the U reference lap. V Stopwatch in the instrument Stopping timing W cluster bb Timing has been started. The stopwatch is displayed on the "Car & Info" X display. e Sport Chrono e Stop Y Z

214 Sport Chrono Stopwatch

Continuing timing Analog Clock on the Dashboard A bb Timing has been stopped. B e Sport Chrono e Continue C D Ending lap/starting new lap When the stopwatch is running, the current stop- E watch time is stored as the lap time. F bb Timing has been started. G e Sport Chrono e Lap The lap counter A is incremented by one lap. H The time of the fastest completed lap is stored I as the fastest lap time. J Taking intermediate time K bb Timing has been started. L e Sport Chrono e Interim time M The intermediate time is displayed briefly and Fig. 172: Sport Chrono Stoppuhr N not saved. Timing continues to run in the The time and the brightness of the lighting of the background. analog clock can be set via the touch display in the O Area F in the circle diagram shows the inter- dashboard: P mediate time set. > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 234. Q Resetting the stopwatch time R bb Timing has been stopped. S e Sport Chrono e Reset T All stopwatch time displays are reset to zero. U V W X Y Z

215 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

A Starting, driving and stop- Drive positions Starting and driving the vehicle B ping the vehicle Bringing about operational readiness bb C General Safety Instructions High-voltage battery sufficiently charged. D bb Vehicle charging plug removed from the vehicle Reduced driving noise charge connection socket. WARNING E with electric vehicles bb Vehicle key is detected inside the vehicle. F Even when E-Sound is switched on in accordance Automatically G with legal requirements, an electric vehicle produces e Get into the vehicle and close the driver door. very little driving noise, which means that other road Operational readiness is achieved. H users might not even hear it. There is therefore a risk Manually I of accidents, particularly in areas with traffic calming, while maneuvering or parking. J e Be particularly alert while driving! K L Operating principle M A distinction is made between readiness for operation (standby) and readiness to drive. Both are acti- Fig. 173: Drive position display N vated separately. The following drive positions are available: O D — Drive Operational readiness P Drive position D for driving forwards. When you get into the vehicle, the key you have with R — Reverse gear Q you is detected by the vehicle, and readiness for Drive position R for driving in reverse. operation is established automatically. Some elec- Only engage when the vehicle is stationary and the R trical equipment and electronic systems, such as the brake is applied. central display, are available. S N — Neutral e To save the battery, only leave the vehicle in T Transmission range N must be engaged in car standby (ready for operation) and only use the washes, for example. U active electrical equipment for as long as is ab- Fig. 174: Power button P — Park solutely necessary. bb Operational readiness shut off. V Drive position P for securing the vehicle. bb Vehicle key is detected inside the vehicle. Readiness to drive Drive positions D, R and N are selected using the W e Press the power button. Selecting transmission range D, N or R establishes selector lever to the right of the steering wheel, Operational readiness is achieved. X driving readiness. The vehicle is now ready to drive while drive position P is selected by pressing the P Y and can be moved. button. Z

216 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

Bringing about operational readiness and Driving off with a high rate of acceleration Energy recovery (recuperation) A driving off (Launch Control) Unsuitable use of B bb Operational readiness achieved. Driving off with a high WARNING WARNING recuperation 1. Press the brake pedal. rate of acceleration C 2. Select the D or R drive position with the selector Recuperation is a system that is used only for energy D lever. Under certain circumstances (poor road conditions, recovery. When simultaneously using a recuperation The parking lock and electrical parking brake are drive inattention, etc.), driving off with a high rate of stage with a driver assistance system, the control E automatically disengaged. acceleration may cause control of the vehicle to be behavior of the driver assistance system is always lost or other traffic participants to be endangered. F 3. Release the brake pedal and slowly step on the prioritized (independently of the display). It is not a accelerator pedal to start driving. e Only accelerate at high speed on public roads if driver assistance system and cannot take over any G The driving range depends on the style of driving, the street and traffic conditions allow this to be driver assistance system tasks. H climatic conditions, the use of high-energy-con- done. e Do not use the deceleration effect of recupera- I suming devices and the vehicle settings selected (e. e Do not endanger other traffic participants by tion as a distance control system. g. driving mode), among other things. driving off with a high rate of acceleration. e Always be ready to brake and stay a safe dis- J Even in normal driving mode, the vehicle enables tance away from the vehicle in front. e K Information driving off with a high rate of acceleration. Maximum For greater braking power or for braking the ve- acceleration from a standstill is achieved using hicle to a standstill, press the brake pedal as L Operational readiness is shut off under the following required. conditions: Launch Control. M – When certain settings have been made in energy Driving off with Launch Control Automatic overrun recu- WARNING N management bb Vehicle at a standstill. peration limited or not – If the vehicle has been locked from the outside bb Operational readiness achieved. available O – By opening the driver side door and releasing the bb Steering wheel is set to straight-ahead position. P The maximum overrun recuperation is limited. seatbelt of the driver while in the D or R drive bb Transmission range D is selected. Q positions bb SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving mode activated. The detection capability of the sensors can be im- – By pressing the P button 1. Brake pedal is pressed with the left foot. paired by being dirty, bad weather conditions (rain, R – By other systems that automatically select snow, ice, fog, spray) and unfavorable road condi- 2. Quickly press the accelerator pedal fully and hold S transmission range P when a fault occurs, for it down. tions (loose gravel reflective objects). Vehicles up ahead may not be adequately detected or may not example, or that prompt the driver to engage A message appears on the instrument cluster. T transmission range P be detected at all. 3. Quickly the brake pedal again. U The vehicle accelerates at the maximum rate. If automatic overrun recuperation (Auto setting) is not available, such as if sensors are dirty, a message V to this effect will appear in the instrument cluster. Information W e Do not use automatic overrun recuperation in Stresses on components increase significantly when conditions of poor visibility and bad road X driving off at maximum acceleration compared to conditions. Y normal driving off. Z

217 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

A Operating principle Information Driving in coasting mode B During recuperation, the drive converts most of the "Coasting" is the term used to describe driving kinetic energy into electrical energy, which is stored The deceleration effect of overrun recuperation can without the braking effect of overrun recuperation. C in the high-voltage battery. There are two types of be limited if the charge state of the high-voltage This function is designed to increase efficiency by battery is high, for example. D recuperation - overrun recuperation and braking reducing power consumption. Coasting starts when recuperation: e Compensate for reduced overrun recuperation by the accelerator pedal is released slowly and fully. E – Overrun recuperation starts as soon as you take pressing the brake if necessary. Coasting ends when the accelerator pedal is your foot off the accelerator pedal and slows The overrun recuperation strength is displayed in pressed. F down the vehicle. You can configure the overrun the power meter. bb Driving in transmission range D. G recuperation strength. bb PSM is active. Selecting overrun recuperation level H – When you press the brakes, braking recupera- bb No major inclines or slopes. tion increases the amount of recuperated energy e Press the recuperation button on the steering bb Recuperation is switched off. I to a maximum. A higher braking request is then wheel: e Slowly remove your foot from the accelerator achieved using the vehicle's wheel brakes. – Quick press = Switch overrun recuperation on J pedal. and off K Overrun recuperation settings – Press and hold = Switch automatic overrun recuperation (Auto) on and off Information L Set- Dis- Meaning – or – Coasting mode is also possible in "SPORT" and M tings play "SPORT PLUS" drive modes. The overrun recupera- e Drive e Recuperation (accelerator) N tion setting that is activated as standard for these Off No dis- No overrun recuperation. The selected setting is shown on the instrument drive modes must be switched off when selecting O play Vehicle coasting. cluster. these modes. P On Overrun recuperation with Information Q moderate deceleration of Automatic overrun recuperation is only available Parking and leaving the vehicle the vehicle. when PSM is active. Automatic overrun recuperation No power steering or R WARNING brake force boosting S Auto Variable adaptation of over- is not available in "PSM SPORT" mode. run recuperation based on T Power steering and brake force boosting are only data relating to the area Information active when operational readiness is established. If U around the vehicle. The various overrun recuperation settings are as- the vehicle is not ready for operation, a much greater V signed to the drive modes, but can also be freely force will need to be applied during steering or braking. W selected by the driver. Personalization is possible in the INDIVIDUAL drive e Only switch off operational readiness when the X mode. vehicle is at a standstill. Y Z

218 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

Risk of the vehicle rolling WARNING Selecting drive position P manually If the vehicle is stopped on an upward or down- A away ward slope of more than 8%, the parking brake is also activated. The brake warning light (USA: B In the following situations, the parking brake is not / Canada: ) lights up. C active and the vehicle may roll away. Activating and deactivating the electric parking – When leaving the vehicle with drive position N D brake manually engaged. E – If the driver's door is open and the driver's seat- The electric parking brake can be activated or deac- belt is unfastened, pressing the brake pedal and tivated in the central display, regardless of whether F drive position P is engaged. selecting drive position D or R again will deacti- G vate the parking brake, Fig. 175: Button for the parking lock and electric parking e e Settings e Vehicle e Electric parking H which can cause injuries and damage the vehicle. A brake brake warning on the instrument cluster indicates that bb I there is a danger of the vehicle rolling away. Hold the vehicle stationary by pressing the brake The brake warning light (USA: / Canada: pedal. ) lights up or goes out. J e Before leaving the vehicle, activate the parking e Press button P. brake by pressing the P button. Brake warning light USA K The parking lock and electric parking brake are Brake warning light Canada activated simultaneously. L Stopping the vehicle The brake warning light (USA: / Canada: Responding to warning symbols M e Press the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to ) and indicator for drive position P on the in- The brake warning light (USA: / Canada: a standstill. strument cluster light up. N ) flashes if the electric parking brake is not fully ap- – When stopping briefly, stop the vehicle with Selecting drive position P automatically plied when the vehicle is stationary. O the brake pedal and leave the selector lever in bb Hold the vehicle stationary by pressing the brake transmission range D. If the parking lock cannot be activated, a warning P pedal. message appears on the instrument cluster. On gradients, the vehicle is automatically held bb Drive position D or R selected. > Please see chapter "Warning and information Q stationary using the HOLD function. e Open the driver’s door and unfasten the driver’s messages" on page 244. R seat belt. Parking the vehicle The parking lock and parking brake are activated Switching off operational readiness and leav- S Select drive position P to secure the vehicle against automatically. ing the vehicle rolling away. T The brake warning light (USA: / Canada: bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. ) and indicator for drive position P on the in- e Exit and lock the vehicle. U strument cluster light up. Operational readiness of the vehicle is switched V – or – off. e Switch off the vehicle using the power button. – or – W The parking brake is activated automatically. e Press the Power button for approx. 1 second. X The indicator for drive position P on the instru- Operational readiness of the vehicle is switched Y ment cluster lights up. off. Z

219 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

A Information B Operational readiness is switched off automatically C in the following situations: – 30 minutes after leaving the vehicle D – The vehicle’s high-voltage battery has insuffi- E cient charge. F G Additional information H Leaving the vehicle in drive position N I In drive position N, driving readiness is switched off J after 30 seconds in the following situations: – Parking brake is not activated K – Driver’s door is opened and driver’s seat belt is L not fastened – Brake pedal is not pressed M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

220 Steering wheel

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Operating instrument cluster with A Uncontrolled retrieval of CAUTION the multifunction steering wheel B Adjusting the steering wheel the memory settings For further information on operating the instrument C Steering wheel adjust- cluster: WARNING If persons or animals are within the range of movement while driving > Please see chapter "Operating the instrument D ment of the steering wheel, there is a risk of parts of cluster" on page 132. The steering wheel can move further than intended the body being pinched or crushed when you adjust E if adjusted while driving. You may lose control of the the steering wheel. Switching the heated steering F vehicle. e Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. wheel on and off G e Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. H Adjusting the steering wheel manually I J K L M N O P Q R Fig. 177: Control lever for steering wheel adjustment Fig. 178: Heated steering wheel button S e Move the control lever under the steering column bb Operational readiness established. T in the relevant direction until the desired position e Press the button on the central steering wheel is reached. U spoke until either the Steering wheel heating Fig. 176: Steering wheel adjustment lever turned on or Steering wheel heating turned off V 1. Turn the lever downward, away from the driver. Storing steering wheel settings message appears briefly on the instrument W 2. Move the steering wheel vertically and horizon- In vehicles with the memory package, the steering cluster. tally in order to adjust the steering wheel posi- wheel settings can be stored to the memory buttons X tion to the tilt of the backrest and seat position. in the driver's door and on the vehicle key. Y 3. Turn back the lever to the original position, to- > Please see chapter "Personal settings" on ward the driver, until you feel it engage. page 168. Z

221 Storage

A Storage – Open storage spaces to the right and left in the Closing the glove compartment trunk e Close the cover by pressing on it. B Stowing objects – Open storage space between the rear seats (ve- The glove compartment can be locked and unlocked C hicles with two rear seats) using the emergency key. Unsecured or incorrectly WARNING > Please see chapter "Vehicle Key" on page 232. D positioned objects Depending on equipment, the vehicle has the following additional storage options: E When braking, accelerating sharply, changing direc- – Storage tray with sides under the center console Opening the storage compartment F tion or in the event of an accident, unsecured or in- control panel in the armrest correctly positioned loads can slide or be thrown – Storage tray on the drive shaft hump ahead of G about and injure the occupants in the vehicle. the rear seats Opening the storage compartment in the H e Only use the storage options described in these – Storage net in the trunk front armrest – Bag hooks in the trunk I instructions. e Transport objects in lockable storage compart- J ments as often as possible. Opening and closing the glove K e Do not store objects in or on open areas in the compartment center console (e.g. center console control L panel). M e Store objects in such a way that they cannot slide or be thrown about in the above-mentioned N situations. O e Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage compartments or storage nets. P e Do not transport any heavy, hard, sharp, sharp- Q edged or fragile objects in open storage compartments or storage trays. R e Always keep lockable storage compartments S closed while driving. T The vehicle has the following storage options: Fig. 180: Opening the storage compartment in the front – Glove compartment U armrest – Drink holders in the front and rear e V – Clothing hooks on the B-columns and the hold- Press the button on the driver side of the ing handles in the front. armrest. W The lid will open by itself. – Storage compartment under the storage space Fig. 179: Opening the glove compartment X floor in the trunk Opening the glove compartment – Storage compartment in the front armrest Y e Pull the handle. – Storage space and bottle holder in the front and The glove compartment opens automatically. Z rear door panels 222 Sun visors

Sun visors Opening vanity mirror A B Adjusting sun visor C D E F G H I J K L M Fig. 182: Opening vanity mirror N e Open the sliding cover of the vanity mirror on the Fig. 181: Adjusting sun visor inside of the sun visor. O e Swivel the sun visor downward to prevent glare The vanity mirror lighting is switched on. P from the front. Glare from the side: NOTICE Q e Disengage the sun visor from the inner retainer R and swivel it round to in front of the side window. Risk of damage to the sliding vanity mirror cover. e Do not attempt to push the sliding cover past its S limit position. T U V W X Y Z

223 Towing

A Towing Towing the vehicle manufacturer's safety and operating instructions. B Tow starting and push starting e Always observe the permissible towing force of C the towing rope or towing bar. The towing rope the vehicle or towing bar must be approved for the vehicle D NOTICE weight. Never exceed the manufacturer's E specifications. e The towed vehicle must not be heavier than the F Risk of substantial damage to the vehicle due to towing or pushing. towing vehicle. G e Vehicles with defective brakes must not be e Never tow-start or push-start the vehicle. towed. H e Do not attempt to tow the vehicle. Fig. 183: Permissible towing e When towing, first screw the towing hook into e Call a roadside assistance or breakdown recovery I the vehicle before attaching the towing rope or service. towing bar to the towing hook. J e Have the vehicle transported with both axles on a > Please see chapter "Using a towing hook" on recovery vehicle, transport truck or trailer. K page 224. e Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels. Never L attach tension straps to the towing hook. Using a towing rope e Always keep the towing rope taut when towing. M If the high-voltage battery is defective or completely Avoid jerky and sudden loading. N discharged, it will not be possible to turn on the vehicle until after the high-voltage battery has been Using a towing bar O recharged. e Do not attach the towing bar diagonally between the vehicles. P e Go to a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as Q they have trained technicians and the necessary Using a towing hook parts and tools. R > Please see chapter "12-volt battery" on Information S page 268. e T Always follow the legal regulations governing Fig. 184: Impermissible towing vehicle transportation. U > Please see chapter "Transporting the vehicle on e Before driving the vehicle, the driver should be- car trains, ferries and vehicle transporters" on V come familiarized with the particular features of page 226. vehicle transportation. W X Towing another vehicle e Data and installation instructions can be found in Y the accessory manufacturer's manual. Follow the Z

224 Towing

Using flat bed A Pulling vehicle onto flat bed B C D E F G H I J K

Fig. 185: Towing ring in front Fig. 186: Towing loop in rear L M Installing the towing ring in front Installing the towing ring in the rear The towing hook is stored in the tool box. The towing hook is stored in the tool box. N > > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on Fig. 187: Pulling vehicle onto flat bed O page 154. page 154. 1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat 1. Press the plastic cover on the lower edge of the 1. Carefully unlatch the plastic cover on the upper bed to reduce the angle of the pull. P bumper until it juts out. edge marketing using a suitable object. 2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside Q 2. Pull the plastic cover out of the bumper and let it 2. Pull the plastic cover out of the bumper and stow of the vehicle for any interference. hang by its thread. it safely in the vehicle. R 3. Screw in the towing hook A as far as possible 3. Screw in the towing hook A as far as possible S counterclockwise (left-hand thread) and tighten counterclockwise (left-hand thread) and tighten by hand. by hand. T U Removing the towing hook 1. Screw out towing hook A clockwise (left-hand V thread). W 2. Insert the plastic cover at the lower edge of the opening. X 3. Fold up the plastic cover and press at the top Y until it engages in the bumper. 4. Store the towing hook in the tool box. Z 225 Towing

A Tying down vehicle on flat bed Transporting the vehicle on car B trains, ferries and vehicle C transporters 1. Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels. Never D attach tension straps to the towing hook. E 2. Deactivate the passenger compartment monitoring system and inclination sensor. F > Please see chapter "Alarm System" on page 65. G 3. Activate Porsche Vehicle Tracking System Plus (PTVS Plus) transport mode. H > Please see chapter "Transport" on page 191. I J K L M Fig. 188: Tying down vehicle on flat bed N 1. Carefully feed towing straps through the opening O in the rear wheels. Make sure metal parts of straps do not damage rim. Make sure the strap is P flat over the rim bead. Make sure brake backing Q plate is not damaged. 2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed. R 3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension tie- S down straps. T 4. Carefully feed towing straps through the opening in the front wheels. Make sure metal parts of U straps do not damage rim. Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead. Make sure brake backing V plate is not damaged. W 5. Secure straps to front of flat bed. X 6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not disconnect. Y Z

226 Traffic sign recognition

Traffic sign recognition1 System limitations Display elements A The assistance provided by the system cannot be B General Safety Instructions guaranteed if traffic signs are covered or damaged. C Lack of attention Responding to warning symbols WARNING D Always heed any warning and information messages Responsibility when driving, e.g. choosing an appro- displayed in the vehicle. E priate speed, remains with the driver even if traffic > Please see chapter "Warning and information F sign detection is being used. The system does not messages" on page 244. replace the driver's attentiveness. G e Drive with extreme care. Operating principle H e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and Traffic sign detection (available in some countries) I the vehicle surroundings. detects speed restrictions, the start and end of no e Adjust driving speed to road conditions. overtaking zones and curve ahead signs. The traffic J signs are evaluated in conjunction with the camera Failure of camera to de- (A) and the map data stored in the navigation sys- K WARNING tect traffic signs tem and displayed in the instrument cluster. L If a traffic sign is restricted to a certain time or spe- The camera's view can be impaired by various influ- M cific weather conditions (e.g. fog or rain), the de- Fig. 190: Traffic sign display in instrument cluster encing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy spray, on- tected sign is compared with the vehicle information N coming headlights, reflections, dirt, damage). (e.g. rain sensor, navigation data and time) and dis- A Main traffic sign B Bend ahead warning In some circumstances, the camera may not detect played if relevant. O traffic signs or may detect them incorrectly, which In countries where traffic sign detection is not Up to three main traffic signs (A) including the curve P will result in a speed limit or bend ahead warning not available, a message will appear in the instrument ahead warning (B) can be displayed on the instru- Q being displayed or being displayed incorrectly. Traf- cluster. ment cluster. The traffic sign with the highest prior- fic signs always take precedence. ity is on the left. R The curve ahead warning (C) is displayed approx. e Always pay attention to traffic signs. S e Drive with extreme care. 500 ft. (150 m) before a curve and remains dis- e Always keep your eyes on the road ahead. played until the curve has been passed. T e Clean the camera lens regularly and keep it free U of snow and ice. Speed limit display e Do not cover the camera lens and check for The most recently valid speed limit appears in the V instrument cluster once the vehicle is switched on damage at regular intervals. W and ready to drive. If no speed limit was detected or Fig. 189: Windshield camera if traffic sign detection is not available in the current X Y Z 1. Available in some countries 227 Traffic sign recognition

A area, a notification will appear in the instrument cluster. B C Information D – In traffic-calmed areas or play streets, the dis- E play shows "3 mph (5 km/h)". – On unsigned highway and highway on and off- F ramps, the respective speed limit for surface G roads (out of town) is displayed. H Speed limit warning display I – The sign flashes once the first time the speed J limit is exceeded. K – A red box appears around the sign and flashes for 10 seconds. L – The box then lights up continuously. M N Speed limit warning A speed limit warning with a warning threshold of O 0 mph – 5 mph (0 km/h – 10 km/h) can be set in P the central display. The function must also be activated. When the set threshold is exceeded, the rel- Q evant traffic sign is highlighted in the instrument cluster. R S Setting and activating speed limit warning

T e e Assist e e Assistance system settings U e Traffic sign recognition V W X Y Z

228 Trunk lid

Trunk lid Release button underneath the trunk lid at the bb Ready for operation. A outside (rear skirt). bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. – or – B General Safety Instructions Touch control panel Gesture using your foot. C Uncontrolled opening or e WARNING Press the appropriate button to resume one- e e D closing of the powerlift touch operation. tailgate The trunk lid opens as far as the set opening height. E Risk of injury as a result of uncontrolled opening or Opening the trunk lid F closing of the powerlift tailgate. Central display G e Opening the trunk lid using the unlocking Open or close the trunk lid only when the vehicle e e Settings e Vehicle e Hood, trunk lid button H is stationary. and charge port doors e Opening trunk lid e Open or close the trunk lid only when there are The trunk lid opens as far as the set opening I no persons or animals within its movement height. range. J e Always pay close attention to the opening and K closing operation so that the movement can be Opening the trunk lid with the vehicle key stopped at any time in the event of danger. bb Vehicle switched off. L e Press the button on the vehicle key. M NOTICE The vehicle unlocks all doors. The trunk lid opens as far as the set opening N height. Risk of damage as a result of uncontrolled opening or O closing of the trunk lid. Fig. 191: Trunk lid unlocking button Opening the trunk lid using foot gesture P e Make sure there is sufficient clearance behind bb Vehicle unlocked (vehicles without Comfort and above the vehicle (e.g. roof transport sys- Access). Q tems, garage ceiling). – or – R e Do not allow a load to protrude over the edge of bb Vehicle key is carried (vehicles with Comfort S the luggage compartment. Access). e Press the button. T The vehicle unlocks all doors. Interrupting the opening or closing operation U The trunk lid opens as far as the set opening in the event of danger height. V Press one of the following buttons to immediately W interrupt the opening or closing operation: Opening trunk lid using the center console e button on the vehicle key. control panel or central display Fig. 192: Foot gesture control X – or – The trunk lid can be opened using the flap view on Y One of the two buttons in the trunk lid trim panel. the center console control panel or using the central – or – display. Z

229 Trunk lid

Unintentional movement Unsecured Luggage A CAUTION Adjusting the opening height of the trunk lid WARNING of the trunk lid B The opening height of the trunk lid can be configured If the sensors in the rear end detect persons, move- freely. When loading the luggage compartment, make sure C ments or objects and a valid vehicle key is located at On vehicles with a leveling system, always adjust the that items of luggage or other objects cannot be- D the rear of the vehicle, the trunk lid may open or trunk lid when the vehicle is at its highest level. come caught on the handle. This could cause the close automatically, causing injury to persons or 1. Stand behind the vehicle and open the trunk lid. luggage compartment to open unintentionally. E damage to the vehicle. 2. Press the button on the vehicle key or on the F To prevent unintentional movement of the trunk lid: trunk lid trim panel to stop the automatic open- Function ing operation. G e Deactivate the function in the central display. If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked by using 3. Move the trunk lid to the desired opening height – or – the internal trunk release mechanism, the lid can be H by hand. e Deactivate Comfort Access. opened from the inside immediately. 4. Press and hold button A on the trunk lid trim I A warning message lights up when unlocking button bb panel for approx. 3 seconds. Vehicles with Comfort Access. is operated. J bb An acoustic signal confirms the programmed Function activated. 1. Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning opening height. K bb Vehicle key is carried. message lights up. 1. Stand at a central position behind the vehicle. L Automatic stop in the event of an uninten- 2. Check the luggage compartment. 2. Move your foot toward the vehicle and back in 3. Close the lid. one sequence. tional movement of the trunk lid M Empty Battery The trunk lid opens as far as the set opening If the trunk lid lowers unaided immediately after WARNING N height. opening, such as due to the weight of snow, an electrical mechanism brakes the trunk lid, and a O The function can be activated or deactivated in the The internal trunk release mechanism will not work if series of brief warning signals sounds until the trunk central display. the vehicle does not have battery power. P lid stops moving. Q e e Settings e Vehicle e Vehicle closing e Bring the trunk lid to rest for approx. 1 second. systems e Trunk lid comfort opening The automatic stop function is deactivated. R S Information Trunk Entrapment T Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk re- The foot gesture function may not be available in the lease mechanism. U following situations: A person trapped in the luggage compartment can – The weather conditions are bad (rain, snow or V release the lid from the inside using the unlocking ice). button. W – The bumper is dirty. The unlocking button is equipped with a light indi- X – The vehicle key radio signal is interfered with cator. The light indicator keeps flashing for 60 mi- through radio waves. nutes after locking of the luggage compartment lid. Y Z

230 Trunk lid

Closing the trunk lid Closing trunk lid using center console control – or – A panel or central display e Deactivate Comfort Access. B Closing trunk lid using button in trunk lid trim The trunk lid can be closed using the flap view on the bb Vehicles with Comfort Access. panel center console control panel or using the central C bb display. Vehicle key is carried. bb D bb Ready for operation. The approx. distance to the vehicle is max. 29.5 in. (75 cm). bb Parking lock and parking brake activated. E 1. Stand in a central position behind the vehicle. Center console control panel 2. Move your foot toward the vehicle and back in F one sequence. e e G The trunk lid is closed. H e Keep pressing the central display until the trunk lid is closed. Detection of obstacles during closing I A warning signal sounds and the trunk lid is The closing operation is interrupted automatically if J closed. closing of the trunk lid is blocked by an obstruction. Fig. 193: Buttons in trunk lid trim panel A warning signal sounds and the trunk lid stops K A Close trunk lid Central display moving. B Close trunk lid and lock vehicle L 1. Remove the obstruction. e e Settings e Vehicle e Hood, trunk lid 2. Close the trunk lid automatically or slowly by M e Press button A in the trunk lid trim panel. and charge port door e Close trunk The trunk lid is closed. hand. N e Keep pressing the central display until the trunk Closing and locking trunk lid using button in lid is closed. O trunk lid trim panel A warning signal sounds and the trunk lid is P bb Vehicles with Comfort Access. closed. Q bb Vehicle key is carried. e Press button B in the trunk lid trim panel. Closing trunk lid using foot gesture R The trunk lid is closed and the vehicle is locked. Unintentional movement CAUTION S of the trunk lid Information T If the sensors in the rear end detect persons, move- If the key is inside the vehicle when you lock it, the ments or objects and a valid vehicle key is located at U vehicle will be unlocked again. Several warning sig- the rear of the vehicle, the trunk lid may open or V nals sound, and the vehicle flashes four times. Only if close automatically, causing injury to persons or a door or the tailgate is not opened within approx. 45 damage to the vehicle. W seconds is the vehicle locked and can only be un- To prevent unintentional movement of the trunk lid: X locked using a second key. e Deactivate the function in the central display. e Make sure that the vehicle key is not left inside Y the vehicle when locking it. Z

231 Vehicle Key

A Vehicle Key To stop the alarm e Press the red button E again. B Using the vehicle key The horn becomes silent and the emergency flasher C goes out. D Information Using the emergency key E e Only use the vehicle key when the vehicle is in F your sight. Removing emergency key G The Porsche Crest on the vehicle key lights up when buttons are pressed on the vehicle key. The Porsche H Crest may also light up while driving, without press- I ing buttons on the vehicle key. Data of relevance for servicing and maintenance is J stored on the vehicle key while driving. The Porsche K Crest on the vehicle key may therefore light up without actuation. For further information on storing L and reading out the data on the vehicle key: Fig. 194: Vehicle key M e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. A Unlock vehicle The remote control may not work for the following B Lock vehicle N reasons: C Unlocking the hood and vehicle D Opening the trunk lid and unlocking the vehicle – Radio waves can interfere with transmission O E Panic button (even radio contact between the vehicle key and F Emergency key P vehicle in the case of Comfort Access). Q – The remote control is malfunctioning due to a There is an emergency key integrated in every ve- fault. hicle key. The vehicle keys can be used to operate all Fig. 195: Removing emergency key R – The vehicle key battery is discharged. the vehicle locks. e Take care of your vehicle keys: do not part with e Push the emergency key upward out of the ve- S e Never store the vehicle key together with elec- them except under exceptional circumstances. hicle key. tronic devices that are switched on (e.g. cell- T e Never leave the vehicle key in the vehicle. phone, notebook, charging cable). Change where Insert the emergency key U you store the vehicle key if necessary. e Insert the emergency key into the vehicle key V Using the panic button In dangerous situations or when one's own safety is until it clicks in place. W threatened, it is possible to draw attention to the X situation by triggering an alarm. To trigger an alarm Y e Press the red button E once. Z The horn sounds and the emergency flasher flashes.

232 Vehicle Key

Replacing the vehicle key battery Changing the battery (CR 2032, 3 V) To teach new vehicle keys for the vehicle: A 1. Remove the emergency key. e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- Risk of internal burns or B WARNING ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they death from swallowing 2. Unclip the vehicle key housing to the right and have trained technicians and the necessary parts the lithium coin cell left. C and tools. (button battery) 3. Turn the battery cover counterclockwise and re- D move it. e Teach all vehicle keys belonging to the vehicle The vehicle key contains a lithium coin cell (battery). 4. Change the battery (check polarity). again. E Swallowing the battery can cause internal burns 5. Put the battery cover back on and tighten it F within two hours and this can result in death. clockwise. Information Ensure that the emergency key can be pushed in G e Keep removed or new batteries out of children's A total of eight vehicle keys can be taught. reach. again. H 6. Push the vehicle key housing upwards from be- e Keep vehicle keys out of children's reach. Chil- I dren could open the vehicle key and remove the low and clip into place. Information 7. Insert the emergency key. J battery. e If a vehicle key is lost or stolen, have an author- e If the battery is swallowed or inserted into a body ized Porsche dealer disable this vehicle key in the K orifice, seek medical attention from a doctor Starting the vehicle with dis- vehicle and change the mechanical locks if immediately. charged vehicle key battery or ra- necessary. L dio interference e You should notify your insurance company of the M loss or theft of vehicle keys or of the production Information Malfunctions during wireless communication be- of additional or replacement keys. N e Observe the disposal instructions for batteries. tween the vehicle and the vehicle key, or a discharged vehicle key battery can disable detection of O If the battery in the vehicle key needs to be replaced, the vehicle key. P a message appears in the instrument cluster. The Then, when switching on the vehicle, pay particular Porsche emblem on the vehicle key no longer lights attention to the following: Q up when the vehicle key is used. 1. Put the vehicle key in the rear drink holder in the R center console. Hold the vehicle key against the front wall of the drink holder. S 2. Press the power button and switch on the T vehicle. U Ordering a replacement key and V keeping it in a safe place W Vehicle keys can only be ordered from an authorized X Porsche dealer. This can take a long time. e Always have a replacement key available. Y Fig. 196: Changing battery e Keep the replacement key in a safe place, but Z under no circumstances in or on the vehicle. 233 Vehicle settings

A Vehicle settings B Different vehicle settings can be configured depending on model, country and equipment. The vehicle settings listed here are therefore not available in all models, countries and equipment versions. For safety reasons, some functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary. C The vehicle settings remain stored even after the vehicle is switched off. D > Please see chapter "Personal settings" on page 168. E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

234 Vehicle settings

System settings A B What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? C – Configuring general system settings (language, e Tap e Settings e System. D time, units, etc.) – Language and keyboard E – Date and time – Units F – Reset system to factory settings G H Display settings I What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? J K Configuring general display settings (brightness, e Tap e Settings e Displays. – touch tone setting, etc.) – Central display L – Touch control panel M – Instrument cluster – Additional instrument N O Volume settings P Q What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? R Adjusting volume (navigation announcements, – e Tap e Settings e Volume. S ParkAssist, etc.) – Navigation announcements – ParkAssist T – Adjust volume when ParkAssist is active U – Automatically adjusts volume to compensate for road noise V – Lane departure warning W – Ringtone X – Message sound – Mute navigation during calls Y Z

235 Vehicle settings

A Sound settings B What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? C – D Setting the sound (treble/bass, balance/fader) e Tap e Settings e Sound. – Bass and treble E – Balance and fader F G Voice control settings H What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? I Configuring voice control settings > digital1 J e Tap e Settings e Voice control. – Activate by saying "Hey Porsche" K – Short dialogues L – Interrupt voice control M – Online voice recognition N Vehicle settings O P What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? Q Configuring vehicle settings / using vehicle func- e Tap e Settings e Vehicle. R tions (unlocking when approaching the vehicle, folding in mirrors, tire selection, activation of dy- – Manual cleaning position spoiler > p. 213 S namic high beam, etc.) – Electric parking brake > p. 67 T – Shortcut buttons > p. 127 U – Hood, trunk lid and charge port doors > p. 124 – Vehicle locking systems > p. 79 V – Tire pressure monitoring > p. 252 W – Light and visibility > p. 150 X Y Z 1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 236 Vehicle settings

Assistance system settings A B What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? C Changing assistance system settings (warning e Tap e Settings e Assistance systems. D signal volume, warning time setting, etc.) – ParkAssist > p. 164 E – Warn and Brake Assist > p. 241 F – Porsche InnoDrive > p. 181 G – Adaptive Speed Limiter > p. 210 – Lane departure warning > p. 147 H – Lane Change Assist > p. 142 I – Night View Assist > p. 162 J – Traffic sign recognition > p. 227 – Personal speed limits > p. 210 K – Hazardous conditions – L M Notification center N What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? O > 1 Configuring settings for notifications e Tap e Settings e Notification settings. digital P – Allow notifications Q – Notification sound R

Radio settings S T What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? U

Configuring radio settings e Tap e Settings e Media. – V – Online station tracking during poor reception W X Y Z 1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 237 Vehicle settings

A Porsche Connect settings B What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? C > digital1 D Configuring settings for Porsche Connect (Privacy, e Tap e Settings e Privacy and Porsche etc.); displaying the Legal Notice and data privacy Connect. E information F Set-up assistant G

H What do I want to do? What should I select? Where?

I > Call up set-up assistant e Tap e Settings e Set-up assistant. p. 168 J When you start the PCM for the first time, the set- K up assistant is displayed and guides you through important steps for configuring the PCM. L The Set-up assistant can also be called up M manually. N O Software information

P What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? Q Displaying software information (version, e Tap e Settings e Software information. – R components) S T U V W X Y Z 1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 238 Vehicle settings

Drive A B What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? C Configure vehicle settings (drive mode, chassis, e Tap e Drive. etc.) D – Drive mode > p. 105 E > – Chassis p. 170 F – Chassis height > p. 170 – Recuperation (accelerator) > p. 216 G – Electric sound > p. 105 H I Configure drive mode e Tap e Drive e . J – Individual drive mode configuration > p. 105 K – Range drive mode configuration > p. 105 L Assistance M N What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? O Switch basic assistance systems on e Touch e Assist e Basic Assist. P The basic assistance systems are designed for safety and should always be switched on. – Warn and Brake Assist > p. 241 Q – Emergency Stop Function > p. 111 R – Night View Assist > p. 162 S Switch assistance systems on e Touch e Assist. T U V W X Y Z

239 Vehicle settings

A What do I want to do? What should I select? Where?

B – ParkAssist > p. 164 C – Lane Keep Assist > p. 147 D – Active Lane Keeping > p. 34 – Maneuvering Assist – E – Rear Cross Traffic Alert > p. 193 F – Intersection Assist > p. 139 – Lane Change Assist G > p. 142 – Traffic sign recognition > p. 227 H

I Trip J K What do I want to do? What should I select? Where?

L Display driving data (average consumption, range, e Touch e Trip. – drive time, etc.), configure driving data display, M – Personal trip reset trip data – Reset trip data N O Comfort P Q What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? R Configure comfort settings for ambient lighting e Tap e Comfort. (brightness, color) and driver/front passenger seat S (massage function, seat heating/seat ventilation – Ambient lighting – T balance), – Driver seat/Passenger seat > p. 203 switch Comfort Entry function on, – Comfort access > p. 203 U adjust passenger seat from the driver’s seat – Adjust passenger seat > p. 203 V W X Y Z

240 Warn and Brake Assist

Warn and Brake Assist approx. 53 mph (85 km/h). It can react to vehicles Operating principle A up to a speed of 156 mph (250 km/h). The warning and brake assistant can initiate actions B General safety instructions The system does not react to animals, cross traffic in certain hazardous situations to protect passen- or objects such as poles, fences or rail vehicles. gers and other traffic participants. C System unavailable or WARNING On vehicles with Turn Assist, the system also reacts The warning and break assistant has the following only available to a limited D to oncoming vehicles. functions, depending on the country: extent – Distance warning (depending on equipment) E This function is not available: The system supports the driver within the system – Collision warning F limits but cannot prevent an accident under all – When reversing – Acute warning (warning jolt) circumstances. – If brake lights are defective – Automatic braking and braking assistance G The driver is ultimately responsible for reacting ap- – If there is a fault in the PSM or if the PSM is – Avoidance assistant (depending on the equip- H propriately to prevent an accident. switched off ment configuration) – If there is a fault in the airbag control unit I e Drive with extreme care. – Turning assistant (depending on the equipment e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and configuration) J The function may be restricted or unavailable the vehicle surroundings. – Preventive occupant protection functions (de- in the following instances: K e Always be prepared to take control of the vehicle pending on equipment) – Up to 10 seconds after establishing operational if the system becomes unavailable or does not The camera behind the windshield and the radar L readiness function as expected. sensor in the automatic cruise control (ACC) (de- M – If the seatbelts are not fastened pending on the equipment configuration) scan the – In sharp curves area in front of the vehicle. An impending frontal N – When encountering reflective objects such as System limitations collision with other road users (vehicles, pedestrians O Within the system limits, the system can warn crash barriers or entering a tunnel or cyclists) can be detected. against impending frontal collisions and initiate ap- – In heavy rain, snowfall, fog and ice P propriate braking maneuvers (depending on the – If the windshield is damaged Information Q country) or provide steering support (depending on – If the bumper is damaged, such as from parking the equipment). Not all road users and dangerous collisions e Follow the respective country-specific regula- R tions, particularly with respect to driving, vehicle situations can be detected correctly and in time. – If the radar sensor is damaged or dirty S The side areas of the vehicle and the rear are not – If there is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise Control spacing, speed, etc. monitored. (ACC) The driver is always responsible for complying T with the relevant regulations that apply in each In complex driving situations, the system may issue U undesired warnings and perform undesired braking Responding to warning symbols country. e interventions. Always heed any warning and information messages Observe instructions for deactivating Warn and V Brake Assist. Depending on the danger detected, not all Warning displayed in the vehicle. W and Brake Assist protection measures might be > Please see chapter "Warning and information e Observe information for setting the functions. triggered. messages" on page 244. X > Please see chapter "Switching Warn and Brake The system is available as of walking speed and can Assist on and off" on page 243. Y react to pedestrians or cyclists up to a speed of Z

241 Warn and Brake Assist

A > Please see chapter "Setting the Warn and Brake If the system detects a possible collision, it can warn Information Assist functions" on page 243. the driver by issuing a warning tone and displaying a B warning on the instrument cluster. Once the vehicle has reached a standstill, it is not C Distance warning held constantly by the brake system. 1 e Actuate the brake as necessary and resume If Warn and Brake Assist detects a safety hazard due Acute warning (warning jolt) D control of the vehicle. to driving too closely to the vehicle in front, the If the driver does not respond to the collision warn- E driver is warned by the display on the instrument ing, a warning jolt is performed in addition to the F cluster1. warning tone and display of the symbol on the in- Swerve Assist strument cluster. G Detection is possible within a driving speed range The Swerve Assist can help to steer the vehicle from approx. 40 mph (65 km/h) to With the warning jolt, the system draws attention to around an obstacle in hazardous situations. the increasing danger of collision. H 156 mph (250 km/h). If the system detects a critical situation and the Even with this warning, the driver may still have to I driver actively avoids the obstacle after the urgent Collision warning1 swerve or brake sharply in order to avoid a collision. warning, Swerve Assist will support the driver by J selectively braking individual wheels and correcting K Automatic braking and braking the steering angle with a slight steering movement. assistance1 If Swerve Assist is active, automatic braking or L braking assistance will be canceled. If the driver does not respond to the acute warning M or does not brake sufficiently, the warning assistant and BrakeAssist can assist the driver with braking by System limitations N progressively increasing braking force or braking the Swerve Assist is available at speeds from O vehicle to a standstill. 30 mph (50 km/h) - 93 mph (150 km/h). In addition, a warning tone is emitted and a symbol P appears on the instrument cluster as well. Turn Assist Q Reducing the vehicle speed can help to mitigate the Turn Assist can help when driving off or when driving consequences of a potential accident. slowly by initiating braking intervention so that the R vehicle does not collide with an oncoming vehicle S Information when turning left2 The braking intervention keeps the vehicle in its own lane. T Automatic braking interventions can be aborted with U the following measures: System limitations e Press the brake pedal. Turn Assist is only available when the turn signal is Fig. 197: Collision warning on the instrument cluster V e Fully depress the accelerator pedal. activated and up to a maximum speed of W e Actively steer. 6 mph (10 km/h). X Y Z 1. Availability dependent on country. 2. Country-dependent: Turn Assist is available in countries with right-hand traffic only when turning left and in countries with left-hand traffic only when turning right. 242 Warn and Brake Assist

Preventive occupant protection In this case, unfasten and refasten the seat belt Information A or deactivate Warn and Brake Assist. functions B – In the event of a defect in the reversible belt The function is activated automatically once opera- Seat belt system optimization tensioner, the preventive occupant protection tional readiness is established. C measures are only available to a limited extent. When driving off, the front seat belts are gently D tightened once. – The seat-belt pretensioner may be damaged following an accident. Visit an authorized Porsche It is activated upon reaching a driving speed of ap- Setting the Warn and Brake Assist E dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Por- prox. 20 mph (30 km/h) or when the seat belts are functions sche dealer, as they have trained technicians and F fastened again. the necessary parts and tools. e e Assist e Basic Assist e Warn and Brake G Preconditioning of the seat belt and passen- – If the PSM functionality is restricted or switched Assist off, the preventive occupant protection functions H ger compartment The following functions be switched off and on: of Warn and Brake Assist are deactivated. In dangerous situations, Warn and Brake Assist can I e Distance warning initiate measures to prepare for a possible collision in J order to support the effectiveness of the passive Switching Warn and Brake Assist The warning time can also be set. K occupant protection system. For this purpose, the on and off e Collision warning front seat belts are pretensioned, open side windows The warning time can also be set. L are closed and (depending on equipment) the front NOTICE seat side bolsters are inflated, depending on the e Turn Assist M situation. e Switch off Warn and Brake Assist in the follow- e Swerve Assist N The preventive occupant protection measures can ing situations: be activated within the limits of the system in the – When driving off-road O following situations: – When transporting the vehicle, e.g. on a re- P – If the driver initiates emergency braking from a covery truck, car transporter, train or ferry speed of approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) Q – During automatic braking intervention initiated R by the vehicle e e Assist e Basic Assist e Warn and Brake Assist S As soon as the detected collision hazard has passed and a stable driving condition is achieved, the pre- If Warn and Brake Assist is restricted or switched T off, this is indicated by a display on the instrument conditioning measures are ended and existing seat U belt tension is released again. cluster. > Please see chapter "Instrument cluster" on V Limits of the system page 127. W – In the case of repeated activation (e.g. in the context of driver safety training), the belt tension X increases progressively so that it may no longer Y be possible to reliably release the belt tensioning. Z

243 Warning and information messages

A Warning and information messages B If a warning message appears, refer to the corresponding sections in this manual. Warning messages are only possible if all measurement conditions are satisfied – therefore check all fluid levels regularly. The message disappears when acknowledged or after a certain time has elapsed. C If a warning light comes on, refer to the corresponding sections in this manual. Please see chapter "Instrument cluster" on page 127. D Important messages are stored as notifications under in the main menu of the central display. The display may vary depending on the message and include graphics, symbols or buttons for acknowledging or confirming a prompt. Additional functions are available for selected messages, such as displaying instructions in E the central display or searching for a nearby authorized Porsche dealer. F > Please see chapter "Notifications" of the on-board Owner's Manual.

G General structure of messages H The following table lists the different message types and their meaning. I Color Message structure Example Degree of Meaning and action required J severity

K Red Cause: Drive system faulty High risk of Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to L For example: Component failed/ Electric drive overheated damage do so. Component defective/ e Do not continue driving; stop when it M Component faulty is safe to do so and turn off the N vehicle. Action: Parking the vehicle safely e Call a roadside assistance service and O Parking the vehicle safely have the vehicle towed if necessary. P > Please see chapter "Towing" on Any other required actions Allow the electric drive to cool page 224. Q down e Have the fault remedied immediately R at a qualified specialist repair shop.1 S Yellow Cause: Chassis system fault Increased risk of Restricted and adapted driving T For example: Component failed/ damage permitted. e U Component defective/ Adapt your driving style to the Component faulty/ situation. V Component overloaded/ e Reduce load. W Component restricted/ e If the fault occurs multiple times or Component not available consistently, have the problem rem- X edied at a qualified specialist repair Action and any other required actions: Go to a repair shop 1 Y shop. Z 1. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 244 Warning and information messages

Color Message structure Example Degree of Meaning and action required A severity B

For example: Service necessary/ Adapted driving permitted C Go to a repair shop/ D Check the component/ (Adapted or restricted) driving E permitted/ F Adapt or reduce speed/ Reduce the load G

White Cause: Camera system not available Low risk of Continued driving possible with H For example: Component faulty/ damage adjustment I Component restricted/ e Temporary state. Normal status is re- Component not or no longer available stored automatically while driving or J after the vehicle is restarted. K Explanation: Temporary state e Adapt your driving style to the For example: Temporary state situation. L e If the fault occurs multiple times or M Any other required actions: Continued driving possible consistently, have the problem rem- For example: Service necessary/ edied at a qualified specialist repair N Continued driving possible/ shop.2 O Reduce load/ Adjust your driving P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 2. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 245 Warning and information messages

A Messages with additional information are included in this manual

B Message in the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required C Active Parking Support available Active parking support is restricted or faulty. D Sensors limited, See Owner's Manual Continued driving possible with adjustment E – OR – e Adapt your driving style to the situation. 1 F Active Parking Support partially available e Have the fault remedied promptly at a qualified specialist repair shop. Laser scanner error, See Owner's Manual G H A Function on Demand is currently being executed. Individual An update is being installed or a Function on Demand (FoD) has been activated. Opera- displays, control units and functions that are potentially relevant to tional readiness is blocked. Some of the displays and vehicle functions (e.g. comfort I safety and individual driver assistance systems may not be functions or anti-theft protection functions) may not work for a short time. J available. Starting the vehicle is not possible at present. Please e Observe the prompts shown on the central display, such as leaving vehicle together refer to the Owner's Manual for additional information. with all other occupants. K – OR – e Do not use the vehicle while an update is being installed or if the Function on Demand L An online software update is currently being performed. Individual (FoD) is activated. > Please see chapter "Online software update" of the on-board Owner's Manual. M displays, control units and functions that are potentially relevant to safety and individual driver assistance systems may not be N available. Starting the vehicle is not possible at present. Please O refer to the Owner's Manual for additional information. P Curb warning is restricted or faulty. Curb Warning not available Q Continued driving possible with adjustment Sensors limited, See Owner's Manual e Adapt your driving style to the situation. R e Have the fault remedied promptly at a qualified specialist repair shop.1 S Brake pads are worn. T Brake pads worn Restricted and adapted driving permitted. Replace brake pads, Continued driving possible U e Have brake pads replaced by a qualified specialist repair shop as soon as possible.1 V Power steering has failed or is faulty. Brake booster failed W Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. – OR – e Do not continue driving; stop when it is safe to do so and turn off the vehicle. X Brake booster faulty e Call a roadside assistance service and have the vehicle towed if necessary. Y Z 1. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 246 Warning and information messages

Message in the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required A B > Please see chapter "Towing" on page 224. e Have the fault remedied immediately at a qualified specialist repair shop.2 C D An update has failed. Operational readiness may be blocked depending on the severity of the relevant error. Some of the displays and vehicle functions may not work correctly. The E The online software update could not be performed, which may severity of the relevant error and the resulting consequences are shown in the central F result in functional limitations. Please observe the warning and display. indicator lights and refer to the Owner's Manual. Please go to a e If the vehicle is able to be driven: Adapt your driving style to the situation. G qualified specialist repair shop to have the update implemented e If the vehicle cannot be driven: Call a roadside assistance service and have the vehicle H successfully. towed. > Please see chapter "Towing" on page 224. I e Have the fault remedied immediately at a qualified specialist repair shop.2 J

The intervention of a driver assistance system was interrupted. K Restricted and adapted driving permitted. L Intervention has been canceled e Take over control of the vehicle. See owner's manual M e Adapt your driving style to the situation. > Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 234. N O Chassis failure The chassis has failed or is faulty. Continued driving possible with adjustment, See Owner's Manual Restricted and adapted driving permitted. P – OR – e Adapt your driving style to the situation. Q e Reduce load. Chassis error R e Have the fault remedied promptly at a qualified specialist repair shop.2 Continued driving possible with adjustment, See Owner's Manual S

Left charging port impaired The function of one or both charge port doors is restricted or faulty. T Check charging port, See Owner's Manual Restricted and adapted driving permitted. U e Adapt your driving style to the situation. – OR – e Check the charge port door at the next opportunity. V Right charging port impaired Perform emergency release of charge port door if necessary. W Check charging port, See Owner's Manual > Please see chapter "Emergency release of the charge port door" on page 93. – OR – e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at an authorized Porsche dealer.2 X Y Z 2. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 247 Warning and information messages

A Message in the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required B Charging ports impaired C Check charging ports, See Owner's Manual D From a speed of approx. 10 mph (15 km/h), the doors may lock automatically and no E Door cannot be opened while driving longer open. F See owner's manual e Set locking options. > G Please see chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 234. H Parking brake is in service mode. Restricted and adapted driving permitted. I Parking brake in service mode e Adapt your driving style to the situation. J e Have the fault remedied promptly at a qualified specialist repair shop.3 K Rain/light sensor is defective. L Rain or light sensor defective Continued driving possible with adjustment M Service necessary e Switch on the windshield wipers and lights manually. 3 N e Have the fault remedied promptly at a qualified specialist repair shop.

O Tire pressure monitoring restricted or defective. P Continued driving possible with adjustment TPMS error e Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and set the correct pressure if Q Service necessary necessary. R > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 252. e 3 S Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at an authorized Porsche dealer. T Speed for set tire pressure has been exceeded. U Tire pressure too low Continued driving possible with adjustment e Reduce speed. Reduce speed V e Set the correct tire pressure at the next opportunity. W > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 252. X Check tires Significant loss of pressure on one or more tires. Y Z 3. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 248 Warning and information messages

Message in the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required A B Park the vehicle safely. e Do not continue driving; stop when it is safe to do so and turn off the vehicle. C e Check the relevant tire for damage. D e Fill in sealant if necessary. e Set the correct tire pressure at the next opportunity. E > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 252. F > Please see chapter "Flat Tire" on page 114. G e Call a roadside assistance service and have the vehicle towed if necessary. > Please see chapter "Towing" on page 224. H e Have the fault remedied immediately at a qualified specialist repair shop.4 I

The key signal is faulty, the key was not detected due to incorrect key position or the J vehicle key battery is discharged. K Key not found e Place the vehicle key in the rear drink holder in the center console. Put key in storage compartment, see Owner's Manual e Replace the battery. L e Switch off possible interference sources. M > Please see chapter "Vehicle Key" on page 232. N Smart Lift has failed. O Restricted and adapted driving permitted. Smart Lift failure P e Adapt your driving style to the situation. See owner's manual e Reduce load. Q e Have the fault remedied promptly at a qualified specialist repair shop.4 R

An update has failed. Driving readiness may be blocked depending on the severity of the S error caused. Some of the displays and vehicle functions may not work correctly. The T Update failed severity of the error caused and the resulting consequences are shown on the central display. U Limited vehicle functions, See Owner's Manual e If the vehicle can be driven: Adapt your driving style to the situation. V e If the vehicle cannot be driven: Call a roadside assistance service and have the vehicle W towed. X Y Z 4. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 249 Warning and information messages

A Message in the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required B > Please see chapter "Towing" on page 224. C e Have the fault remedied immediately at an authorized Porsche dealer.5 D An update is being installed. Driving readiness is blocked. Some of the displays and vehicle E functions (e.g. comfort functions or anti-theft protection functions) may not work for a Update in progress... F short time. Vehicle not ready to drive, Check Owner's Manual e Do not use the vehicle during installation of the update. G > Please see chapter "Online software update" of the on-board Owner's Manual. H Warning and Brake Assist is restricted or faulty. I Warn and Brake Assist limited Restricted and adapted driving permitted. J See owner's manual e Adapt your driving style to the situation. e Have the fault remedied promptly at a qualified specialist repair shop.5 K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 5. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. 250 Washer Fluid

Washer Fluid For information on window cleaner concentrates A approved by Porsche: Contact an authorized Porsche B Selecting washer fluid dealer. If the washer fluid level is too low, a warning symbol C appears on the instrument cluster. D Refilling the washer fluid E 1. Open the cap of the washer fluid reservoir. F 2. Top up the washer fluid. G > Please see chapter "Filling quantities" on page 277. H 3. Carefully close the cap. I J K L M N Fig. 198: Washer fluid reservoir O Note the following points: P e Depending on the time of year, add appropriate additives (window cleaner concentrate, freeze Q protection) to the water. Note the correct mixing ratio as well as all warnings on the containers of R the additives used. S – Summer: Fill with water and window cleaner concentrate T – Winter: Fill with water, freeze protection and U window cleaner concentrate V Only use window cleaner concentrates that meet the following requirements: W – Dilutability 1:100 X – Phosphate-free Y – Suitable for plastic headlights Z

251 Wheels and Tires

A Wheels and Tires from temperature influence. e Check the tire pressure at least monthly when B In addition to correct tire inflation pressure and correct wheel alignment, the service life of the tires also the tires are cold. C depends on your driving style. Abrupt acceleration, e Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt, and thus from leakage. Always screw caps tightly D high cornering speeds and heavy braking increase tire wear. Tread wear is also increased at high out- down. Replace missing caps immediately. E side temperatures and on rough road surfaces. e Use only plastic valve caps. e For safety reasons, don't use tire inflating F Complying with load and speed bottles. G requirements H e Drive at an appropriate speed. NOTICE I e Do not overload the vehicle and pay attention to the roof load. Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to overheat J > Page and thus be damaged – even invisibly K e Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse- Checking tire pressure quently correcting the tire pressure. L e Never let air out of hot tires. When tires are Fig. 199: Location of the tire pressure plate Low Tire Pressure M DANGER warm, the tire pressure is increased. This could The tire pressure must match the prescribed value. cause the tire pressure to fall below the pre- The tire pressure is specified on the plate at the door N Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases scribed value. sill area on the driver’s side and in the "Technical O risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control. Data". The values apply to cold tires (68°F / 20°C). > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on e Check the tire pressure at least monthly when P Furthermore, low tire pressure increases rate of wear page 274. of the affected tires and causes damage. the tires are cold. When tires are warm, the tire pressure is increased. Q e Always use an accurate tire pressure gauge when e Never let air out of hot tires. This could cause the R checking inflation pressures. tire pressure to fall below the prescribed value. Checking tire pressure with a e Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure listed pressure gauge S Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to overheat on the tire sidewall. and thus be damaged – even invisibly. Hidden tire 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire. T e Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires must damage is not eliminated by subsequently correct- 2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem. be cold, ambient temperature maximum 68 °F ing the tire pressure. U 3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and (20 °C), when adjusting the inflation pressure. compare it to the permissible tire pressure. This V Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measuring information can be found on the tire pressure cold pressures, since the pressures would rise W plate or in the chapter “Technical Data”. > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on X page 274. Y 4. Remove the pressure gauge. Z

252 Wheels and Tires

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated acknowledged when the vehicle is switched on. The A tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire red tire pressure warning also appears while travel- failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency ing and can be acknowledged. B and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han- e If the tire pressure warning light comes on and a C dling and stopping ability. tire pressure warning is displayed even with a Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for correct tire pressure: Visit an authorized Porsche D proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re- dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Por- E sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if sche dealer, as they have trained technicians and Fig. 200: Example of a tire pressure plate under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger the necessary parts and tools. F illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. A Seating capacity G The display as well as the settings for the Tire Pres- Maximum number of vehicle occupants, including the Information H driver. sure Monitoring System take place on the multi- B Vehicle load limit function display. However, the tires still have to be The tire pressure monitoring system issues warnings I Is the maximum total weight limit specified of the load inflated manually. relating to loss of pressure due to natural diffusion (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the max- > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on and gradual loss of pressure caused by foreign J imum weight of passengers and cargo that can be page 274. bodies. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System cannot K loaded into the vehicle. warn you about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e. C Vehicle load limit The tire pressure monitoring system offers the fol- Size of tires mounted at the factory. lowing functionalities: g. a flat tire due to unexpected external effects). L D Recommended cold tire inflation pressure – Permanent monitoring of tire pressure and tire M These values are for cold tires (68 °F (20 °C)). Defective tires temperature. WARNING – Displays the actual tire pressure (actual pres- N Tire Pressure Monitoring System sure) while driving. Driving with defective tires can result in serious O – Tire pressure warnings in two stages (yellow and accidents. (TPMS) red warning). P e When a red tire pressure warning appears on the Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be – Vehicle stationary: Display of pressure deviation instrument cluster: stop immediately in a suit- Q checked monthly when cold and inflated to the in- from the set pressure. flation pressure recommended by the vehicle man- able place and check the tires for damage. If R ufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation The tire pressure warning light and a corre- necessary, remedy the damage with tire sealant S pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different sponding message on the instrument cluster warn or fit the spare wheel. size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or against loss of pressure in two stages (yellow and e Do not continue to drive with defective tires. T tire inflation pressure label, you should determine red tire pressure warning, depending on the extent Have defective tires replaced immediately. Visit U the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) of the pressure loss). an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recom- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been The tire pressure warning light only goes out when mends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they V equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System the tire pressure has been corrected to the set have trained technicians and the necessary parts W (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale pressure. and tools. when one or more of your tires is significantly under- The yellow tire pressure warning is displayed for e Do not drive with tires that repeatedly lose pres- X inflated. Accordingly, when the tire pressure warning around 10 seconds when the vehicle is stationary sure in a short space of time. If in doubt, have the Y light comes on, you should stop, check your tires as and switched off or when the vehicle is switched on tire checked by an authorized Porsche dealer. soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper again. The yellow tire pressure warning can be Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche Z

253 Wheels and Tires

A dealer, as they have trained technicians and the Service status If the reading for the right rear tire is shown as necessary parts and tools. –0.1 bar, this tire needs to be inflated by B For further information on the service status (availability dependent on country): 1.4 psi (0.1 bar). The tire temperature has already C > been taken into account in the pressures shown. Malfunctions in the tire pressure monitoring Please see chapter "Smart Service" of the on- board Owner's Manual. e You should only use the pressure difference from D system the display or the corresponding tire pressure E Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS Retrieving the tire pressure warning to correct the tire pressure. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is The individual tire pressures are only displayed F not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi- above a speed of approx 16 mph (25 km/h) or if the Setting the tires cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. G tire is filled to at least 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). When the Configuring settings for tire type, tire size and load When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale vehicle is switched on after it has been stationary for using the central display: H will flash for approximately one minute and then re- more than approx. 10 minutes, lines (-.-) are shown > Please see chapter "Setting up the tire pressure main continuously illuminated. This sequence will I instead of the tire pressures. control system (TPM) in the central display" on continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long page 254. J as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction in- e Tire pressure e Current dicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to K detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS The actual pressures are displayed for information Setting up the tire pressure con- L malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, in- purposes only. The tire pressures change according trol system (TPM) in the central cluding the installation of replacement or alternate to the temperature. display M tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS e Never change the tire pressures on the basis of this display. Incorrect settings N from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS WARNING malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires O or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re- Displaying pressure deviation Tire pressure that is too low or too high destroys the placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the P tire and wheel, extends the braking distance and TPMS to continue to function properly. significantly increases the risk of an accident. Q Monitoring is interrupted in the following cases: – If the tire pressure monitoring system is faulty Although the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is R available, it is the driver's responsibility to ensure – If wheel sensors for the tire pressure monitoring that the tires are inflated to the correct tire pressure S system are missing and that the vehicle settings are correct. Incomplete T – In the learning phase after the tire settings have or incorrect settings can affect the output of warn- been updated U ings and notices. – After a wheel change without updating the tire V settings Fig. 201: Example pressure difference e Adjust tire pressure to suit your tires and the load. – If the tire temperatures are too high bb Vehicle is stationary. W e Ensure that the settings in the TPMS menu cor- > Please see chapter "Warning and information X e Tire pressure e Pressure difference respond to the tires fitted on the vehicle and the messages" on page 244. current load of the vehicle (especially after a Y The pressure difference from the set pressure on the relevant wheel is displayed. Example: Z

254 Wheels and Tires

wheel change or changes in vehicle loading). Setting the tire type and tire size Learning the Tire Pressure Monitoring System A e Select tire type and size in the Tire Pressure After the tires have been changed, the wheel sensor B Monitoring menu again, even if a newly mounted Information has been replaced, or the tire settings have been wheel set corresponds to the settings of the updated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System starts C predecessor. The options available depend on the model and tire learning the tires. The tire pressure control system D type. It is therefore possible that not all the options recognizes the wheels and their installation position. shown here are available. The position and pressure data is available as soon E Displaying inflation information e Before fitting tires and wheels with dimensions as the Tire Pressure Monitoring System has assigned bb Vehicle is stationary. that are not available for selection in the Tire the recognized wheels to the correct wheel position. F Pressure Monitoring System menu, the missing During the learning process, the target pressures for G e e Settings e Vehicle e Tire pressure information should be added. Visit an authorized cold tires (68 °F) are shown on the central display, monitoring Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an author- and a message appears on the instrument cluster. H The settings for loading and the type and size of the ized Porsche dealer, as they have trained techni- I cians and the necessary parts and tools. The tire pressure warning light in the instrument tire are displayed. cluster remains illuminated until the information for e Only use tires and wheels approved by Porsche. J For tires that have not yet been identified, dashes all of the tires has been learned. (-.-) are shown in place of the tire pressure levels. K e e Settings e Vehicle e Tire pressure Uniform Tire Quality Grading and L Displaying pressure deviation monitoring e Tire selection bb Vehicle is stationary. Glossary of Tire Terminology M Selecting full load or partial load Tire Abuse N e e Settings e Vehicle e Tire pressure WARNING e monitoring Pressure deviation e e Settings e Vehicle e Tire pressure O The temperature grade for this tire is established for monitoring e Full Load Displayed are the target pressure and pressure de- a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. P viation relative to the target pressure in each tire Full load Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive load- along with the information on the load, type and size Q Full load is activated. ing, either separately or in combination, can cause of the tire. heat buildup and possible tire failure. R Example: If the reading for the right rear tire is Full load e shown as –0.1 bar, this tire needs to be inflated by Partial load is activated. Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed for S 1.4 psi (0.1 bar). The tire temperature has already e Adapt the tire pressures to the selected load the tires fitted to the vehicle. T been taken into account in the pressures shown. type. e Ensure that the tires are set to the correct infla- e You should only use the pressure difference from tion pressure. U e the display or the corresponding tire pressure Information Observe the maximum load for the vehicle. V warning to correct the tire pressure. In the case of tires that have not yet been taught-in, If the option Full load is not displayed, the specified W the new target pressures are displayed instead of tire pressures are valid for all types of vehicle load. X the actual pressure differences. Y Z

255 Wheels and Tires

A Traction AA, A, B, C Ply B The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords. A, B, and C and they represent the tire's ability to C stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled Cord D conditions on specified government test surfaces of The strands forming the plies in the tire. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor E traction performance. Rim F A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly Information upon which the tire beads are seated. G The traction grade assigned to this is based on Bead H braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does not The part of the tire made of steel wires, wrapped or include cornering (turned) traction, acceleration, hy- I reinforced by ply cords, that is shaped to fit the rim. droplaning or peak traction characteristics. J Sidewall K Temperature A, B, C The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. L Fig. 202: Treadwear, Traction and Temperature of the Tire The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, Tread M Quality grades can be found where applicable on the representing the tire's resistance to the generation tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested The portion of the tire that comes in contact with N section width. All passenger vehicle tires must con- under controlled conditions on a specified indoor the road. O form to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to laboratory test wheel. these grades. Quality grades can be found where Sustained high temperatures can cause the material Tire pressure plate P applicable. of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and A label in the door sill area at the driver’s door providing information about seating capacity, vehicle Q excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire Treadwear failure. load limit, original tire size and recommended infla- R The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based The grade C corresponds to a level of performance tion pressure. S on the wear rate of the tire when tested under con- which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under trolled conditions on a specific government test the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Tire Identification Number (TIN) T course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear Grades B and A represent higher levels of perform- An identification number on radial tires providing information about the manufacturer, tire size, tire type U one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern- ance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative per- required by law. and date of manufacture. V formance of tires depends upon the actual Glossary of tire terminology Inflation pressure W conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driv- A measure of the amount of air in the tire. The tire X ing habits, service practices and differences in road Radial ply tire pressure is measured in kilopascals (kPa), pounds characteristics and climate. per square inch (psi) or bar. Y A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords which extend > Please see chapter "Checking tire tread" on to the beads are laid at substantially 90° to the cen- Z page 260. terline of the tread.

256 Wheels and Tires

Cold inflation pressure NOTICE The tire is inflated. A 3. Check inflation pressure using the pressure gage The tire pressure of a cold tire with ambient tem- B perature maximum 68 °F / 20 °C and the vehicle out Risk of damage to the vehicle and to the tires. Dam- and reduce tire pressure or continue filling as of direct sunlight exposure. age due to overloading is not covered by the vehicle required. Check the inflation pressure again. C warranty. 4. Switch off the compressor. D Maximum permissible inflation pressure 5. Unscrew the compressor filler hose. Tire damage may also be caused by overloading, and The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire E this damage is not covered by your tire warranty. may be inflated. e Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about Information F Recommended inflation pressure the roof load. You can also check the tire pressure and inflate your G e If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the tires at service stations. The cold inflation pressure found on the tire pressure H plate. tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be found on the tire pressure plate and in the Reducing inflation pressure I chapter “Technical Data”. kPa (Kilopascal) 1. Switch off the compressor. e Never exceed the specified axle load. J A metric unit for tire pressure. 2. Open air bleed screw on the filler hose until the correct inflation pressure is achieved. K PSI (Pounds per square inch) Inflating tires L A standard unit for tire pressure. Reading off inscription on tires > Hot filler hose M Please see chapter "Loading Information" on CAUTION page 274. N The compressor filler hose can become hot during O Overloading filling and cause burns. P Overloading e DANGER Wear gloves. Q The compressor is stored in the right-hand box at Overloading can lead to dangerous vehicle reactions the front of the front luggage compartment. R and long braking distances. > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on S e Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about page 154. Fig. 203: Inscription on radial tires the roof load. > Comply with the operating instructions on the T A – Tire size e If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the compressor. U tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can Example: P 225/55R19 (103Y) XL 1. Screw the compressor filler hose onto the tire V be found on the tire pressure plate and in the valve. – P – The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle. This information is not included on all tires. chapter technical data. 2. Connect the compressor to a socket in the ve- W e Never exceed the specified axle load. hicle and switch on the compressor. – 225 – Indication of tire width in mm – 55 – Indication of tire height to tire width ratio in X percent Y – R – Belt type code letter for radial – 19 – Indication of rim diameter in inches Z 257 Wheels and Tires

A – 103 – Load capacity coefficient G – Term of tubeless or tube tire – Y – Speed code letter B Identification for tubeless tires. – XL (Extra Load) – Tire with increased load rating C Speed code letter B – TIN (Tire Identification Number) D The speed code letter indicates the maximum per- Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx mitted speed for the tire. This rating is indicated on E The DOT symbol indicates that the tires comply with the tire side wall. F the requirements of the US Department of Trans- portation and provides information about: T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) G – First two-digit code indicates the manufacturer’s H up to 131 mph (210 km/h) H identification mark. – Second two-digit code indicates the tire size. V up to 150 mph (240 km/h) I – Third four-digit code indicates the tire type code. – Fourth four-digit code indicates the date of J W up to 167 mph (270 km/h) manufacture. If, for example, the last four num- K bers read 0204, the tire was produced in the 2nd Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) L week of 2004. Fig. 204: Inscription on wheel M C – Tire ply composition and material (Y) up to 186 mph (300 km/h) as for Y A Rim width in inches tires. Speeds of more than 185 mph B Rim-flange contour code letter The number of layers in the tread and side walls and N (300 km/h) are also possible at a C Symbol for drop-center rim their material composition. D Rim diameter in inches O maximum tire load capacity of 85% E Double hump (confirmation from tire manufacturer P D – Maximum permissible inflation pressure F Rim offset in mm required for speeds of more than The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure to Q 185 mph (300 km/h)). which a tire can be inflated. Identifying tire damage e Do not exceed the permissible inflation pressure. R Hidden tire damage and Reading off inscription on wheels WARNING S E – Maximum load rating damage to the rim flange The information is inscribed on the back of the T The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can be spokes near the tire valve. Hidden tire damage can cause the tire to burst. You U carried by the tire. If you replace tires always use a may lose control of the vehicle. tire that has the same maximum load rating as the e Check tires, including the sidewalls, regularly for V factory installed tire. embedded foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and W F – Radial bulges. e Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if X The identification indicates if the tire has a radial possible. Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs structure. Y or objects with sharp edges (such as stones) Z

258 Wheels and Tires

heavily or at an acute angle. current approval status: Contact an authorized Information A e If in doubt, have the tire, especially the inner side, Porsche dealer. B checked by an expert. Go to a qualified special- e Use only tire makes tested and approved by If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice- ized repair shop. Porsche recommends an au- Porsche. able change in handling occurs due to the different C thorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained e tread depth of the other tires. This is especially the The difference in tread depths on one axle must D technicians and the necessary parts and tools. not exceed 30%. case if only the rear tires are replaced. However, this e Tire repairs are not permissible under any cir- e Only use second-hand tires if their prior usage is effect is reduced continuously as the new tires are E cumstances. Sealing a tire with tire sealant is known. broken in. F only an emergency solution so that you can drive e Always replace both tires on one axle to avoid to the nearest workshop. any unnecessary effect on driving behavior due G Checking and replacing valves and to varying tread depths. H For safety reasons, tires must be replaced in the e Only authorized Porsche dealers may mount valve caps event of the following types of damage: tires. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche e Use only genuine Porsche valves for the Tire I – If the possibility of a fracture in the ply cannot be recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). ruled out. J they have trained technicians and the necessary e Have the valves checked and replaced if neces- – If the tire was thermally or mechanically over- parts and tools. sary whenever the tires are changed. Porsche K loaded as a result of pressure loss or other prior e Adjust your driving style to the altered handling recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as damage. L behavior. they have trained technicians and the necessary e Only use tires with tire pressure sensors for the parts and tools. M Replacing tires and wheels Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the absence of valve caps, the valve is unpro- N e Shut off the vehicle when changing a tire. e Make sure the wheels are compatible with the tected from dust and dirt, resulting in leaks. O Lack of grip TPMS on your vehicle. For information on suit- e Always screw on valve caps tightly to protect WARNING able wheels and on the TPMS on your vehicle: valve inserts from dirt. Dirty valve inserts can P Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. cause creeping air loss. Initially, new tires do not provide their full grip. e Check the battery level of the tire pressure sen- e Replace missing valve caps immediately. Q sors when changing tires. Visit an authorized e You should therefore drive at moderate speeds e Use only plastic valve caps. R during the first 125 mls (200 km) to extend the Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an author- service life of the tires and achieve full perform- ized Porsche dealer, as they have trained techni- S cians and the necessary parts and tools. Using snow tires ance capability. T > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on Exceeding the maximum WARNING e Be sure to only install tires of identical make, of page 274. permitted speed U the same type and with the same specification V number ("N..."). Exceeding the maximum permitted speed can cause e Before mounting new tires, inquire about their tires to burst. W e Observe the maximum permitted speed for the X tire. e Only install snow tires that have a lower permis- Y sible maximum speed than the indicated maxi- Z mum vehicle speed if they have the M+S label or 259 Wheels and Tires

A the snowflake symbol on the side of the tire. e Only use snow chains approved by Porsche so Information Observe country-specific regulations. that sufficient clearance between the wheel well B e Affix the sticker with the maximum permitted and chain is assured. Unevenly worn tires indicate a fault in the vehicle: C speed in the driver's field of vision. Observe e Remove ice and snow deposits in the wheel well e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have country-specific regulations. before installing the chains. trained technicians and the necessary parts and D e Set the maximum permitted speed as the speed e Observe the different national regulations re- tools. E limit. garding maximum speeds.

F e Install snow tires in a timely manner before the Storing wheels cold season begins. Checking tire tread Do not use tires that are more than 6 years old. G e Check tire tread regularly, particularly before and e Use only tire makes tested and approved by Chemical additives, which make the tire rubber after long journeys. H Porsche. elastic, lose their effectiveness over the course of e The original equipment tires on your Porsche e Before mounting new tires, inquire about their time and the rubber becomes brittle. The age of the I have built-in tire wear indicators. They are current approval status: Contact an authorized tire can be seen from the "DOT" code number shown molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and J Porsche dealer. on the tire sidewall. If, for example, the last four will appear as approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) numbers are 3016, then the tire was produced in the K bands when the tire tread depth is down to 1/16 Information 30th week of 2016. L of an in (1.6 mm). e Always store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place. At low temperatures, juddering noises caused by the e When the indicators appear in two or more adja- Store tires without rims vertically. M tires can occur during maneuvering or accelerating cent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We e Do not store summer tires or park vehicles with N out of curves on both dry and wet road surfaces. recommend, however, that you do not let the summer tires mounted at ambient temperatures The driving performance and comfort of summer tires wear down to this extent. under 5 °F (-15 °C). O tires are impaired at low temperatures below 45 °F/ e Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly e Avoid contact with gas, oil or grease. P 7 °C. Porsche therefore recommends that you fit and are even less effective on wet roads. snow tires on the vehicle at temperatures below 45 ° e For safety reasons, replace the tires before the Q F/7 °C. wear indicators appear. Snow tires are no longer Balancing wheels As a precaution, have wheels balanced in spring Extremely low temperatures below 5 °F (-15 °C) can suitable when their tread depth falls below 5/32 R (summer tires) and before winter (M+S tires) by an cause permanent damage to summer tires. in. (4 mm). S authorized Porsche dealer. Snow tires are no longer suitable if their tread depth e In the United States, state laws may govern the e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- T is less than 0.16 in. (4 mm). minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such laws. ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they U have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools. V Using snow chains Measuring tire tread depth e Insert a commercially available tread depth W Install snow chains only on the rear wheels and only with the tire/rim combinations designated for use gauge or caliper in the tire tread and measure the X with snow chains listed in the Technical Data. tire tread depth. Y > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on page 274. Z

260 Wheels and Tires

Changing a wheel Caring for wheel attachment faces type of vehicle or wheel bolts of identical quality A that have been manufactured according to the Working under the WARNING specifications and production requirements of B vehicle Porsche. C e Tighten wheel bolts with a tightening torque of The vehicle can slip off the jack. D e Make sure that there is no one inside the vehicle 118 ftlb. (160 Nm). when jacking it up and changing the wheel. e Do not use any power tools such as impact E wrenches. e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking F points on the vehicle underbody. e Never jack up the vehicle on a surface that slopes Using security wheel bolts G up, down or to the side. H e Only use the jack to raise the vehicle for changing a wheel. I e Always place the vehicle on solid supports when J working under the vehicle. K > Please see chapter "Jack and Lifting Platform" on L page 141. M Fig. 205: Wheel attachment faces Information N NOTICE The tools needed for changing wheels (jack, wheel O bolt wrench, mounting aids, etc.) are not included in the standard scope of supply for the vehicle. Risk of damage to the wheel and wheel attachment P e For information on the tool required: Contact an face. Q authorized Porsche dealer. e The wheel attachment face B on the brake disk, wheel hub and on the wheel itself must not be R Information greased. Fig. 206: Adapter for security wheel bolts S e Only the areas A may be greased. Grease these The tire and wheel sizes on both axles are different. areas very thinly with Optimoly® TA: Contact an The adapter for the security wheel bolts is located in T the tool box. When removing the wheels, mark the direction of authorized Porsche dealer. Do not use any other U rotation and position on each wheel and carry out grease or paste. e To loosen and tighten the wheel bolt with anti- the installation according to these markings. theft protection, the adapter must be used be- V tween the wheel bolt and the wheel bolt wrench. e Only use wheels/tires with approved dimensions W for each axle. Care of wheel bolts e When positioning the adapter ensure that it en- Vehicle papers or Please see chapter "Technical Da- e Clean the wheel bolts before installation. gages fully in the teeth of the wheel bolt. X ta" on page 274. e Wheel bolts must not be greased. Y e Replace damaged wheel bolts. Only use original Porsche wheel bolts specifically designed for this Z 261 Wheels and Tires

A Changing wheels Changing wheels 1. For vehicles without PCCB: Remove one wheel bolt and screw in an assembly aid. B Preparing the vehicle – or – C Control operation of the 1. For vehicles with PCCB: Remove two wheel bolts WARNING and screw in two assembly aids A and B. D leveling system E A vehicle on which the leveling system is activated NOTICE F can move unexpectedly or tip or fall off lifting equipment, e.g. a jack or lifting platform. This can The brake disks can become damaged if wheels are G cause serious injuries and damage. not changed properly, especially on vehicles with PCCB. H e Manually set Normal level and switch off the leveling system before raising the vehicle. e When changing a wheel, screw in the assembly I aids.

J e e Settings e Vehicle e Additional 2. Remove the remaining wheel bolts. K chassis settings e Deactivate chassis 3. Remove the wheel. adjustments to use a jack L 4. Fit a new wheel. 1. Activate the electric parking brake. 5. Insert wheel bolts and tighten in diagonally op- M 2. Switch off the vehicle. posite sequence. Fig. 207: Screw in an assembly aid for vehicles without N 3. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling PCCB 6. Remove assembly aids and screw in remaining away, e.g. by placing wedges at the wheels on wheel bolts. Initially tighten bolts only slightly in O the opposite side. a diagonally opposite sequence so that the wheel P 4. Slightly loosen the wheel bolts or wheel nuts on is centered. the wheel to be changed. 7. Inflate the tires if necessary. Q 5. Raise the vehicle only at the specified jacking 8. Lower the vehicle fully and remove the jack. R points. 9. Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonally opposite > Please see chapter "Jack and Lifting Plat- sequence. Do not use any power tools such as S form" on page 141. impact wrenches. T 6. Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts off the 10.After changing a wheel, immediately use a tor- ground. que wrench to check the specified tightening U torque of the wheel bolts (118 ftlb. (160 Nm)). V 11.Update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) settings. W > Please see chapter "Learning the Tire Pres- X sure Monitoring System" on page 255. Y

Z Fig. 208: Screw in two assembly aids for vehicles with PCCB

262 Windows

Windows Information bb The vehicle has been turned off, but for no longer A than 10 minutes. B Opening and closing side windows If a window is blocked by an obstruction when clos- bb The driver's or passenger's door has not yet been ing, the window stops and opens again a few opened. C Opening and closing side centimeters. WARNING The switches feature a two-stage function. When D windows If the window is blocked a second time within the buttons are actuated, both stages can be clearly around 10 seconds, one-touch mode for this win- When opening or closing the side windows, particu- felt due to resistance when pushed or pulled. E dow is locked. The window can be closed manually. larly in automatic mode, body parts can become One-touch mode is enabled again once the window Stage one – manual operation F trapped between the moving side window and sta- has been completely shut once in manual mode. e Press or pull the relevant switch to the first stage tionary vehicle parts. until the desired position is reached. G e When opening and closing the side windows, The process stops when the button is released. H make sure that no parts of the body can become Opening and closing side windows Stage two – automatic operation I trapped between the moving side windows and e Briefly push or pull the relevant switch fully to stationary vehicle parts. the second stage. J e Press the power button and turn off the vehicle The side window opens or closes automatically K when leaving the vehicle. People who are unfa- to the final position. miliar with the vehicle could be injured when L e Actuating the button again stops the side win- operating the power windows. dow in the desired position. M e In case of danger: Release the button on the ve- In one-touch operation, the window opens or closes hicle key immediately. N more quickly than in manual operation. e Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. O Storing the final position of side windows Closing a window P WARNING manually The final positions of the side windows are lost after the 12-volt power supply fails. One-touch operation Q of the side windows is disabled. If one-touch mode was deactivated after a window R was blocked, the window will close with its full force Perform the following steps for all side windows: S when closed manually. 1. Close the side window completely once by pull- e Make sure that nobody is trapped or crushed ing the switch to the second setting. T during closing of the windows. 2. When the window is completely closed, briefly Fig. 209: Buttons for driver's door power window U pull the switch to the second setting again. A Power window button, front, driver side 3. Completely open the side window once by V B Power window button, front, passenger side pressing the switch. C Power window button, rear, driver side W D Power window button, rear, passenger side E Child protection safety button X

bb Operational readiness established. Y – or – Z

263 Windows

A Disabling controls in the rear – B child protection The power window buttons on the rear doors and the C touch display in the rear can be disabled by pressing D the safety button E in the control panel on the driver’s door. E Switching child protection on/off F e Press safety button E. G The light indicator on the button lights up. The rear power window buttons on the rear doors H and the rear display are deactivated. I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

264 Windshield wipers

Windshield wipers Controls A B General safety instructions C Undesired wiping WARNING D

In rain sensor mode, the windshield wipers wipe au- E tomatically when water is detected on the F windshield. G e Always switch off the windshield wipers before cleaning the windshield. H I NOTICE J Risk of damage to the luggage compartment lid, K windshield and wiper system. Fig. 211: Switch for rain sensor/intermittent operation L e Only wipe the windshield when sufficiently wet, or else it could become scratched Fig. 210: Windshield wiper lever High sensitivity (wipe more frequently) M e Press switch (A) upward. e Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the 0 Windshield wipers off N windshield before driving. 1 Rain sensor operation The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the e Always switch off windshield wipers in car 2 Slow wipe windshield. O washes to prevent them from wiping when not 3 Fast wipe 4 One-touch wiping Low sensitivity (wipe less frequently) P desired (rain sensor mode). e 5 Spray and wipe Press switch (A) downward. Q Responding to warning symbols Switching on rain sensor mode Switching on continuous wiper R Always observe any warning and information mes- In rain sensor mode, the windshield wipers wipe in operation S sages displayed in the vehicle. accordance with the amount of water measured on Slow wipe T > Please see chapter "Warning and information the windshield. e messages" on page 244. Press wiper lever up to the second detent (posi- U e Move wiper lever up to the first detent (position tion 2). 1). V Rain sensor mode is active. Fast wipe e Press wiper lever up to the third detent (position W 3). Setting rain sensor sensitivity X By adjusting the sensitivity in 4 stages, you can control the wipe interval according to the amount of Y water measured on the windshield. Z

265 Windshield wipers

A One-touch wiping Replacing wiper blades Push the wiper arms inward bb Operational readiness turned on. B One-time wiping Incorrectly mounted CAUTION e e Briefly press the wiper lever downward windshield wipers Press the wiper lever downward for at least 2 C (position 4). seconds (position 4). D Windshield wipers that are not attached properly The wiper arms move back to their initial Multiple wiping when replaced can come loose while driving. position. e Press and hold the wiper lever downward E e Lock wiper blades correctly into the wiper arm. (position 4). F e Check that the wiper blades are securely set in Information place. G Spraying and wiping If necessary visit an authorized Porsche dealer to e Pull wiper lever toward the steering wheel (5). have this work carried out. Porsche recommends an H NOTICE authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained Spray nozzles and windshield wipers are active technicians and the necessary parts and tools. I as long as the wiper lever is held. If the wiper arms accidentally fall back onto the When the wiper lever is released, the windshield J windshield, they can damage the windshield. wipers continue to perform a few wipes. After Service status K several wipes, the Night View Assist camera is e Always hold the wiper arms securely when re- For further information on the service status (avail- cleaned automatically. placing the wiper blades. L ability dependent on country): M Properly functioning wiper blades are absolutely > Please see chapter "Smart Service" of the on- Switching windshield wipers off necessary for a clear view. The wiper blades should board Owner's Manual. N e Move the wiper lever to position 0. be replaced twice per year (before and after the cold O season) or if wiper performance deteriorates or the Cleaning the reversing camera Information wipers are damaged. P > Please see chapter "ParkAssist" on page 164. When the windshield wipers or operational readiness Q Replacing windshield wiper blades are switched off, the wipers move up slightly from The wiper arms must be extended outward to re- Additional information R their rest position so that the wiping edges are place the wiper blades or insert an ice cover or aligned correctly. sunshade. Behavior of the windshield wipers when op- S erational readiness is switched on T Extend the wiper arms outward – Wiper lever is in position 1: Rain sensor is acti- bb Operational readiness shut off. vated from 2.5 mph (4 km/h). U 1. Press the wiper lever downward once (position – Wiper lever is in position 2 or 3: Windshield V 4). wipers stay off until the wiper lever is moved. The wiper arms will move upward about 90°. This prevents the windshield wipers from wiping on W 2. Change the wiper blades in accordance with the an iced-up windshield, for example, when opera- separate installation instructions provided by the X tional readiness is switched on. manufacturer. Y In so doing, pay attention to the varying length Z of the wiper blades!

266 Windshield wipers

Behavior of the windshield wipers when A changing speed B bb Wiper lever is in position 2 or 3. – Speed falls below 2.5 mph (4 km/h): Wipers C switch to rain sensor mode. D – Speed increases above 7.5 mph (12 km/h): Wipers switch to the selected setting. E Example: When braking at traffic lights, the wind- F shield wipers switch to rain sensor mode. When ac- G celerating, the wipers switch to the selected setting from a speed of 7.5 mph (12 km/h). H I Information J The windshield wipers stop when the hood is opened. K e To switch the windshield wipers on again, press L the windshield wiper lever upward/downward. M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

267 12-volt battery

A 12-volt battery short circuits. The short circuit can cause a fire. vehicle and burns. B e Use only standard jumper cables with sufficient e Do not use boosters. General Safety Notices cross section and completely insulated clamps. e Only use chargers that have been approved by C Follow instructions of the jumper cable the equipment manufacturer for LiFePO4 bat- Electric shock, short cir- WARNING manufacturer. teries with integrated electronic protection D cuit, fire or explosion e The vehicles must not touch, otherwise current circuits. E Touching conductive parts of the vehicle can give may flow as soon as the positive terminals are e The following maximum values must never be F you an electric shock. You can cause a short circuit connected. exceeded: when working on the vehicle's electrical system. The e Ensure that conductive jewelry (e.g. rings, – Max. charging voltage: 14.8 V (even in the G short circuit can cause a fire. chains, watch straps) do not come into contact event of a fault with battery disconnected; no voltage peaks permitted) H e Work on the electrical system and removing and with live parts of the vehicle. e Never connect jumper cables directly to the 12 V – Max. charging current: 90 A I installing the 12 V lithium battery must only be carried out by an authorized Porsche dealer. lithium battery or other electrical components. e If in doubt, contact an authorized Porsche dealer. J Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche Only connect jumper cables to the emergency starting terminals Exhaustively discharged K dealer, as they have trained technicians and the NOTICE necessary parts and tools. 12 V lithium battery Emergency starting a L WARNING Escaping electrolyte fluid frozen or damaged Risk of damage when supplying external power to an M WARNING and toxic gas battery exhaustively discharged 12 V lithium battery. N e If you suspect that the 12 V lithium battery is When emergency starting a frozen or damaged bat- If the 12 volt lithium battery is damaged or handled exhaustively discharged, do not supply power tery, there is a danger of explosion and chemical O incorrectly, there is the risk in rare cases that elec- from an external source. burns. P trolyte fluid or toxic gases could escape from it. e Never emergency start a frozen or damaged e Avoid any inhalation of the vapors and any skin NOTICE Q battery. contact with the electrolyte fluid. R e Keep people away and on the side facing into the Escaping irritating gases Electrical control units and components pose a risk wind. CAUTION S due to a damaged of short circuits, fire, and damage. e Only charge the 12 V lithium battery in well battery e T ventilated spaces. Removing and installing theybattermust only be carried out by an authorized Porsche dealer. The use of boosters or non-approved chargers can U Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche Unsuitable jumper ca- result in the battery being charged with excessive WARNING dealer, as they have trained technicians and the V bles and following incor- charging voltage and excessive charging current. necessary parts and tools. rect procedures This can damage the battery and irritating gases can W e Always disconnect the negative terminal on the escape. This can cause considerable damage to the X Supplying external power using unsuitable jumper battery when working on the electrical system. cables or following incorrect procedures can cause Y The 12 V lithium battery is housed in the back of the trunk under a plastic cover. Z

268 12-volt battery

> Please see chapter "Installing and removing the The need to repeatedly supply electricity from an Always have maintenance work carried A plastic cover in the front luggage compartment" external source or charge the 12-volt lithium battery out by qualified technicians on page 156. under normal operating conditions may indicate that Never attempt to replace the 12 volt B lithium battery on your own. The 12 V The 12-volt lithium battery is automatically discon- the 12-volt lithium battery is damaged. lithium battery of this vehicle is only to C nected from the vehicle electrical system if the bat- be replaced with a 12 V lithium battery tery charge state is low. When the 12-volt lithium Safety symbols on the 12 V lithium battery D explicitly provided for this vehicle by battery is discharged, it is impossible to operate the Consult the Manual Porsche. The use of other 12 V lithium or E vehicle. The electrical system is deactivated lead batteries will cause significant dis- temporarily. F Wear protective goggles ruptions to or even the total failure of the e Observe the warning message. electrical system. G Charging the 12-volt lithium battery: Risk of explosion Replacing the 12 V lithium battery is H e Establish driving readiness. only to be carried out by a qualified spe- > Please see chapter "Starting, driving and Fire, sparks, naked flames and smoking cialist repair shop. Porsche recommends I are prohibited stopping the vehicle" on page 216. an authorized Porsche dealer, as they J – or – Avoid sparking and short circuits when have trained technicians and the neces- e Charging the 12-volt V battery using the handling cables and electrical devices. sary parts and tools. K charger. Risk of chemical burns Electrolyte fluid is highly corrosive: wear L – or – 12 V Lithium Battery safety gloves and eye protection. M e Supply electricity in from another vehicle for at First aid What do I What action do I need to take? least 5 minutes. If electrolyte fluid splashes into your eye, N Then establish operational readiness or charge want to do? rinse immediately for a few minutes with O the 12-volt battery using the charger. clean water. Immediately seek medical Prevent bat- e Switch off any electrical con- attention from a doctor. If electrolyte P After establishing operational readiness, charging tery from sumers not required on short fluid splashes onto your skin or clothing, the 12-volt lithium battery with a charger (for at discharging trips. Q least 10 minutes) or supplying electricity from an neutralize immediately with soapsuds and rinse with plenty of water. If you ac- external source, the electrical system is automati- Prepare for e Prior to the start of winter, R cidentally drink electrolyte fluid, consult cally reactivated. The 12-volt lithium battery is au- winter use have the 12 V lithium battery S a doctor immediately. tomatically re-connected to the vehicle electrical checked. supply. Keep children away T Using a jumper cable, the battery of another vehicle U can be used to supply electricity to the vehicle. Both Disposal batteries must have a nominal voltage level of 12 Hand in old batteries at a battery collec- V volts. The capacity (Ah) of the donor battery must tion point. W not be substantially less than that of the discharged Never dispose of old batteries as house- battery. The discharged 12-volt lithium battery hold waste. X must be connected properly to the vehicle electrical system. Y Z

269 12-volt battery

A What do I What action do I need to take? 1. Open the hood. > Please see chapter "Opening and locking the B want to do? hood and trunk lid" on page 154. C Charge the e Do not charge a damaged 12 2. Remove the plastic cover. V lithium battery. D 12 volt lith- > Please see chapter "Installing and removing ium battery the plastic cover in the front luggage com- E partment" on page 156. Park the ve- e If the vehicle is left for long F 3. Fold open the cap on the positive terminal for hicle in periods in the garage or emergency starting +. G storage workshop, the doors, covers 4. Connect the red positive cable of the charger to and lids of the vehicle should the positive terminal for emergency starting +. H be closed. 5. Connect the black negative cable of the charger e I Shut off the vehicle. to the – ground point. J 6. Switch on the charger. Charging the 12 V battery using the charger 7. After charging, switch off the charger before K disconnecting it. L 8. Close the cap on the positive terminal for emer- Fig. 213: 12 V lithium battery terminals gency starting +. 3. Fold open the cap on the positive terminal for M 9. Install the plastic cover. emergency starting +. N > Please see chapter "Installing and removing 4. Connect the red positive cable to the positive the plastic cover in the front luggage com- terminal for emergency starting +. O partment" on page 156. 5. Connect the red positive cable to the positive P For recommendations for a suitable charger: terminal of the donor battery. e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. Q 6. Connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the donor battery. R Supplying external power from another vehicle 7. Connect the black negative cable to the ground S point –. 1. Open the hood. 8. Let the engine of the donor vehicle run at a T > Please see chapter "Emergency unlatching of higher engine speed. the hood" on page 125. U 9. Charge the 12 V lithium battery from the exter- 2. Remove the plastic cover. nal power supply (min. 5 minutes). V > Please see chapter "Installing and removing The electrical system is reactivated W Fig. 212: 12 V lithium battery terminals the plastic cover in the front luggage com- automatically. partment" on page 156. X e Observe the instructions of the charger 10.Operational readiness established: manufacturer. Y e 12 V lithium batteries should only be charged in Z a well ventilated area.

270 12-volt battery

First, disconnect the black negative cable from Replacing the 12 V lithium battery A the ground point –, then from the negative ter- Danger of fire due to un- minal on the donor battery. WARNING B suitable 12 V lithium 11.Operational readiness established: battery C First, disconnect the red positive cable from the D positive terminal of the donor battery, then from In addition to significant malfunctions of the vehicle the positive terminal for emergency starting +. electrical system, use of an unsuitable 12 V lithium E 12.Close the cap on the positive terminal for emer- battery or its incorrect installation may in excep- F gency starting +. tional cases cause a fire (e.g. during charging). 13.Install the plastic cover. e Never attempt to replace the 12 V lithium bat- G > Please see chapter "Installing and removing tery yourself. Only have the 12 V lithium battery H the plastic cover in the front luggage com- of this vehicle replaced with a 12 V lithium bat- partment" on page 156. tery explicitly specified by Porsche for this ve- I 14.To continue charging the 12 V lithium battery: hicle. The use of other lithium or lead-acid J Charge the 12 V lithium battery using the batteries results in significant malfunctions in- charger. cluding total failure of the electrical system. K > Please see chapter "Charging the 12 V bat- Fig. 214: 12 V lithium battery terminals e Always have the 12 V lithium battery replaced by L tery using the charger" on page 270. a qualified specialist repair shop. Porsche rec- 3. Fold open the cap on the positive terminal for M – or – ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they emergency starting +. Establish driving readiness. have trained technicians and the necessary parts N 4. Connect the red positive cable to the positive > Please see chapter "Starting, driving and and tools. terminal for emergency starting +. O stopping the vehicle" on page 216. e Observe the disposal instructions for lithium 5. Connect the red positive cable to the positive batteries. P Emergency starting of another vehicle terminal of the flat battery. 6. Connect the black negative cable to the negative Q bb Driving readiness established. terminal of the flat battery. Service status 1. Open the hood. R 7. Connect the black negative cable to the ground > Please see chapter "Emergency unlatching of For further information on the service status (avail- point –. S the hood" on page 125. ability depending on country): 8. Perform emergency starting. > 2. Remove the plastic cover. Please see chapter "Smart Service" of the on- T Refer to the Owner's Manual of the other vehicle. board Owner's Manual. > Please see chapter "Installing and removing 9. Close the cap on the positive terminal for emer- U the plastic cover in the front luggage com- gency starting +. Power interruption partment" on page 156. V 10.Install the plastic cover. Following a temporary power interruption, some > Please see chapter "Installing and removing equipment must be reinitialized. W the plastic cover in the front luggage com- 1. Store the final position of the power windows. X partment" on page 156. > Please see chapter "Windows" on page 263. Y 2. Teach wheels and tires in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Z

271 12-volt battery

A > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 252. B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

272 Technical Data On the following pages you will find technical data for your vehicle.

273 Technical Data Technical Data

Vehicle identification number Safety compliance sticker Tire pressure plate

Fig. 215: Location of the vehicle identification number Fig. 216: Safety compliance sticker Fig. 217: Location of the tire pressure plate The vehicle identification number is located behind The safety compliance sticker is your assurance that The tire pressure plate is located on the door sill at the windshield at the bottom left as well as under- your new Porsche complies with all applicable Fed- the driver's door. neath the passenger seat. eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards that were in ef- e When ordering spare parts, always specify the fect at the time the vehicle was manufactured. Vehicle data carrier vehicle identification number. The sticker also shows the month and year of pro- You will find the vehicle data carrier in the Mainte- duction and the vehicle identification number of your nance booklet. It contains all important data about car (perforations) as well as the Gross Vehicle your vehicle. This data carrier cannot be reordered if Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating. it is lost or damaged.

Loading Information equipment, fluids, and emergency tools. This weight The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum does not include passengers and cargo. total weight of vehicle, passengers, luggage and op- Definitions The Gross Vehicle Weight is the sum of the curb tional equipment. The rear-axle load is the vehicle weight on the rear weight and the weight of passengers and cargo The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum load axle plus the weight of the transported load. combined. limit for the front or the rear axle. This information is The Curb weight – actual weight of your vehicle – is located on the safety compliance sticker located in the vehicle weight including standard and optional the driver’s side door aperture area.

274 Technical Data

Overloading Vehicle For determining the compatibility of the tire and ve- DANGER Steps for determining correct load limit: hicle load capabilities: 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on Overloading will lead to dangerous vehicle reactions occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg page 252. and long braking distances. or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) is a mini- 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and e Never exceed the specified axle loads. mum requirement. For more information: passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and page 252. NOTICE passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount total weight rating of vehicle, passengers and cargo. Risk of damage to the vehicle if the vehicle is of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, The Vehicle Capacity Weight – Load Limit – is the overloaded. if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there maximum total weight limit specified of the load Overloading can shorten the service life of the tires will be four 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the and car. Damage due to overloading is not covered the amount of available cargo and luggage load maximum weight of passengers and cargo that can by the vehicle warranty. capacity is 650 lbs. [1400 – 600 (4 x 150) = be loaded into the vehicle. This information can be 800 lbs.]. e Never exceed the specified axle loads. found on the tire pressure plate. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the sum of cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity Vehicle Load Capacity may not safely exceed the available cargo and weight and production options weight. luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. The load rating is the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. The maximum load rating is the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure. The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of passengers from the load limit. e Never exceed the permissible limits. Riding in a Cargo Area Fig. 218: Example for determining the combined weight of DANGER occupants and cargo e The combined weight of occupants and cargo Injuries are much more likely in an accident if occu- should never exceed the weight shown on the pants ride in the cargo area. tire pressure plate in the vehicle. e Occupants must ride only in the seats provided e Never exceed the number of passengers shown for this purpose. on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle. e Make sure that all occupants fasten their seat belts. Determining the combined weight of occupants and cargo: e Add the weight of all occupants and then add the total luggage weight (figure) 275 Technical Data Engine data Generally, the available drive power of battery electric vehicles depends on various factors, such as the duration of the power request, the battery voltage and battery temperature. The specified power is available for at least 10 seconds, while the specified overboost power when using Launch Control, which comes as standard, is available for at least 2.5 seconds.

Taycan

Power 93 kWh battery: 280 kW (375 hp) 79 kWh battery: 240 kW (321 hp)

Overboost power with Launch Control 93 kWh battery: 350 kW (469 hp) 79 kWh battery: 300 kW (402 hp)

Maximum torque with Launch Control 93 kWh battery: 263 lb-ft (357 Nm) 79 kWh battery: 254 lb-ft (345 Nm)

Taycan 4S

Power 93 kWh battery: 360 kW (482 hp) 79 kWh battery: 320 kW (429 hp)

Overboost power with Launch Control 93 kWh battery: 420 kW (562 hp) 79 kWh battery: 390 kW (522 hp)

Maximum torque with Launch Control 93 kWh battery: 479 lb-ft (650 Nm) 79 kWh battery: 472 lb-ft (640 Nm)

Taycan Turbo

Power 460 kW (616 hp)

Overboost power with Launch Control 500 kW (670 hp)

Maximum torque with Launch Control 626 lb-ft (850 Nm)

276 Technical Data

Taycan Turbo S

Power 460 kW (616 hp)

Overboost power with Launch Control 560 kW (750 hp)

Maximum torque with Launch Control 774 lb-ft (1,050 Nm)

Dimensions

Length (depending on the equipment) 195 in. (4,963 mm)

Width (depending on the equipment) 77.4 in. (1,966 mm)

Width with door mirrors 84.4 in. (2,144 mm)

Height at empty weight 53.9 in. (1,368 mm) – 55.2 in. (1,401 mm) depending on the the chassis variant

Ground clearance at empty weight 4.6 in. (116 mm) – 5.8 in. (148 mm) depending on the the chassis variant

Filling quantities

Approx. 0.65 gals (2.5 liters) (vehicles with Night View Assist or rear view Washer fluid camera: approx 1.45 gals (5.5 liters))

Refrigerant R1234yf 930 g - 980 g

Air-conditioning system compressor oil 160 g +/- 10 g

277 Technical Data Weights e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and maximum axle loads. If additional accessories are installed, the maximum permissible load will be reduced. e Only use roof transport systems from the Porsche Tequipment range or that have been tested and approved by Porsche. e Always take into account the individual weights of the roof transport system and add-on parts. e Do not drive at a speed of more than 80 mph (130 km/h) when the roof transport system is fitted.

Taycan

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed the weight Additional load shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.

Maximum axle load, front 2,888 lbs. (1,310 kg)

Maximum axle load, rear 3,395 lbs. (1,540 kg)

Maximum gross weight 6,162 lbs. (2,795 kg)

Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg)

Taycan 4S

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed the weight Additional load shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.

Maximum axle load, front 3,075 lbs. (1,395 kg)

Maximum axle load, rear 3,395 lbs. (1,540 kg)

Maximum gross weight 6,349 lbs. (2,880 kg)

Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg)

Taycan Turbo

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed the weight Additional load shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.

Maximum axle load, front 3,053 lbs. (1,385 kg) 278 Technical Data

Taycan Turbo

Maximum axle load, rear 3,406 lbs. (1,545 kg)

Maximum gross weight 6,349 lbs. (2,880 kg)

Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg)

Taycan Turbo S

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed the weight Additional load shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.

Maximum axle load, front 3,064 lbs. (1,390 kg)

Maximum axle load, rear 3,395 lbs. (1,540 kg)

Maximum gross weight 6,327 lbs. (2,870 kg)

Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg)

Wheels and Tires Wheel and tire sizes The load capacity code number (e.g. "105") and speed code letter for permitted maximum speed (e.g. "Y") are minimum requirements. When fitting new or different tires: > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 252. e Snow chains must only be fitted to the appropriately marked wheel and tire sizes. Observe the applicable national regulations regarding maximum speeds when snow chains are fitted. Only use snow chains approved by Porsche. e Before fitting different wheels and tires, check the EU declaration of conformity to see if the desired wheel/tire combination is permitted for your vehicle. For more information: Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.

Tire type Tire size Wheel size Fitting snow chains

FA: 225/55 R 19 103Y XL FA: 8.0J x 19 RO 50 Summer tires No RA: 275/45 R 19 108Y XL RA: 10.0J x 19 RO 47

279 Technical Data

Tire type Tire size Wheel size Fitting snow chains

FA: 245/45 R 20 103Y XL FA: 9.0J x 20 RO 54 No RA: 285/40 R 20 108Y XL RA: 11.0J x 20 RO 60

FA: 265/35 ZR 21 (101Y) XL FA: 9.5J x 21 RO 60 No RA: 305/30 ZR 21 (104Y) XL RA: 11.5J x 21 RO 66

FA: 225/55 R19 103H XL M+S FA: 8.0J x 19 RO 50 No RA: 275/45 R19 108H XL M+S RA: 10.0J x 19 RO 47

FA: 245/45 R 20 103H XL M+S FA: 9.0J x 20 RO 54 All-season tires No RA: 285/40 R 20 108H XL M+S RA: 11.0J x 20 RO 60

FA: 265/35 R 21 101H XL M+S FA: 9.5J x 21 RO 60 No RA: 305/30 R 21 104H XL M+S RA: 11.5J x 21 RO 66

FA: 225/55 R19 103V XL M+S FA: 8.0J x 19 RO 50 On the rear axle only RA: 275/45 R19 108V XL M+S RA: 10.0J x 19 RO 47 Snow tires FA: 245/45 R 20 103V XL M+S FA: 9.0J x 20 RO 54 On the rear axle only RA: 285/40 R 20 108V XL M+S RA: 11.0J x 20 RO 60

19-inch wheels are not suitable for vehicles with Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB) or Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB). FA = front axle, RA = rear axle, RO = rim offset

Tire pressure All tire pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche for cold tires (68 °F / 20 °C). e Set the tire type, tire size and load condition in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). > Please see chapter "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" on page 253. Standard tire pressure

280 Technical Data

Taycan with 2 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

19-inch summer tires 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.1 bar / 210 kPa / 31 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi

20-inch summer tires 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.1 bar / 210 kPa / 31 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

19-inch all-season tires 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch all-season tires 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 3.1 bar / 310 kPa / 45 psi

19-inch winter tires 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

Taycan with 3 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

19-inch summer tires 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi

20-inch summer tires 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

19-inch all-season tires 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 281 Technical Data

Taycan with 3 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

21-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 3.1 bar / 310 kPa / 45 psi

19-inch winter tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

Taycan 4S with 2 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

19-inch summer tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi

20-inch summer tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

19-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

19-inch winter tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

282 Technical Data

Taycan 4S with 3 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

19-inch summer tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi

20-inch summer tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

19-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

19-inch winter tires 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

Taycan Turbo with 2 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

20-inch summer tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.1 bar / 310 kPa / 45 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch all-season tires 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

283 Technical Data

Taycan Turbo with 3 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

20-inch summer tires 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.1 bar / 310 kPa / 45 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch all-season tires 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

Taycan Turbo S with 2 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

20-inch summer tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.1 bar / 310 kPa / 45 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.3 bar / 230 kPa / 33 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch all-season tires 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

284 Technical Data

Taycan Turbo S with 3 seats in the rear Part load Full load FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

FA RA FA RA

20-inch summer tires 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch summer tires 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.1 bar / 310 kPa / 45 psi

20-inch all-season tires 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 2.6 bar / 260 kPa / 38 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi

21-inch all-season tires 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

20-inch winter tires 2.8 bar / 280 kPa / 41 psi 2.7 bar / 270 kPa / 39 psi 2.9 bar / 290 kPa / 42 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi

Porsche Communication Management Technical data: Audio and video files

Supported SD cards up to 128 GB media Portable players MTP Player, USB 2.0 devices of "USB Device Subclass 1 and 6" such as, for example, USB sticks, USB MP3 players without special driver software, external USB Flash memory and hard drives

File system SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC memory cards USB mass storage exFAT, FAT or FAT32, NTFS file systems with a maximum of 4 partitions

Format MPEG 1/2 Layer 3; Windows Media Audio 9 and 10; MPEG 2/4; FLAC, MPEG 1/2; ISO-MPEG4; DivX 3, 4 and 5; Xvid; ISO-MPEG4 H.264 (MPEG4 AVC); Windows Media Video 9

File extension .mp3; .wma; .asf; .m4a; .m4b; .aac; .flac; .mpg; .mpeg; .avi; .mp4; .m4v; .mov; .wmv

Playback lists .M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX

Characteristics max. 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampling frequency; max. 2,000 kbit/s and 720x576 px. at max. 25 fps

285 Technical Data

Technical data: Audio and video files

Number of files USB mass storage and memory cards max. 10,000 files per medium, max. 1,000 files per directory/playback list

Metadata Album covers up to 800 x 800 pixels; GIF, JPG and PNG formats or via Gracenote® database

Technical data: Connectivity

Mobile networks GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad Band, 850/900 MHz/1,800/1,900 MHz UMTS/HSPA+: Triple band, 850 MHz (band V)/AWS (band VI)/1,900 MHz (band II) LTE: Quad band, 700 MHz (band 17)/850 MHz (band 5) /AWS (band 4)/1,900 MHz (band 2)

WiFi IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (2.4 GHz)

Bluetooth® Bluetooth® 2.1, IEEE 802.15.1, Class 2, range approx. 10 m

Technical data: Radio

Frequency FM: 87.5 – 108 MHz ranges/ AM: 537 – 1602 kHz (availability dependent on country) standards

Tuning grid with FM: 200 kHz automatic sta- AM: 9 kHz (availability dependent on country) tion search

License notices

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by AISIN AW CO., LTD. Bluetooth® is under licence. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Dolby Digital Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, DTS Digital & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Surround Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Gracenote and “Powered by Gracenote” are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Gracenote, Inc. in the United Gracenote® States and/or other countries. 286 Technical Data

Inspection marks and declarations Information 2. this device must accept any interference re- of conformity ceived, including interference that may cause The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or undesired operation. TV interference caused by unauthorized modifica- Radio Frequency Devices and Radio Commu- United States (FCC) 47 CFR Part 15 and Canada tions to this equipment. nication Equipment (ISED) RSS-Gen (English) Such modification could void the user's authority to Radio Frequency Devices and Radio Communication This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and In- operate the equipment. Equipment comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules novation, Science, and Economic Development Can- ada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Model: R3TR two conditions: (1) This device may not cause Operation is subject to the following two conditions: IC: 3659A-R3TR 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, harmful interference, and (2) This device must ac- This device complies with Industry Canada licence- cept any interference that maybe received including and exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 2. this device must accept any interference re- interference that may cause undesired operation. following two conditions: WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and ceived, including interference that may cause 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, undesired operation. complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or and modifications not expressly approved by the party Changes or modifications made to the equipment 2. this device must accept any interference, in- responsible for compliance could void the user's au- not expressly approved by Porsche may void the FCC cluding interference that may cause undesired thority to operate the device. This equipment com- authorization to operate the equipment. operation of the device. plies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set The equipment has been tested and found to comply Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Indus- forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant trie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts must follow the specific operating instructions for to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- de licence. L'exploitation est satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter signed to provide reasonable protection against 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not harmful interference when the equipment is oper- be co-located or operating in conjunction with any 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout ated in a commercial environment. The equipment other antenna or transmitter. brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency en- brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le Canada (ISED) RSS-Gen (French) ergy and, if not installed and used in accordance fonctionnement. Cet appareil est conforme aux règlements dalà FCC, with this manual, may cause harmful interference to section 15, et au CNR-210 d'innovation, Sciences et radio communications. Operation of the equipment USA Model: R3TR Développement économique Canada. Le fonc- in a residential area is likely to cause harmful inter- FCC: LTQR3TR tionnement est assujetti aux deux conditions sui- ference in which case the user will be required to Changes or modifications not expressly approved by vantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer correct the interference at his own expense. the party responsible for compliance could void the d'interférences nuisibles et (2) cet appareil doit ac- These Class A digital devices comply with Canadian user’s authority to operate the equipment. cepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celle qui ICES-003. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement. MISE EN Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à and with RSS of the Industry Canada. Operation is GARDE : L'émetteur a subi des tests et est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. subject to the following two conditions: aux règlements de la FCC et d'ISDE. Les change- ID Central Locking System 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, ments ou modifications non approuvés explicite- USA: FCC-ID IYZ-PK3 and ment par la partie responsable de la conformité Canada: IC 2701A-PK3 pourraient rendre caduque l'autorisation de l'utilisateur de se servir du dispositif. Cet appareil est

287 Technical Data

conforme aux limites d'exposition aux radiations de la FCC et d'ISDE établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent respecter les instructions d'utilisation spécifiques pour satisfaire aux exigences de conformité aux expositions de RF. L'émetteur doit se trouver à 20 cm au minimum de l'utilisateur et ne doit pas être situé au même endroit que tout autre émetteur ou antenne ni fonctionner avec un autre émetteur ou antenne.

Bluetooth® approval (extract) Albania – Andorra – Angola – Aruba – Australia – Austria – Bahamas – Bahrain – Barbados – Belarus – Belgium – Belize – Bolivia – Bonaire – Bosnia and Herzegovina – Brazil – Brunei – Bulgaria – Burkina Faso – Canada – Chile – China – Colombia – Costa Rica – Croatia – Curacao – Cyprus – Czech Republic – Denmark – Dominican Republic – Ecuador – Egypt – El Salvador – Estonia – Ethiopia – Finland – France – French Guyana – French Polynesia – Ga- bon – Germany – Ghana – Gibraltar – Guadeloupe – Guatemala – Greece – Greenland – Hong Kong – Hungary – Iceland – India – Indonesia – Ireland – Iraq – Israel – Italy – Ivory Coast – Jamaica – Japan – Jordan – Kenya – Kosovo – Kuwait – Latvia – Lebanon – Lesotho – Liberia – Libya – Liechtenstein – Lithuania – Luxembourg – Macau – Macedonia – Madagascar – Malaysia – Malta – Martinique – Mauritius – Mexico – Monaco – Mongolia – Moroc- co – Mozambique – Netherlands – New Caledonia – New Zealand – Nigeria – Norway – Oman – Pakistan – Panama – Peru – Poland – Portugal – Puerto Rico – Qatar – Réunion – Romania – Russia – San Marino – Saudi Arabia – Senegal – Serbia – Singapore – Slovakia – South Africa – Spain – St. Lucia – Swe- den – Switzerland – Tahiti – Taiwan – Thailand – United Arab Emirates – United Kingdom – Uruguay – USA – Venezuela – Vietnam – Yemen – Zimbabwe

288 Technical Data Recycling Airbag and seat-belt pretensioner units Non-ignited gas generators, or whole vehicles or assemblies with airbag and seat-belt pretensioner units, must not be disposed of as "normal" scrap or waste or put into any other form of end storage. For recommendations for proper recycling: e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.

Old batteries Old batteries must not be disposed of as "normal" scrap or waste or put into any other form of end storage. e Observe the local disposal instructions. Hand in old household batteries at a battery collection point. For recommendations for proper recycling: e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.

289 Index

Index Switching Eco mode on/off ...... 60 Assistance systems Switching maximum cooling output on/off ...... 59 Changing settings ...... 237 Switching on/off ...... 57 Automatic Coming Home lights ...... 152 Switching the ionizer on/off...... 61 Automatic dimming Symbols Upper ventilation panel...... 58 Mirrors...... 160 12-volt lithium battery Air distribution Automatic headlights Emergency starting ...... 270 Adjusting...... 58 Setting ...... 150 External power supply...... 270 Air suspension (PASM)...... 170 Automatic lift function ...... 171 Airbag A Care instructions ...... 73 ABS (anti-lock braking system)...... 190 Function ...... 49 B Battery ...... 270 1 Indicator lamp on the overhead console ...... 50 Accepting/rejecting a call...... digital Charging (lithium battery) ...... 268, 270 Installation location ...... 48 Account ...... 168 Emergency starting ...... 270 Safety instructions ...... 48 Active Lane Keeping ...... 34 External power supply...... 270 Display elements ...... 36 Alarm system Installation location (lithium battery) ...... 268 General safety instructions...... 34 Deactivating interior monitoring and inclination Lithium battery ...... 268, 270 Switching on and off ...... 36 sensor ...... 65 Notices (lithium battery) ...... 268 Function display...... 65 Active Parking Support...... 38 Procedure after connection (lithium battery). . . . 268, 270 Functional description...... 65 Replacing (lithium battery)...... 268, 270 Acute warning (warning jolt) ...... 242 Switching on and off ...... 65 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Vehicle electrical system voltage warning (lithium Alloy wheels battery) ...... 268, 270 Braking to a standstill and driving off again...... 47 Care instructions ...... 72 Warnings on the battery (lithium battery) ...... 268 Changing the desired distance ...... 45 Allwheel drive Changing the desired speed...... 45 Battery charge level Allwheel display ...... 134 Controls ...... 44 Displaying ...... 128 Torque distribution display...... 134 Interrupting and resuming control...... 46 Battery temperature Operating modes ...... 45 Aluminum rims Displaying ...... 128 Operating principle ...... 44 Care instructions ...... 72 Belts Overriding control ...... 46 Ambient lighting ...... 137 Care instructions ...... 74 Switching on and off ...... 45 Adjusting brightness ...... 240 Fastening ...... 202 Adjusting seat position...... 203 Setting color...... 240 Opening the belt buckle and removing the belt...... 202 Adjusting the blower Analog Clock ...... 215 Seat-belt pretensioners ...... 200 Air conditioning system ...... 59 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ...... 190 Warning light on the instrument cluster...... 201 Warning message ...... 201 Advanced Climate Control ...... 57 Anti-theft protection ...... 65 Warnings ...... 200 Air conditioning system Apple CarPlay ...... digital1 1 Bend ahead warning ...... 227 Activating/deactivating cooling function ...... 59 Siri ...... digital ® Adjusting air distribution ...... 58 Switching between iPod and Apple CarPlay...... digital1 Bluetooth 1 Defrosting windshield ...... 62 Apps...... digital1 Connecting a cellphone ...... digital 1 Setting automatic air-recirculation mode...... 61 Porsche Connect App ...... digital1 Device Manager ...... digital Setting footwell temperature...... 59 Armrest Bottle holder ...... 103 Setting the air flow ...... 59 Front storage compartment ...... 222 Brake fluid ...... 66 Setting the temperature ...... 59 Arrival Changing brake fluid ...... 66 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 168 Displaying ...... 128 Checking brake fluid level...... 66 Switch on automatic air conditioning ...... 57 Ashtray Brakes Switching A/C MAX mode on/off ...... 59 Emptying ...... 209 Bedding in and cleaning ...... 67 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ...... 61 Opening...... 209 Brake pads and brake disks ...... 67

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 290 Index

General safety instructions...... 67 Car wash...... 70 Warning and information messages ...... 244 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) ...... 67 Carpet ...... 73 Central locking...... 79 Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB)...... 67 Decorative films...... 72 Locking the vehicle with Comfort Access ...... 83 Warning messages ...... 68 Displays...... 74 Locking vehicle using vehicle key ...... 82 Braking Fabric lining ...... 74 Opening and locking the vehicle from inside ...... 83 Emergency braking function ...... 68 Foot mats ...... 73 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 168 Braking assistance ...... 242 High-voltage battery...... 69 Unlocking vehicle using vehicle key ...... 81 Instructions if leaving the vehicle parked for extended Breakdown call ...... 109 Unlocking vehicle with Comfort Access ...... 81 periods ...... 70 Data transmission ...... 109 Changing battery Leather ...... 73 Online measure ...... 110 Vehicle key ...... 233 Paint ...... 71 Triggering ...... 109 Charge port door PCM...... 74 Vehicle access ...... 110 Emergency operation ...... 93 Race-Tex...... 74 Opening the charge port door ...... 88 Bringing about operational readiness ...... 216-217 Screens ...... 74 Bulbs...... 153 Seals ...... 72 Charging Buttons on the multifunction steering wheel ...... 132 Seat belts ...... 74 Fuel Range ...... 128 Storing the vehicle...... 74 Charging (high-voltage battery) Touch displays ...... 74 Emergency operation of vehicle plug ...... 94 C Underbody protection ...... 72 Ending charging process and removing vehicle plug . . . 90 Calling up Owner's Manual in the Central display ...... 178 Wheel bolts ...... 261 High-voltage battery charge and locking status display on Calling up Owner’s Manual in the vehicle...... 178 Windows...... 71 the vehicle charge port ...... 89 Cameras Carpet...... 73 Inserting vehicle plug and starting charging process . . . 89 Overview...... 23 Care instructions ...... 73 Profile function ...... 90 Safety instructions ...... 86 Car care ...... 69 Cellphone Airbags ...... 73 1 Timer function ...... 90 Connecting a cellphone ...... digital 1 Alloy wheels ...... 72 Connecting via Bluetooth® (known cellphone) . . . . . digital1 Charging Planner ...... digital Car wash...... 70 Connecting via Bluetooth® (new cellphone) ...... digital1 Chassis number...... 274 Decorative films...... 72 Connecting via Bluetooth® (second cellphone) . . . . digital1 Checking voicemail messages ...... digital1 Dinamica...... 74 Connecting via Bluetooth® (Windows® and iOS operating Child lock Fabric lining ...... 74 system) ...... digital1 Rear seats...... 264 Headlights ...... 72 Stowing ...... digital1 Child protection Leather ...... 73 Wireless charging...... digital1 Disabling controls in the rear ...... 264 Paint ...... 71 Center armrest Plastic parts ...... 72 Child restraint system Front storage compartment ...... 222 Rear spoiler...... 213 Installing with L.A.T.C.H. system ...... 98 Seals ...... 72 Center console control panel Child seats ...... 96 Seat belts ...... 74 Fast filter ...... 76 Clock Storing the vehicle...... 74 Freehand writing ...... 178 on the dashboard...... 215 Operating ...... 78 Underbody protection ...... 72 Closing the profile cover ...... 198 Remote operation ...... 76 Use of high-pressure cleaning equipment ...... 69 Coasting mode ...... 218 Warnings ...... 69 Central display...... 176 Configuring Home screen ...... digital1 Cockpit Wheel bolts ...... 261 Adjusting lighting...... 137 Windows...... 71 Configuring homepage ...... digital1 1 Car & Info display ...... 128 Car wash ...... 70 Configuring MyScreen ...... digital MyScreen...... digital1 Odometer ...... 134 Care instructions...... 69 Notifications ...... digital1 Power meter...... 127 Airbags ...... 73 Smart Service ...... digital1 Speed & Assist display ...... 127 Alloy wheels ...... 72 Start menu ...... digital1 Trip counter ...... 134

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 291 Index

Warning lights and light indicators ...... 128 D Drive mode...... 105 Collision warning...... 242 Data connection Configuring INDIVIDUAL...... 105 Setting warning time...... 243 Device Manager ...... digital1 Configuring RANGE ...... 105 Switching on and off ...... 243 Establishing (embedded SIM card) ...... digital1 INDIVIDUAL ...... 105 Comfort Access External WiFi hotspot ...... digital1 NORMAL ...... 105 Locking the vehicle ...... 83 Using the vehicle hotspot ...... digital1 Range ...... 106 Operating principle ...... 80 Date RANGE ...... 105 Unlocking vehicle...... 81 Displaying ...... 128 Select ...... 105 SPORT...... 105 Comfort Entry function Date and time SPORT PLUS ...... 105 Switching on ...... 240 Setting ...... 235 Warning messages ...... 106 Comfort memory package ...... 168 Deceleration Drive positions...... 216 Compass Displaying ...... 128 Driver memory package ...... 168 Displaying ...... 128 Decorative films ...... 72 Driving mode Configuring the capacitive button on the instrument Care instructions ...... 72 Vehicle setup ...... 106 cluster...... 236 Device Manager ...... digital1 Driving time and distance Configuring the shortcut button on the steering wheel. . . . . 236 Diagnostic socket ...... 10 Displaying ...... 128 Congestion updates (navigation)...... digital1 Digital manual Dynamic high beam Connect ...... digital1 App...... 4 Activating ...... 236 Using Porsche Connect services ...... digital1 On-board ...... 4 Connecting an external device via USB ...... digital1 Display Connection Manager ...... digital1 Car & Info ...... 128 E Connection status ...... digital1 Speed & Assist...... 127 Electric parking brake Operating ...... 236 Connections in the armrest ...... digital1 Displaying and resetting the odometer ...... 134 Electrical socket (12-volt) ...... 107 Connectivity Displaying and resetting the trip counter...... 134 Connection status ...... digital1 Displaying/editing e-mails ...... digital1 Electrical system voltage Establishing data connection ...... digital1 Displaying/editing messages (text messages/e- Displaying ...... 128 Using Porsche Connect services ...... digital1 mails) ...... digital1 Embedded SIM card 1 Contacts (phone) ...... digital1 Displaying/editing text messages ...... digital1 Establishing data connection ...... digital Coolant ...... 100 Displays Emergency Assist ...... 111 Cruise control Care instructions ...... 74 Emergency call ...... 108 Controls ...... 101 Distance warning ...... 242 Emergency key ...... 232 Cruise Control (CC)...... 101 Setting warning time...... 243 Emergency locking of doors...... 84 Activating ...... 102 Switching on and off ...... 243 Emergency operation Changing the desired speed...... 102 Door Charge port door ...... 93 Display elements ...... 101 Emergency locking ...... 84 Vehicle plug ...... 94 General safety instructions...... 101 Emergency unlocking ...... 84 Emergency starting...... 270 Interrupting control ...... 102 Locking using vehicle key...... 82 External power supply...... 270 Operating principle ...... 101 Locking with Comfort Access ...... 83 Emergency stop function ...... 111 Resuming control...... 102 Opening and locking from inside ...... 83 General safety instructions...... 111 Switching on and off ...... 101 Door mirrors Operating principle ...... 111 Warning messages ...... 101 Folding in/out ...... 159 Override ...... 112 Cup holder ...... 103 Setting ...... 158 Switching on and off ...... 112 Cup holders ...... 103 Setting as parking aid ...... 159 System limitations...... 111 Storing settings (memory) ...... 159 Warning messages ...... 111

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 292 Index

Emergency unlocking Function on Demand (FoD) General safety instructions...... 123 Hood ...... 125 Activating ...... digital1 Operating principle ...... 123 Emergency unlocking of doors ...... 84 Activation failed ...... digital1 Warning messages ...... 123 1 Ending charging process and removing vehicle plug ...... 90 Buying ...... digital HOLD Function ...... 123 Deactivating ...... digital1 ® Entering a stopover (navigation) ...... digital1 HomeLink Downloading ...... digital1 Entering characters...... 78 Garage door opener...... 120 Fuse ...... 116 ® Entering/finding a destination ...... digital1 HomeLink garage door opener Changing electric fuses ...... 116 Teaching ...... 120 Examples of commands ...... digital1 Fuse assignment ...... 116 Using...... 120 Exit Warning ...... 113 Fuse assignment - left dashboard...... 117 Hood Fuse assignment - left footwell...... 118 Exterior lighting Closing ...... 125 Fuse assignment - right dashboard...... 117 Setting the off-delay time ...... 236 Emergency unlocking ...... 125 Fuse assignment - right footwell...... 119 External power supply ...... 270 Opening...... 124 1 Fuse box ...... 116 External WiFi hotspot ...... digital Hotspot Using an external WiFi hotspot ...... digital1 G Using the PCM WiFi hotspot ...... digital1 F G-force display ...... 134 Fabric lining (care instructions)...... 74 HUD (Head-Up Display) ...... 122 Garage door opener Factory settings HomeLink® ...... 120 Resetting vehicle settings ...... 235 Teaching ...... 120 I Fire extinguisher ...... 16 Using...... 120 Ice cover...... 266 First aid kit...... 155 Gestures ...... 78 Identification number ...... 274 Fitting carrier...... 194 Glove compartment Immobilizer ...... 65 Flat bed Storage ...... 222 Information area Towing ...... 225 GPS altitude Configuring...... 128 FM Displaying ...... 128 Inserting vehicle plug and starting charging process...... 89 1 Setting the reception range ...... digital Installing attachments ...... 198 Folding down rear seat backrest ...... 207 Instrument cluster...... 127 Folding in mirrors ...... 236 H Handwriting input field...... 78 Adapting display ...... 235 Foot mats Adjusting lighting...... 137 Head-Up Display (HUD) ...... 122 Care instructions ...... 73 Car & Info display ...... 128 Headlights ...... 153 Footwell temperature Configuring the capacitive button on the instrument Care instructions ...... 72 Adjusting...... 59 cluster ...... 236 Changing bulbs ...... 153 Freehand writing ...... 78 Menu overview...... 134 Setting ...... 153 Odometer ...... 134 Freeze protection High beam lever ...... 152 Operating ...... 132 In coolant ...... 100 High-pressure cleaning equipment Overview...... 127 In washer fluid ...... 251 Notes on use ...... 69 Power meter...... 127 Front passenger display ...... 179 High-voltage battery ...... 86 Selecting options and activating functions ...... 133 Freehand writing ...... 180 High-voltage battery care ...... 69 Speed & Assist display ...... 127 Operating ...... 179 Sport Chrono stopwatch...... 214 Front seat High-voltage battery charge and locking status display on the vehicle charge port ...... 89 Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 253 Setting ...... 203 Trip counter ...... 134 High-voltage battery charge and locking status on the vehicle Full load Warning and information messages ...... 244 charge port ...... 89 Setting ...... 255 Warning lights and light indicators ...... 128 HOLD function Function buttons on the multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 132 Activating ...... 123

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 293 Index

Instrument lighting Keyboard ...... 177 Emergency flasher...... 153 Adjusting brightness ...... 137 Setting ...... 235 Entry function/Exit function ...... 152 Instrument panel Exterior lighting ...... 150 Adjusting lighting...... 137 Flasher...... 152 L Fog function ...... 152 Car & Info display ...... 128 L.A.T.C.H. system General safety instructions...... 151 Overview...... 127 Child restraint system...... 98 Power meter...... 127 Highway light ...... 152 Lane Change Assist (LCA) ...... 142 Speed & Assist display ...... 127 Low beam...... 150 Adjusting warning indicator brightness ...... 144 Warning lights and light indicators ...... 128 PDLS Plus with LED headlights ...... 152 Display elements ...... 144 Intelligent charging functions ...... 92 PDLS Plus with LED matrix headlights ...... 152 Driving situations...... 144 Rear fog light ...... 150 Intelligent detour ...... digital1 General safety instructions...... 142 Setting the fade-out ...... 152 Interfaces in the armrest Information and warning stage ...... 144 1 Setting the travel mode ...... 236 USB ...... digital Operating principle ...... 143 Side lights...... 150 Interior lighting Rear collision warning ...... 143 Situational lighting control ...... 152 Ambient lighting ...... 137 Rear Turn Assist...... 142 Switching dynamic High Beam Assist on and off . . . . . 152 Dimming ...... 137 Switching on and off ...... 144 Switching high beam on and off ...... 152 Setting the off-delay time and brightness ...... 236 System limitations...... 143 Switching off ...... 151 Switching on and off ...... 137 Warning messages ...... 143 Switching the parking light on and off ...... 152 Interior mirror Lane Keep Assist...... 147 Turn signals ...... 152 Dimming ...... 160 Operating principle ...... 148 Warning messages ...... 151 Setting ...... 160 Switching on and off ...... 149 Loads Internet Language Transporting on the roof...... 194 1 Establishing data connection ...... digital Setting ...... 235 Locking Intersection Assist ...... 139 Lashing rings Emergency locking of vehicle...... 84 Display elements ...... 139 Using...... 157 Locking the vehicle from inside ...... 83 General safety instructions...... 139 Lateral acceleration forces Locking the vehicle with Comfort Access ...... 83 Operating principle ...... 139 Display ...... 134 Locking vehicle using vehicle key ...... 82 Switching on and off ...... 140 Launch Control ...... 217 Locking options System limitations...... 139 Leather Setting ...... 236 Warning messages ...... 139 Care instructions ...... 73 Longitudinal acceleration Ionizer Light Displaying ...... 128 Switching on/off ...... 61 Interior lighting ...... 137 Longitudinal acceleration forces Light indicators ...... 128 Display ...... 134 J Lighting Low beam...... 150 Jack Interior lighting ...... 137 Luggage compartment Information on raising vehicles with air suspension . . . 171 Lights Closing ...... 125 Lifting the vehicle ...... 141 Adverse weather lights ...... 152 Emergency unlocking ...... 125 Ambient lighting ...... 137 Opening...... 124, 229 K Automatic Coming Home lights...... 152 Luggage Compartment ...... 154 Key Automatic headlights ...... 150 Locking vehicle ...... 82 Brief overview ...... 150 Care instructions ...... 72 M Removing emergency key...... 232 Maintenance position ...... 266 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 168 Changing bulbs ...... 153 Maintenance work Unlocking vehicle...... 81 Dynamic cornering light ...... 152 Dynamic high beam...... 152 Topping up washer fluid ...... 251

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 294 Index

Malfunctions Playing ...... digital1 Online services Power windows ...... 263 Storing/editing a favorite ...... digital1 Establishing data connection ...... digital1 Storing the final position of side windows ...... 263 Supported data formats ...... 285 Online software update...... digital1 Vehicle key battery ...... 233 MyScreen ...... digital1 Downloading ...... digital1 Maneuvering Assist...... 40 Failed ...... digital1 Map (Navigation) Installing ...... digital1 1 N Configuring ...... digital Navigating lists via voice control ...... digital1 Opening and locking ...... 79 Opening ...... digital1 Side windows...... 263 Navigation ...... digital1 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 168 Massage program Avoiding traffic disruptions...... digital1 Adjusting...... 240 1 Vehicle ...... 79 Charging Planner ...... digital 1 Massage strength Configuring map contents ...... digital1 Opening playlist ...... digital Adjusting...... 240 Displaying traffic notices...... digital1 Overrun recuperation ...... 218 Media...... digital1 Displaying/configuring the map view ...... digital1 Browsing ...... digital1 Enter a stopover ...... digital1 1 1 P Connecting an external device via USB...... digital Entering GPS coordinates ...... digital Paint ...... 71 1 1 Interfaces in the armrest...... digital Entering/finding a destination ...... digital Care...... 71 1 Making settings ...... digital Map view and navigation information on the instrument Care instructions ...... 71 1 1 Playing ...... digital cluster ...... digital Polishing ...... 71 1 1 Selecting source ...... digital Planning a tour ...... digital Preserving...... 71 1 1 Storing/editing a favorite ...... digital Porsche Intelligent Range Manager (PIRM) ...... digital Removing marks ...... 71 1 Supported media and data formats...... 285 Route monitor ...... digital Repairing damage ...... 71 Tuning to/storing stations ...... digital1 Settings ...... digital1 Panic button ...... 232 Memory package...... 168 Toll devices ...... digital1 Parental Control ...... 84 Messages ...... digital1 Night View Assist ...... 162 ParkAssist ...... 164 Minor repairs Animal warning ...... 162 Cleaning the camera ...... 163 Active Parking Support ...... 38 In the event of a flat tire ...... 114 Maneuvering Assist ...... 40 Securing vehicle to prevent it from rolling away ...... 114 Display elements ...... 163 General safety instructions...... 162 Rear Cross Traffic Alert...... 193 Towing the vehicle ...... 224 Rear view camera ...... 165 Mirrors Operating principle ...... 162 Pedestrian warning ...... 162 Surround View ...... 166 Adjusting door mirrors ...... 158 Parking Automatic dimming...... 160 Setting image contrast ...... 163 Setting warning time...... 163 Active Parking Support ...... 38 Door mirror heating ...... 62 ParkAssist...... 164 Folding door mirrors in/out ...... 159 Switching on and off ...... 163 System limitations...... 162 Rear view camera ...... 165 Setting door mirror as parking aid...... 159 Surround View ...... 166 Storing the door mirror settings (memory) ...... 159 Warning messages ...... 162 1 Parking aid Vanity mirror ...... 223 Notification center ...... digital Swiveling mirror glass downward ...... 159 Mobile data (connectivity) ...... digital1 Notifications ...... digital1 1 Partial load Mode switch ...... 105 Filtering ...... digital Opening ...... digital1 Setting ...... 255 Multi-collision braking ...... 190 PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management) ...... 170 Multifunction steering wheel PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON display...... 50 Buttons ...... 132 O Passenger airbag Recuperation button ...... 133 On-board computer Indicator light on the overhead console ...... 50 Music Menu overview...... 134 Passenger seat Connecting an external device via USB...... digital1 Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 253 Adjusting from the driver’s seat...... 240 Interfaces in the armrest...... digital1 Online navigation ...... digital1

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 295 Index

Passenger's door mirror Plug & Charge ...... 92 Transport ...... 191 Folding in/out ...... 159 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) ...... 170 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System Plus (PVTS Plus) ...... 191 Passenger's side mirror Selecting chassis setup ...... 170 Transport ...... 191 Setting ...... 158 Selecting the chassis height ...... 170 Power meter ...... 127 Setting as parking aid ...... 159 Switching the leveling system off (car jack mode) . . . . 171 Power windows PCM ...... 173 ...... digital1 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB)...... 67 Opening/closing side windows ...... 263 Adapting display ...... 235 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) ...... 173 Storing the final position ...... 263 1 Apple CarPlay ...... digital Calling up Owner's Manual in the vehicle ...... 178 Preventive occupant protection function...... 243 Care instructions ...... 74 Central display ...... 176 Privacy Central display ...... 176 Operating ...... 173 1 Changing settings ...... 238 Configuring Home screen ...... digital Porsche Connect ...... digital1 1 1 Private mode...... digital Configuring homepage ...... digital Changing settings ...... 238 1 Profile function ...... 90 Configuring MyScreen ...... digital Displaying data privacy information ...... 238 Entering text and characters ...... 177 Displaying the Legal Notice ...... 238 PSM (Porsche Stability Management) ...... 189 Keyboard...... 177 Establishing data connection ...... digital1 1 MyScreen...... digital Logging in user (Porsche ID)...... digital1 1 R Notifications ...... digital Managing user (Porsche ID) ...... digital1 Race-Tex Opening menus ...... 177 Private mode ...... digital1 Care instructions ...... 74 Setting display of time or temperature...... 177 1 Settings ...... digital Radio ...... digital1 Start menu ...... digital1 1 Using services...... digital Online radio ...... digital1 Using an external WiFi hotspot ...... digital1 Porsche Connect App ...... digital1 Setting the reception range ...... digital1 Using the PCM WiFi hotspot ...... digital1 Connecting to the PCM via WiFi ...... digital1 Storing/editing a favorite ...... digital1 Warning and information messages ...... 244 Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED Tuning to/storing stations ...... digital1 PCM hotspot...... digital1 Headlights ...... 152 Reading lights ...... 137 PCM setup assistant Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED matrix Rear Cross Traffic Alert...... 193 Opening...... 238 headlights...... 152 1 Rear fog light...... 150 Phone...... digital Porsche InnoDrive (PID) ...... 181 ® 1 Adaptation of lighting distribution...... 152 Connecting via Bluetooth ...... digital Braking to a standstill and driving off again...... 187 ® 1 Rear seat Connecting via Bluetooth (known cellphone) . . . . . digital Changing the desired speed...... 186 ® 1 Child lock ...... 264 Connecting via Bluetooth (new cellphone) ...... digital Controls ...... 185 ® 1 Rear seat storage space ...... 207 Connecting via Bluetooth (second cellphone) . . . . digital Display elements ...... 185 ® ® Connecting via Bluetooth (Windows and iOS operating Example of how it works...... 187 Rear spoiler ...... 213 1 system) ...... digital Interrupting and resuming control...... 187 Moving to cleaning position ...... 213 1 Connection status ...... digital Operating modes ...... 185 Operating principle ...... 213 1 Device Manager ...... digital Operating principle ...... 184 Rear Turn Assist ...... 142 1 Dialing number ...... digital Overriding control ...... 187 Rear view camera ...... 165 Emergency call...... 108 Setting the desired distance ...... 187 1 Rear window Functions available during a phone call...... digital Setting the maximum speed ...... 187 1 Switching heating on/off ...... 62 Making settings ...... digital Switching on and off ...... 186 Managing contacts...... digital1 Recirculated air mode Porsche Intelligent Range Manager (PIRM) ...... digital1 Storing/editing a favorite ...... digital1 Switching on/off ...... 61 Stowing ...... digital1 Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ...... 189 Recuperation ...... 217 Telephone information in the instrument cluster. . . digital1 Activating PSM Sport ...... 189 Recuperation button...... 133 Wireless charging...... digital1 Operating principle ...... 189 Remote control ...... 232 PID (Porsche InnoDrive) ...... 181 Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB) ...... 67 Locking vehicle ...... 82 Planning a tour (navigation) ...... digital1 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS) ...... 191 Unlocking vehicle...... 81 Operation ...... 191

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 296 Index

Restraint system for children Setting automatic air-recirculation mode Operating principle ...... 210 Installing with L.A.T.C.H. system ...... 98 Air conditioning system ...... 61 Overriding temporarily ...... 212 Retrieving personal settings ...... 168 Setting the air flow ...... 59 Setting the maximum speed ...... 212 Roof transport system Setting the fade-out...... 152 Switching on and off ...... 211 System limitations...... 210 Closing the profile cover...... 198 Settings Fitting carrier ...... 194 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 168 Speed Limiter (LIM) ...... 210 Installing attachments ...... 198 Vehicle ...... 234 Spoiler Transporting loads on the roof...... 194 Shortcut buttons Setting the manual cleaning position ...... 236 Fast filter ...... 76 Spoilers...... 213 Side lights ...... 150 Cleaning position ...... 213 S General safety instructions...... 213 Safety compliance sticker ...... 274 Side windows Operating principle ...... 213 Screens Opening/closing ...... 263 Rear spoiler...... 213 Care instructions ...... 74 Storing the final position ...... 263 Warning messages ...... 213 Sealant/sealing set SIM card Sport Chrono mode switch ...... 105 For defective tires ...... 114 Using the phone ...... digital1 Sport Chrono stopwatch ...... 214 Seals Siri ...... digital1 Start menu ...... digital1 Care instructions ...... 72 Ski bag Seat belts Storing skis/snowboards ...... 156 Station/track Displaying ...... 128 Care instructions ...... 74 Smart Service...... digital1 Steering wheel Opening the belt buckle and removing the belt...... 202 Smartphone Configuring shortcut button ...... 236 Seat-belt pretensioners ...... 200 Connecting via Bluetooth®...... digital1 Setting ...... 221 Warning light on the instrument cluster...... 201 Stowing ...... digital1 Switching heating on/off ...... 221 Warning message ...... 201 Wireless charging...... digital1 Stopwatch ...... 214 Warnings ...... 200 Smoker's Package...... 209 Storage compartment Seat heating balance Snow chains In front armrest, opening ...... 222 Adjusting...... 240 General information...... 260 Storage options ...... 222 Seat memory ...... 168 Snow tires Storage options...... 222 Seat ventilation balance General information...... 259 Adjusting...... 240 Glove compartment...... 222 Software information Storage compartment in front armrest...... 222 Seat-belt pretensioners ...... 200 Displaying software components ...... 238 Storing Seatbelts Displaying version information...... 238 Personal settings...... 168 Fastening ...... 202 Sound settings Storing the final position of power windows ...... 263 Seats Balance and fader ...... 236 Adjusting front seat...... 203 Setting treble and bass...... 236 Storing your vehicle ...... 74 Adjusting seat position ...... 203 Speaking voice commands...... digital1 Storing/editing a favorite Media ...... digital1 Child restraint systems ...... 96 Speed control Phone ...... digital1 Folding rear seat backrest down/up ...... 207 Cruise Control (CC) ...... 101 Storing and retrieving seat position ...... 168 Stowing a cellphone ...... digital1 Speed limiter (LIM) ...... 210 Selecting chassis setup ...... 170 Activating ...... 211 Summer tires Selecting source (media) ...... digital1 Adaptive speed limiter ...... 212 Storage ...... 260 Selecting the chassis height ...... 170 Adjusting the maximum speed ...... 211 Sun visor ...... 223 Sensors Controls ...... 210 Sunshade ...... 266 Overview...... 23 Display elements ...... 211 Surround View ...... 166 Setting and activating speed limit warning ...... 228 General safety instructions...... 210 Interrupting and resuming ...... 212

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 297 Index

Swerve Assist ...... 242 Sealant ...... 114 Trunk lid Switching on and off ...... 243 Setting full load or partial load...... 255 Opening...... 229 Switching door mirror heating on/off...... 62 Setting the tire type and tire size ...... 255 Tuning to/storing stations ...... digital1 Switching seat heating on/off...... 204 Snow chains (general information) ...... 260 Turn Assist...... 242 Snow tires (general information) ...... 259 Switching seat ventilation on/off ...... 204 Switching on and off ...... 243 Storage ...... 260 Turn signals ...... 152 Switching the emergency flasher on and off...... 153 Tire pressure plate...... 274 Comfort turn signals ...... 152 Switching the heated steering wheel on/off ...... 221 Tread wear ...... 260 Operating ...... 152 Valves ...... 259 T Toll devices ...... digital1 Tailgate Tool box U Adjusting opening height ...... 230 Removing and stowing ...... 155 Underbody protection...... 72 Care instructions ...... 72 Technical Data Tools ...... 155 Unlocking Tire pressure tables...... 279 Torque Emergency unlocking of vehicle ...... 84 Wheel and tire sizes ...... 279 Tightening torque for wheel bolts ...... 261 Unlocking and opening the hood ...... 124 Tightening torque Touch display Unlocking and opening the tailgate...... 229 Wheel bolts ...... 261 Adapting display ...... 235 Unlocking the vehicle from inside ...... 82 Time and date Care instructions ...... 74 Unlocking vehicle using vehicle key ...... 81 Setting ...... 235 Towing ...... 224 Unlocking vehicle with Comfort Access ...... 81 Timer function...... 90 Flat bed...... 225 Unlocking options Tire Mobility System - TMS General information...... 224 Setting ...... 236 Towing hook...... 224 Removing and stowing ...... 155 Unlocking when approaching vehicle ...... 236 Using tow rope or tow bar ...... 224 Tire pressure Update Towing hook Checking...... 252 Downloading ...... digital1 In tool box...... 155 Displaying on instrument cluster...... 253 Failed ...... digital1 System learns...... 255 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ...... 253 Installing ...... digital1 1 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 253 Traffic notices...... digital Upper ventilation panel ...... 58 Learning ...... 255 Traffic sign detection USB port ...... digital1 Opening...... 254 Activating speed limit warning ...... 228 Using Voice Control ...... digital1 Tire pressure plate ...... 274 Curve ahead warnings...... 227 Tire pressure tables ...... 279 Display elements ...... 227 Tire pressure warning light ...... 128 General safety instructions...... 227 V Tire sealant Operating principle ...... 227 Valves Removing and stowing ...... 155 Setting speed limit warning ...... 228 Tires ...... 259 Speed limit display ...... 227 Tire sealant/sealing set Vanity mirror ...... 223 Speed limit warning display ...... 227 For defective tires ...... 114 Vehicle System limitations...... 227 Tire selection ...... 236 Driving...... 216 Warning messages ...... 227 Driving off...... 217 Tires ...... 252 Traffic sign recognition ...... 227 Emergency locking ...... 84 Checking tire pressure ...... 252 Transport (on car trains, ferries, etc.) Emergency unlocking ...... 84 Displaying pressure deviation...... 255 Securing the vehicle ...... 226 Locking from inside...... 83 Fixing a flat tire ...... 114 Locking using vehicle key...... 82 Inscriptions...... 257 Transverse acceleration Locking with Comfort Access ...... 83 Learn new tires in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Displaying ...... 128 1 Parking ...... 218 (TPMS) ...... 255 Tray (phone) ...... digital Starting...... 216 Replacing tires (general information) ...... 259 Tread wear ...... 260 Stopping ...... 218

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 298 Index

Unlocking with Comfort Access ...... 81 Tire inflation information ...... 255 Wheel bolts ...... 261 Unlocking with the vehicle key ...... 81 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 254 Wheel care...... 72 Vehicle data carrier ...... 274 Vehicle standing periods ...... 70 Wheels ...... 252 Vehicle door Video Changing...... 261 Opening and locking from inside ...... 83 Supported data formats ...... 285 Fixing a flat tire ...... 114 Unlocking from inside ...... 82 Voice control...... digital1 Inscriptions...... 257 Vehicle hotspot ...... digital1 Examples of commands ...... digital1 Replacing tires (general information) ...... 259 Vehicle identification number ...... 274 Saying natural voice commands...... digital1 Security wheel bolt (socket) ...... 261 Snow chains (general information) ...... 260 Vehicle key Setting ...... 236 1 Snow tires (general information) ...... 259 Changing battery...... 233 Settings ...... digital 1 Storage ...... 260 Locking vehicle ...... 82 Siri ...... digital 1 Tightening torque ...... 261 Unlocking vehicle...... 81 Speaking voice commands ...... digital Tire Mobility System - TMS ...... 114 Vehicle Key ...... 232 Voice Control Using Voice Control ...... digital1 Tire pressure plate...... 274 Vehicle plug (emergency operation) ...... 94 Tire sealant...... 114 Voice control help ...... digital1 Vehicle settings 1 Valves ...... 259 Adapting instrument cluster display ...... 235 Voice control settings ...... digital Wheel bolts (care instructions) ...... 261 Adapting PCM display...... 235 WiFi Adjusting volume of warning signals and ParkAssist. . . 235 W Device Manager ...... digital1 Configuring INDIVIDUAL drive mode...... 239 Warn and Brake Assist ...... 241 Using an external WiFi hotspot ...... digital1 Configuring RANGE drive mode...... 239 Acute warning (warning jolt) ...... 242 Using the PCM WiFi hotspot ...... digital1 Configuring shortcut button on steering wheel...... 236 Braking assistance...... 242 Windows Configuring the capacitive button on the instrument Collision warning ...... 242 Care instructions ...... 71 cluster ...... 236 Distance warning...... 242 Defrosting windshield ...... 62 Displaying pressure deviation...... 255 General safety instructions...... 241 Switching heated rear screen on/off...... 62 Displaying trip data ...... 240 Operating principle ...... 241 Making ...... 234 Windshield Preventive occupant protection function ...... 243 Defrosting...... 62 Modifying touch display settings...... 235 Setting functions...... 243 Windshield wiper system Resetting to factory settings ...... 235 Setting the warning time for the collision warning . . . . 243 Freeze protection...... 251 Resetting trip data...... 240 Setting the warning time for the distance warning. . . . 243 Topping up washer fluid ...... 251 Setting chassis height...... 239 Swerve Assist...... 242 Setting chassis setup ...... 239 Switching Swerve Assist on and off ...... 243 Windshield wipers...... 265 Setting date and time ...... 235 Switching the collision warning on and off ...... 243 Care instructions ...... 71 Setting drive mode ...... 239 Switching the distance warning on and off ...... 243 Cleaning the reversing camera...... 266 Setting E-sound...... 239 Switching Turn Assist on and off...... 243 Controls ...... 265 Setting language ...... 235 Switching Warn and Brake Assist on and off...... 243 Ice cover and sunshade ...... 266 Setting locking and unlocking options ...... 236 System limitations...... 241 One-touch operation ...... 265 Setting locking options...... 236 Turn Assist ...... 242 One-touch wiping ...... 266 Setting recuperation ...... 239 Warning messages ...... 241 Replacing wiper blade...... 266 Setting the keyboard...... 235 Setting rain sensor sensitivity ...... 265 Warning and information messages ...... 244 Setting the tire type and tire size ...... 255 Spraying and wiping ...... 266 Setting the volume for navigation announcements. . . . 235 Warning lights ...... 128 Switching on continuous wiper operation ...... 265 Setting units...... 235 Warning triangle ...... 155 Switching on rain sensor ...... 265 Setting unlocking options...... 236 Washer fluid Wiper blades Setting voice control system ...... 236 Freeze protection agent ...... 251 Care instructions ...... 71 Storing on personal buttons...... 168 Topping up ...... 251 Wireless cellphone charging...... digital1 Switch assistance systems on...... 239 Wheel and tire sizes ...... 279 Wireless Internet access...... digital1

1. Further information can be found in the digital manual (see details at the beginning this booklet). 299